8100 V2 Modules Series

Portable, modular platform

designed for the construction,
validation and maintenance of
optical fiber networks

User Manual
8100 V2 Modules Series
Portable, modular platform designed
for the construction, validation and
maintenance of optical fiber networks

User Manual

VIAVI Solutions
1-844-GO-VIAVI
www.viavisolutions.com
iv User Manual XXXXXXXXX Rev. ???
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was
accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change
without notice, and VIAVI reserves the right to provide an addendum to this
document with information not available at the time that this document was
created.

Copyright
© Copyright 2021 VIAVI, LLC. All rights reserved. VIAVI, Enabling Broad-
band and Optical Innovation, and its logo are trademarks of VIAVI, LLC. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their
respective owners. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted
electronically or otherwise without written permission of the publisher.

Trademarks
VIAVI is a trademark of VIAVI in the United States and other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows CE, Windows NT, MS-DOS, Excel, Word

and Microsoft Internet Explorer are either trademarks or registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Specifications, terms, and conditions are subject to change without notice.

All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respec-
tive companies.

Manual
This guide is a product of VIAVI's Technical Information Development
Department. This manual gives you the main information to install, start
and use the 8100 Module Series.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 v

 WEEE Directive Compliance
VIAVI has established processes in compliance with the Waste Electrical
and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive, 2002/96/EC, and the Battery
Directive, 2006/66/EC.

This product, and the batteries used to power the product, should not be
disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and should be collected sepa-
rately and disposed of according to your national regulations. In the Euro-
pean Union, all equipment and batteries purchased from VIAVI after 2005-
08-13 can be returned for disposal at the end of its useful life. VIAVI will
ensure that all waste equipment and batteries returned are reused, recy-
cled, or disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner, and in compli-
ance with all applicable national and international waste legislation.

It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to return equipment and

batteries to VIAVI for appropriate disposal. If the equipment or battery was
imported by a reseller whose name or logo is marked on the equipment or
battery, then the owner should return the equipment or battery directly to
the reseller.

Instructions for returning waste equipment and batteries to VIAVI can be

found in the Environmental section of VIAVI’s web site at www.viavisolu-
tions.com. If you have questions concerning disposal of your equipment or
batteries, contact VIAVI’s WEEE Program Management team.

vi User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

Contents
About this guide xxxiii
Purpose and scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
Assumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
Recycling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement 1

Principle of reflectometry measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Information yielded by the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Validity of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Principle of bi-directional measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Principle of the optical power and attenuation measurements . . . . . . .5
Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Attenuation measurements (optical link loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PMD principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Method used to measure the PMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD ODM) using
phase shift method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Standards and l0 for different types of fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

vii
Contents

Chapter 2 Getting started 11

Unpacking the device - Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Laser Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Laser classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Warning labels for the laser classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
AC/DC safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Precautions relating to optical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installing a module in a receptacle and removing it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inserting a module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Removing a module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting fiber optic cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Inspecting and cleaning connector end faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Optical connector types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting Fiber optic cable to test port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Optical connectors and interchangeable adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Adapter types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Switching adapter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cleaning the universal connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Top status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mini-trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Signature of the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Main display zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Soft keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements 25

Activating the OTDR function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

viii User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Selecting the Smart Test function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Principle of the Smart Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Selecting Smart Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Selecting the Expert OTDR function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Principle of the Expert OTDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting Expert OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Configuring the reflectometry test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Configuring the unit for Smart Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Modifying some parameters before the acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Configuring the test in Expert OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Configuring the Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Configuring the Alarms parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Configuring the Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Configuring the Link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Configuring the File parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Configuration in Test Auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Saving OTDR configuration in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Loading an existing OTDR configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Traffic Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connection Quality indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Performing OTDR acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Acquisition in Real Time mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Principle of Real Time mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Performing an acquisition in Real Time mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Stopping the real time acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Performing a measurement with Smart Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Performing an acquisition with Expert OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Performing an acquisition from Results page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Multi-wavelength acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Actions on trace during acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Saving results for Smart Test acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Results display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Trace Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 ix

Contents

Common functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Display of events on the trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Results table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Cursors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Zoom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Shift function (Expert OTDR only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Display of traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Traces display in double acquisition mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
SmartLink View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Show the detailed information of one event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Event View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Results Table (Smart Test Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Automatic measurement and detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Addition of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Relative measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Modifying types of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Manual measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Measurements of slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Measurement of ORL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Measurement of Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Splice measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Memorization of the position of events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Overlay trace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Overlaying several traces stored in memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Display of traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Adding traces in overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Swapping overlay traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Changing the traces position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Removing a trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Quitting the overlay menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Reference Trace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using the reference trace function in the Result page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using the reference trace function in the explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

x User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Saving results in Smart Test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Saving results and creating a report in Expert OTDR mode . . . . . . . 102
Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Recalling OTDR files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only) . . . 106
Principle of Enterprise-SLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuring the Enterprise-SLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Loading a SmartConfig™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Site Info Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Simple OTDR Testing (for single fiber). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Managing projects for multi-fibers Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Opening an existing project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Creating a project from the Setup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Project display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Testing MPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Stopping the test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Trace saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Results of project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Description of the table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
View Trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
SmartLink view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
OptiPulses option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Configuring the OTDR acquisition with OptiPulses mode . . . . . . . . . 123
Results in OptiPulses mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
FTTA-SLM option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Principle of FTTA-SLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Acceptance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Troubleshooting Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 xi

Contents

Configuring the Reflectometry test for FTTA network . . . . . . . . . . . .128

FTTA setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Alarms parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Link description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Launching the acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Results page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Trace View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
SmartLink view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Changing the name of an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
FTTH-SLM Software option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Principle of FTTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Configuring the Reflectometry test for FTTH network . . . . . . . . . . . .143
FTTH setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Alarms parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
File parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Launching the acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Results page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Trace View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
SmartLink view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Changing the type of an event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Smart Link Cable Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Principle of Smart Link Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Configuring the Smart Link Cable project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Configuring the project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Saving the project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Loading an existing project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Starting project test process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Trace saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Results of project cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Description of the table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Deactivate the fiber test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
View Trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

xii User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Files and Project storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Text file content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application 167

Description of the RDZ function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Selecting and configuring the RDZ function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Performing the measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Performing an acquisition from Results page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Results display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
SLM view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Saving results and creating a report from results page . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Recalling files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR

Modules 181
Connection to the power meter and the source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Configuring the Power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Configuring the measurement parameters of the power meter . . . . . . . 182
Configuring the alarm parameters of the power meter . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuring the Measurement parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Activating the Source function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Result page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Result page of the Power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Commands of the power meter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Result page of the Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Performing the power level measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Performing the insertion loss measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xiii
Contents

Setting the zero value of the power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Carrying out the reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Carrying out the side by side reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Carrying out the reference in loopback mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Measurements on the fiber under test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Storing and reloading results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
File Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Storing results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Loading results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR 195

Definition of terms used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Description of the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Summary of the automatic operation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Configuration of bi-directional measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Alarms parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Configuration of files parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Performing a bi-directional measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Process Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fiber link check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Measurement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Trace display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Origin and End traces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
OEO trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
OEO Result table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Automatic measurement and addition of markers in OEO page. . . . 207
Key Delete/Auto Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Addition of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Markers display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Test of a cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Saving the traces and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

xiv User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Saving results and creating a report from results page . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Recalling OEO traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning/errors after pressing the key Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning/errors resulting from common configurations . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules 215

General introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Activating the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Establishing References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Reference stage process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Loopback Referencing method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Side-by-Side referencing method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Factory References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Configuring the units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Alarms parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
File parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Automatic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Saving parameters from configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Loading a configuration file FiberComplete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Performing the tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Sending a message to the distant Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Starting the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Cable view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fiber View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fault Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xv
Contents

OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Saving results and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Saving results and creating a report from results page. . . . . . . . . . . 238
Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Recalling OTDR files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Filenaming convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement 243

Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Possible carrier devices for OSA-110 and OSA-50x modules . . . . . . . . 245
Possible carrier devices for OSA-110 modules and its electrical specifica-
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Possible carrier devices for OSA-50x modules and its electrical specifi-
cations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Cleaning of Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Configuration of the instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Loading a configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Acquisition Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Channel Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
OSNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Splitter compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Display Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Zoom Mode (OSA-500). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Zoom Mode (OSA-110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Table Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Saving configuration in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

xvi User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Trace display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Display of the WDM / OSA results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Zoom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Cursors function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Full scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Shift function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Trace /Table key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Channel detection threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Display of a grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Display of total power between cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Display of gain Tilt (delta) and gain slope results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Overlay trace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Overlaying several traces stored in memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Overlaying the current trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Display of traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Swapping overlay traces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Changing the traces position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Trace resulting from the difference between two traces . . . . . . . . . . 272
Removing a trace in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Quitting the overlay menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Type of display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
On/Off-OSNR Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Challenge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Principle of "On/Off-OSNR Measurement" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Channel filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Field of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Using channel filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Drift measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xvii
Contents

EDFA results analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

EDFA test configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
EDFA measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
EDFA results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
DFB results analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
DFB test configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DFB measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DFB results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Testing ROADM networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Measurement of I-OSNR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Pre-setting the OSA for an in-band OSNR measurement in I-OSNR
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Performing an in-band OSNR test in I-OSNR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
WDM-Expert Software option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Configuring the display with WDM-Expert option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Customizing the WDM table (User Defined configuration). . . . . . . . . . . 292
Modifying a user defined table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Results tables with WDM-Expert software option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Saving the trace and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Saving results and creating a report from results page. . . . . . . . . . . .301
Opening the report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Recalling files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement 307

Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Guidelines for the prevention of hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Possible carrier devices for OSCA-710 modules and its electrical
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Cleaning of Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Configuration of the instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

xviii User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Loading a configuration file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Acquisition Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Channel Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
OSNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Splitter compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Zoom Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Table Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Trace display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Display of the WDM / OSCA results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Zoom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Cursors function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Full scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Shift function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Trace /Table key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Channel detection threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Display of a grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Display of total power between cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Display of gain Tilt (delta) and gain slope results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Type of display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Testing ROADM networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Measuring POL-MUX (polarization mulitplexed ) channels. . . . . . . . 330
Pre-setting the OSCA for an in-service OSNR measurement in POL-
MUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Performing OSNR test in WDM/OSNR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xix
Contents

Storing OSCA measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Recalling OSCA files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement 337

Recommended equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
PMD Activation and self calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Loading a configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Alarms parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Saving configuration in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module. . . . . . . . 345
Remote operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Local operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Selecting the HR-PMD function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Performing the reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Performing the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Display of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Spectrum/FFT menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Display of PMD results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Cursors, in spectrum display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Zoom access, in spectrum display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Trace shift access, in spectrum display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Statistics results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Graphics display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Saving the trace and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Saving results and creating a report from results page. . . . . . . . . . . .355
Opening the report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

xx User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Recalling PMD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

PMD standards and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement 361

Recommended equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
I-PMD Activation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Activating the IPMD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Loading a configuration file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
OSNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Splitter Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Saving configuration in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Performing a Zero Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Performing an In-Band PMD-OSNR measurement with an I-PMD
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Detection of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
In band PMD-OSNR measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Display of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
OSA Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
OSA menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Moving the cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Zoom on trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Trace shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Channel key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Advanced key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
PMD results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Performing a PMD Measurement with BBS and IPMD Module . . . . .379
Remote operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Local operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxi
Contents

Display of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Functions on trace display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Saving results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Recalling files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
PMD standards and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement 385

Cleaning of Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Configuration of the instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Loading a configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Acquisition Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Saving configuration in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Trace display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Display of the WDM / OSA results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Zoom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Cursors function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Full scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Shift function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Trace /Table key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Channel detection threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Display of total power between cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Overlay trace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Overlaying several traces stored in memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Overlaying the current trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Display of traces in overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Swapping overlay traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Changing the traces position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Trace resulting from the difference between two traces . . . . . . . . . 402

xxii User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Removing a trace in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Quitting the overlay menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
On/Off-OSNR Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Challenge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Principle of "On/Off-OSNR Measurement" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
DFB results analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
DFB test configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
DFB measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
DFB results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Storing HR-OSA measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Recalling HR-OSA files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile 411

Recommended equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
AP Activation and self calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Loading a configuration file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Test Auto configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Acquisition band (with 81DISPAP modules). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Averaging acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Last Reference / BBS Type / BBS Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Saving configuration in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
AP Reference Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Performing the reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxiii
Contents

Saving a reference measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Loading existing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Performing a AP measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Display of AP results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Trace display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Spectrum/Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Trace shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Results table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Saving the trace and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Saving results and creating a report from results page. . . . . . . . . . . 426
Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Recalling AP files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method 431

CD activation and self calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Configuring the CD test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Loading a configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Alarms parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Analysis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Displ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ay437
Saving configuration in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
CD Reference measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Performing the reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Saving a reference measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Loading existing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Performing a CD Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

xxiv User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Display of CD results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
General display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Functions available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Delay / Dispersion / Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Trace/Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Cursor, Zoom and Shift functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Wavelength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Saving the trace and generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Saving results and creating a report from results page . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
File Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Recalling reference or CD measurement files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Chapter 15 Broadband source BBS 455

Function of the BBS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Activation process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Remote interlock connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

Chapter 16 Multi Test Access Unit 459

Function of the MTAU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Manual mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization 463

Inspect and clean connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Connect the test modules to the MTAU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Referencing the test functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxv
Contents

Inspect and clean connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

IL/ORL referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
IL/ORL referencing with the integrated FiberComplete® solution . . . . . 467
ORL and side by side IL Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Perform ORL and Loopback IL Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
AP and CD referencing with FC2 Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Activate the CD or AP function on T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Activate the BBS Source on T-BERD/MTS 6000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Perform the CD/AP referencing on T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
AP and CD referencing with FC1 Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Activate the AP/CD function on the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2. . . . . . . . . . . 472
Activate the AP/CD mode of the OBS5x0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Perform the AP / CD referencing on the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 . . . . . . . 473
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode. . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Fiber Characterization with FC1 Test Kit (Unidirectional). . . . . . . . . . 473
Getting started with the "Link Characterization" Script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Define the Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Define the Job Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Define the Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Configuring the “Results” Summary table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Start the test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
OBS-500/550 LightSource Operation for Fiber Characterization Testing 477
Fiber Characterization with FC2 Test Kit (Bi-dir.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Activating the test functions on T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Activating the test functions on T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Creating the storage directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Setting the test parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Defining the filenaming and fiber description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Starting a test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Testing next fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link
Characterization Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

xxvi User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Fiber Characterization with FC1 Test Kit (Unidirectional) . . . . . . . . . . 483

Selecting data storage directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Launching the Link Characterization script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Configuring the Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Configuring the Job Type & Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Configuring the “Results” Summary table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Starting a test sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Fiber Characterization with datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Connecting the Optical Talkset and Datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Setting the OTDR/IL/ORL Pass/Fail criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Selecting data storage directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Launching the Link Characterization script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Configuring the test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Configuring the Job Type & Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Configuring the “Results” Summary table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Starting a test sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Testing next fiber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Fiber Characterization - No datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Setting the OTDR/IL/ORL Pass/Fail criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Selecting data storage directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Launching the Link Characterization script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Configuring the test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Configuring the Job Type & Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Configuring the “Results” Summary table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Starting a test sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Testing next fiber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Results display and saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Chapter 18 OFI Module 501

OFI module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Selection of the OFI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
LTS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Connections to the power meter and the source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxvii
Contents

Configuring the LTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Configuring the alarm parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Configuring the Measurement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Display of results and command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Result of the measurement in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Table of results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Making a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Power measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Optical link loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
FOX Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Acquisition parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Results screen parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
File Storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Establishing a reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Establishing a reference for loss measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Taking a side by side reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Taking the reference in a loop-back mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
ORL Emitted power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
ORL Zero adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Measurement acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Choosing the fiber to be tested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Making the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Identifying the distant module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Displaying results for a FOX automatic measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Sending a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Manual ORL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement. . . . . . . . . 521
Measurement acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Making the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Display of results for an ORL manual measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Generating a pdf report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

xxviii User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

Creating a report from results page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Storing results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Recalling files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Chapter 19 Macros 527

Calling the Macro function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Macro recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
File macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Adding interaction to your macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Inserting a dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Inserting a message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Inserting a pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Renaming a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
The «Overwrite Config.» setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Replacing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Removing a macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Using the default macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Setting a macro as default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Macro playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Storing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Chapter 20 File management 535

Description of the explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Opening the file explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Managing tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
File signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Buttons on the right of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxix
Contents

Directory and files editing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Saving and loading files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Saving Files from the Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Loading files and displaying traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Simple loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Load with configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Loading several traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Explorer/Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Editing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Exporting a directory in a txt file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Generating pdf report(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using the Merge key, with the txt/pdf files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Sending files by e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Chapter 21 Technical specifications 549

Mains adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Indoor/outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Pollution degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
EMI/ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Drop test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Shocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Bumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Vibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Flammability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
IP Protection Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
OTDR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
OTDR measurements characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
OTDR size and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555

xxx User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Contents

OTDR Module supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

B, C & D Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
CWDM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Distance Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Ranges for OTDR Module A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Ranges for OTDR Module B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Ranges for OTDR Module C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Ranges for OTDR Module D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Ranges for CWDM modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
HR OSA Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
ODM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
ODM MR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
High Resolution Dispersion test solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
BBS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
MTAU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570

Chapter 22 Options and accessories 571

References of measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
OTDR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
OTDR CWDM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
PMD / I-PMD / HR OSA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
ODM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
ODM MR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
BBS Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
MTAU Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
User manual references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
References of optical connectors and adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
References of result processing software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxxi
Contents

Appendix A RoHS Information 579

Concerned products: 8100 V2 modules series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Concerned products: OTDR 8100 V2 Modules Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Concerned products: OTDR VLR 8100 V2 Modules Series . . . . . . . . . . 582
Concerned products: PMD 8100 V2 Modules Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Index 585

xxxii User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

About this guide
The MTS/TBERD series of VIAVI provides a portable, modular platform designed for the
construction, validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks.

The modules described in this document are applicable for the following platforms:
• MTS 8000
• T-BERD 8000
• MTS 6000A V2
• T-BERD 6000A V2
• OneAdvisor ONA-800
• OneAdvisor ONA-1000

NOTE
All mainframes are supplied by extra low voltage < 60V DC supplies so that
voltages which can create electrical shocks are excluded.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Purpose and scope” on page xxxiv
• “Assumptions” on page xxxiv
• “Technical assistance” on page xxxiv
• “Recycling Information” on page xxxiv
• “Conventions” on page xxxv

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxxiii
About this guide
Purpose and scope

Purpose and scope

The purpose of this guide is to help you successfully use the MTS / T-BERD features
and capabilities. This guide includes task-based instructions that describe how to install,
configure, use, and troubleshoot the equipment. Additionally, this guide provides a
complete description of VIAVI’s warranty, services, and repair information, including
terms and conditions of the licensing agreement.

Assumptions
This guide is intended for novice, intermediate, and experienced users who want to use
the equipment effectively and efficiently. We are assuming that you are familiar with
basic telecommunication concepts and terminology.

Technical assistance
If you require technical assistance, call 1-844-GO-VIAVI. For the latest TAC information,
go to http://www.viavisolutions.com/en/services-and-support/support/technical-assis-
tance.

Recycling Information
VIAVI recommends that customers dispose of their instruments and peripherals in an
environnmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole
products and recycling of products components, and/or materials.

Waste Electrical and electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive

In the European Union, this label indicates that this product should not be
disposed of with household waste. Il should be deposited at an appropriate
facility to enable recovery and recycling.

xxxiv User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 About this guide
Conventions

Conventions
This guide uses naming conventions and symbols, as described in the following tables.

Table 1 Typographical conventions

Description Example

User interface actions appear in this typeface. On the Status bar, click Start

Buttons or switches that you press on a unit Press the ON switch.

appear in this TYPEFACE.

Code and output messages appear in this All results okay

typeface.

Text you must type exactly as shown appears in Type: a:\set.exe in the dia-
this typeface. log box.

Variables appear in this typeface. Type the new hostname.

Book references appear in this typeface. Refer to Newton’s Telecom

Dictionary

A vertical bar | means “or”: only one option can platform [a|b|e]
appear in a single command.

Square brackets [ ] indicate an optional argu- login [platform name]

ment.

Slanted brackets < > group required arguments. <password>

Table 2 Keyboard and menu conventions

Description Example

A plus sign + indicates simultaneous keystrokes. Press Ctrl+s

A comma indicates consecutive key strokes. Press Alt+f,s

A slanted bracket indicates choosing a submenu On the menu bar, click

from menu. Start > Program Files.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

xxxv
About this guide
Conventions

Table 3 Symbol conventions

CAUTION
This symbol represents a general hazard.

DANGER
This symbol represents a risk of electrical shock

NOTE
This symbol represents a Note indicating related information or tip.

This symbol, located on the equipment or its packaging, indicates that the
equipment must not be disposed of in a land-fill site or as municipal waste,
and should be disposed of according to your national regulations.

Table 4 Safety definitions

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.

xxxvi User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 1
Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
This chapter gives the principles of the measurements made by the reflectometer
(OTDR) plug-ins, OSA spectrum analyzers (WDM technology) and PMD analyzers
(Polarization mode dispersion).

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Principle of reflectometry measurements” on page 2
• “Principle of bi-directional measurement” on page 4
• “Principle of the optical power and attenuation measurements” on page 5
• “PMD principle” on page 7
• “Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD ODM) using phase shift
method” on page 9
• “Standards and l0 for different types of fiber” on page 9

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 1

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
Principle of reflectometry measurements

Principle of reflectometry measurements

Optical time domain reflectometry consists in injecting a light pulse into one end of the
optical fiber to be analyzed and observing, at the same end, the optical intensity passing
through the fiber in the opposite direction to the propagation of the pulse.
The signal detected is exponentially diminishing in form, typical of the phenomenon of
backscattering, with superimposed peaks due to reflections from the ends of the fiber or
other variations in the refractive index.

Figure 1 Trace showing typical backscattering

Information yielded by the measurement

From a backscatter trace it is possible, in particular, to determine the position of a section
of fiber within a link. The measurement result must reveal:
• the attenuation
• the location of faults, by their distance from a point of origin,
• attenuation with respect to distance (dB/km)
• the reflectance of a reflective event or a link.

2 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
Principle of reflectometry measurements

To locate faults, a reflectometer measures only time. Consequently, group

velocity must be introduced in order to determine the distance of the loca-
tion. This is done by introducing the refractive index of the fiber into the
instrument.

Validity of Measurement
UTI-T, in recommendations G.650, G.651 and G.652, give backscatter measurement as
an alternative method for measuring attenuation, the method of reference being the cut
fiber.

The field of application of backscatter is not limited, but the conditions for application of
this method are nevertheless stipulated:
• injection conditions: Fresnel reflections must be limited at fiber input.
• a high-power source (laser) should be used.
• receiver bandwidth should be chosen to achieve a compromise between pulse
rise time and noise level.
• backscatter power should be represented on a logarithmic scale.

Reflectance
Reflectance is a value with which the coefficient of reflection of a reflecting optical
element can be quantified. It is defined as the ratio of the power reflected by the element
over the incident power.

These reflections are due to variations in refractive index all along the optical link in
certain telecommunications applications. If they are not controlled, they may degrade
the performance of the system by perturbing the operation of the emitting laser (espe-
cially DFB lasers) or may generate interference noise in the receiver by multiple reflec-
tions.

The reflectometer is particularly well suited to the measurement of discrete reflectances

on an optical fiber link. To calculate the coefficient of reflection, it is necessary to
measure the total amplitude of the Fresnel reflection generated and then to apply a
conversion formula to obtain the reflectance value.

This formula takes into account:

• the total amplitude of the reflection measured by the reflectometer.
• the pulse width used to measure the amplitude of the reflection (in nanoseconds)
• the backscatter coefficient of the fiber used:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 3

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
Principle of bi-directional measurement

• typical values of the backscatter coefficient for a pulse of 1 ns and

– for a single-mode fiber: -79 dB to 1310 nm
-81 dB to 1550 nm and 1625 nm
– for a multi-mode fiber: -70 dB to 850 nm
-75 dB to 1300 nm

NOTE
To measure the widest range of reflection coefficient, it is necessary to insert
a variable optical attenuator between the reflectometer and the link to be
tested. This attenuator enables the level of the trace to be adjusted so as to
avoid saturation of the reflectometer by the reflection to be evaluated.

Principle of bi-directional measurement

If fibers with different mode-field diameters (core size etc.) are joined, the resulting
OTDR trace waveform can show a higher backscattering level. This is due to the
increased level of backscattered signal reflected back to the OTDR in the downstream
fiber.

Figure 2 Normal splice

This phenomenon can occur when jointing different types of fiber in multi-mode or 2
fibers with different backscattering coefficients.

4 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
Principle of the optical power and attenuation measurements

Figure 3 Positive splice (A ->B) / Negative Splice (B -> A)

The sum gives the bi-directional or average splice loss value: S = S1 + S2-
------------------
2
Bi-directionnal measurement consists in performing a measurement from the extremity
of fiber A, then another measurement from the extremity of fiber B, finally get events of
both traces and calculate the average for all slope, splice and reflectance measure-
ments.

Principle of the optical power and attenuation

measurements
Power measurement
A power meter, is all that is needed to measure emitted or received power:
• to measure emitted power, connect the power meter directly to the output of the
optical emitter;
• to measure the power at the input of an optical receiver, the power meter is
connected to the end of the fiber, at the point where the optical receiver would be
connected.

Attenuation measurements (optical link loss)

For measurement of the attenuation of power in a complete link or in elements such as
sections of fiber, connections or optical components, a light source and a power meter
are required.

This attenuation is usually deduced from the measurement of optical power at two
points:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 5

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
Principle of the optical power and attenuation measurements

Laser light 1 2
source of the Power meter
Platform 8000 Reference Link under test
fiber
Attenuation A(dB) = P1 (dBm) - P2 (dBm)

To perform accurate measurements, the following conditions are vital

• Use one of the light sources of the LTS or a light source which is stable both in
time and as a function of temperature.
• Make sure that all connections and fibers and the receiving cell are perfectly
clean.
• Use a reference link between the laser source and the test subject. If several
measurements are to be made under identical light injection conditions, this refer-
ence fiber must not be disconnected during the period while measurements are
taking place.

Insertion loss method

1 The power meter is first connected to the laser source via the reference fiber: P1
is measured.
2 Then the fiber to be tested is inserted between the reference fiber and the power
meter: P2 is measured.
The difference between P2 and P1 gives the attenuation of the fiber under test.
It is preferable to use the same type of connector at both ends of the fiber being
tested, to ensure the same connection conditions for measuring P1 and P2.

Accuracy of measurements

• A high degree of accuracy is often required. It is then necessary to perform a

preliminary calibration without the fiber under test to eliminate the losses due to
connections as far as this is possible. To do this, use the «Reference Value» func-
tion.

For measurements in the laboratory, where both ends of the fiber are on the same site,
the repeatability of attenuation measurements is better than 0.1 dB. For measurements
in the field, where the two ends are on different sites, variations from one measurement
to another are of the order of ± 0.2 dB (using a relative measurement).

6 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
PMD principle

PMD principle
The transmission rate and range are two of the most important parameters of fiber optics
paths and must therefore be optimized. And, since more and more paths (including
those already installed) are being used for transmitting Wavelength Division Multiplex
(WDM) signals or for bit rates of 10 Gbit/s, it is becoming all the more important to deter-
mine the Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).

PMD, which is the basic property of single-mode fibers, in particular affects the magni-
tude of the transmission rate. It results from the difference in propagation times of the
energy of a given wavelength, which is split into two polarization layers that are at right
angles to each other (as shown in the below diagram). The main causes of this birefrin-
gence are non-circularities of the fiber itself and external stress on the fiber (macro-
bending, micro-bending, twist and temperature variations).

Figure 4 Example of a time delay between two polarization layers

er
od e fib
le-M
Sing
V2 DGD

V1

The PMD is also referred to as mean value of all Differential Group Delays (DGD) in
picoseconds (ps) or as the DGD coefficient in ps/√km.

The mean DGD causes the transmission pulse to broaden when transmitted along the
fiber, generating distortion, which in turns increases the bit-error-rate (BER) of the optical
system. The consequence is that the PMD limits the transmission bit rate on a link. It is
then important to know the PMD values to calculate what are the bit rate limits of the
links.

Method used to measure the PMD

The method used to measure the PMD is based on the Fixed Analyzer Method1 which
requires a broadband polarized source at one extremity, and a polarized (variable)
Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA) at the other extremity.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 7

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
PMD principle

Figure 5 Fixed Analyzer Method used to measure the PMD

Broadband Fixed Rotatable Optical Spectrum
light source Polarizer Polarizer Analyzer (OSA)
(SLED) Link under test

The method used to measure PMD is the Fast Fourier Transform Method (FFT).

From the spectrum, the mean period of the amplitude modulation is measured.

The Fast Fourier Transform Method into a time distribution will give a Gaussian curve
and the mean DGD value is determined from this curve (for fiber links with strong mode
coupling).

It is not necessary to modify the polarization angle of the analyzer when strong mode
coupling is used. For weak mode coupling, an angle could be selected to get the
maximum amplitude of the modulation.

The instrument should have a higher dynamic range than the link itself. A 35 dB dynamic
range is usually enough for most of the applications, and 45 dB should be used for very
long distance networks.

The measurement range of the PMD should be linked with the transmission rate. For
WDM applications, it should be between 0.1 ps to 60 ps so that measurement can be
carried out for bit rates between 2.5 and 40 Gbit/s. The table below indicates the
maximum permitted PMD values for various bit rates.

Maximum PMD PMD coefficient (ps/√ km)

Bit rate (Gbit/s)
(ps) 400 km cable length
2.5 40 <2
10 10 < 0.5
40 2.5 < 0.125
10Gbps Ethernet 5 -

• Tables at the end of chapter gives information about the appropriate standards
and limits.

1.This is standardized by the ANSI/TIA/EIA FOTP-113 Polarization Mode Disper-

sion Measurement for Single-Mode Optical Fibers by the Fixed Analyzer Method.

8 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD ODM) using phase shift method

Principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion

(CD ODM) using phase shift method
The Phase shift method

A modulated broadband light is sent over the Fiber Under Test. The phase of the test
signal is compared to the phase of the reference signal. The measured value is the
group delay, corresponding to a wavelength interval between the reference phase and
the test wavelength phase. It is measured in the frequency domain, by detecting,
recording and processing the phase shift of The modulated signals. The fibre chromatic
dispersion is derived from the measurement of the relative group delay using an approx-
imation formula.

Figure 6 CD ODM measurement using phase shift method

Standards and λ0 for different types of fiber

non-zero or
non-offset
Fiber offset dispersion homogeneous offset
dispersion
dispersion
Standard ITU/Y ITU-T G.652 ITU-T G.653 ITU-T G.655
Standard IEC IEC 60793-1-1 IEC 60793-1-1 IEC 60793-1-1
type B1 type B2 type B3
Standard TIA/EIA Iva IVb IVb
Approximate λ0 . 1310 nm 1550 nm 1500 nm or indefinite

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 9

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement
Standards and l0 for different types of fiber

Most suitable method of approximation according to trace

zone

Single Mode Fiber

ITU-T Wavelength Range Approximation
Type
Dispersion unshifted G.652 around 1310 nm 3-term Sellmeier
fiber (standard fiber)
1550 nm region Quadratic
Full wavelength range 5-term Sellmeier
(1260 - 1640 nm)
Dispersion shifted fiber G.653 1550 nm region Quadratic
Full wavelength range 5-term Sellmeier
(1260 - 1640 nm)
Non-dispersion shifted G.655 1550 nm region Quadratic
fiber
Full wavelength range 5-term Sellmeier
(1260 - 1640 nm)
Wideband NZDSF G.656 Full wavelength range 5-term Sellmeier
(1260 - 1640 nm)
Mixed fibers including 1550 nm region Quadratic
DCF
Full wavelength range 5-term Sellmeier
(1260 - 1640 nm)

10 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 2
Chapter 2 Getting started
This chapter describes how to start using the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 or T-BERD/MTS
6000/6000A V2.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Unpacking the device - Precautions” on page 12
• “Laser Safety instructions” on page 12
• “AC/DC safety information” on page 14
• “Precautions relating to optical connections” on page 14
• “Installing a module in a receptacle and removing it” on page 15
• “Connecting fiber optic cable” on page 16
• “Optical connectors and interchangeable adapters” on page 19
• “Display screen” on page 21

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 11

Chapter 2 Getting started
Unpacking the device - Precautions

Unpacking the device - Precautions

We suggest that you keep the original packing material. It is designed for reuse (unless
it is damaged during shipping). Using the original packing material ensures that the
device is properly protected during shipping.

If another packaging is used (for returning the equipment for example), VIAVI cannot
give warranty on good protection of the equipment.

If needed, you can obtain appropriate packing materials by contacting Technical Assis-
tance Center.

NOTE
Product marking is based on the commercial reference excluding the first let-
ter.
Example: Commercial reference E4146QUAD is identified 4146QUAD on
the product and refer to the same product

Laser Safety instructions

The provisions contained in two standards define the safety procedures to be observed
both by users and by manufacturers when utilizing laser products:
• IEC 60825-1: 2014 - Safety of laser products – Part 1: Classification of products,
requirements and user guidelines.
• FDA 21 CFR § 1040.10 - Performance standards for light-emitting products -
Laser products.

Due to the range of possible wavelengths, power values and injection characteristics of
a laser beam, the risks inherent in its usage vary. The laser classes form groups repre-
senting different safety thresholds.

Laser classes
Standards IEC 60825-1: 2014 and FDA21CFR§1040.10:
• VFL option: Class 2.

12 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 2 Getting started
Laser Safety instructions

Warning labels for the laser classes

Due to the reduced dimensions of the optical modules, it is not possible to attach the
required warning labels to them. In line with the provisions of Article 7.1 of the IEC
60825-1:2014 standard, the laser class identification labels are shown below:

The user must take the necessary precautions concerning the optical output of the
instrument and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Ref.
IEC 60825-1:2014 FDA21CFR§1040.10
standard

CLASS 1
Class 1 LASER PRODUCT

Class 1M

Class 2

Measurements on optical fibers are difficult to execute and the preci-

sion of the results obtained depends largely on the precautions taken
by the user.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 13

Chapter 2 Getting started
AC/DC safety information

AC/DC safety information

Do not use any mains adapter other than the one supplied with the instrument, or
supplied by 3 as an option for this instrument.

If another adapter is used, it may damage the equipment itself.

Other basic safety precautions are as follows:

• Do not use AC/Adapter/Charger outdoors or in wet or damp locations

• Connect the AC/Adapter/Charger to the correct mains voltage, as indicated on
the ratings label.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord, and do not locate the product
where people can walk on the power cord.
• Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric chock from lightning.
• Do not use this product in the vicinity of a gas leak or in any explosive environ-
ment.
• Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers
may expose you to dangerous, high voltage points and other hazards. Contact
qualified service personnel for all service.

Precautions relating to optical connections

• The normal operating life of an optical connector is usually of the order of a few
hundred manipulations. It is then advisable to manipulate the optical connections
as rarely as possible.
• The proper operation of the instrument and its accuracy of measurement are
dependent on the cleanliness of the environment and the optical connectors as
well as the care taken in its manipulation.
• The optical connectors must therefore be clean and dust-free. If the optical
connection is not being used, protect the connections of the module using the
protective caps.

14 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 2 Getting started
Installing a module in a receptacle and removing it

Installing a module in a receptacle and removing it

With the T-BERD/MTS-8000 V2, a module may be inserted into either of the two slots
provided for the purpose. With the T-BERD/MTS-6000/6000A, only one module may be
installed into the Platform.

When a slot is vacant, it is closed by means of a cover-plate fitted with two captive
screws like those on the plug-ins.

Figure 7 Rear view of the 8000 V2 Platform (example)

Captive screws securing the

Inserting a module

The Platform must be switched off, and if it has a mains power supply, the
adapter cable must be unplugged

1 Slide the module into its slot.

2 When it is fully home, press against the screen-printed surface of the module
while tightening the securing screws. The screen-printed surface of the plug-in
must be flush with that of the receptacle.
3 Make sure that the two large captive screws of the plug-in are screwed fully
home.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 15

Chapter 2 Getting started
Connecting fiber optic cable

NOTE
UHD modules use very powerful lasers: they must be connected exclusively
to optical connectors equipped with zirconium ferules. Using connectors
equipped with metallic ferrules could damage the plug-in connector.

Removing a module

The Platform must be switched off, and if it has a mains power supply, the
adapter cable must be unplugged

1 Completely unscrew (up to the stop) the two captive screws securing the module.
2 Carefully slide the module out of its slot.

Connecting fiber optic cable

Inspecting and cleaning connector end faces

Always inspect and clean the connector end face of the optical fiber
cable and the test port before mating both together.
VIAVI is not responsible for damage and reduced performance caused
by bad fiber handling and cleaning.

• Optical connector contamination is the #1 source of performance degradation

and test equipment repair
• A single particle mated into the core of a fiber can cause significant back reflec-
tion, insertion loss and equipment damage. Visual inspection is the only way to
determine if the fiber connectors are truly clean before mating them.

Follow this simple "INSPECT BEFORE YOU CONNECT" process to ensure fiber end
faces are clean prior to mating connectors.

16 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 2 Getting started
Connecting fiber optic cable

Figure 8 "Inspect Before You Connect" process

Optical connector types

There are many optical connectors in the market place. Always ensure to use a high
quality connector that meets the international standards.

Two main types of connectors are deployed in the telecommunication industry:

1 Straight polished connectors, so called PC or UPC
2 Angled polished connectors, so called APC

The PC or UPC-type test port is identified by a grey cap with the addition of a "PC" label.

The APC-type test port is identified by a green cap with the addition of a "APC" label.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 17

Chapter 2 Getting started
Connecting fiber optic cable

Figure 9 Modules with APC and PC connector

Caution

Never connect a PC connector into an APC test port or vice versa. This will result in
damaging the connector end faces.

Figure 10 PC/APC bad connection

WARNING
VIAVI declines responsibilities of connector damages if a poor quality con-
nector is used or APC to PC connections made. Test port connector repair
will be charged

18 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 2 Getting started
Optical connectors and interchangeable adapters

WARNING
All the universal connectors are available on the OTDR Modules, except on
the LA Module.

Connecting Fiber optic cable to test port

After ensuring proper cleaning of both end connectors, follow the below steps in order
to correctly and safely connect the optical fiber into the test port:
1 Carefully align the connector and test port to prevent the fiber end from touching
the outside of the port and scratching the end face.

NOTE
If your connector features a keying mechanism, ensure that it is correctly fit-
ted into the test port's insert.

2 Push the connector to firmly place it inside ensuring physical end face contact.

NOTE
If your connector features a screw-on sleeve, tighten the connector to firmly
maintain the fiber in place. Do not over tighten as this will damage the fiber
and the test port.

WARNING
Never force the connector ferrule or insert it with an angle into the test port
adapter. Mechanical stress may permanently damage the ceramic sleeve of
the adapter or the end face of the connector. A new adapter purchase only
will get the unit back to operation.

Optical connectors and interchangeable adapters

Fiber Optic modules may come equipped with a universal connector and adapter
selected at time of order.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 19

Chapter 2 Getting started
Optical connectors and interchangeable adapters

Adapter types
VIAVI offers 5 different adapters, all compatible with this connector, allowing the user to
switch from one adapter to another according to which fiber type he intends to work with.

Adapter types supplied are: FC, SC, DIN, ST and LC.

Figure 11 5 different types of adapters may be mounted on the universal connector

DIN Adapter (EUDINAD) ST Adapter (EUSTAD)

FC Adapter (EUFCAD)
LC Adapter (EULCAD) SC Adapter (EUSCAD)

Switching adapter type

In order to switch from an adapter to another, proceed as shown.

Figure 12 Removing and refitting an adapter

Pull out in the direction of the
arrow in order to release the
adapter from the lug holes
To place an adapter, position
the handle as shown in order
to engage with the the lugs,
push hard and pull the handle
down

Cleaning the universal connector

Remove the adapter in order to access the ferrule and clean it using a cotton swab.

20 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 2 Getting started
Display screen

Display screen
The display screen is divided into a number of different zones. Starting from the top,
these are:
1 a status bar in which various icons indicate the current functions:
2 a bar displaying a scaled-down representation of the trace, showing the zoom
zone and the parameters of the measurement on display (signature of the
measurement).
3 the main part of the screen, displaying a menu or the page of results.
4 tabs enabling the user to switch from one function to another (OTDR, PMD,
power meter, etc.), as required.
5 At the right-hand side of the screen, softkeys give access to the various
commands. Their action depends on the current function and configuration.

Figure 13 Example of display of results (OTDR)

1
2

3 5

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 21

Chapter 2 Getting started
Display screen

Top status bar

The top status bar on the screen shows, on the right, current date and time, and in the
form of icons:
• the type of power supply: mains or battery, and if the power supply is on battery
the level of charge (see Battery management in chapter 2 from the Platform
manual)
• if the Talkset option is present and the telephone is activated, the icon .
• if a remote screen is selected, the icon (or if two users or more are
working on the same Platform ).
• if transfer of data is in progress, the icon .
• if a printing process is in progress, the icon
• if a data saving is in progress, the icon
• if a USB key is connected onto the Platform, the icon

Mini-trace
The File menu and the Results page can include a scaled-down representation of the
trace which may show the location of the zoom zone corresponding to the main display.
The part of the trace shown in the main display is boxed on the mini-trace.

This mini-trace will only appear if the trace originated from an Platform . Other Bellcore
files read on this instrument do not contain the information needed to display it.

In OTDR Mode, the symbol LFD can be displayed with the mini trace, indicating the
Traffic Detection function has been used.

Signature of the measurement

A status bar repeats the parameters of the measurement, and in some cases:
• the position of the cursors:
In OTDR results page, the cursors information are displayed only if Cursor key is
active (see page 73).
• a comment
• the name of the file when the result is stored and recalled from a memory.

22 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 2 Getting started
Display screen

Main display zone

The central zone of the screen can display the configuration of the instrument or the
measurement, the memory explorer of the Platform , the measurement results, etc.
Refer to the chapter dealing with the measurement in progress.

Tabs
When the instrument performs several different functions (OTDR, PMD, Power Meter,
etc.), the various configuration or results pages are accessible from tabs. To change
from one tab to another, the button selecting the page must be pressed. For example:
• on the Results page, to change from one tab to the other, press the RESULTS
button
• on the measurement configuration page, to change from one tab to the other,
press the SETUP button
• On the file configuration page, to change from one tab to the other, press the
FILE button.

NOTE
There is a tab for each different type of measurement: OTDR SM, OTDR
MM, OSA, Power Meter... The tab of a function is displayed if and only if a
module corresponding to this type of measurement has been inserted in the
instrument, or if a file of the type of this measurement is open. If two modules
of the same measurement type are present, then only one module is
"active", so only one tab will appear for this measurement. To change the
active module, go to the Home screen and select it there.

A small icon may appear in the left corner of each tab, according to the status of the
corresponding module.

The icon signification is the following:

• No icon: the function is used in a read-only mode (no module), or the module has
not been selected.
• Dark green icon: the function has been selected but the corresponding module
does not currently perform an acquisition.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 23

Chapter 2 Getting started
Display screen

• Green icon: the function has been selected and the corresponding module
currently performs an acquisition.

Soft keys
The 7 softkeys at the side depend on the current configuration and the context.

Their use is symbolized by an icon.

Icons

shows that the action is immediate when the key is pressed.

shows that the key gives access to a sub-menu.

shows that the key will quit the sub-menu.

shows that the function selected by the key will be controlled by the
direction keys

Selection keys
The selection may be exclusive (only one choice possible) or non-exclusive (more than
one option available at the same time):

This key offers two / three exclusive options. The change of function occurs
immediately, the first time the key is pressed.

This key offers two / three non-exclusive options. Pressing the key repeat-
edly modifies the choice.

24 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 3
Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Pressing the START/STOP key is all that is needed to start or stop a measurement.
However, it is necessary to configure the measurement and the type of results desired.

This chapter describes the different stages in a reflectometry measurement made using
an OTDR module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Activating the OTDR function” on page 26
• “Configuring the reflectometry test” on page 28
• “Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator” on page 56
• “Performing OTDR acquisitions” on page 57
• “Saving results for Smart Test acquisitions” on page 65
• “Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode” on page 85
• “Saving the trace(s) and generating a report” on page 100
• “Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)” on page 106
• “OptiPulses option” on page 123
• “FTTA-SLM option” on page 125
• “FTTH-SLM Software option” on page 142
• “Smart Link Cable Option” on page 157

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 25

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Activating the OTDR function

Activating the OTDR function

Once the OTDR module is correctly set onto the equipment and the T-BERD/MTS is
switched on, the desired OTDR function must be selected before any OTDR configura-
tion, or measurement.

Selecting the Smart Test function

Principle of the Smart Test

The Smart Test is used to perform OTDR acquisitions using a pre loaded configuration
file (no setup required) and access to essential analysis features.

Selecting Smart Test

The Smart Test function is available whatever is the OTDR module set onto the T-BERD/
MTS.

To select this function, after the equipment starts:

1 Press the HOME button.

Figure 14 Home page

2 Select the Smart Test icon

26 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Activating the OTDR function

The icon turns yellow .

NOTE
The selection of Smart Test icon automatically deselects the Expert OTDR
icon and vice-versa.

NOTE
In the case a Singlemode/Multimode module, one line contains the Multi-
mode icons and a second one the Singlemode icons.
To distinguish both modes, multimode icons contain the MM mark.

Selecting the Expert OTDR function

Principle of the Expert OTDR

The Expert OTDR is used to
• perform OTDR acquisitions with full OTDR setup capabilities, and advanced anal-
ysis features.
• create configuration files that can be loaded by Smart Test users.

Selecting Expert OTDR

The Expert OTDR function is available whatever is the OTDR module set onto the T-
BERD/MTS.

To select this function, after the equipment start:

1 Press the HOME button
2 Select the Expert OTDR icon
The icon turns yellow .

NOTE
The selection of Expert OTDR icon automatically deselects the Smart Test
icon and vice-versa.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 27

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

NOTE
In the case a Singlemode/Multimode module, one line contains the Multi-
mode icons and a second one the Singlemode icons.
To distinguish both modes, multimode icons contain the MM mark.

Configuring the reflectometry test1

Configuring the unit for Smart Test
Once the Smart Test icon is validate, press SETUP.

Smart Test standard process

1 Select the configuration file, which contains all acquisition parameters and file
storage setup, and which has been created in Expert mode (see “Saving OTDR
configuration in a file” on page 53).
2 Configure / modify some parameters before starting the test.
3 Start the acquisition (standard or real time)
4 Save the results

Figure 15 Standard Smart Test Process

Load a test config

Set basic
parameters
START SmartLink
acquisition
Read measurement
pass/fail verdct

Save results

1.if an OTDR module is installed

28 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Selecting the configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for Smart Test test:
1 If necessary, click on the button to display the superior level of the direc-
tory.
2 In the selection file screen, select the configuration file to be used for the acquisi-
tion on Smart Test mode.
The file is underlined in blue.
3 Press Load to load the selected file and display the current parameters for this
configuration.

Figure 16 .Load file as Smart Test Configuration

Location of the
configuration files
for Smart Test

4 Once loaded, the configuration parameters that can be modified displays.

Modifying some parameters before the acquisition

In Smart Test mode, the user have access to 4 parameters he can modified before
launching the test.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 29

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Figure 17 Smart TestSetup page

• Laser The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength(s)

selected (for multiple-wavelength modules). In case of a multi-
wavelength module, select All to perform a measurement for
all the wavelengths available (this parameter visible exclusively
on modules with one single OTDR port). The possible values
depend on the module used.
• Distance unit select the unit to be used for distance (km / kfeet / miles /
meter / feet / inch).
• Launch cable Define if the Launch Cable must be taken into account for the
acquisition: No / Yes.
If Yes is selected, set the length clicking on Set Length and
enter the distance using the numeric keypad. Click on to
validate (or on to cancel)

30 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

• Alarms Define if alarms thresholds must be applied for the acquisition:

Select No if no alarm thresholds must be applied.
Select Yes to define alarms, and press Alarm Level to define
the pre-defined thresholds for the acquisition.

See Table 1 and Table 2 to get the values for each pre-defined alarm thresholds.
The thresholds can be modified only in Expert mode and saved in a new configu-
ration file.

Once all configuration parameters are correctly defined, the acquisition can be
launched.

The Config. key allows to return to configuration file selection (see Figure 16 on
page 29).

Configuring the test in Expert OTDR

Once the Expert OTDR icon is selected, the Results page automatically displays.

In Expert OTDR, the parameters for acquisition and for file storage can be configured.
1 To call up the test configuration window, press the SETUP button.
Dialog boxes / menu keys on the same screen enable selection of:

– Acquisition parameters
– Alarms parameters Used for the OTDR acquisition
– Analysis parameters
– Link parameters
Used for the OTDR results saving
– File parameters

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 31

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Figure 18 OTDR Setup screen

In these windows, the parameter selected is in video inverse.

Configuring the Acquisition parameters

You can choose the OTDR acquisition parameters.
1 Once the Setup page is displayed, press Acquisition menu key to configure the
Acquisition parameters.

The Acquisition Setup page is divided into two parts: the Acquisition box and the
Launch cable box.

If some acquisition parameters are not accessible (not visible or displayed in

grey), check in the Home page that the Expert OTDR function is selected
(see “Selecting the Expert OTDR function” on page 27).

32 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Laser

The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength(s) selected (for multiple-wave-
length modules). In case of a multi-wavelength module, select All to perform a measure-
ment for all the wavelengths available (this parameter visible exclusively on modules
with one single OTDR port). The possible values depend on the module used.

Acquisition Mode

Select the kind of acquisition to be performed:

Manual The acquisition parameters Pulse / Range / Resolution can be set
by user.
Auto The acquisition parameters Pulse / Range / Resolution are defined
automatically and cannot be modified
The Measurement time will be set to Auto, but can be modified (see “Time” on
page 34).
Smart Acq. (not available in Multimode)
This parameter allows to launch a short acquisition before the stan-
dard one.
The first acquisition is performed with the shortest pulse in order to
detect more precisely the events at the beginning of the fiber.

Range

The possible range depends on the pulse length selected. This range is given for each
pulse length in the paragraph “Distance Ranges” on page 591. This parameter is exclu-
sively configurable if Acquisition parameter is set to Manual. It depends on the module
used
Auto allows to detect automatically the range.

In Auto mode, the range is selected as a function of the end of the fiber.

Pulse

The available values depend of the module used. Parameter selectable only if Acquisi-
tion parameter is set to Manual.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 33

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

In the case of a multi wavelength acquisition:

– you can define a pulse for each wavelength:
a select each wavelength in the Laser line and define a pulse
b Once all lasers are configured, go back to the pulse line and select Multi.
– you can define a pulse for all lasers:
c select All on the Laser line
d select a pulse, which will be common to all lasers

See “OTDR Specifications” on page 585.

NOTE
According to the value selected for Pulse parameter, the Range parameter
can be automatically modified, and vice-versa.

Resolution

This parameter is exclusively configurable if Acquisition parameter is set to Manual.

Auto resolution is selected automatically according to the last two parame-
ters above.
High Resolution the highest resolution is applied
High Dynamic the highest dynamic is applied

Time

Real time the equipment performs up to ten acquisitions per second (see
“Performing OTDR acquisitions” on page 57).

NOTE
Whatever is the acquisition mode selected, an acquisition in real time mode
can be launched maintaining the START/STOP button pushed for about 2 sec-
onds.

NOTE
If the Acquisition parameter is defined to Auto, then the Time parameter is
defined to Auto, but can be modified.

34 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Manual Enter the acquisition time desired (from 5 s. to 5 minutes max).

Predefined Select one of the acquisition times predefined: 10 seconds / 20
seconds / 30 seconds / 1 minute / 2 minutes / 3 minutes.

If the option OptiPulse is available, see “Configuring the OTDR acquisition with Opti-
Pulses mode” on page 123 to configure the OTDR acquisition with this option.

Otdr Connector test

This parameter allows to choose if a test of the front connector must be performed when
acquisition is launched.
No the OTDR connection is tested with indication Bad/Good.
Yes & Continue the OTDR connection is tested, and if the state is not good, the
acquisition continues but a warning displays.
Yes & Abort the OTDR connection is tested, and if the state is bad, a warning
displays and the acquisition stops.

Launch Cable End / Receive Cable Start

No All the results are displayed and referenced on the basis of the board
of the module.
Evt 1, 2, 3 The results relating to the launch cable are eliminated from the table.
Attenuation and distances are then measured on the basis of the
marker Evt 1, 2 or 3 selected.
Distance Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance (Min= 0 / Max=50 km /
164.042 kfeet / 31.075 miles)
or
affect the active cursor value, using the Set Cursor Distance key.
or
click on Measure Length to launch the measurement of the launch
cable connected and apply the results for the parameter.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 35

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Figure 19 Launch Cable / Receive Cable

Launch Cable Receive Cable
Fiber Under Test
OTDR

Launch Receive
Cable end Cable start

Distance of the Distance of the

launch cable receive cable

Include Link Start Connector / Include Link End Connector

Defining the Launch Cable End parameter with an event number or a distance will auto-
matically activate the corresponding parameter Include Link Start Connector. This
parameters can be set to Yes if the budget must include the connectors loss of the
launch cable at end

Defining the Receive Cable Start parameter with an event number or a distance, will
automatically activate the corresponding parameter Include Link End Connector. This
parameters can be set to Yes if the budget must include the connectors loss of the
launch cable at start

If those parameters are set to No, the budget only displays the connector loss of the
fiber.

Configuring the Alarms parameters

In the Setup page, press Alarms softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Alarms).

Once the Alarms page is displayed, configure the parameters for applying thresholds to
results displayed.

36 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Alarms > Threshold

None The alarm function is not active.

Fail This menu lists possible major alarm thresholds that the user could
select. If results are above those thresholds, they will be highlighted
in red in the table of results, and the icon will appear at the top
right of the screen.
– If Fail is selected, select in the Threshold parameter to defined values
either manually or according to standards:
User: define your own thresholds values for one or several elements: Splice /
Connector / Reflectance / Slope / Fiber Length Min and Max / Total Loss Min and
Max / ORL
TIA-568 3 / TIA-568 3.RL35 / ISO/IEC 11801 2002 or 2010 / ISO/IEC 14763-3
2006 or 2014 / Default: Select one of this parameter to configure the alarm
thresholds with predefined values:

Table 1 Singlemode Modules

Splice Mux/
Connector loss Reflectance Slope1 ORL
Loss Demux
Default > 0.20 dB > 0.50 dB > - 35 dB > 1.00 dB/km < 27 dB No
TIA-568.3 > 0.75 dB No > 1.00 dB/km -

TIA-568.3 RL35 > 0.75 dB > - 35 dB > 1.00 dB/km -

ISO/IEC 11801 No
> 0.75 dB No > 1.00 dB/km -
(2002)
ISO/IEC 11801 > 0.30 dB > 0.50 dB > - 35 dB > 0.40 dB/km -
(2010)
ISO/IEC 14763-3
> 0.50 dB No > 1.00 dB/km -
(2006)
No
ISO/IEC 14763-3
> 0.75 dB No > 0.40 dB/km -
(2014)

1. This parameter is not available in OEO-OTDR configuration

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 37

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Table 2 Multimode Modules

Default TIA-568C & ISO/IEC 11801

Splice Loss > 0.20 dB > 0.30 dB
Connector Loss > 0.50 dB > 0.75 dB
Slope 850 nm > 3.50 dB/km > 3.50 dB/km
Slope 1300 nm > 1.50 dB/km > 1.50 dB/km
Reflectance > - 35 dB -
ORL < 27 dB -

Warning This menu lists possible minor alarm thresholds that the user could
select. If results are between those thresholds and the «fail» thresh-
olds, they will be highlighted in yellow in the table of results, and the
icon will appear at the top right of the screen.
Thresholds can be set for: Splice / Connector Loss / Reflectance.

If all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in red or yellow), results are
displayed in green in the table and the icon is .

Configuring the Analysis parameters

In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

The Analysis Setup page is divided into two parts: the Parameters box and the
Measurement box.

Parameters

Section Attenuation
dB/km Displays the section slope in the table of results. When the fiber is
too short to measure the slope accurately, no value is displayed
(empty field).
dB Displays the section Loss in the table of results. With short fiber
where the slope cannot be measured with a good accuracy, the loss
in dB is approximate and displayed.

38 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

None The section attenuation and Loss values are not displayed in the
table of results.

Section Length
Choose to display or not the section length in the table of results.

Index of refraction
Choice of group refraction index of the whole fiber.
User Define for each wavelength (1310 SM, 1360-1510 SM, 1550 SM,
1625 SM) a refraction index of 1.30000 to 1.69999. The selection of
an index alters the value of the section AB (actual distance between
cursors A and B).

NOTE
With the CWDM Module, the selection is as follows:
• For lasers 1271, 1291, 1311, 1331 and 1351, select the line 1310 SM.
• For lasers 1371 to 1511, select the line 1360 - 1510 SM
• For lasers 1531, 1551 and 1571, select the line 1550 SM
• For lasers 1591 and 1611, select the line 1625 SM.

or,
If the actual distance between the cursors A and B is known, enter its
value under Section AB to establish the index of the fiber. Selection
of this distance causes the display of the indices. The extreme
distance values are given by the index values (1.30000 à 1.70000).
or
You can also enter the Link Length, if it is known, using the Numeric
keypad.
Predefined It is possible to choose one of the predefined values given for certain
cables. The corresponding indices given in the table below are
repeated on the screen.

Figure 20 Predefined index values (Single Mode)

Wavelength (nm) 1310 SM 1360 - 1510 SM 1550 SM 1625 - 1650 SM

Generic G652 G657 1.46750 1.46800 1.46800 1.46850
Generic G653 G655 1.46750 1.46800 1.46800 1.46850
ATT SM 1.46600 1.46700 1.46700 1.46700

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 39

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Wavelength (nm) 1310 SM 1360 - 1510 SM 1550 SM 1625 - 1650 SM

Corning SMF-28 1.46750 1.46810 1.46810 1.46810
Corning SMF-DS 1.47180 1.47110 1.47110 1.47110
Corning SMF-LS 1.47100 1.47000 1.47000 1.47000
Corning-Leaf 1.46890 1.46840 1.46840 1.46900
Draka SMF 1.46750 1.46800 1.46800 1.46850
Draka Longline 1.46700 1.46700 1.46710 1.46750
Draka Teralight 1.46820 1.46820 1.46830 1.46850
Draka Benbright 1.46750 1.46750 1.46800 1.46850
Fitel Furukawa 1.47000 1.47000 1.47000 1.47000
OFS Lucent Allwave 1.46750 1.46750 1.46750 1.46850
Lucent Truewave 1.47100 1.47100 1.47000 1.47000
SpecTran SM 1.46750 1.46810 1.46810 1.46810
Sterlite 1.46700 1.46700 1.46750 1.46750
Sumitomo Litespec 1.46600 1.46600 1.46700 1.47000
Sumitomo Pure 1.46600 1.46600 1.46700 1.47000

Figure 21 Predefined index values (Multi Mode)

Wavelength (nm) 850 MM 1300 MM

Corning 62.5 1.50140 1.49660
Corning 50 1.48970 1.48560
SpecTran 62.5 1.49600 1.49100
Generic 50 1.49000 1.48600
Generic 62.5 1.49000 1.48700
Generic OM1-62/125 1.49600 1.49100
Generic OM2-3- 4 50/125 1.48200 1.47700

Scatter coefficient
User Selects for each wavelength, the backscatter coefficient of -99 dB to
-50 dB by increments of 0.1dB. Modification of the backscatter coeffi-
cient K changes the measurements of reflectance and ORL.
Auto Backscatter coefficients are selected automatically for each wave-
length.

40 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

In Multimode, two predefined scatter coefficients are available:

– Generic 50: 850 MM - > -66.3 dB
1300 MM -> -73.7 dB
– Generic 62.5: 850 MM -> -66.1 dB
1300 MM -> -70.3 dB

The default values are given in the paragraph “Reflectance” on page 3.

Distance Unit
Define the unit of the distances displayed: km, kfeet, miles, meter, feet, inch.

Results on trace
None the trace alone
All the trace with results and markers.
Graphics the trace with markers only.

If All or Graphics is selected, the reflectometry trace is displayed with a dotted vertical
line set on the end of launch cable (if the Launch Cable is defined in the SETUP
menu) and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber .

Event Notes

See “Table notes” on page 88

No no display of notes
Notes display of notes entered by the user
Uncertainty display of indicators of the level of confidence in the measurement
result.

Measurement

Otdr Connector Measurement

This parameter allows to choose if a measurement of the front connector must be
performed when acquisition is launched.
No In the results table, the first line corresponds to the first event
detected.
Yes In the results, the first result corresponds to the front connector
measurement, at 0 meter (estimated value).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 41

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Detection
Splice Select if a level of detection for splice must be defined.
Press Edit Number soft key and select a value:
– Enter a min level of detection, from 0.01 to 1.99 dB
– No: no splice detection
– Auto: to automatically detect splice
Reflectance Select if level of detection for reflectance must be defined.
Press Edit Number soft key and select a value:
– Enter a min level of detection, from -98 to -11 dB
– None: no reflectance detection
– All: all reflectances are detected
Ghost Choice (Yes / No / No Analysis) of whether information relating to
ghosts is to be displayed. If ghosts are displayed, the reflection icon
in the table of results appears dotted and the reflection value is
displayed in brackets on the trace, for example «(R:-50 dB)».
Fiber end Once parameter is selected, press Edit Number key to display the
numeric keypad and select the wished value:
Auto (recommended) option in which the T-BERD/MTS automatically
detects the end of a fiber.
> 3 to > 20 dB (steps of 1 dB): threshold of detection of end of fiber.
Bend (not available in Multimode) With any dual or triple-wavelength
measurement module, the user will have access to the macro bend
detection function in the test setup. Each event of the selected wave-
lengths will then be compared.
Once parameter is selected, press Edit Number key to display the numeric
keypad and select the wished value:
– None: Bend will not be detected.
– Auto: Bend will be automatically detected.
– Define by user: Enter the bend value (in dB), with direction keys or numeric
keypad.
Mux/Demux Once parameter is selected, press Edit Number key to display the
numeric keypad and select the wished value:
– Auto (recommended): option in which the T-BERD/MTS automatically
detects the mux/demux.
– > 0.50 to > 4.99 dB: threshold of detection of mux/demux.
– None: no mux/demux available.

42 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Event After Fiber End

If Yes, the events after the end of the link are detected.

Total Loss
Before evt for a given line on table, the total loss result does not include the
splice/connector loss of the corresponding line
After evt on the table, for a given line, the total loss measurement on the table
does include the splice/connector loss of the corresponding line.

Configuring the Link parameters

In the Setup page, press Link softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current screen,
press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Link).

NOTE
The softkey Copy File/Link To all is displayed when one parameter is
selected in the Link or File Setup page and when the Powermeter or Source
function is active.
It allows to apply the Link and File configuration parameters of the current
applications to all the other active Fiber Optic applications (powermeter and
source).

The information entered in the Link Description window concerns the editing and/or the
modifications of the cable and fiber parameters. When a trace is recalled without recall
of the configuration, the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature.

Link Description

Fiber Id
Select the parameter Fiber Id and enter a name for the fiber, using the edition keypad.

Fiber Number / Fiber Code

The parameter Fiber Number becomes Fiber Code if, in the Cable Structure window,
the Cable Content parameter is defined on another parameter than Fiber (Ribbon/
Fiber, Tube/Fiber or Tube/Ribbon/Fiber). See page 46.

The fiber code corresponds to the fiber number if, in the Cable Structure, the parameter
Color coding is defined on No.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 43

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

The fiber code corresponds to the fiber color if, in the Cable Structure, the parameter
Color coding is defined on Yes.

Select the parameter Fiber Number/Fiber Code and modify the parameter using the left
and right direction keys.
The fiber number can be automatically incremented/decremented at each new
file save if it has been configured in the File Setup page (see “Configuring the File
parameters” on page 48).

NOTE
The Fiber Code and the fiber number concatenated with Fiber Name are
interdependent: they are incremented or decremented at the same time.
However, the fiber number remains a number only, while the fiber code is
alphanumerical. Whether it includes a color code or not (see “Cable struc-
ture” on page 45), it may be composed of one, two or three parts (see figure
Table 22 on page 44).

Figure 22 Example of incrementation of fiber code

Fiber and cable parameters used in the example:

Fiber Name: ’Fiberx’

Cable Content: ’Tube/Fiber’
Max Tube: 12
Max Fiber: 24
Coding used for the fiber and the tube: TIA
Fiber N Fiber N+1

Color Code Yes No Yes No

<Fiber Name> Fiberx24 Fiberx24 Fiberx25 Fiberx25

<Fiber Code> Bl/Aq- 1/24 Gold/Bl 2/1

Change Fiber Nbr

Increment the fiber number is automatically incremented at each new file-save.

Decrement the fiber number is automatically decremented at each new file-save
User defined Use Edit Number softkey to enter the increment/decrement value for
fiber number.

44 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Note: to decrement the number, enter the sign «-» before the number. Example: -
1.
Min: -999 / Max: 999 / Auto: 0
No the Fiber number must not automatically modified.

Extremities are different

In some cases, it is interesting to save different information for the origin and the
extremity of the cable.

If this option is validated, it is possible, after selecting the extremity to be edited in the
Cable Structure menu, to modify the values specific to the cable (cable name, color
coding, content of the coding), for each of these extremities. See chapter “Cable struc-
ture” on page 45)

To display/modify the data specific to the fiber (name and code), it is necessary to
change direction temporarily. In the "O->E" direction, the information on the origin can
be edited, and in the "E->O" direction, that on the extremity.

Cable Id
This parameter allows to enter an identification of the cable, using the Edition menu.

Direction
The direction shows if the acquisition has been made from the origin to the extremity (A-
>B) or from the extremity to the origin (B->A). Changing direction makes it possible,
when different extremities are handled, to see the parameters of the fiber for the other
extremity.

Location A
The name of the Location A of the link may be entered here.

Location B
The name of the Location B of the link may be entered here.

Cable structure
This line opens a sub-menu, all the parameters of which can be different for each
extremity.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 45

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Figure 23 Cable structure menu

NOTE
The Cable Structure window is specific to an extremity. Each structure
keeps its own parameters by default. Modifications made to the one are not
automatically applied to the other. Thus, after the values relating to the origin
have been modified, it is normal not to find these same values entered for
the extremity.

View extremity If extremities are declared as different (see “Extremities are different”
on page 45), this parameter allows to navigate between the
Extremity and Origin parameters.
Cable Id If the extremities are different, you can specify the cable identification
for the origin and the extremity.
Color Coding Choice of whether or not to apply a color coding to the fiber. This
choice is made at link level, as all the fibers of a given link, for a
given extremity, will be coded the same way. This choice modifies
the result of the <Fiber Code> line. See “Fiber Code / Fiber Num” on
page 133.
Cable content Shows how the color code is to be used (see figure “Cable structure
menu” on page 46):
– FiberOnly the color code of the fiber is proposed (example: «Gold»)
– Ribbon/Fiber The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the ribbon,
and separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Bl/Or’)
– Tube/Fiber The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube, and
separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Br/Or’)

46 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

– Tube/Ribbon/Fiber
The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube, then by that of
the ribbon; the three being separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Br/Bl/Or’). See
“Fiber Code / Fiber Num” on page 133.
Max tube Shows the maximum number of tubes in the cable for the extremity
selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the
fiber. See “Fiber Code / Fiber Num” on page 133.
Max ribbon Shows the maximum number of ribbons in the cable for the extremity
selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the
fiber. See “Fiber Code / Fiber Num” on page 133.
Max fiber Shows the maximum number of fibers in the cable for the extremity
selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the
fiber. See “Fiber Code / Fiber Num” on page 133.

NOTE
Certain parameters are not valid in the configuration selected. Thus, if no
tube is selected in Cable Content, all the lines relating to the tube concept
will be deactivated (grayed out in the menu).

Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding, Fiber Coding

The lines Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding and Fiber Coding enable
selection of the color coding of the tube, the ribbon and the fiber from
5 different codes described below: TIA, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3
and USER 4.
Code Definition The Code Definition line opens a sub-menu, with which the different
color codes possible on the instrument can be displayed and modi-
fied (see figure “Color code definition” on page 48).
Five different codes can be managed by the T-BERD/MTS, including a standard
code.

The standard code (TIA) may be displayed but it cannot be modified.

The other codes, called by default USER1, USER2, USER3 and USER4, can be entirely
personalized.
– Edited code selects the code for display or modification.
– Code name to give a new name to the code selected, press the
key, which calls up the edit menu.
– View codes displays the color codes 1 to 12, 13 to 24 or 25 to 36.
– Code 1...23 Use the arrow to modify the codes if necessary.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 47

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Figure 24 Color code definition

Project Information

Technician Id
Use the arrow to enter the name of the operator carrying out the measurement.

Job Id
Use the arrow to enter a description of the measurement to be performed.

Comment
In contrast to the other data in this menu, the comment is specific to a fiber. This line is
thus used to enter a new comment and not to display it. The comment appears at the
top of the screen, with the other parameters of the fiber.
This comment will remain available for the next acquisition, unless it is deleted. It is also
saved when a trace is saved with a comment.

Configuring the File parameters

The File storage parameters must be also configured, in order to define how the results
traces will be saved onto the T-BERD/MTS.

In the Setup page, press Set Report softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Set
Report).

48 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

NOTE
The softkey Copy File/Link To all is displayed when one parameter is
selected in the Link or File Setup page and when the Powermeter or Source
function is active.
It allows to apply the Link and File configuration parameters of the current
applications to all the other active Fiber Optic applications (powermeter, and
source).

Directory configuration

Dir. Naming
Click on Current Directory menu key to select the directory currently selected in the
explorer for files saving

or

Use the arrow to enter the directory name and path:

In the edition keypad, select the pre-defined parameters available or, press abc
key to enter a name manually for the directory. Then, press Enter to validate.
Example: disk/OTDR/Test

Figure 25 Directory - Edition keypad

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 49

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

or
Press Default Filename to apply the name by default to the file:
(hard)disk/[Cable_Id]

Press Clear and validate (Enter key) in order to define the [Current directory]
selected as directory for saving measurements.

Dir
This parameter cannot be configured, and display the directory selected by default into
which the file(s) will be saved.

Result storage

Filenaming
Select Filenaming parameter and press the right arrow key to modify the name of the
file for the result trace.
In the edition keypad, select the pre-defined parameters available or, press abc
key to enter a name manually for the file. Then, press Enter to validate.

Figure 26 Filenaming - Edition keypad

or
Press Default Filename to apply the name by default to the file:

50 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Fiber[Cable_Id][Fiber_Num]_[Lambda]_[Direction][Pulse]

The name of the file is displayed in grey under Filenaming parameter

File Content
In this parameter, select the file content for traces saving:
One Trace in case of traces in overlay, each trace is saved in a distinct file (.sor
extension).
All Traces in case of traces in overlay, all traces are saved in one single file
(.msor extension).
One and All Traces
this option combines the two previous ones: in case of traces in
overlay, each trace is saved in a distinct file and all traces are saved
in one single file.

NOTE
This parameter is not available with RDZ application (see “Reduced Dead
Zone OTDR application” on page 167).

Auto Store
Select Yes to store automatically the trace or traces resulting from each acquisition
according to the filenaming rules.

Report Configuration

A report can be generated from the OTDR results page at the same time as the trace
saving (see “Saving the trace(s) and generating a report” on page 100).

The report configuration is performed form the File Setup page

Report As
Select the report format to be generated: Txt / Pdf or All (pdf + txt format).

Select No if no report must be generated.

Report Layout
This parameter allows to define the report page setting:
Standard in multi-traces display, one report page is generated for each trace.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 51

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Consolidated in multi-traces display, one report page is generated for all traces

Report naming
Select Report naming parameter and press the right arrow key to modify the name of
the report file for the result trace.

In the edition keypad, enter a name manually for the file and press Enter to validate.

Include Microscope Image

In the report page, an image of the scope test result can be displayed on the upper part
of the report. Select Yes to include the scope test result image into the report.

NOTE
This parameter is not available if the report format selected is a Txt file.

Configuration in Test Auto mode

The Test Auto key imposes the parameters for acquisition, measurement and display
of results defined as default settings in factory.

ACQUISITION Acquisition Laser All

Acquisition Mode Auto
Time Auto
OTDR Connector Test Yes & Cont
Launch Cable No
Additional Pulses Setup Short Pulse No
ALARMS Alarms Alarm Level None
ANALYSIS Parameters Section Attenuation dB/km
Section Length Yes
Index of Refraction G652 G657
Scatter Coefficient Auto
Results on trace Graphics
Event Notes No
Measurement OTDR Connector Meas No
Splice Auto

52 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

ACQUISITION Acquisition Laser All

Reflectance All
Ghost No
Fiber End Auto
Bend Auto
Event After Fiber End No
Total Loss Before evt.
LINK Link Description Change Fiber Nr Increment
REPORT Dir. Naming [Current Dir.]
File configuration Filenaming Auto filenaming
Fiber[Cable_Id][Fiber_Num]_[Lambda]_[Direction]
Auto Store Yes

Saving OTDR configuration in a file

Once File and Measurement parameters have been configured, those parameters can
be kept in memory and saved in a configuration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled in two cases:

• in order to be applied when acquisition in Smart Test mode is performed.
• in order to be recalled for future acquisition in Expert OTDR

To save parameters in a configuration file:

1 If necessary, press SETUP to return to Setup page.
2 Select one parameter in one of the setup page (acquisition, link..)
3 Press Save Config. menu key
4 Enter a name for the configuration file using the edition keypad (max 20 charac-
ters).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 53

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

Figure 27 Save Configuration file - Edition keypad

Directory into
which file is saved

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the directory config, into the disk.

5 Press Enter to validate

A sound is emitted to indicate the file is saved.

The configuration file is saved with the extension ".fo_cfg" (icon ) and can be
recalled at any time from the Explorer page.

This configuration file can be selected in Smart Test (see “Selecting the configuration
file” on page 29) or loaded for Expert OTDR.

Loading an existing OTDR configuration file

To load a configuration file previously created or available in the T-BERD/MTS and apply
parameters to new OTDR Expert tests:

From the File Explorer page

1 Press FILE hard key

2 Select the configuration file desired
3 Press Load > Load Config.

54 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Configuring the reflectometry test

• Press SETUP hard key to display the OTDR acquisition parameters saved in the
selected configuration file.

You can modify some acquisition or file storage parameters, and save them in a new
configuration file (see “Saving OTDR configuration in a file” on page 53).

From the Setup page

1 Select one header in either Setup page (Acquisition, Link, File...)

2 Press Load Config. menu key.
The file Explorer page displays
3 Select the configuration file desired
4 Press Load Config. to load the configuration file for acquisition in OTDR Expert
mode.
A sound is emitted to confirm the loading.
The Setup screen is displayed again.

NOTE
Some configuration files are available into the equipment, in disk/config.

Figure 28 Loading a configuration file

The main parameters available in the selected configuration file are
displayed in the File signature. Configuration file will
be used for Expert
OTDR acquisition only

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 55

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator

Traffic Detection and connection quality indicator

Traffic Detection
Traffic on the fiber under test is automatically detected and reported.
1 Press the START/STOP key to begin the measurement.
A message indicates there is traffic on the fiber and asks you if you wish to
continue or not:
• If you click on NO, the measurement is not launched.
• If you click on YES, the measurement is performed, despite the traffic.

NOTE
If the measurement is validated despite the traffic (key YES), the next mea-
surement will be automatically performed, even if traffic is still detected on
fiber.
If the measurement is cancelled (key NO), and the START/STOP pushed
another time, the box asking if you wish to continue or not is displayed.

The functioning of Traffic Detection is then indicated in the scaled down representation
of trace, on the upper left part of screen .

Connection Quality indicator

An indicator of the state of the connection (Good / Bad) is given at the beginning of an
acquisition, whatever is the acquisition mode selected.

The connection quality indicator gives the following information:

Table 3 Quality of connection

State Connection
Good The connection is OK

56 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

Table 3 Quality of connection

Possible causes of a bad result:

- There are several connectors close to the external connector of the T-BERD/
MTS.
Bad - One of the connectors is dirty or badly connected. Replace the launch cable,
make the connection again properly or clean the connector of the OTDR or of
the jumper.
- No fiber is connected.

If the state of the connection is bad, it is still possible to carry out a measurement, but
the results will not be very reliable.

NOTE
If the connection is bad, check and clean the connector / jumpers (see
“Cleaning the universal connector” on page 20).

Battery saver

When running on battery, if no acquisition has been performed for two minutes, the
power supply of the module is cut off to save the battery.

Performing OTDR acquisitions

Once the configuration for acquisition and file storage has been defined, the instrument
is ready to launch an OTDR measurement.

Acquisition in Real Time mode

Principle of Real Time mode

Acquisition in real time must not be used if a precise measurement is required because
of the high noise level, but it is sufficient for rapid optimization of a connection and for
observing a fiber in process of utilization.

Performing an acquisition in Real Time mode

To carry out an acquisition in real time, after selection of the requisite acquisition param-
eters (see “Configuring the Acquisition parameters” on page 32):

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 57

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

• Hold the START key down for about three seconds, to launch the acquisition in
real time, either in Smart Test or Expert OTDR mode, whatever is the acquisition
mode selected.
or
If the Time parameter is defined with Real Time in Setup page in Expert OTDR
mode, press START/STOP hard key.
or
In the Setup page of the Smart Test mode, press Real Time key (see
Figure 16 on page 29).
The red Testing indicator will go on to show that real time acquisition is in prog-
ress. The trace acquired is displayed in real time.
An indicator of the state of the connection (Good/Bad) is displayed below the
trace.

NOTE
If the connection is bad, check and clean the connector / jumpers.

Once START/STOP key is pressed, the acquisition in real time is launched.

Figure 29 Example of acquisition in real time

During an acquisition in real time, several actions can be made on results in progress:
see “Actions on trace during acquisition” on page 63.

58 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

NOTE
During acquisition, the traffic on fiber is automatically detected (see “Traffic
Detection” on page 56)

Stopping the real time acquisition

To stop an acquisition in real time mode, press the START/STOP key at any time.

Performing a measurement with Smart Test

The acquisition is carried out with the parameters saved in the Configuration file. It may
be stopped at any time using the START/STOP key.

At the end of test, the results page displays.

1 From the Setup page, press Start Acquisition key to launch
measurement (see Figure 17 on page 30).
The red Testing indicator goes on to show that the T-BERD/MTS is in process of
acquisition and the screen displays the trace in process of acquisition.
2 The quality of the connection is displayed for a few
seconds (see Table 3 on page 56)
3 Then, a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time.

Figure 30 Acquisition in progress in Smart Test

Elapsed Number of Elapsed Total acquisition

acquisition averages time time
time calculated

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 59

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

At the end of the acquisition, a beep is emitted, and the measurements are displayed in
SLM view,

NOTE
During acquisition, the traffic on fiber is automatically detected (see “Traffic
Detection” on page 56)

Performing an acquisition with Expert OTDR

In this mode, the T-BERD/MTS carries out a number of averagings defined as a function
of the maximum acquisition time specified in the Acquisition menu, and then terminates
the acquisition.

The acquisition is carried out with the parameters previously selected in the Acquisition
menu. It may be stopped at any time using the START/STOP key.
1 Press the START/STOP key to start the acquisition.
The red indicator goes on to show that the T-BERD/MTS is in process of acquisi-
tion and the screen displays the trace in process of acquisition.
2 The quality of the connection is displayed for a few
seconds (see Table 3 on page 56)
3 Then, a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time.

60 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

Figure 31 Acquisition in progress with Expert OTDR

Elapsed Number of averages Elapsed Total acquisition

acquisition time calculated time time

At the end of the acquisition, a beep is emitted, the trace is displayed and an automatic
measurement is started.

NOTE
During acquisition, the traffic on fiber is automatically detected (see “Traffic
Detection” on page 56).

NOTE
To stop the acquisition, the START/STOP key may be pressed at any time.
Then an automatic measurement is carried out, but some events cannot be
detected (a manual measurement must then be made).

Performing an acquisition from Results page

Once the results page is displayed, you can perform a new acquisition modifying the
main acquisition parameters.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 61

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

CAUTION
Before launching a new OTDR acquisition, make sure the trace(s) displayed
have been previously saved if necessary, as the new acquisition will auto-
matically delete the displayed results.

On Results page,in Expert OTDR mode, press the softkey Quick Setup: the
acquisition parameters to be modified are displayed under the results trace.

Figure 32 Results page and Quick Setup menu (Expert OTDR)

– Modify the acquisition parameters wished in the displayed menu: Laser /

Acquisition / Range / Pulse / Time
See page 33 and page 34.
1 Once configured, launch the new OTDR test pressing the START/STOP hard key.

Press again Quick Setup menu key to hide the menu under the trace.

Multi-wavelength acquisition
If the module possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisitions on all the
wavelengths:
1 In the SETUP menu, on the Laser line, choose several lasers or select All.
2 Start the acquisition by pressing the START/STOP button.

62 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

3 Once the acquisition for the first wavelength is finished, the acquisition for the
following wavelength starts automatically.
or
To stop manually the acquisition for current wavelength, click on Stop Wave-
length. This will allow to automatically start the measurement for the following
wavelength.

The different traces appear in the same window and can be managed as traces in
overlay (see “Display of traces in overlay” on page 77).

Actions on trace during acquisition

During an acquisition, several actions are available on results in progress.

Positioning Cursors A and B

1 Select Cursor A or Cursor B and:

– Set both cursors A & B to control distance between two points.
– Set one cursor A or B to get the distance from one point.
– Set one cursor A or B to zoom on this cursor

Zooming on trace

1 Select Zoom function:

– use the menu key in Smart Test
– use the menu key in Expert OTDR
2 Use touchscreen or validation key to zoom in and zoom out on trace (see “Zoom
function” on page 75)

Shifting the trace (Expert OTDR and Real Time only)

In Expert OTDR and Real time mode only, the trace can be shifted vertically or horizon-
tally during the acquisition:
1 Select Shift function on menu key
2 Use touchscreen or direction keys to shift horizontally or vertically the trace (see
“Shift function (Expert OTDR only)” on page 77)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 63

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Performing OTDR acquisitions

Displaying Trace or SmartLink page

1 Use the menu key Trace/SmartLink to display either:

• the acquisition trace in progress and the bar graph of time
• the SmartLink page with exclusively the bar graph of time.

In the case of measurement on several wavelengths, once a measurement is completed

for one wavelength:
• the Trace function allows to display the trace and results table for this wave-
length: once Trace is selected, press validation key to pass from Trace +
results table on 1 line to Trace + results table on 4 lines, and vice-versa,
• the SmartLink function allows to display a graphical view of results.

Modifying acquisition parameters (in Real Time mode only)

You can modify the acquisition parameters without returning to the SETUP menu.
1 Press the Acquisition Param key
2 Use displayed keys to scroll through the possible values of the various acquisition
parameters.

Figure 33 Example of acquisition in Real Time

64 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving results for Smart Test acquisitions

Zooming on the fiber end (in Real Time mode only)

During a real time acquisition, you can reach the end of the fiber under test at any time:
1 Press Zoom to End menu key.
The display automatically reaches the end of the fiber under test.
The menu key Zoom to End becomes Zoom to Start.

Press Zoom to Start to display the start of the fiber under test.

Performing measurements during acquisition (Real Time

mode only)

The real time mode allows to make Loss, ORL or Reflectance measurement using the
A & B cursors and the key Loss / ORL / Reflect.:
1 Position A & B cursors on the trace
2 Click as many times as necessary on key to get the measurement
between A & B cursors.

Figure 34 Example of loss measurement

Saving results for Smart Test acquisitions

Once the acquisition is completed, the results trace displays, in Smart Link view
1 Press Save menu key to save the results in a file.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 65

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving results for Smart Test acquisitions

The Recording Information page displays

Figure 35 Save results in Smart Test mode

2 Click on one parameter configuration (white background) to modify it using the

edition or numeric keypad displayed:
– Fiber Id: click on the fiber name currently defined to display the edition
keypad and enter a new fiber name.
– Fiber Number; click on the fiber number currently defined to display the
numeric keypad and enter a new fiber number.
– Location A / Location B: click on the location name currently defined to
display the edition keypad and enter a new name.
– Job Id: click on the Job description currently defined to display the edition
keypad and enter a new description.

NOTE
The file is saved automatically by default with the Job Id parameter.
Example: if the Job Id is defined with Test Fiber 1, the otdr filename will be
Test Fiber 1.sor.

66 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

3 Once the recording information are defined as wished, select the saving mode
wished:
– Click on FILE ONLY to save exclusively the results trace to the
.sor format
– Click on FILE + PDF to save the results trace in a .sor file and to
generate a pdf report of the results.
Click on BACK to return to results trace without saving the results.

Results display
The traces acquired or recalled from a memory are displayed on the Results page.
According to the mode of acquisition (Expert OTDR or Smart Test), the results page
offers similar functions, but also different functions.

At the end of the acquisition, the Smart Link view is displayed in Smart Test mode,
whereas the Trace View is displayed in Expert OTDR mode.

Click on the softkey Trace/SmartLink to modify the diplay.

Trace Display

Figure 36 Example of results trace with Expert OTDR

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 67

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

• On the upper right side, the alarm icon is displayed (if some alarm thresholds are
defined in the pre loaded configuration file or in the Setup screen in Expert OTDR
mode).

Table 4 Alarms display

Indicates that at least one result exceeds the alarm thresholds

Fail defined in the configuration file used for acquisition
Results are displayed in red in table.
Results for minor alarm exceed the thresholds defined in Warning
Warning mode.
Results are displayed in yellow in the table.
Indicates that all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in
Valid red or yellow).
Results are displayed in green in the table.

Common functions

Display of events on the trace

Each event detected is referenced under the trace by a serial number. The reflectometry
trace is displayed with a dotted vertical line set on the start of launch cable (if the
Launch Cable End parameter is defined in the SETUP menu)

The trace can also be displayed with a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber .
The icon is displayed on trace if the Receive Cable Start parameter has been
defined in the Setup menu.

The results of the measurements of attenuation, reflectance and slope can be marked
on the trace.

The reflectance of a ghost event is displayed in brackets on the trace.

Criteria for display of an event

An event will be displayed if its attenuation or its reflectance exceeds the corresponding
threshold selected in the SETUP menu (see “Configuring the test in Expert OTDR” on
page 31). Attenuation and reflectance results for an event will be displayed if they can
be calculated

68 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

The following table gives some examples of detection of events for different threshold
values.

The T-BERD/MTS displays a value if the

Value of the thresholds attenuation or the reflectance has one of the
E.g. following values

Attenuat. Reflect.
Attenuation Reflectance
(dB) (dB)

1 0.05 - 60 > 0.05 dB > - 60 dB1

2 1 - 15 > 1 dB >- 15 dB2
3 6 --- > 6 dB

1. Example: a value will be displayed at -43 dB.

2. Example: a value will be displayed at -14 dB but not at -20 dB.

The reflectance of an event is always measured except when the event causes a satu-
rated Fresnel peak or if it is drowned out by noise. In this case, the T-BERD/MTS
displays > to show that the actual reflectance exceeds the value displayed.

Results table
Under the trace is displayed the results table with all the events detected during acqui-
sition.

Smart Test Mode

In Smart Test,mode, the results table is always displayed under the trace, in Trace
dispay: see Figure 37 on page 70

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 69

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Expert OTDR Mode

Figure 37 Trace + Table results in Smart Test

In Expert OTDR mode, once Trace is selected, press validation key to pass from
Trace + results table on 1 line to Trace + results table on 8 lines, and vice-versa

The table with one line displayed under the trace gives the type and characteristics of
the event nearest to the cursor.

The 8 lines table gives the type and the characteristics of all the events detected during
the measurement: the 8 first lines displayed correspond to the 8 first events nearest to
the cursor. The line corresponding to the event nearest to the cursor is highlighted. This
highlighting moves if the cursor is moved.

70 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Figure 38 Example of trace and results table in Expert OTDR

At the top of the table, a line shows the generic parameters of the fiber: numbers of
events present, total ORL of the link and, in Expert OTDR mode, reference trace icon (if
trace is the reference trace - see “Reference Trace function” on page 99).

Each event is referenced under the trace by a number which is repeated in the first
column of the table. The table then shows:
• icon symbolizing the type of the event:

Receive cable Start

Launch cable End: the attenuation and distances are measured on the basis of
the corresponding marker.

Non-reflective attenuation (e.g. splice).

Splitter.

Reflective event. (e.g. connector)

Ghost reflection.

Slope of the fiber (when no fault follows the slope).

End of fiber

OTDR connector

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 71

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Event marker when a measurement cannot be carried out. If the event to be

added is too close to an existing event, the icon appears on the trace and the
table, but no measurement is carried out: to obtain the results for this event, a
manual measurement is necessary.

Merged Connectors Loss

– Total group loss = loss on last connector
– Loss connector N-1 = 0 dB)

The event underlined in yellow is the one the nearest of the cursor set on trace. To visu-
alize an event, click on this event on the table to set the cursor on it onto the trace.

Detailed description of an event

Click on one event icon in the results table to display the event type and the alarm
threshold defined for this event (if Alarms have been defined in the Setup page).

If the value of the event selected exceeds the defined threshold, then the possible
causes for this alarm are described in the window:

Figure 39 Event description

Click

The following columns are then displayed next to each event icon:

72 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

The distance of the event from the beginning of the fiber, in

Distance
meters (or miles)
Loss The attenuation due to the event, in dB
Reflect. The reflectance of the event, in dB
Slope The slope before the event, in dB/km (or dB/kft) if it can be
(Expert OTDR only) measured
Section The length of the section = the distance between the marker of
(Expert OTDR only) the event and the previous marker.
T. Loss The total attenuation of the fiber (total loss), in dB

Cursors
The cursors A and B are represented by vertical lines of different colors:
• in a solid line if the cursor is selected.
• in a dotted line if the cursor is not selected.

Positioning the cursor

1 Press the key to active the cursor.

2 Touch the screen on the required location on trace where the active cursor must
be set.
You can also use the direction keys and to move the selected cursor along
the trace

Above the trace is shown the 2-points loss measurement between the two cursors,
together with the distance between the two cursors.

The cursors data are displayed exclusively if the Cursor menu key is active.
If another key is active, the display shows help tooltips, different according
to the selected function.

When a selected cursor touches the right or left-hand edge of the screen, the trace starts
to scroll horizontally to maintain display of this cursor.

If an unselected cursor has been moved off-screen by a zoom, it can be brought back
on to the screen by selecting it and then pressing one of the direction keys or . It
will then appear on whichever edge of the screen is closest to its position.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 73

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

When the cursor function is selected, the keys and move the trace vertically.

Cursors information

The information related to cursors are displayed exclusively when the Cursor function is
selected (menu key selected).

Above the trace are shown the co-ordinates of the points of intersection of the cursors
A and B with the trace, together with the distance between the two points.

Figure 40 Cursors information

The Cursor function is

not selected

The Cursor function is

selected

NOTE
The cursors information are displayed in the report when the Cursor function
is selected (active key). If the cursors values must not be displayed in the
report, select another softkey than the Cursor one before performing the
report (softkey Trace or Zoom for example).

Cursor and Zoom

If the Cursor key is selected, press the validation button ( or ENTER) to perform an
automatic zoom until the fiber end or until the end of the range (Range parameter
defined in the configuration screen).

This will modify the cursors position, which will be positioned automatically at the begin-
ning and at the end of the link (taking into account the possible launch cables).

74 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

If another key than the key Cursor A / Cursor B is activated when the validation key is
pressed (Trace or Zoom), the cursors’ position is unchanged.

Cursor function not selected

When Cursor menu key is not selected, the upper banner displays information, different
according to the menu key selected:
• If the Trace/Summary key is selected, with Trace function valid, the upper
banner indicates that to change the displayed trace, you can click on the banner
or on the right arrow key
• If the Zoom/Shift key is selected, and the Zoom function valid, the upper banner
indicates that to get an automatic or full zoom, you must press ENTER key.

Zoom function
The Zoom function is used to analyze part of the trace in greater detail. The zoom is
centred on the active cursor.

The position of the section of trace displayed with respect to the complete trace is repre-
sented by a red rectangle on the mini-trace at the top left-hand corner of the screen.

Defining a zoom on the trace using the touchscreen or

screen deported on PC

1 Press Zoom or Zoom/Shift softkey to activate the zoom function

– menu key in Smart Test

– menu key in Expert OTDR

2 Press once in one location on the screen, which will represent the upper left
corner of the zoomed area.
The icon is displayed on the screen.
3 Press another time on the location which will represent the lower right corner of
the zoom.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 75

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Figure 41 Zoom on trace using touchscreen

First
Zoomed area

Second press

Defining a zoom level on the trace using direction keys

1 Select Cursor A or B and center it on the zone to be examined

2 Press Zoom softkey in Smart Test or select the Zoom function on key Zoom/
Shift on Expert OTDR.
3 Use the or key to increase or reduce the zoom factor, keeping the selected
cursor centered on screen.

Swapping from an automatic zoom to full trace and vice-

versa

The automatic zoom allows to get an optimized display of the trace.

To apply an automatic or entire zoom on the trace:

1 Press Zoom softkey in Smart Test or select the Zoom function on key Zoom/
Shift in Expert OTDR.
2 Press validation key to apply an auto zoom on trace.
Press again validation key to display the trace in full screen.

Specific functions of the zoom with a touchscreen

With the touchscreen, once the Zoom function is selected, you can:
• maintain your finger pressed on screen and shift the traces horizontally or verti-
cally
• position your finger on a cursor and move it on trace maintaining your finger
pressed and moving it toward left or right

76 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

• once a zoom is performed, double click on the zoomed zone to undo the zoom

Zooming on the different events in succession

1 Zoom on one of the events detected as shown above.

2 On the Trace/Summary key, select the Trace function.
3 Use the and keys to move the zoom on to the successive events.

Shift function (Expert OTDR only)

The Shift function is used to displace the displayed section of the trace by pressing the
direction keys or directly clicking on the touchscreen.

The horizontal shift is performed maintaining the point of intersection between the trace
and the selected cursor at the same level, scrolling the trace horizontally while following
it vertically, so that it never goes off the screen.

To use this function:

1 Select the zoom factor as described above.
2 Choose cursor A and cursor B position.
3 On the Zoom/Shift key, select Shift.
4 Displace trace manually on touchscreen toward left/right or upward/backward.
or
Use the direction keys to shift the trace in the desired direction

Display of traces in overlay

Whether in Expert OTDR or Smart Test mode, up to 8 traces can be displayed in overlay.
Those traces are either
• results from the acquisition
• loaded from the Explorer page
• open from the Overlay sub-menu, in Expert OTDR mode exclusively.

In overlay mode, the traces are shown in different colors (the active trace is green).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 77

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Figure 42 Traces in overlay

Selecting one trace from overlaid traces

To make actions on a trace in overlay (move on events, set a cursor...), it must first be
swapped with the active trace. To do this:
1 Press the Trace key
2 Press the direction keys and , as many times as necessary, traces
until the active trace is displayed in green. numbers

or
Click on the trace numbers in the upper right side of the result page
until the trace desired is selected.
or
Click on the upper part of the screen, in Trace information zone to scroll the
traces.

NOTE
Actions relative to traces (move cursors, events...) are exclusively done on
the active trace (in green), not on the other ones.

78 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Traces display in double acquisition mode

When a double acquisition has been performed, i.e. a short acquisition preceding a stan-
dard one (see page 33), two traces are displayed in the same window.

Figure 43 Traces display in double acquisition mode

Standard acquisition
(in green)

Short acquisition
(in blue)

The short trace is the one resulting from the short acquisition and stops while the stan-
dard one continues until the end of measurement.

SmartLink View
1 Click on this menu key Trace/SmartLink to select SmartLink.
A screen as the following one is displayed:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 79

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Figure 44 SmartLink function

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

The screen is divided into three zones:

• Zone 1: Graphical representation of the link, with icons symbolizing the different
events detected.

Receive Cable

End Cable

Splice

Splitter

Mux / Demux

Connector

Ghost

ORL

Bend

Slope

End connector

80 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Front OTDR connector

Merged connectors
• Zone 2: Link Table, which gives a summary of results for each wavelength, with
results within/without thresholds in green/red (according to Alarm thresholds
defined in the setup screen).
• Zone 3: Alarms table (if any)

Show the detailed information of one event

The information concerning the event, its type and the alarm thresholds defined for this
event, can be displayed from the SmartLink screen.
1 Select the event for which information must be displayed, on the graphic using
the touchscreen or direction keys.
The event is highlighted in yellow once selected.
2 Click on the Event Diagnosis menu key.
A small window displays. It describes:
– the event type
– the value above which it is on defect
– the possible causes of the alarm

Figure 45 Event Diagnosis

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 81

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Event View
1 Click on Event View menu key to display a detailed description of one event
detected on trace.
2 Select the event to be described on the graphic (underlined in yellow).
The corresponding event description is displayed on the Zone 3, with a recall of
alarm threshold for this event:

Figure 46 SmartLink: Event View

3 Click on View Trace to display the selected event in the results table and zoomed
on trace.

NOTE
The event is framed in red if it is above the alarm thresholds defined in the
setup menu.
It is framed in green if it lies within the thresholds.
It is framed in purple if no alarm has been defined in the Setup menu

Changing the type of an event

Once the Event View is displayed, the type of event can be modified:
1 Select the event to be modified (framed in yellow)

82 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

2 Press Event Code menu key

3 Click on the event type to be applied to the selected event:

Figure 47 Event Code

Click on one event code to

modify the selected event

4 Click on Exit to return to Event View.

5 Click back on Event View menu key to return to Summary screen
or
Click on Trace View menu key to return to trace (+ table) screen.

NOTE
The event modification is automatically applied on trace and in the results
table.

Splitter sub-menus
The Splitter icon is different according to the menu key pressed in the Splitter sub-
menus.

Example:

If the menu key is pressed, the icon is displayed

If the menu key is pressed, the icon is displayed.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 83

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Results display

Moreover, the icon and splitter configuration is different according to the number of
«clicks» on one menu key.

Example with the menu key :

• Click once: the icon is
• Click twice: the icon is
• Click three times: the icon is
• Click four times: the icon is

Click a fifth time to reset the event by default.

Results Table (Smart Test Mode)

In Smart Test mode, the Smart Link view allows to display exclusively the results table
on screen.
1 Click on Results Table menu key.

Figure 48 Results Table in Smart Test mode

Press again the Results Table menu key to return to the Smart Link view.

84 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Several actions on trace displayed can be performed in Expert OTDR mode only.

Automatic measurement and detection

If the instrument does not detect all the expected events, additional manual measure-
ments can be carried out.

To delete all the markers, press the Advanced key, then select Modify Meas. > Delete.

The following procedure is recommended:

1 By default, the instrument locates the events and proceeds to the measurements.
2 Addition of events (see “Addition of events” on page 85) in the cases of splices
showing low attenuation and of close events. The T-BERD/MTS then automati-
cally measures the slope before and after the markers selected and measures
the attenuation of the splice.
3 Addition of manual measurements if necessary (for deeper analysis). The T-
BERD/MTS performs the measurements requested by the user.

To start an automatic measurement while a measurement is already in progress:

1 Press the Advanced key.
2 Press the Modify Meas. menu key
3 Select Delete and press validation key .
4 Select Auto Meas. and press validation key .

Addition of events
You can also manually place markers in addition to those positioned automatically
during automatic measurement.

Representation of the events

The events are represented by the symbol : if they are set during a measurement.

The events are represented by the symbol if they are set manually in Advanced
mode.

To add markers of events:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 85

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

1 Select a cursor (A or B).

2 Use the direction keys or touchscreen to move the cursor to the place where you
want to position a marker.
3 Press the keys: Advanced > Set Event.
4 An event marker is displayed at the position of the cursor and a measurement
is carried out on the event.
Measurement of slope before the marker starts just after the previous event (or at
the end of the dead zone at the beginning of the fiber); measurement of slope
after the marker stops just before the next marker or at the end of the fiber.

Hints on the positioning of events

• Do not add markers (with the Set Event key) after a manual measurement, as all
the results will be recalculated automatically by the instrument.
• If two markers are too close together, they will appear on the trace and the table
but no measurement will be carried out on the second marker: to obtain results
for this marker, a manual measurement is necessary.
• If you press the Set Event key when the cursor is very close to a marker, the
latter will be deleted.

Deleting events

To delete an event, move the cursor onto the event and press the Set Event key. The
event selected will be deleted and a complete measurement, without this event, is
carried out.

Deletion of events can cause incorrect measurement results.

Relative measurement
Relative measurements, using the 2 point method, can be carried out by means of the
Event function in coordination with the two cursors. For example, you can analyze the
total loss on a link with launch cable:
1 Place one of the cursors at the end of the launch cable.
2 Select the other cursor.
3 Use the Set Event function. The measurements displayed give the actual
distance from the start of the link and the attenuation of the link plus the attenua-
tion of the connection.

86 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Modifying types of events

The types of events are detected automatically as a function of their optical signature.
This can sometimes lead the system astray, if reflection from a connector is too strong
(end of fiber?), if a splice has a very low insertion loss (slope?), etc. Similarly, some types
of events cannot be recognized automatically from their signatures (for example,
couplers, multiplexers, etc.). For this reason, it is advantageous in some cases to be
able to change the type of events.

To do this:
1 In the Advanced menu, press Modify Meas. key, then select Manual Meas.
2 Select the Event Code button.

Figure 49 Buttons used to modify types of events

New, more specific event types are then proposed:

Splice
Connector
Splitter/Coupler
Ghost
Fiber End
3 Position the cursor on the line for which modification of event type is desired.
4 Click on the button corresponding to the required type of event.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 87

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Splitter sub-menus
The Splitter icon is different according to the menu key pressed in the Splitter sub-
menus.

Example:

If the menu key is pressed, the icon is displayed

If the menu key is pressed, the icon is displayed.

Moreover, the icon and splitter configuration is different according to the number of
«clicks» on one menu key.

Example with the menu key :

• Click once: the icon is
• Click twice: the icon is
• Click three times: the icon is
• Click four times: the icon is

Click a fifth time to reset the event by default.

Table notes
With each event, it is possible to associate:
• a note of no more than 40 characters, entered by the user
• an indicator of uncertainty qualifying the result displayed.

NOTE
This information appears in the table, under the line relating to the event, if it
has been validated in the SETUP menu on the Event Notes line.

Notes

For each wavelength, a maximum of 16 notes is possible.

For each note, 40 characters can be entered.

88 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

NOTE
Each note is associated with an event. Consequently, if the event is deleted,
the note will be deleted too.

To enter a note:
1 In the menu: Setup > Analysis > Event Notes, the Notes option must be
selected
2 On the Results page, in the table, select the event
3 Press Advanced
4 Press Notes
5 Enter the text of the note in the edit menu that appears
6 Press Enter and then Exit.

The notes are displayed under the selected event, in the results table.

Uncertainty of results

In the table of results, the user can display indicators to evaluate the uncertainty of the
result. This function must be validated in the SETUP menu, on the Notes Evt. line.

The following cases are possible:

Indicators concerning attenuation measurements

Result of a manual measurement between the reference and the cursor
2c manual
using the 2-cursors method.
5c manual Result of a manual measurement using the 5-cursors method.

The attenuation displayed is a global result for Fresnel reflections which are
Global
not sufficiently separated.
As several events are too close together, only the attenuation of the last one
Close evts
is displayed.
Indicators concerning measurements of slope
Measurement of slope by the least square approximation method without
Few pts
using many points of acquisition.
2 points Measurement of slope by the 2-point method.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 89

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

NOTE
The SETUP menu > Analysis > Event Notes line enables display of notes, of
uncertainties or of neither the one nor the other. Notes cannot be displayed
at the same time as uncertainties.

Manual measurements
As soon as you have made an acquisition, with or without automatic measurement, you
can make manual measurements on any event on the trace by means of the cursors A
and B, in association with the functions of slope, detection of splice and calculation of
ORL.

The manual measurements are accessible in the Results page, after pressing the keys:
Advanced, then Manual Mea..

Measurements of slope
To make a manual measurement of slope, press the RESULTS button to call up the trace
and then:
1 Place the cursor A at the beginning of the section of the trace where the slope is
to be measured.
2 Place the cursor B at the end of this section.
3 Press the Advanced key, then the Manual Meas. key, then select Slope.
4 Press validation key ( or ENTER) : the slope of the specified trace section is
displayed.

90 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Figure 50 Manual Measurement results

Slope

Result of slope measurement

The result is displayed on the screen between the two slope indicators [ and ].

The measurement results are also available in the table:

1 Press Exit to return to the initial results page.
2 Select Trace using Trace/Summary soft key
3 Press validation key to display results table under the trace.
– "Distance" shows the distance between the beginning of the trace and the end
of the slope;
– "Section" shows the distance between the previous event (which may also be
the beginning of the link) and the end of the slope. Thus this section value is not
equivalent to the distance between the two slope indicators [ and ].
– "Slope" shows the slope value in dB/km

If no result is displayed in the table, this means that the distance between the cursors A
and B is too small.

Deleting a slope measurement

To delete a particular slope measurement result:

1 Superimpose the cursors A and B on the slope concerned

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 91

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

2 Select Slope (after, if necessary, pressing Advanced > Modify Meas. > Manual
Meas.).
3 Press validation key : the slope of the specified trace section is deleted.

Measurement of ORL
It is possible to carry out an ORL measurement on a part of the fiber.

Follow the following procedure to measure a part of the fiber:

1 Position the cursors A and B to delimit the section that you wish to measure.
2 Press the Advanced > Modify Meas. > Manual Meas., then select ORL.
3 Press validation key .
The ORL is measured for the section of trace defined.

Figure 51 Result of ORL measurement

ORL on a saturated trace

If saturation occurs during an ORL measurement, the result is given with the sign <. This
means that the actual ORL value is less than the value displayed.

92 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Measurement of Reflectance
It is possible to carry out a reflectance measurement of a Fresnel for a reflective event.

Follow the following procedure to measure the reflectance:

1 Position the cursor A at the base of the peak
2 Position the cursor B at the top of the peak of the required Fresnel, or after the
peak to calculate automatically the maximum reflectance.
3 Press the Advanced > Modify Meas. > Manual Meas., then select Reflec..
4 Press validation key .

The Reflectance value is defined in dB, and displayed in the trace in purple.

Figure 52 Reflectance measurement

Splice measurements
There are two methods of carrying out manual measurements of splices on the trace:
the two-cursor method and the five-cursor method.

The five-cursor method is the more accurate, as it takes into account the difference of
level between the slope before the splice and the slope after the splice. This method
should be used whenever possible.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 93

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

If very close events have created a dead zone preventing the measurement of slope by
the five-cursor method, it is possible to use the two-cursor method. This considers the
difference in level between the cursors.

Before performing one of these measurements, define in the Setup menu the splice
detection threshold.

Two points method

To perform a splice measurement by the "two-points" method, display the Results page,
then:
1 Place cursor A exactly on the fault, then place cursor B after the splice that you
wish to define.
2 Press the Advanced key, then Modify Meas. > Manual Meas.
3 Select the function 2 Pt Loss.
4 Press validation key .
The splice marker is placed at the point defined by the first (left-hand) cursor and
the result is displayed on the screen. If the fault is reflective, the reflectance value
is also measured and displayed. These results are added to the table of results.

NOTE
If you try to measure a splice on a slope, the measurement is not carried out
and the following error message is displayed: "Slope found between
two cursors".

Five points method

To carry out a splice measurement by the "five points" method:

1 Measure the slope preceding the fault to be measured, then the slope following it.
2 Place the cursor on the fault (between the two sections).
3 Press the Advanced key
4 Press Modify Meas. key, then Manual Meas.
5 Select 5 Pt Loss.
6 Press validation key .
The splice event marker is placed on the cursor and the result is displayed on the
trace and in the table of results.

94 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

NOTE
If no result is displayed, it is possible that the display threshold of the attenu-
ation measurement result is higher than the attenuation that you are trying to
measure.

NOTE
If you try to measure a splice on a slope, the measurement is not carried out
and the following error message is displayed: Slope found between two
cursors.

Memorization of the position of events

To memorize the position of events with a view to repeating the measurements at the
same place during a future acquisition or on another trace, press the Advanced key,
then select Lock Evts. The event memorization icon will appear in the title bar.

The positions memorized will then be used in the subsequent measurements, either at
the end of the manual acquisition, or when a stored trace is recalled.

NOTE
This function memorizes the markers placed on the current trace.

The following procedure is recommended to start a measurement with markers:

1 Carry out an automatic measurement.
2 Memorize the position of the events selecting Lock with the key in the
Advanced menu.
3 Add the manual measurements required (keys: Advanced > Modify Meas. >
Manual Meas.).

CAUTION

If an event is added (with the Set Event key) after manual measurements have been
performed, then all the events on the trace will be converted into AUTO markers and an
automatic measurement will be performed using these events. The previous manual
measurements will be lost.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 95

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Provided the event memorization icon is displayed, the automatic measurement

following the acquisition is carried out using the events which were present before the
acquisition.

If you wish to make a measurement without events, deactivate memorization of events

by pressing the Free Events key.

Overlay trace function

This very useful function enables up to eight traces to be displayed on the screen at
once:
• either to compare traces acquired on a number of different fibers in the same
cable,
• or to observe changes over time in traces taken of one and the same fiber.

Figure 53 Example of overlaid traces

Overlaying several traces stored in memory

To display up to 8 traces from the memory, deleting the current trace(s) already loaded:
1 Press the FILE button.
2 Select the files of the traces for display.

96 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

3 Press the Load key.

4 Press View trace(s).
5 When loading is complete, the Results screen appears: the first trace selected is
the active trace (in green), the other traces being overlaid.

Display of traces in overlay

• The traces are shown in different colors (the active trace is green).
• Their serial numbers are repeated at the top of the screen.
• The OTDR markers are referenced on the active trace by the symbol , and on
the other traces by vertical dashes.

Adding traces in overlay

With one or more traces already displayed, to add further traces to the display (the
number of traces displayed cannot exceed 8):
1 Define at least one trace as reference (see “Reference Trace function” on
page 99)
2 Press the FILE button, and in the Explorer, select the files of the traces to be
added.
3 Press Load key.
4 Press the View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
When loading is complete, the new traces are displayed in overlay with those that
were defined as reference traces.

NOTE
If the number of files selected exceeds the display capacity, a message gives
warning that loading will be incomplete: only the trace or traces selected first
will be displayed, up to the permitted limit of 8 traces.

Swapping overlay traces

Measurements can only be made on the active trace and not on overlaid traces. To make
measurements on a trace in overlay, it must first be swapped with the active trace.
1 Press the Trace key,

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 97

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

2 Press the and direction keys, as many times as necessary, until the active
trace is displayed in green.
or traces
Click on the trace numbers in the upper right side of the result page
until the trace desired is selected.

Changing the traces position

Once a trace is displayed in overlay, the traces can be adjusted according to the Y axis:
1 Press Advanced > Overlay menu keys.
2 Select the adjustment according to Y axis:
• Y Reset: all traces are on the the same level at the intersection with the active
cursor.
• Y Shift: Each trace is shifted from 5 dB from the other.
• Y Exact: the traces displayed are on the same position according to their injec-
tion level.

Removing a trace

Removing the current trace in overlay

It is possible to remove a trace displayed. To do this, first select it (see previous para-
graph), then successively press Advanced > Overlay > Remove Current Trace.

Removing all the traces in overlay

To remove all the traces except the current trace, then successively press Advanced >
Overlay > Remove Other Traces.

Quitting the overlay menu

To quit the overlay menu, press the Exit key.

98 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Advanced functions in Expert OTDR mode

Reference Trace function

The reference trace function consists in defining trace(s) which will be «blocked» on
screen and used as models before acquiring or loading other standard trace(s).

Using the reference trace function in the Result

page
Once one or several trace(s) is/are displayed, after an acquisition or loaded from the
explorer:
1 If several traces are in overlay, check the correct current trace is selected
2 Go in the Advanced menu
3 Click on Overlay
4 Click on Set curve As Reference key.

The active trace becomes the reference trace;

• the icon appears on the upper right hand part of the results table.

To define all the traces displayed as reference traces, click on Set All As Reference key
(whatever is the active trace).

Removing the reference trace(s)

To change one reference trace into a «standard» trace, select it using the Trace/
Summary key or click on the trace number, and in the Advanced > Overlay menu, click
on Reset Reference

To change all the reference traces displayed into «standard» traces, whatever is the
active trace, go in the Advanced > Overlay menu and click on Reset All Reference.

Performing an acquisition once one or several trace(s) is/are

defined

Three situations can occur once an acquisition is performed:

• Only reference trace(s) is/are displayed: the trace acquired is added to the refer-
ence ones.
• Reference trace(s) and «standard» trace(s) are displayed: the reference trace(s)
are «blocked», the standard ones are removed and the new trace acquired is
displayed with the reference one(s).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 99

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

• No reference trace(s) defined: all the «standard» traces are removed and only the
new trace acquired is displayed.

Using the reference trace function in the explorer

A trace stored in memory can be set as reference trace before loading one or several
«standard» trace(s).

To open one or several reference trace(s)

1 Go on the File Explorer
2 Select the trace(s) to be defined as reference
3 Click on Load and select Reference = Yes on the key
4 Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The trace(s) open(s) and the icon appears on the upper right hand part of
the results table.

To open «standard» traces to be added to the reference ones

5 Go back to the explorer
6 Select the trace(s) to be opened in the same screen as the reference trace(s)
7 Click on Load and select Reference = No on the key
8 Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.

Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the trace(s) can be saved and, in Expert Mode only,
a report can be generated directly from the results screen.

In Expert mode, the traces saving and report generation can have already been
performed automatically if the parameter Auto Store was defined on Yes in the Setup
screen (see “Auto Store” on page 51) with the appropriate Save Mode (file only or file +
txt or + pdf).

Saving results in Smart Test mode

Once the results page is displayed, cick on the menu key Save .

100 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

1 In the Recording Information screen, click on one parameter definition to modify

it.

Figure 54 Saving results in Smart Test mode

NOTE
The file is saved automatically by default with the Job Id parameter.
Example: if the Job Id is defined with Test Fiber 1, the otdr filename will be
Test Fiber 1.sor.

2 Click on one parameter configuration (white background) to modify it using the

edition or numeric keypad displayed:
– Fiber Id: click on the fiber name currently defined to display the edition
keypad and enter a new fiber name.
– Fiber Number; click on the fiber number currently defined to display the
numeric keypad and enter a new fiber number.
– Location A / Location B: click on the location name currently defined to
display the edition keypad and enter a new name.
– Job Id: click on the Job description currently defined to display the edition
keypad and enter a new description.
3 Once the recording information are correctly defined, click on File Only to save
the results in a .sor file,
or

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 101

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Click on File + PDF to save the results in a .sor file and in a pdf one.
A sound is emitted to confirm the results saving.

Saving results and creating a report in Expert OTDR

mode
To save the trace and generate a report:
1 Press Fast Report key.
A menu displays under the trace.
2 In the menu, configure the file saving mode (and the report).

Figure 55 Fast report configuration

a Modify the Fiber Number / Fiber Code using the key .

The parameter is different according to the Cable Structure configuration
(see “Cable structure” on page 45).
b In the Save Mode parameter, select:
txt file select Yes to save the results in a .sor file and to generate a
txt file of the results.
pdf file select Yes to save the results in a .sor file and to generate a
report in a pdf file.
json file select Yes to save the results in a .sor file and to generate a
json file.
If all parameters are defined with No, only the .sor (or .msor) file will be
saved.

102 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

c In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
d In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A).
e In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
3 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
4 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad.
or
Click on Auto Filenaming menu key to apply the file name defined in the Setup
screen, in Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 50)
5 Press Enter to validate.

NOTE
The sor file and the txt or pdf file will have the same name.

The icon displays during saving process.

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform.

NOTE
The file and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

NOTE
The file saving can also be performed from the FILE > Explorer page (see
“Saving Files from the Explorer” on page 539).

Saving and report for traces in overlay

If several traces are displayed in overlay in the results page, one or several file(s)/
report(s) is/are generated:
• If in the File Setup page (SETUP > File), the parameter File Content is defined
with One Trace, one .sor file and one pdf/txt report will be generated for each
trace

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 103

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Example: if 3 traces are displayed in overlay, 3 .sor files and 3 pdf/txt files will be
saved.
• If in the File Setup page (SETUP > File), the parameter File Content is defined
with All Traces, one single .msor file and one single txt/pdf report will be gener-
ated, bringing together all traces.
Example: if 3 traces are displayed in overlay, one single .msor file and one single
txt/pdf file (with one trace per page; except if the results table is too long for one
page) will be saved.

Opening a report
1 To open the report, press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the file/report.
The file name is:
For the txt file: trace file_sor.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.sor.pdf
3 Press Load.
The file opens on the T-BERD/MTS.

104 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Figure 56 Example of TXT and PDF reports

Header

Fiber /Cable
description

OTDR Setup

Alarms
thresholds Trace

Summary

Results
table

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A PDF Report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on page 545).

Recalling OTDR files

Once a OTDR file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:
1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.
2 Select the directory and then the file to open

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 105

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

3 Click on Load
4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-

6000A V2 only)
This chapter describes the use of the Enterprise-SLM option, when the software license
has been purchased with an OTDR module.

Principle of Enterprise-SLM
The Enterprise-SLM is designed to simplify and automate the characterization (TIER-2)
and troubleshooting of structured cabling in Enterprise & Data Centers.
Goals of this function are to:
• characterize/certify the entire link including passive elements such as connectors,
cassettes, splices, couplers or splitters, at the installation
• be used as a troubleshooting tool to detect faults such as breaks, bends or exces-
sive losses
• generate all-in-one PDF certification reports on site for each fiber link

Configuring the Enterprise-SLM

Loading a SmartConfig™
The SmartConfig™ is defined with pre-defined test settings to be used as a base config-
uration that can be customized.

Once the Enterprise-SLM license is installed:

1 From the Home page, select the Otdr Entreprise function .
2 Press SETUP hard key to display the OTDR configuration screen.
3 Press Load Config. to select a configuration file from the list:

106 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

The configuration file includes pre-defined test parameters and label schemes
(for automatic file labels generation)
– TIA-606A Class 2 Single Building Horizontal Link = ENTERPRISE_-
Class2_Hlink
– TIA-606 Class 2 Single Building Backbone Cable = ENTERPRISE_-
Class2_BBCable
– TIA-606 Class 3 Campus Backbone Cable = ENTERPRISE_Class3_BB-
Cable
– TIA-606 Customized Hierarchical Cable Labeling Scheme = ENTER-
PRISE_Custom
– TIA Colour Coding = ENTERPRISE_Color
– Simple Cable Label (Cable Id, Fiber Id, Fiber Num) = ENTERPRISE_-
Simple
4 Once the file selected, press Load as ENTREPRISE Config..
5 Once desired configuration file is loaded, Acquisition, Alarms, Link Cable and
File setup menus can be configured.

Figure 57 OTDR - Enterprise SLM Configuration

Acquisition
In the first screen, configure the following parameters:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 107

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Laser
The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength(s) selected (for multiple-wave-
length modules). In case of a multi-wavelength module, select All to perform a measure-
ment for all the wavelengths available (this parameter visible exclusively on modules
with one single OTDR port). The possible values depend on the module used.

Index of refraction
Choice of group refraction index of the whole fiber.
User Define for each wavelength (1310 SM, 1360-1510 SM, 1550 SM,
1625 SM) a refraction index of 1.30000 to 1.69999. The selection of
an index alters the value of the section AB (actual distance between
cursors A and B).
or,
If the actual distance between the cursors A and B is known, enter its
value under Section AB to establish the index of the fiber. Selection
of this distance causes the display of the indices. The extreme
distance values are given by the index values (1.30000 à 1.70000).
Predefined It is possible to choose one of the predefined values given for certain
cables. The corresponding indices given in the table below are
repeated on the screen. See OTDR chapter, “Index of refraction” on
page 39.

Scatter coefficient
Define the scatter coefficient of the fiber. See OTDR chapter “Scatter coefficient” on
page 40.

Launch Cable End / Receive Cable Start

No All the results are displayed and referenced on the basis of the board
of the module.
Evt 1, 2, 3 The results relating to the launch cable are eliminated from the table.
Attenuation and distances are then measured on the basis of the
marker Evt 1, 2 or 3 selected.
Length Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance (Min= 0 / Max=50 km /
164.042 kfeet / 31.075 miles) or affect the active cursor value, using
the Set Cursor Distance key.

108 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Figure 58 Launch Cable / Receive Cable

Launch Cable Receive Cable
Fiber Under Test
OTDR

Launch Receive Cable

Cable end start

Distance of the Distance of the

launch cable receive cable

Distance Unit
Define the unit of the distances displayed: km, kfeet, miles, meter, feet, inch.

Config.
This parameter displays the last configuration file loaded and cannot be modified unless
a new configuration file is loaded.

Alarms
In the Setup page, press the Alarm menu key (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Alarms).

Alarms > Threshold

• None The alarm function is not active.

• User Define your own thresholds values for one or several elements:
Splice Loss / Connector Loss / Reflectance / Fiber Length Min /
Link Loss Max / ORL
• TIA-568 C / ISO/IEC 11801 / Default
Select one of this parameter to configure the alarm thresholds
with predefined standards values:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 109

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Splice Connector
Slope Reflectance ORL Distance
Loss Loss

SM MM

SM: > 1.00 dB/km

Default > 0.20 dB > 0.50 dB MM: 850 nm > 3.50 dB/km > -35 dB < 27 dB N/A
1300 nm: > 1.50 dB/km
TIA-568.3 SM: > 1.00 dB/km No
TIA-563.3 > 0.30 dB > 0.75 dB MM: 850 nm > 3.50 dB/km No 40 km 2 km
1300 nm: > 1.50 dB/km > -35 dB
RL35
ISO/IEC SM: > 1.00 dB/km
11801 > 0.75 dB MM: 850 nm > 3.50 dB/km No
(2002) 1300 nm: > 1.50 dB/km
> 0.30 dB No 5 km 2 km
ISO/IEC SM: > 0.40 dB/km
11801 > 0.50 dB MM: 850 nm > 3.50 dB/km > -35 dB
(2010) 1300 nm: > 1.50 dB/km
ISO/IEC SM: > 1.00 dB/km
14763-3 > 0.50 dB MM: 850 nm > 3.50 dB/km
(2006) 1300 nm: > 1.50 dB/km
> 0.30 dB No No 5 km 2 km
ISO/IEC SM: > 0.40 dB/km
14763-3 > 0.75 dB MM: 850 nm > 3.50 dB/km
(2014) 1300 nm: > 1.50 dB/km

If results are above the thresholds, they will be highlighted in red in the table of results,
and the icon will appear at the top right of the screen.
If all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in red), results are displayed in
green in the table and the icon is .

Site Info Labels

In the Setup page, press Site Info Labels softkey (if one parameter is selected in the
current screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Site
Info Labels).

The Site Info Labels screen allows configuring the Site Properties and the Labeling.

110 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Site Properties

In the Site Properties box, click on the right arrow key for each parameter to define the
Site Properties, the Technician Identification and the Job Identification.

Labeling

The Labeling box differs according to the configuration file loaded and currently used.

Label Format
This parameter displays the label format applied to the project according to the configu-
ration file selected.

Fiber Count (mandatory for project creation)

This parameter is available once the configuration file ENTERP RISE_Cus-
tom_List.SM-OTDR is loaded.

Select the right Fiber Count for the cables being tested:

• Simplex (single fiber strand) • Duplex (dual fiber strand)

MPO (8/12): 8 fibers used over 12

MPO (12/12): 12 fibers used over 12

• MPO

MPO (20/24): 20 fibers used over 24

MPO (24/24): 24 fibers used over 24

Fiber Prefix
Press the right arrow key to enter the prefix applied to the fiber, as an identification.

Fiber Number
Use the left and right arrow keys to increment or decrement the fiber number.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 111

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Fiber Code
Once selected, press the right arrow key to modify some fields of the fiber code. The
structure must follow TIA-606 standards.

Change Fiber Number

Increment the fiber number is automatically incremented at each new file-save.
Decrement the fiber number is automatically decremented at each new file-save.
User defined Use Edit Number softkey to enter the increment/decrement value for
fiber number.
Note: to decrement the number, enter the sign «-» before the number. Example: -1
Min: -999 / Max: 999 / Auto: 0
No the fiber number is not automatically modified at each new file-save.

Direction
The direction shows if the acquisition must be performed from the origin to the extremity
(A->B) or from the extremity to the origin (B->A).

Location A
The name of the Location A of the link may be entered here.

Location B
The name of the Location B of the link may be entered here.

Label Structure
The Label Structure sub-menu is different according to the configuration file selected.

NOTE
See “Cable structure” on page 45 for a description of the Cable Structure
sub-menu available with «Color» configuration.

• Fiber Code Displays the fiber code previously configured in the Labeling
box (see “Fiber Code” on page 112. It cannot be modified from
the Label Structure sub-menu.

112 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

• Floor Press to open the sub-menu, different according to the

selected configuration:
- define the Type of Label (Alphabetical / Numerical / None) and enter
the Min and Max values and the Separator type1 (No; «.»; «:»; «-»:
«/»; «_»).
or
- enter a floor number for Floor 1 & Floor 2.
• Telecom Room Press to open the sub-menu, different according to the
selected configuration:
- define the Type of Label (Alphabetical / Numerical / None) and enter
the Min and Max values and the Separator type (No; «.»; «:»; «-»:
«/»; «_»)<Exposant>1
or
- enter an identification for Telecom Room 1 and Telecom Room 2.
• Rack-X / Rack-Y Press to open the sub-menu, define the Label Type
(Alphabetical / Numerical / None) and enter the Min and Max
values and the Separator type (No; «.»; «:»; «-»: «/»; «_»).
• Panel Slice Press to open the sub-menu, define the Label Type
(Alphabetical / Numerical / None) and enter the Min and Max
values and the Separator type (No; «.»; «:»; «-»: «/»; «_»).
• Panel Press to open the sub-menu, define the Label Type
(Alphabetical / Numerical / None)2 and enter the Min and Max
values and the Separator type (No; «.»; «:»; «-»: «/»;
«_»)<Exposant>1.
• Port/Position Press to open the sub-menu, define the Label Type
(Alphabetical / Numerical / None)<Exposant>1 and enter the
Min and Max values.
• Backbone Cable Press to open the sub-menu and enter the Min and Max
values according to the Label Type defined (not changeable).
• Cable Press to open the sub-menu and enter the Min and Max
values according to the Label Type defined (not changeable).
• Building Enter an identification for Building 1 and Building 2.

1. This parameter can be modified exclusively with «Custom» configuration

2. This parameter can be modified exclusively with «Custom» configuration

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 113

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

TIA-606 Class 2 TIA-606 Class 2 TIA-606 Class 3

Label Format Simple Custom Color Single Building Single Building Campus List
Horizontal Link Backbone Cable Backbone Cable
Fiber Count x
Fiber Prefix x x x x x x
Fiber Code Fib. Num. x x x x x x
Change Fiber
x x x x x x
Number
Direction x x
Location A / B x x
Label Structure x1
Fiber Code x x x x
Floor x x x x
Telecom Room x x x x
Rack -X / -Y x
Panel Slice x
Panel x x
Port/Position x x
Backbone Cable x x
Cable x x
Building x

1. See “Cable structure” on page 45

File
In the Setup page, press File softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current screen,
press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on File).

The file configuration is identical to the OTDR file configuration menu: see, in the OTDR
chapter, “Configuring the File parameters” on page 48.

NOTE
The Default Filename, with the Enterprise SLM option, differs according to
the configuration file selected.

114 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Simple OTDR Testing (for single fiber)

The OTDR Enterprise Option can be use to test single fibers, with the optimum acquisi-
tion parameters automatically applied.
1 Select the OTDR Enterprise icon (MM or SM) and validate .
2 From the results page, press SETUP button.
3 In the Setup screen, press Load configuration to load an Enterprise SmartCon-
figTM file.
4 Select the file in the explorer and press Load as ENTERPRISE Config.
5 Modify / complete the parameters wished (see “Configuring the Enterprise-SLM”
on page 106)
6 If necessary, press Save Config. to save the new configuration in a file , and
reuse it for other tests.
7 Press Start/Stop button to launch the acquisition for the fiber.

See Results for description of the results page.

Managing projects for multi-fibers Testing

The Enterprise OTDR option allows to generate projects in order to easily control and
document all test results.

Some existing projects are available on the Platform, and configured automatically. A
configuration file exist for each Fiber count (= connector type): Simplex, Duplex and
MPO cables.
A project may also be created by the user, with configuration previously defined.

Opening an existing project

Once the OTDR Enterprise icon is validated:
1 Press RESULTS button to display a results page.
2 Press Manage Project menu key .
3 In the Explorer, select the project file to be used.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 115

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Figure 59 Select Project file

4 Press Open Project menu key.

The Project displays, with a list of labels to be tested.
5 Click on the label arrow to open the list of fibers to be tested for this label.

NOTE
In Simplex mode, only the label is available as it represents the single fiber.

Creating a project from the Setup page

Once the OTDR Enterprise icon is validated, the results page automatically opens:
1 Press SETUP button to open the Setup page.
2 Load the file ENTERPRISE_Custom-list SmartConfig™
3 Modify setup menus (Acquisition, Alarms, Site Info Labels and File) if needed.
4 In the Site Info Labels menu, make sure the Fiber count parameter is defined
according to the network configuration:
– Simplex: generate a project for one single fiber test
– Duplex: generate the project for double fiber test
– MPO: generate a project for MPO cables
See “Fiber Count (mandatory for project creation)” on page 111.

116 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

5 Once all parameters are configured, press Save Config. to save the current
configuration in a file.
6 Press Import Label List top right soft key.
7 Select the csv file that includes the list of labels / Cable Ids to be tested:
Simplex: 1 label = 1 fiber
Duplex: 1 label = 2 fibers
MPO: 1 label = up to 24 fibers
8 Press Create Project menu key to generate the project.
9 The project displays, with the list of labels defined in the csv file.

CAUTION
If the list of labels exceeds the maximum number of labels authorized by the
software (1000 fibers / 500 for Duplex / 83 for MPO (12) / 41 for MPO (24)),
a warning displays: Label max numbers reached, next labels
are ignored. Hit any key to continue.

Warnings on CSV file

The csv file used for labeling must include the following instructions:
– 1 label per line, starting from row 1 of the spreadsheet.
– the number of characters per label cannot exceed 120.
– avoid the use of special characters, such as: *; /; \; %; &; #...

Project display
Once the project is loaded on the Platform, it is displayed as follows:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 117

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Figure 60 Example of Project

The icon displays on the upper banner, indicating a project is opened.

Click on the label to open the sub-menu where the fiber numbers are displayed.
Note; This sub menu cannot be opened for Simplex mode as 1 label corresponds
to 1 fiber.

Disable a test

Before starting the test, some fibers can be disabled so that the acquisition will not be
performed. on those
1 Select the fiber number which does not need to be tested (underlined).
2 Click on the soft key Disable fiber test.
3 Repeat the process for the fibers which do not have to be tested.

118 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Figure 61 Fibers 4 and 6 deactivated

The disable fibers will be skipped while moving to the next fiber test.

If Disable Fiber Test is pressed while a tested fiber is selected, a dialog

box displays: «You’re about to delete acquisition files. Are you
sure?».
Click on Yes to confirm the deactivation, and by consequence, to delete cor-
responding trace(s).
Click on No to cancel the deactivation.

To activate the fiber, select it and press Enable Fiber Test.

Testing MPO
Once the project is opened, the OTDR acquisitions can be launched.
1 Connect the Switch to the Platform, via a USB cable.
2 Activate the USB Switch icon on the Platform

3 On the Project page, select the label or fiber to be tested.

If a label is selected (highlighted in blue), all the active fibers of this label will be
tested one after the other.
If one fiber number is selected (in blue), the test will be performed exclusively for
this fiber.

4 Press START/STOP button to launch the test.

The fiber number being tested in displayed on the Switch.

5 Once a test is completed, a dialog box is displayed to test for next label/fiber.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 119

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

6 Press Yes to launch a new acquisition or No to stop the acquisition and return to
project screen.

Stopping the test

The test stops automatically once the label/fiber test is completed; or the user can press
the Start/Stop button at any time to stop the test in progress.

In this case, the icon is displayed on the label row to indicate that not all of the fibers
have been tested.

Trace saving
The traces are automatically stored into the project directory and according to defined
filenaming convention.

Results of project
After each fiber/label tested, the project page is updated, on the fly.

Figure 62 Enterprise OTDR - Project

Description of the table

The status for each label is indicated on the right of the label row:

120 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

Pass

Fail

The number of fiber is highlighted in different color according to the alarm status:

Pass
No Alarm defined

Fail No test performed on the fiber

View Trace
1 In the project page, click on the fiber number for which you want to display the
corresponding OTDR trace (e.g. ).

2 Click on View Trace(s) soft key.

The trace result page displays.

Figure 63 Trace from fiber selected in project

Name of the label Number of the fiber tested

Click to return to
project

Once the traces are displayed, one can:

• Zoom on trace (see “Zoom function” on page 75).
• Set Cursor A and/or Cursor B (see “Cursors” on page 73).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 121

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Enterprise-SLM Software option (T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2 only)

• Save the traces and create a report (see “Saving the trace(s) and generating a
report” on page 100).
• Analyze and visualize the different events (see “Results table” on page 69).

Detailed description of an event

When clicking on one event icon in the results table, a popup window describes the
event type and provides a diagnosis to help troubleshoot faulty optical elements (indi-
cated in red).

Figure 64 Event description

SmartLink view
1 Click on the menu key Trace/SmartLink to select SmartLink.
A screen as the following one is displayed:

Figure 65 SmartLink function

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

122 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
OptiPulses option

The screen is divided into three zones:

• Zone 1: Graphical representation of the link, with icons symbolizing the different
events detected.
• Zone 2: Link Table, which gives a summary of results for each wavelength, with
results within/without thresholds in green/red (according to Alarm thresholds
defined in the setup screen).
• Zone 3: Alarms table (if any)

OptiPulses option
The OptiPulses option is automatically available with the FTTH-SLM option.

OptiPulses is a software license key for OTDR applications that uses multipulse acqui-
sitions and advanced algorithms to deliver detailed information on every element of the
link (available in the ExpertOTDR module).

This option is configurable in ExpertOTDR mode.

NOTE
Patented as described at www.viavisolutions.com/patents.

Configuring the OTDR acquisition with OptiPulses

mode
Once the installation of the licence is completed (see Base-Unit manual) and the Exper-
tOTDR icon is sbelected in the Home page:
1 Press SETUP hard key to display the configuration parameters
2 In the Acquisition parameters, select OptiPulses and configure the acquisition:
• No No OTDR short acquisition with the shorted pulsewidth is
performed before the standard one
• Auto this parameter allows to perform a short acquisition, before the
standard one, with the Short Pulse and Short Range
parameters defined automatically.
• Manual this parameter allows to perform a short acquisition, before the
standard one, with the Short Pulse and Short Range
parameters defined by the user in the two following lines.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 123

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
OptiPulses option

Figure 66 OptiPulses configuration

See page 33 for information on principle of the acquisition.

3 Configure the other parameters for the OTDR acquisition to be performed
4 Launch the acquisition pressing START/STOP key
A beep is emitted at the end of the acquisition.

Results in OptiPulses mode

Once the acquisition is completed, a screen as the following one displays:

Figure 67 OTDR Traces with OptiPulses

event detected on
trace with shortest
pulse
events detected
on standard trace

124 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

With the OptiPulses option, the screen is as follows:

– Two traces for each wavelength measured: the trace with shortest pulse and
the standard one,
– One single results table per wavelength with results from both traces merged.
Example: if OTDR acquisition if performed on two wavelengths, the screen
displays 4 traces and 2 results table.

Click on one event in the results table to automatically turns the trace on which it has
been detected active

OptiPulses and SmartLink option

The SmartLink screen displays the graphical representation of the link with all the events
detected, whether they are detected on the trace with shortest pulse or on standard
trace.

Figure 68 OptiPulses results in SmartLink mode

events detected on events detected on
trace with shortest pulse standard trace

FTTA-SLM option
Principle of FTTA-SLM
FTTA-SLM is an OTDR software application that is delivered as an option of the OTDR
module (see references in the ordering information section), and is installed onto the

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 125

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

mainframe as a license key (see the 2000/4000 base-unit user manual for the instruc-
tions on license files installation).

FTTA-SLM simplifies OTDR testing for cell-tower technicians and eliminates complexi-
ties of result interpretation.

In a FTTA environment, the OTDR module, associated with the FTTA-SLM application,
allows to:
• Characterize and measure the fiber link loss, measure the loss and reflectance of
each passive element, and provide the position for each one: Acceptance
Testing
• Locate and identify causes of failure on a fiber link: Troubleshooting / Mainte-
nance.

Acceptance Testing
One way to judge installation quality is to use a loopback device (a retractible/expand-
able fiber leash cable or a patchcord) on duplex fiber to test at the junction box or RRU
location and shoot with an OTDR from the BBU or fiber-patch panel location to qualify
the entire fiber channel.

126 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Figure 69 Acceptance Testing

20m cable leash

recommended

Loopback
Device

TX Feeder RX Feeder

Launch
lead

Receive lead

Troubleshooting Testing
An OTDR from the BBU or fiber patch panel location will troubleshoot the fiber link up to
the RRU/RRH. Before performing the OTDR measurement, make sure that the fiber
being tested has no signal and the equipment is shut down.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 127

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Figure 70 Troubleshooting Testing

RX Feeder

Launch
Lead

Configuring the Reflectometry test for FTTA network

Once the OTDR module is set into the T-BERD/MTS, and the FTTA-SLM license
installed:
1 Select the FTTA-OTDR icon .
The results page automatically displays.
2 Press SETUP hard key to display the OTDR configuration screen for FTTA
network.

128 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Figure 71 FTTA OTDR Setup

See OTDR Setup:

“Configuring the Link
parameters” on page 43

FTTA setup
In the first screen, configure the following parameters:

Laser
• The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength(s) selected (for multiple-
wavelength modules). In case of a multi-wavelength module, select All to perform
a measurement for all the wavelengths available (this parameter visible
exclusively on modules with one single OTDR port). The possible values depend
on the module used.

Network Config. (see page 130)

This parameter is used to identify the network type.
Cell Tower Typical macro cell tower topology
Rooftop Tenant Rooftop topology
Rooftop Penthouse Rooftop topology
Das Distributed Antenna System

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 129

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Figure 72 Network configurations

Rooftop Tenant Rooftop Penthouse

Cell Tower

DAS

Config.
This parameter displays the last configuration file loaded and cannot be modified unless
a new configuration file is loaded.

130 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Alarms parameters
In the Setup page, press the Alarm menu key (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Alarms).

Threshold
None The alarm function is not active.
User Define your own thresholds values for one or several elements:
Splice Loss / Connector Loss / Reflectance / Fiber Length Min / Link
Loss Max / ORL
TIA-568 C / ISO/IEC 11801 / Default
Select one of this parameter to configure the alarm thresholds with
predefined values:

Default TIA-568C & ISO/IEC 11801

Splice Loss > 0.20 dB > 0.30 dB
Connector Loss > 0.50 dB > 0.75 dB
1
Slope > 1.00 dB/km > 1.00 dB/km
Reflectance > - 35 dB -
ORL < 27 dB -

1. This parameter is not available in OEO-OTDR configuration

If results are above the thresholds, they will be highlighted in red in the table of results,
and the icon will appear at the top right of the screen.

If all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in red), results are displayed in
green in the table and the icon is .

Analysis
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

This screen allows to configure the network:

BBU Jumper
Test from the patchcord that will be plugged into BBU.
(not applicable for DAS networks)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 131

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

RRU Jumper
Test from the patchcord that will be plugged into RRU.
(not applicable for DAS networks)

Mode
Select the kind of acquisition to be performed:
Construction Select this mode to perform the OTDR acquisition in the case of an
Acceptance Testing (see “Acceptance Testing” on page 126).
Maintenance Select this mode to perform the OTDR acquisition in the case of
Troubleshooting (see “Troubleshooting Testing” on page 127).

Loopback Cable
Select if a loopback cable is used (parameter available exclusively in Construction
mode).

Launch Cable End / Receive Cable Start (not available in Maintenance

mode)
No All the results are displayed and referenced on the basis of the board
of the module.
Evt 1, 2, 3 The results relating to the launch cable are eliminated from the table.
Attenuation and distances are then measured on the basis of the
marker Evt 1, 2 or 3 selected.
Distance Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance (Min= 0 / Max=50 km /
164.042 kfeet / 31.075 miles) or affect the active cursor value, using
the Set Cursor Distance key.

Link description
In the Setup page, press Link softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current screen,
press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Link).

The information entered in the Link Description window concerns the editing and/or the
modifications of the cable and fiber parameters. When a trace is recalled without recall
of the configuration, the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature.

132 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Base Station Id or Headend Id (in case of DAS)

If known, enter the name of the Base Station using the edition keypad, displayed
pressing the right arrow key.

NOTE
The name of Location A entered in ExpertOTDR configuration is displayed
by default in this parameter (see “Location A” on page 45).

RRU Id or Remote End Id (in case of DAS)

If known, enter the name of the RRU/RRH (Remote Radio Unit / Head) using the edition
keypad, displayed pressing the right arrow key.

NOTE
The name of Location B entered in ExpertOTDR configuration is displayed
by default in this parameter (see “Location B” on page 45).

Fiber Code / Fiber Num

To use the Fiber Code convention, with Rx/Tx labeling, choose between the following
config files: FTTA_Rx_Tx.SM-OTDR or FTTA_Rx_Tx.MM-OTDR.

For a simple labeling of the fiber number (1 to 24), load one of the following config files:
FTTA_Simple.SM-OTDR or FTTA_Simple.MM-OTDR

Example of fiber code in:

• Construction mode (with loopback): from 1-Rx_1-Tx to 24-Rx_24-Tx
• Maintenance mode: from 1-Rx to 24-Rx

Change Fiber Nbr

Select if the fiber number must be automatically Incremented or Decremented at each
new file save.
Increment the fiber number is automatically incremented at each new file-save.
Decrement the fiber number is automatically decremented at each new file-save
User defined Use Edit Number softkey to enter the increment/decrement value for
fiber number.
Note: to decrement the number, enter the sign «-» before the number. Example: -
1.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 133

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Min: -999 / Max: 999 / Auto: 0

No the Fiber number must not automatically modified

Distance unit

Select the unit to be used for distance (km / kfeet / miles / meter / feet).

Launching the acquisition

CAUTION
Inspect & clean all fiber connections prior connecting fiber cables into the
ports (BBU, distribution boxes, OVP and RRU/RRH and SFP ports).

1 Press START/STOP hard key to launch measurement.

The red Testing indicator goes on to show that the T-BERD/MTS is working and
the screen displays the trace in process of acquisition.
2 The quality of the connection is displayed for a few
seconds (see Table 3 on page 56)
3 Then, a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time.

134 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Figure 73 Acquisition in progress

Elapsed Number of Elapsed Total

acquisition averages time acquisition
time calculated time

At the end of the acquisition, a beep is emitted, the trace is displayed and an
automatic measurement is started.

NOTE
During acquisition, the traffic on fiber is automatically detected (see “Traffic
Detection” on page 56).

If the module possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisitions on all the
wavelengths:
1 In the SETUP menu, check in Laser line, that several lasers are selected or
select All.
2 Start the acquisition by pressing the START/STOP button.
3 Once the acquisition for the first wavelength is finished, the acquisition for the
following wavelength starts automatically.
or
To stop manually the acquisition for current wavelength, click on Stop Wave-
length. This will allow to automatically start the measurement for the following
wavelength.
A beep is emitted once the acquisitions on all lasers are completed.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 135

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

The different traces appear in the same window and can be managed as traces in
overlay (see “Overlay trace function” on page 96).

Results page
The trace(s) acquired or recalled from a memory is/are displayed on the Results page.

Trace View
The Trace view is displayed by default once OTDR acquisition is completed.

Figure 74 FTTA OTDR Trace

Once trace is displayed, you can:

• Zoom on trace (see “Zoom function” on page 75).
• Set Cursor A and/or Cursor B (see “Cursors” on page 73).
• Save trace(s) and launch a report of results (see “Saving the trace(s) and gener-
ating a report” on page 100)

136 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Detailed description of an event

When clicking on one event icon in the results table, a popup window describes the
event type and provides a diagnosis to help troubleshoot faulty optical elements (indi-
cated in red).

Figure 75 Event description

Press SETUP hard key or Setup soft key to go back to FTTA Setup screen and modify
the parameters before launching a new acquisition.

SmartLink view
1 Click on the menu key Trace/SmartLink to select SmartLink.
A screen as the following one is displayed:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 137

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Figure 76 SmartLink function

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

The screen is divided into three zones:

• Zone 1: Graphical representation of the link, with icons symbolizing the different
events detected.
• Zone 2: Link Table, which gives a summary of results for each wavelength, with
results within/without thresholds in green/red (according to Alarm thresholds
defined in the setup screen).
• Zone 3: Alarms table (if any).

CAUTION
If several traces are displayed in overlay, with the same wavelength, then
only the Zone 2 is displayed, there is no graphical representation of the link
(Zone 1).

Getting a diagnostic on potential causes of failure

When an event has reached an alarm, the diagnostic of potential causes is given in
SmartLink view.
1 Select the event to be described (underlined in yellow).
2 Click on Event Diagnostic soft key

138 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

A new window, on the lower part of the screen, gives the details of the selected
event:
– its type
– the thresholds applied for this event
– the possible causes of the alarm

Figure 77 Event Detail window

Results Table
To display exclusively the results table from the SmartLink page, press the Results
Table softkey.

Figure 78 FTTA Smart Link: Results Table

Press again the Results Table menu key to return to SmartLink display.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 139

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Event View
1 Click on Event View menu key to display a detailed description of one event
detected on trace.
In this view, an algorithm automatically detects the elements of the FTTA link and
label them.
2 Select the event to be described on the graphic (highlight in yellow).
The corresponding event description is displayed on the Zone 3, with a recall of
alarm threshold for this event:

Figure 79 SmartLink: Event View

3 Click on Trace View to display the selected event in the results table and zoomed
on trace.

NOTE
The event is framed in red if it is above the alarm thresholds defined in the
setup menu.
It is framed in green if it lies within the thresholds.
It is framed in purple if no alarm has been defined for this type of event.

140 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTA-SLM option

Merged connectors

When 2 or more connectors are very close to eahc others (in the attenuation dead zone),
usually the reflectances can be measured but the loss of the individuals can’t be - the
loss of these connectors is "merged" .

The following formula is then applied (only in FTTA mode):

loss per connector = (total group loss) / (nb of connectors in the group)

Changing the name of an event

Once the SmartLink screen is displayed, the name of an event can be modified:
1 Select the event to be modified (highlighted in yellow) .
2 Press Rename Event menu key
3 In the edition keypad, enter a new name for the event.

Figure 80 Rename Event

4 Click on Enter to return to Event View.

The event name is displayed under the icon, and replaces the previous FTTA
label .

Click on Replay Label to rename the event as it was previously (at last saving).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 141

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

FTTH-SLM Software option

Principle of FTTH
FTTH-SLM is an OTDR software application that is delivered as an option of the OTDR
module (see references in the Chapter 22 on page 571), and is installed onto the main-
frame as a license key (see the 8000 V2 or 6000A V2 base-unit user manual for the
instructions on license files installation).

FTTH-SLM application brings an FTTH user interface and a specific algorithm for OTDR
measurements, especially through PON splitters (Passive Optical Network).

In a FTTH environment, the OTDR module, associated with the FTTH-SLM application:
• Selects optimized test parameters to conduct reliable measurements, especially
through optical splitters, and to detect close events near the start (Central Office
splices/ connectors) (OptiPulses Automatic Algorithm).
• Automatically identifies all network elements such as PON splitter types/ratios
(Discover Mode).
• Iconically displays a map of OTDR trace results (SmartLink View)
• Guarantees measurements with automatic PASS/FAIL analysis to ITU-T/IEEE
PON standards or customer-defined specifications.

Figure 81 FTTH network

NOTE
Patented as described at www.viavisolutions.com/patents.

142 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Configuring the Reflectometry test for FTTH network

Once the OTDR module is set into the T-BERD/MTS, and the FTTH-SLM license
installed:
1 Select the FTTH-OTDR icon .
The results page automatically displays.
2 Press SETUP hard key to display the OTDR configuration screen for FTTH
network.

Figure 82 FTTH OTDR Setup

FTTH setup
In the first screen, configure the following parameters:

Laser
The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength(s) selected (for multiple-wave-
length modules). In case of a multi-wavelength module, select All to perform a measure-
ment for all the wavelengths available (this parameter visible exclusively on modules
with one single OTDR port). The possible values depend on the module used.
• OLT: Optical Line Terminal (switch at the Central Office)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 143

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

• ONT: Optical Network Terminal (media converter and gateway in the Home)

Select the direction of the measurement:

– Downstream: from OLT to ONT (OLT -> ONT)
– Upstream: from ONT to OLT (ONT -> OLT)

Number of Splitters
If known, enter the number of splitters installed in the FTTH network.

CAUTION
It is preferred to know the number of splitters in order to get Pass/Fail status
for the splitters’ loss.

None: no splitter is installed

Discover: auto-detection and identification of PON splitter types.

NOTE
The Discover mode does not allow Pass/Fail analysis

1 / 2 / 3: select the number of splitters.

This selection opens a sub menu into which the splitters types must be defined for all
splitters installed.

Splitters types

Splitter 1: define the splitter type among the list:

– 1x2 / 1x4 / 1x8 / 1x16 / 1x32 / 1x64
– 2x2 / 2x4 / 2x8 / 2x16 / 2x32 / 2x64

Splitter 2 and Splitter 3: define the splitter type among the list:
– 1x2 / 1x4 / 1x8 / 1x16 / 1x32 / 1x64

Launch Cable End / Receive Cable Start

No All the results are displayed and referenced on the basis of the board
of the module.

144 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Length Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance (Min= 0 / Max=50 km /
164.042 kfeet / 31.075 miles) or affect the active cursor value, using
the Set Cursor Distance key.

Distance Unit
Define the unit of the distances displayed: km, kfeet, miles, meter, feet

Config.

This parameter displays the configuration file selected for acquisition, and cannot be
modified from Setup page. To modify the configuration file to be used:
1 Click on the menu header FTTH (PON) Setup
2 Click on Load Config. menu key
3 Select the file in the Explorer.

Alarms parameters
In the Setup page, press Alarms softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Alarms).
None The alarm function is not active.
User Define your own thresholds values for one or several elements:
Splice Loss / Connector Loss / Reflectance / Splitter Alarm / Fiber
Length Min / Link Loss Max / ORL

Default / TIA-568 C / ISO/IEC 11801 / G.697/G.98x PON / G.697/IEEE

PON
Select one of this parameter to configure the alarm thresholds with predefined values:

G.697/G.98x PON & G.697/ TIA-568C & ISO/

Default
IEEE PON IEC 11801
Splice Loss > 0.20 dB > 0.30 dB > 0.30 dB
Connector Loss > 0.50 dB > 0.50 dB > 0.75 dB
Slope > 1.00 dB/km - > 1.00 dB/km
Reflectance > - 35 dB > - 35 dB

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 145

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

G.697/G.98x PON & G.697/ TIA-568C & ISO/

Default
IEEE PON IEC 11801
ORL < 27 dB < 27 dB

Splitter Alarm
Splitter 1x2 > 5.0 dB > 4.2 dB
Splitter 1x4 > 8.0 dB > 7.8 dB
Splitter 1x8 > 11.0 dB > 11.4 dB
Splitter 1x16 > 14.0 dB > 15.0 dB
Splitter 1x32 > 17.0 dB > 18.6 dB
Splitter 1x64 > 21.0 dB > 22.0 dB
Select: No, Manual or:
• for G.697/G.98x PON: 20
dB (A) / 25 dB (B) / 30 dB
Link Loss Max (C)
• for G.697/IEEE PON: 23
dB (PX-10) / 26 dB (PX-
20)

If results are above the thresholds, they will be highlighted in red in the table of results,
and the icon will appear at the top right of the screen.

If all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in red), results are displayed in
green in the table and the icon is .

Link parameters
In the Setup page, press Link softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current screen,
press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Link).

The information entered in the Link Description window concerns the editing and/or the
modifications of the cable and fiber parameters. When a trace is recalled without recall
of the configuration, the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature.

Test Point / OLT Id / ONT Id / Distribution Id / Feeder Id

Those parameters allow to enter an identification for each element of the network (test
point, OLT, ONT...) using the Edition menu.

146 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Fiber Number
1 Select the parameter Fiber Number and modify the number of the fiber to be
tested.

The fiber number can be automatically incremented/decremented at each new file save
if it has been configured in the Change Fiber Nbr parameter (see “Change Fiber Nbr”
on page 147).

Change Fiber Nbr

Increment the fiber number is automatically incremented at each new file-save.
Decrement the fiber number is automatically decremented at each new file-save
No the Fiber number must not automatically modified.
User defined Use Edit Number softkey to enter the increment/decrement value for
fiber number.
Note: to decrement the number, enter the sign «-» before the number. Example: -
1.
Min: -999 / Max: 999 / Auto: 0

Operator
Use the arrow to enter the name of the operator carrying out the measurement.

Comment
Use the arrow to enter a comment, which will be displayed in the file signature, on the
upper part of the screen.

File parameters
Press the File menu key (or Next key when one parameter of the File page is selected)
to configure the File saving parameters for the OTDR measurements.

Dir
The Dir parameter displays the directory (and sub-directory) into which file(s) will be
saved and cannot be modified.

To modify the location of files saved, go to explorer page (pressing File hard key) and
select another media storage/directory.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 147

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Filenaming
Select the parameter and modify the name of the file for the result trace.
a In the edition keypad, enter a name manually for the file and/or use the
predefined parameters available (ONT_Id, Feeder_Id...).
b Press Enter to validate.

Figure 83 Filenaming - Edition keypad

Predefined
parameters
for naming
files

The name of the file is displayed in grey under Filenaming parameter

Press the Default Filename menu key to apply the name by default for the file:
[Test_Point]_[Date_Time].

File Content
In this parameter, select the file content for traces saving:
One Trace in case of traces in overlay, each trace is saved in a distinct file (.sor
extension).
All Traces in case of traces in overlay, all traces are saved in one single file
(.msor extension)

Save Mode
When a trace or more is displayed, in the parameter Save Mode, you can select three
types of methods for storing traces:
File Only only the trace(s) is/are stored in one/several file(s), with its extension
(.sor or .msor)
File + txt the trace(s) is/are stored in one/several file(s), with its extension and
one txt file is also generated.

148 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

File + pdf the trace(s) is/are stored in one/several file(s), with its extension and
one pdf file is also generated.

Auto store
Select Yes to store automatically the trace or traces resulting from each acquisition
according to the filenaming rules.

Launching the acquisition

CAUTION
Inspect & clean all fiber connections prior connecting fiber cables into the
ports.

1 Press START/STOP hard key to launch measurement.

The red Testing indicator goes on to show that the T-BERD/MTS is in process of
acquisition and the screen displays the trace in process of acquisition.
2 The quality of the connection is displayed for a few
seconds (see Table 3 on page 56)
3 Then, a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time.

Figure 84 Acquisition in progress

Elapsed Number of Elapsed Total

acquisition averages time acquisition
time calculated time

At the end of the acquisition, a beep is emitted, the trace is displayed and an
automatic measurement is started.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 149

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

NOTE
During acquisition, the traffic on fiber is automatically detected (see “Traffic
Detection” on page 56).

If the module possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisitions on all the
wavelengths:
1 In the Setup menu, check in Laser line, that several lasers are selected or
select All.
2 Start the acquisition by pressing the START/STOP button.
3 Once the acquisition for the first wavelength is finished, the acquisition for the
following wavelength starts automatically.
or
To stop manually the acquisition for current wavelength, click on Stop Wave-
length. This allows to automatically start the measurement for the following laser.
A beep is emitted once the acquisitions on all lasers are completed.

The different traces appear in the same window and can be managed as traces in
overlay (see “Overlay trace function” on page 96).

Results page
The trace(s) acquired or recalled from a memory is/are displayed on the Results page.

Trace View
The Trace view is displayed by default once OTDR acquisition is completed.

150 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Figure 85 FTTH OTDR Trace

Once trace is displayed, you can:

• Zoom on trace (see “Zoom function” on page 75).
• Set Cursor A and/or Cursor B (see “Cursors” on page 73).
• Save trace(s) and launch a report of results (see “Saving the trace(s) and gener-
ating a report” on page 100)

Detailed description of an event

When clicking on one event icon in the results table, a popup window describes the
event type and provides a diagnosis to help troubleshoot faulty optical elements (indi-
cated in red).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 151

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Figure 86 Event description

Press SETUP hard key or Setup menu key on Results page to go back to FTTH Setup
screen and modify the parameters before launching a new acquisition.

SmartLink view
1 Click on the menu key Trace/SmartLink to select SmartLink.
A screen as the following one is displayed:

152 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Figure 87 SmartLink function

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

The screen is divided into three zones:

• Zone 1: Graphical representation of the link, with icons symbolizing the different
events detected.
• Zone 2: Link Table, which gives a summary of results for each wavelength, with
results within/without thresholds in green/red (according to Alarm thresholds
defined in the setup screen).
• Zone 3: Alarms table (if any)

If several traces are displayed in overlay, with the same wavelength, then
the Zone 2 indicates the results for each wavelength. The graphical repre-
sentation of the Zone 1 is a combination of multiple pulses and wavelengths
acquisitions.

Getting a diagnostic of an event

Diagnosis is used to provide further information about events and eventual problems,
such as root cause possibilities of a failed optical element.
1 Select the event to be described on the graphic (underlined in yellow).
2 Click on Event Diagnostic soft key

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 153

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

A popup window, on the lower part of the screen, gives the information related to
the selected event:
– its type
– thresholds applied for this event
– possible causes of the alarm

Figure 88 Diagnostic Event window

Results table

To display exclusively the results table from the SmartLink page, press the Results
Table softkey.

Press again the Results Table menu key to return to SmartLink display.

Event View

«Event View» provides the possible loss and reflectance of the selected event, per
tested wavelengths.
1 Click on Event View menu key.
In this view, an algorithm automatically identifies the elements of the FTTH link
and label them.
2 Select the event to be described on the graphic (highlight in yellow).

154 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

The corresponding event description is displayed on the Zone 3, with a recall of

alarm threshold for this event:

Figure 89 SmartLink: Event View

3 Click on Trace View to display the selected event in the results table and zoomed
on trace.

NOTE
The event is framed in red if it is above the alarm thresholds defined in the
setup menu.
It is framed in green if it lies within the thresholds.
It is framed in purple if no alarm has been defined for this type of event.

Changing the type of an event

Once the Event View is displayed, the type of event can be modified:
1 Select the event to be modified (highlighted in yellow)
2 Press Event Code menu key
3 Click on the event type to be applied to the selected event:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 155

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
FTTH-SLM Software option

Figure 90 Event Code

Click on one event code to modify the

selected event

4 Click on Exit to return to Event View.

5 Click back on Event View menu key to return to Summary screen
or
Click on Trace View menu key to return to trace (and table) results screen.

NOTE
The event modification is automatically applied on trace and in the results
table.

Splitter sub-menus

The Splitter icon is different according to the menu key pressed in the Splitter sub-
menus.

Example:

If the menu key is pressed, the icon is displayed

If the menu key is pressed, the icon is displayed.

156 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

Moreover, the icon and splitter configuration is different according to the number of
«clicks» on one menu key.

Example with the menu key :

• Click once: the icon is
• Click twice: the icon is
• Click three times: the icon is
• Click four times: the icon is

Click a fifth time to reset the event by default.

Smart Link Cable Option

This chapter describes the use of the Smart Link Cable option, when the software
license has been purchased with an OTDR module.

Principle of Smart Link Cable

The Smart Link Cable option is a function used to manage a cable commissioning or a
multi-fiber test project.

The aims of this option is to:

• improve workflow in cable commissioning (P2P links even with different
distances, for example FTTH drops)
• ensure test consistency
• reduce manipulation errors / issue
• generate a report text file

Configuring the Smart Link Cable project

Configuring the project

Once the OTDR module is set into the T-BERD/MTS, and the Smart Link Cable license
installed:
1 From the Home page, select the Expert OTDR function.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 157

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

2 Press SETUP hard key to display the OTDR configuration screen and:
– Configure the OTDR Acquisition parameters (see page 32)
– Configure the OTDR Alarms parameters (see page 36)
– Configure the OTDR File parameters (see page 48)
3 Press Link Cable menu key .
4 Configure the Link Description parameters (see page 43)
5 In the new window Project Information, configure the project as required:
• Use the Edition keypad to enter a name for Technician Id / Job Id / Contactor Id
/ Sub Contractor Id / Engineer Id.
• Define the Display mode of the Project: Numbering or Labelling.
If Numbering is defined:
– On the parameter Start Fiber, press Edit Number soft key to enter the
number of the first fiber of the cable to be tested (Min 1 / Max 100).
– On the parameter Number Of Fibers, press Edit Number soft key to enter
the total number of fibers of the cable (Min 1 / Max 100).
If Labelling is defined:
– On the parameter Fiber Count, select the type of connector: Simplex /
Duplex / MPO (8/12) / MPO (12/12) / MPO (20/24) / MPO (24/24)
• Press the right direction key to enter a Comment if necessary, using the edition
keypad.

Figure 91 Cable SLM Setup

Cable Commissioning
configuration

158 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

Saving the project

Once all configuration parameters are defined, save the project:
1 Press Save Project soft key (displayed when one parameter of the Cable Project
window is displayed).
2 In the Edition keypad opened, enter a name for the project and press Enter to
validate.

Figure 92 Enter a name for the project

The project file (.prj) contains Acquisition / Alarms / Link / File parameters and is
sa ved in root disk or Harddisk under project > EXPERT_OTDR > OTDR_SM or
OTDR_MM directory.

A directory is automatically generated with the project name, and it is saved under
(hard)disk > Project > EXPERT_OTDR > OTDR_SM or OTDR_MM. Measurements
are stored into this directory, as well as a summary text file.

NOTE
Once a project is created, the parameters cannot be modified except the
acquisition ones.

Loading an existing project

To open the project just created or to load an existing project
1 Press the Manage Project soft key on the Results screen .

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 159

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

2 Select the project file to be used (.prj) in Project > EXPERT_OTDR > OTDR_SM
or OTDR_MM directory.
3 Press Open Project softkey..

Figure 93 Loading a project

Recall of the
Cable Project
parameters

A summary table of all fibers and measurements is displayed.

Starting project test process

Inspect & clean all fiber connections prior to connecting fiber under test to
the OTDR port.

Once the project is loaded, the following screen is displayed.

160 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

Figure 94 Cable view

View «List» See page 158 View «Number»

1 Click on the first fiber to be tested.

2 The fiber number is underlined in purple (n°1 in Figure above)
3 Press START/STOP hard key to start the acquisition.

CAUTION
If a test is launched onto a fiber already tested, a dialog box displays: «Test
already done. Do you really want to repeat the test? Results
files will be deleted.».
Click on Yes to confirm the new test, and by consequence, to delete existing
file(s).
Click on No to cancel the test.

4 Once all wavelengths have been measured, a window opens, asking:

– Click on Yes to test next fiber

– Click on No to return to project table.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 161

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

Trace saving
The traces are automatically stored into the project directory and according to defined
filenaming convention.

Results of project cable

Once fibers have been tested, the project page updates on the fly:

Figure 95 Cable project

Summary of the
selected fiber

Description of the table

An icon is displayed to indicate if the alarm thresholds have been exceeded:
• Pass
• Fail
• No alarm or no test performed

Deactivate the fiber test

Before starting the test, some fibers can be deactivated so that the acquisition will not
be performed.

162 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

1 Select the fiber number which does not need to be tested (framed in black).
2 Click on the soft key Deactivate fiber test.
3 Repeat the process for the fibers which do not have to be tested.

Figure 96 Fibers 4 and 6 deactivated

The deactivated fibers will be skipped while moving to next fiber to test.

CAUTION
If a test is deactivated on a fiber already tested, a dialog box displays:
«You’re about to delete acquisition files. Are you sure?».
Click on Yes to confirm the deactivation, and by consequence, to delete cor-
responding trace(s).
Click on No to cancel the deactivation.

View Trace
1 In the project page, click on the fiber number for which you want to display the
corresponding trace.
2 Click on View Fiber Test soft key.
The trace result page displays.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 163

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

Figure 97 Trace from fiber selected in project

Name of the project Number of the fiber selected

Click to return
to project

Files and Project storage

As soon as a project is saved from Setup page (see “Saving the project” on page 159),
a folder is automatically generated with associated sub-directories.

The project and all corresponding test files are saved in the folder cable_co, automatic
ally created.

The project file is saved in the directory cable_co > OTDR.

164 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

Figure 98 Project files

The project file is not visible in the explorer until the project is closed.

For each project, a subdirectory with the project Id is created, containing test OTDR files
and summary results (in text format): cable_co > OTDR > Project_Id.

Figure 99 Project directory structure with file contents

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 165

Chapter 3 Reflectometry measurements
Smart Link Cable Option

Text file content

As soon as one acquisition is performed from the project, a summary text file (.txt) is
associated to the OTDR test data.

Each new test is inserted into the text file as project process evolves.

This file contains all the summary values of all tested fibers:
– Link loss
– Link distance
– Link ORL

This file uses tabulations to separate values. It is saved with the extension «.txt» and can
be opened by the Platform.

Figure 100 Text file

166 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 4
Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR
application
This chapter describes the Reduced Dead Zone (RDZ) function, available exclusively
with a E8123AV OTDR Module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Description of the RDZ function” on page 168
• “Selecting and configuring the RDZ function” on page 168
• “Performing the measurement” on page 171
• “Results display” on page 172
• “Saving the trace(s) and generating a report” on page 175

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 167

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Description of the RDZ function

Description of the RDZ function

The reduced dead zone (RDZ) multimode OTDR solution has been specifically
designed to characterize and find faults on very short multimode fiber runs such as
aircraft/spacecraft, submarine ships, as well as cable manufacturing.

Selecting and configuring the RDZ function

1 Press the HOME button.
2 Once on the Home page, press the RDZ OTDR icon -> .
3 Press SETUP button to configure the OTDR measurement with RDZ function.

Figure 101 OTDR RDZ Setup

See “Configuring the

Alarms parameters”
on page 36

See “Configuring the

Analysis parameters”
on page 38

See “Configuring the File

See “Configuring the Link
parameters” on page 48
parameters” on page 43

168 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Selecting and configuring the RDZ function

NOTE
The selection of the RDZ function automatically de-selects the selection of
the Multimode function on the same module ,and vice-versa.

Acquisition parameters

Acquisition

Range
Select the range of the measurement: from 50 m to 1km
or
Click on Manual to enter manually a range.
or
Click on Auto to detect automatically the range.
In Auto mode, the range is selected as a function of the end of the fiber.

Time
Select one of the acquisition times predefined: 10 seconds / 20 seconds / 30 seconds /
1 minute.

Otdr connector test

This parameter allows to choose if a test of the front connector must be performed when
acquisition is launched.
No the OTDR connection is tested with indication Bad/Good.
Yes & Continue
the OTDR connection is tested, and if the state is not good, the
acquisition continues but a warning displays.
Yes & Abort the OTDR connection is tested, and if the state is bad, a warning
displays and the acquisition stops.

Launch cable

Launch Cable End / Receive Cable Start

No All the results are displayed and referenced on the basis of the board
of the module.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 169

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Selecting and configuring the RDZ function

Evt 1, 2, 3 The results relating to the launch cable are eliminated from the table.
Attenuation and distances are then measured on the basis of the
marker Evt 1, 2 or 3 selected.
Distance Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance (Min= 0 / Max=50 km /
164.042 kfeet / 31.075 miles) or affect the active cursor value, using
the Set Cursor Distance key.

Figure 102 Launch Cable / Receive Cable

Launch Cable Receive Cable
Fiber Under Test
OTDR

Launch Receive
Cable end Cable start

Distance of the Distance of the

launch cable receive cable

Include Link Start Connector / Include Link End Connector

Defining the Launch Cable End parameter with an event number or a distance will auto-
matically activate the corresponding parameter Include Link Start Connector. This
parameters can be set to Yes if the budget must include the connectors loss of the
launch cable at end

Defining the Receive Cable Start parameter with an event number or a distance, will
automatically activate the corresponding parameter Include Link End Connector. This
parameters can be set to Yes if the budget must include the connectors loss of the
launch cable at start
If those parameters are set to No, the budget only displays the connector loss of the
fiber.

170 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Performing the measurement

Performing the measurement

Once the measurement is correctly configured, the acquisition can be performed.
1 Press START STOP button on the T-BERD/MTS to launch the acquisition.
The red Testing indicator goes on to show that the Platform 8000 is in process of
acquisition and the screen displays the trace in process of acquisition.
2 The quality of the connection is displayed for a few
seconds (see Table 3 on page 56)
3 Then, a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time.

Figure 103 Acquisition in progress in RDZ mode

Elapsed Number of Elapsed Total acquisition

acquisition averages time time
time calculated

At the end of the acquisition, a beep is emitted, and the measurements are displayed.

Performing an acquisition from Results page

Once the results page is displayed, you can perform a new acquisition modifying the
main acquisition parameters.

CAUTION
Before launching a new OTDR acquisition, make sure the trace(s) dis-
played have been previously saved if necessary, as the new acquisi-
tion will automatically delete the displayed results.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 171

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Results display

1 On Results page, press the softkey Quick Setup: the acquisition parameters to
be modified are displayed under the results trace:

Figure 104 Results page and Quick Setup menu

2 Modify the acquisition parameters wished in the displayed menu: see page 169.
3 Once configured, launch the new OTDR test pressing the START/STOP hard key.

Press again (Quick) Setup menu key to hide the menu under the trace.

Results display
The traces acquired or recalled from a memory are displayed on the Results page.

Figure 105 Trace and table results

172 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Results display

The 8 lines table gives the type and the characteristics of all the events detected
during the measurement: the 8 first lines displayed correspond to the 8 first
events nearest to the cursor. The line corresponding to the event nearest to the
cursor is highlighted. This highlighting moves if the cursor is moved.

Once Trace is selected, press validation key to pass from Trace + results table on
8 lines to Trace + results table on 1 line, and vice-versa
The table with one line displayed under the trace gives the type and characteris-
tics of the event nearest to the cursor.

Figure 106 Trace results

At the top of the table, a line shows the generic parameters of the fiber: numbers of
events present and the total ORL of the link.

Each event is referenced under the trace by a number which is repeated in the first
column of the table. The table then shows:
• icon symbolizing the type of the event:

Receive cable Start

Launch cable End: the attenuation and distances are measured on the basis of
the corresponding marker.

Non-reflective attenuation (e.g. splice).

Splitter.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 173

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Results display

Reflective event. (e.g. connector)

Ghost reflection.

Slope of the fiber (when no fault follows the slope).

End of fiber

OTDR connector

Event marker when a measurement cannot be carried out. If the event to be

added is too close to an existing event, the icon appears on the trace and the
table, but no measurement is carried out: to obtain the results for this event, a
manual measurement is necessary.

Merged Connectors Loss

– Total group loss = loss on last connector
– Loss connector N-1 = 0 dB)

The event underlined in yellow is the one the nearest of the cursor set on trace. To visu-
alize an event, click on this event on the table to set the cursor on it onto the trace.

See OTDR chapter “Detailed description of an event” on page 72.

The Trace view allows actions on trace, similar to standard OTDR traces:
• Setting Cursors on trace: see page 73
• Zoom on trace: see “Zoom function” on page 75
• Shifting a trace: see “Shift function (Expert OTDR only)” on page 77
• Modifying measurements: “Automatic measurement and detection” on page 85
• Adding an event: “Addition of events” on page 85
• Memorization of the events position: see “Memorization of the position of events”
on page 95
• Overlaying trace: see “Overlay trace function” on page 96

SLM view
The SLM (Smart Link Mapper) function is automatically available with the RDZ applica-
tion.

To display the SLM view of the results, press SLM on the Trace/SLM menu key.

174 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Figure 107 SLM view

Refer to page 79 to page 123 for a complete description of the SLM screen.

Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the trace(s) can be saved and a report can be gener-
ated directly from the results screen.

Saving results and creating a report from results page

To save the trace and generate a report:
1 Press Fast Report key -> .
A menu displays under the trace.
2 In the menu, configure the file saving mode (and the report).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 175

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Figure 108 Fast report configuration

a In the Save Mode parameter, select:

File Only to save exclusively the trace in a asor file.
File + txt to save the trace in a asor file and to generate a txt file of the
results.
File + pdf to save the trace in a asor file and to generate a report in a pdf
format.
All: to save the trace in a asor file and to generate one txt report and one pdf
report.

NOTE
The Save mode is defined to Standard or Combo mode from the Setup > File
page. See “Report Layout” on page 51

b In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
c Modify the Fiber Number / Fiber Code using the key .
The parameter is different according to the Cable Structure configuration
(see “Cable structure” on page 45).
d In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A)
e In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
3 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
4 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad.
or

176 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Click on Auto Filenaming menu key to apply the file name defined in the Setup
screen, in Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 50)
5 Press Enter to validate.

NOTE
The sor file and the txt or pdf file will have the same name.

The icon displays during saving process.

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform.

NOTE
The file and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

NOTE
The file saving can also be performed from the File page (see “Saving Files
from the Explorer” on page 539).

Saving and report for traces in overlay

If several traces are displayed in overlay in the results page, one or several file(s)/
report(s) is/are generated:
• If in the File Setup page (SETUP > File), the parameter File Content is defined
with One Trace, one .sor file and one pdf/txt report will be generated for each
trace
Example: if 3 traces are displayed in overlay, 3 .sor files and 3 pdf/txt files will be
saved.
• If in the File Setup page (SETUP > File), the parameter File Content is defined
with All Traces, one single .msor file and one single txt/pdf report will be gener-
ated, bringing together all traces.
Example: if 3 traces are displayed in overlay, one single .msor file and one single
txt/pdf file (with one trace per page; except if the results table is too long for one
page) will be saved.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 177

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

Opening a report
1 To open the report, press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the file/report.
The file name is:
For the txt file: trace file_sor.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.sor.pdf
3 Press Load.
The file opens on the Platform 8000.

Figure 109 Example of TXT and PDF reports

Header

Fiber /Cable
description

OTDR Setup

Alarms
thresholds Trace

Summary

Results
table

178 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A PDF Report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on page 545).

Recalling files
Once a file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:
1 Select the directory and then the file to open
2 Click on Load
3 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 179

Chapter 4 Reduced Dead Zone OTDR application
Saving the trace(s) and generating a report

180 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 5
Chapter 5 Power meter and Source
functions of the OTDR Modules
The source function is available:
• either as an option of the OTDR Module (E81OTDRLS)
• or on standard with the OTDR E81xxB and E81xxC module series

The power meter is available exclusively with the OTDR E81xxB and E81xxC module
series.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Connection to the power meter and the source” on page 182
• “Configuring the Power meter” on page 182
• “Activating the Source function” on page 184
• “Result page” on page 185
• “Performing the power level measurement” on page 188
• “Performing the insertion loss measurement” on page 189
• “Storing and reloading results” on page 192

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 181

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Connection to the power meter and the source

Connection to the power meter and the source

The type of optical connector used for the power meter and/or source is the same as the
OTDR port.

It is not possible to use simultaneously the Source function and the

Powermeter function, when both options are set onto the OTDR mod-
ule, as they use the same connector.

Configuring the Power meter

The power meter function is delivered on standard with the E81xxB and E81xxC OTDR
Modules.

To activate the function:

1 Press the HOME button
2 Use the direction keys or touchscreen to select the power meter icon in the
section of the OTDR Module .

The effect of this action will to be to bring the power meter into use.

Configuring the measurement parameters of the

power meter
The measurement parameters can be accessed with the SETUP key.

182 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Configuring the Power meter

Figure 110 Configuration of power measurement

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the
Link parameters” on page 43 File parameters” on page 48

Configuring the alarm parameters of the power meter

• Alarm Activation of the Alarm function: any result below the lower
threshold or above the upper threshold will be displayed in red
on the Results page.
• Min and max thresholds:
Choice of lower and upper thresholds for each available
wavelength, from -60 to +40 dBm (selected with the direction
keys).

NOTE
To copy one value of the Lower or/and Upper threshold for all wavelengths,
select the reference value and click on Update for All Wavel..

NOTE
A continuous push on direction keys increments the value by 10 dBm.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 183

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Activating the Source function

Configuring the Measurement parameters

In the Setup page, press Measur’t softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Measur’t)
Wavelength Select wavelength:
Auto: the wavelength of the input signal will be automatically
detected and selected to perform the measurement:
1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 or 1650 nm: measurement performed at
specified wavelength.
Beep on modulation
Select if a sound must be heard when a modulation occurs (Yes /
No)
Unit Unit of power displayed:
Watt, dBm for displaying absolute power
dB for displaying a result relative to a reference (link loss)
Reference level If dB units were chosen in the previous line, selection of the refer-
ence value for the wavelength selected. Using the direction keys,
first choose the wavelength, then press the > key to access choice of
the value (+XXX.XX), then confirm this value with the ENTER key.
This reference is also automatically available, in the Results page,
using the Set as Reference key.
Attenuator compensation
Choice of level to be applied to the wavelength chosen for measure-
ment to compensate for the loss due to the external attenuator
(+XX.XX dB). First use the direction keys to choose the wavelength,
then press to access choice of value, then confirm this value
pressing ENTER.

NOTE
To copy a Reference Level/Attenuator Compensator on all wavelengths,
select the reference wavelength and click on Update for All Wavel..

Activating the Source function

The Source function is an option chosen at the time of order and incorporated into the
OTDR module in the factory.

To activate the function:

184 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Result page

1 Press the HOME button

2 Use the direction keys or touchscreen to select the Source icon in the section of
the OTDR Module.
3 With direction keys, press the ENTER key.
The icon is selected .

Result page
The results page called up by the RESULTS button, gives the information relating to the
measurement in progress, results previously saved and the commands available for
measurement and saving.

Result page of the Power meter

The power measured by the power meter is displayed in large characters, in the units
selected in the SETUP menu, together with:
• the mode of transmission of the signal measured: continuous (CW) or modulated
to a frequency of 270Hz, 330Hz, 1KHz, or 2KHz.
• the wavelength of the signal measured.
• the reference level expressed in dB.
• the level of Attenuation Compensation.

Table of results
For one and the same fiber, the power meter displays a table of 9 results corresponding
to the different possible wavelengths. The table shows the power measured in dBm, the
relative power (in dB) and the reference level in dBm (if units = dB), together with the
mode.
• A measurement result is displayed in the table when the Keep Result softkey is
pressed.
• The Clear Table softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table.
• If the Alarm function has been activated, any result that exceeds the selected
thresholds appears in red in the table. Otherwise, results are shown in the table in
green.
• When the instrument is switched off, results present in the table are saved.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 185

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Result page

Figure 111 Results and commands of the power meter

Commands of the power meter parameters

When the Powermeter function is selected, the following softkeys are available on the
results page:

The different configuration buttons are displayed:

Wavelength Selection of the wavelength
Unit Choice of the unit
Zero Adjustment of the Zero value when the power meter’s optical input is
closed with a plug (a validation is required).

On the results page, the following actions are available:

Standard Reference
Selects the current result as reference value to measure the attenua-
tion of a link. This reference is displayed under the measurement
result until a new reference value is chosen.
Keep Result Saves the result on the corresponding line of the table.
Clear Table Deletes all the results recorded in the table.

If the Source function is selected (either on this Platform, on the base Unit or on an
OTDR module, or on another Platform), the Power meter results page is different:
• The Wavelength, Unit and Zero menu keys are accessible via the menu key
Power Config.

186 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Result page

• The Power Ref. menu key allows to reach the Standard Ref menu key. It also
allows to reach the Jumper Ref menu key if Power meter function is associated
with Source function onto another unit (see “Carrying out the reference in loop-
back mode” on page 191).

Result page of the Source

Once the source icon is selected, click on the SETUP or RESULTS button to display the
result page and to configure the source.

Figure 112 Source result page

Laser On / Laser Off

Activation or shut-down of the laser (same function as the START/
STOP button)
When the laser is on, the icon is displayed.

The parameters of the source can be accessed directly on the result screen:
Wavelength To change the wavelength when a multi-wavelength source is
present (depending on option).
The wavelength value is displayed.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 187

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Performing the power level measurement

Mode To vary the mode of emission of the source. Possible modulation

values are:
– 270 Hz / 330 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz
– Auto (the sources emit on determined frequencies to enable the power
meter to detect the wavelength used automatically)
– TwinTest (cyclical emission on all available wavelengths for a few seconds
on each wavelength).
– CW (continuous emission)
The mode used is displayed, above the icon .
Standard Reference
To perform a side by side reference measurement (see “Carrying out
the side by side reference” on page 189).

If the power meter function is selected onto the equipment (either on Base-Unit or on
OTDR module) the menu keys are different on screen:
Source Config
Allows to display the following keys:
– Wavelength and Mode menu keys
– The Source Reference menu key, which allows to open a sub-menu with
the following keys:
Standard Ref:to perform a reference in side by side mode (see “Carrying
out the side by side reference” on page 189).
Jumper Ref:to perform a reference measurement in loopback mode (see
“Carrying out the reference in loopback mode” on page 191)).

Performing the power level measurement

The power meter is started up as soon as the function is activated in the
HOME page.

It is not possible to use simultaneously the Source function and the

Powermeter function, when both options are set onto the OTDR mod-
ule, as they use the same connector.

Power measurement is automatically updated in consequence. The value

«<-50 dBm» is displayed when the laser is switched off and if the source
output is looped on to the power meter input.

188 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Performing the insertion loss measurement

1 Connect the light source to be tested to the rear connector (see "Connection to
the power meter and the source" page -182).
2 In the SETUP menu, choose the units dBm, dB or Watts.
3 Press the START/STOP key to start the measurement.
The result will appear in the results page and can be memorized in the table (see
"Table of results" page -185).
4 Press the START/STOP key to stop the measurement.

Performing the insertion loss measurement

Using light source and power meter, an insertion loss measurement can be performed,
having previously carried out a reference measurement.

Setting the zero value of the power meter

1 Fix the plug over the optical input of the power meter so that no light can reach
the photodiode of the power meter. If the zero adjustment is made without this
plug, an error message may be displayed, as the photodiode will detect too much
light.
2 In the Results page, press Zero soft key and validate.

It is important to set the zero of the power meter before making any mea-
surements where accuracy is required, as the noise from the germanium
photodiode fluctuates over time and with variations in temperature.

Carrying out the reference

Using two T-BERD/MTS-8000 V2/6000(A), with an OTDR module including a laser
source option and a Power meter option, an insertion loss measurement in continuous
wave can be performed.

Two types of reference are available: referencing in side by side mode and referencing
in loopback mode.

Carrying out the side by side reference

This reference can be carried out when both units are connected together meaning they
have to be at the same location.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 189

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Performing the insertion loss measurement

Figure 113 Side by side reference

MTS / BERD 8000 V2 (1) Bulkhead MTS / BERD 8000 V2 (2)
connector Mainframe or
OTDR OTDR module
Source
Jumpers

1 Before connecting fiber/jumper, use appropriate cleaning tool to clean connector

end-faces.
2 Connect the two jumpers together via a bulkhead connector.
3 Set, on MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 (1), the OTDR light source as "Standard Ref"
a Press the HOME key
b Select the Source function from the OTDR Module on Home page .
c Press RESULTS key
d In the Results page, press Standard Ref
e Select the Twintest mode by skipping through the different modes via the
Mode menu key.
f Press Laser On key to activate the source
4 Set, on MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 (2), the power meter (from OTDR module or from
the Base-unit) as "Standard Ref"
a Press the HOME key
b Use the arrow keys or touchscreen to select the Powermeter function of the
Base-Unit, in Home page .
c Press RESULTS key
d In the Results page, press Standard Ref.
The actual power level is set as the new reference level for the selected
wavelength. Then, the displayed value is around 00.00 dB.

The reference levels are stored into the unit, and have been automatically filled into the
setup.

190 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Performing the insertion loss measurement

Carrying out the reference in loopback mode

This reference can be carried out when the units are separated, at different locations. It
is made using the OTDR source and the power meter built-in the platform.

NOTE
Each platform must be equipped with a power meter set onto the base-unit.

Figure 114 Reference in loopback mode

Source of the Power meter of Power meter of
OTDR module 8000 V2 base unit 8000 V2 base unit
OTDR m e OTDR m e
fra fra
ain Source of the ain
V 2M OTDR module V2M
0 0
800 800
MTS / BERD 8000 V2 (1) MTS / BERD 8000 V2 (2)

1 To reference the OTDR light source, on MTS/T-BERD 8000 V2 (1)

a Select the OTDR Source icon in Home page , on the OTDR area.
b Press RESULTS key
c In the LTS result page, press Source Config. > Source Reference >
Jumper Ref..
A popup message appears
d Connect the jumper from the OTDR source to the mainframe power meter,
and then press OK.
The reference measurement is performed automatically.
A popup message appears when it's done: press any key to continue
2 To reference the mainframe power meter, on MTS/T-BERD 8000 V2 (2)
a Select the Optical Powermeter icon of the mainframe in Home
page.
b In the LTS result page, press Pow. Reference > Jumper Ref..
A popup message appears
c Connect the jumper from the OTDR port to the mainframe power meter, and
then press OK
The reference is performed automatically.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 191

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Storing and reloading results

A popup message appears once done. Press any key to continue

The reference levels are stored into the unit, and have been automatically filled into the
setup.

Measurements on the fiber under test

Once the references have been performed on both units:
1 After a reference in loopback mode, disconnect the jumper from the powermeter
port on the MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 (1) and the jumper from the Source port on
the MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 (2).
After a reference in Side by side mode, disconnect the bulkhead connector and
keep the jumpers connected to the Source and Powermeter ports.
2 Connect the jumpers to the fiber under test using the appropriate method (ex.
keying mechanism for FC/PC types).
3 On MTS / T-BERD (1) select Laser On to activate the light source.

Figure 115 Measurement of the fiber under test

Fiber Under Test

OTDR Module: Mainframe

Source port Power meter
port
Jumper
MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 (1) MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 (2)

Storing and reloading results

File Setup
Click on the button FILE to access the File setup. See the chapter Chapter 20 “File
management” for a complete description of all parameters, options and the explorer.

Storing results
In order to save the results of a measurement, click on FILE and select Store trace. Two
files are being saved:

192 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Storing and reloading results

• The first file is to be used with the equipment and allows to retrieve all measure-
ment results. It is saved with the extension .Lts.
• The second file is a ASCII file using tabulations to separate values. It is saved
with the extension «.txt» and can be opened by the 8000 V2 Platform via the Web
Browser. It has been designed to be used with a spreadsheet program on a PC
where it allows to retrieve all measurement results and format them in a nice
customized table.

Loading results
In order to load the results of a measurement
1 Select a file with the extension «.Lts» in the file explorer (see Chapter 20),
2 Click on Load > View trace.
The LTS tab is displayed with the loaded results in the table.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 193

Chapter 5 Power meter and Source functions of the OTDR Modules
Storing and reloading results

194 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 6
Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
This chapter describes the different steps to perform an automatic bi-directional
measurement (also called OEO measurement = Origin-End-Origin).This measurement
requires that two T-BERD/MTS-8000 V2 or 6000(A) are connected at each extremity of
the fiber under test. Every MTS/T-BERD must be equipped with the software option
called «OEO-OTDR» and with both optical talkset and OTDR module.

It is strongly recommended that the same type of OTDR is used (same

reference) at each extremity of the fiber.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Definition of terms used” on page 196
• “Description of the measurement” on page 196
• “Configuration of bi-directional measurement” on page 198
• “Performing a bi-directional measurement” on page 200
• “Trace display functions” on page 205
• “OEO Result table” on page 207
• “Automatic measurement and addition of markers in OEO page” on page 207
• “Test of a cable” on page 208
• “Saving the traces and generating a report” on page 209
• “Troubleshooting” on page 213

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 195

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Definition of terms used

Definition of terms used

Master / Slave unit

The master unit is the MTS/T-BERD that initiates the measurement at one extremity of
the fiber.

The slave unit is the MTS/T-BERD connected on the other extremity of the fiber, and
connected to the master unit via the data connection.

Local / remote unit

These terms are used in the Process Display page (see “Process page display (with two
T-BERD 8000 V2)” on page 202). Each unit is considered as «Local» on its own screen.

NOTE
These terms are to be distinguished from the measurement direction and
extremities of the fiber (see “Configuring the Link parameters” on page 43
and “Configuring the File parameters” on page 48)

Description of the measurement

NOTE
The measurement principle and methods used are described in “Principle of
bi-directional measurement” on page 4.

Thanks to the software option OEO-OTDR, bi-directional measurement can be fully

automatic.

A minimum of two fibers is required. Two MTS/T-BERDs equipped with the talkset option
and an OTDR plug-in are linked at every extremity of the fiber to test at the same time.
A data connection is established between the two talkset ports of the units via another
fiber, in order to exchange orders, configurations and measurement results.

196 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Description of the measurement

NOTE
For automatic bidirectional OTDR testing, two units having the talkset option
and the E80 bidirectional option are required.

Example with 6000 series

Data

Tested Fiber

Fully automatic bi-directional acquisitions can not be performed with-

out a data connection (see «Data transfer» in the user manual of the
MTS/T-BERD, reference 8000EM02 for example).

Please check that the OTDR function has been selected (see “Activating the OTDR
function” on page 26).

For best measurements and in order to qualify the fiber link and connectors,
launch cables shall be inserted between the OTDR modules and the link.

Summary of the automatic operation procedure

• Test if both units are linked to the same fiber
• Consistency verification of the OTDR plug-in between the two units.
• Consistency verification of acquisition configuration, measurement and files, fiber
and link definition. Then transfer of the master unit configuration to the slave unit
if necessary.
• Acquisition start on the master unit

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 197

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Configuration of bi-directional measurement

• Trace transfer to the slave unit

• Acquisition start on the slave unit
• Trace transfer to the master unit
• Bi-directional measurement on both units
• Results storage in a single «.OEO» file or in two «.SOR» files.

All this test procedure is fully automatic, and all results are immediately accessible on
both units.

Configuration of bi-directional measurement

To access the OEO configuration menu, press the button SETUP from the MTS/T-BERD.
OEO parameters are now displayed.

Please check that the OEO-OTDR tab has been selected.

Acquisition parameters are the same as for OTDR measurements (see “Configuring the
reflectometry test” on page 28 for their description). Only different or extra parameters
are presented in this chapter.

198 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Configuration of bi-directional measurement

Figure 116 OEO test setup menu

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the
Alarms parameters” on page 36

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring

the Analysis parameters” on
page 38

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring See OTDR Setup: “Configuring

the Link parameters” on page 43 the File parameters” on
page 48

Acquisition parameters
Laser Acquisition will be performed on all selected wavelengths, as long as
they are available on the remote OTDR as well. If not, acquisition will
be performed on all wavelengths selected and common to both
OTDRs. Please see the recommendation on page 196 about using
the same type of OTDR)
Acquisition Bi-directional measurement allows manual and Auto modes only.
Operation is the same as for OTDR measurement.

Alarms parameters
The alarms apply to the measurements average, and not to the measurements for each
side (as it is in the classical OTDR mode)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 199

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Performing a bi-directional measurement

Configuration of files parameters

To access the files configuration menu of the OEO-OTDR tab, press the button FILE.

Related parameters are then displayed.

All parameters to describe the files, the fiber and the link are proposed in order to save
all measurements. Please refer to “Configuring the File parameters” on page 48. Only
differences are presented in this chapter.

File Content

This option allows to choose to save a bi-directional measurement under two different
formats (see “Recalling OEO traces” on page 213):
One Trace The bi-directional measurement is saved in two different
«.SOR» files
All Traces The bi-directional measurement is saved in a single file
«.OEO».
One and All Traces Both the .OEO and the two .sor files will be saved.

NOTE
For best use, it is recommended to use the auto file naming (with fiber code,
origin, end, lambda, fiber name and auto-store). These parameters are
applied on the master MTS/T-BERD.

Performing a bi-directional measurement

Process Display
The Process page displays the bi-directional measurement steps, the Curve page
displays the traces and results and the Summary page displays a summary of the
results in a table (and the alarms result if alarms have been configured in the Setup
page).

In order to display the Process page, make sure you are currently under the OEO-
OTDR tab, and press the key RESULTS.

200 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Performing a bi-directional measurement

The key View Process/Curves/Summary allows to change from the Curve page to the
Process page and to the Summary page.

In order to select and follow the status of a measurement, go to the Process page.

NOTE
When a measurement has been started, the slave MTS/T-BERD automati-
cally displays the Process page.

The Process screen is divided in three zones:

1 Information zone:
– Representation of the local MTS/T-BERD, with identification1
– Representation of the distant MTS/T-BERD, with identification2
– Status of the data connection: grayed when the link has been cut or the
connection not yet established, yellow when the connection is operational
– Status of the fiber connection: this is the status of the last tested fiber. The
fiber is represented cut and is grayed if the two units are not connected on
the same fiber. If the two units are connected on the same fiber, the link
does not appear cut. When a measurement is processed, the fiber is
displayed in red
– When the fiber connection is established, information providing the module
type and available wavelengths is displayed for both local and distant units
2 User guide zone:

A grey banner is displayed in the center of the screen where operation messages are
displayed.

The icon for keeping all events in memory is displayed in this zone if the key Lock
Evt/Free Evts is set on Lock Evt. In this case, the following measurement is performed
using those markers (see “Memorization of the position of events” on page 95).

NOTE
This function keeps markers in memory for both local trace and distance
trace.

1.includes serial numbers of the mainframe and module as well as available wave-
lengths
2.requires active data connection

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 201

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Performing a bi-directional measurement

1 Measurement status zone:

When a bi-directional measurement has been launched, all the different steps in the
measurement process are presented in this zone. Each one is detailed later in this
chapter.

NOTE
The general information banner is displayed at the top of the screen as for all
other tabs. When a OEO measurement is performed, Data icon is dis-
played as soon as a data connection is established.

Figure 117 Process page display (with two T-BERD 8000 V2)
Data connection status Fiber connection status

Information
zone

User guide
zone

Measurement
status zone

Identifier of the origin or end of the fiber Information Information concerning

according to the direction OE or EO concerning local unit remote unit

Fiber link check

To ensure that the two units are connected to the same fiber under test, select Check
same fiber. If the fiber is the same at both extremities, a symbol will be displayed
on the measurement status zone.

202 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Performing a bi-directional measurement

Measurement process
Fiber measurement

Step 1
1 Choose to use the markers stored in memory or not by selecting Lock Evt or
Free Evts.

NOTE
If the markers events are already defined for the link, you may select the
Lock Evt key. This implies that the unit will now perform measurements with
those markers. Otherwise select Free Evts.

2 Press START to begin the measurement.

The line Check if same set up on both units becomes In progress... .

NOTE
A warning may occur if the configurations of the two units are different (see
“Warning/errors resulting from common configurations” on page 214).

The begin launch cable is transferred to the end launch cable, and the end launch cable
is transferred to the begin launch cable. The master MTS/T-BERD must indeed know
both extremities of the fiber and will send the information to the slave MTS/T-BERD. The
direction of the link is defined by the master MTS/T-BERD, which transmits the opposite
direction to the slave MTS/T-BERD.

In the File configuration, each MTS/T-BERD points to its own directory. Only the master
MTS/T-BERD may save a measurement. Auto storage and File Content parameters
only concern the master unit and are not compared or transferred to the slave MTS/T-
BERD.

The list of lasers for which a measurement will be performed is set by the master MTS/
T-BERD. If these lasters are not all available on the slave MTS/T-BERD, the list shall be
restricted to the ones that are available.

When both menus SETUP and FILE are identical, the validation symbol is displayed
and the process goes to Step 2.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 203

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Performing a bi-directional measurement

Step 2
The line <Check if same fiber for both units> becomes <In progress...>. If the master MTS/
T-BERD successfully detects the other MTS/T-BERD at the extremity of the fiber under
test, the validation symbol is displayed, and the process proceeds to Step 3. Otherwise,
the red cross is displayed and the measurement is stopped.

Step 3
The master MTS/T-BERD performs the acquisition using the first wavelength in the list.
The acquisition time selected on the Setup screen is displayed on each MTS/T-BERD,
either in the «Local» column or the «Remote» column, depending on which MTS/T-
BERD is considered. When the measurement is terminated, the message <Completed>
is displayed. The trace is transferred to the other MTS/T-BERD.

Step 4
The slave MTS/T-BERD performs the acquisition using the same wavelength. The
message acquisition time selected on the Setup screen is displayed on each MTS/T-
BERD, either in the «Local» column or the «Remote» column, according to which MTS/
T-BERD is considered. The message <Completed> is displayed when the measurement
is terminated,. The trace is transferred to the master MTS/T-BERD.

Step 5
The bi-directional measurement is completed.

NOTE
The message <Impossible measurement> is displayed if the measurement has
not been able to detect the end of the fiber on any of the two traces. The
measurement must be performed once more with new acquisition parame-
ters or by placing markers manually on the measurement.

Step 6
Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5 are performed for each wavelength to test.

IMPORTANT

It is possible to stop the measurement at any step of the process, by pressing the button
START/STOP on the master MTS/T-BERD.

204 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Trace display functions

It is also possible to request from the slave MTS/T-BERD that the measurement is
stopped, by pressing the button START/STOP. The master unit receives the request via
a message on the screen: <Remote asks for stop, do you agree ?>. If Yes, the measurement
is stopped, if No, the measurement resumes.

Trace display functions

Figure 118 Butterfly representation of the bi-directional measurement

Selection:
- Local
- Remote
- Bi-Directional

By selecting the Curves, with the View Process / Curves / Summary key, the unit
displays the traces and results like in classical OTDR mode, adding bi-directional
measurement results.

The menu key View Process/Trace/Summary is not available if the OEO

license is not installed onto the Platform.

1
In the Trace page, the multi-choice key allows to visualize successively the
local trace, the remote trace, or both superposed.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 205

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Trace display functions

NOTE
The remote trace is reversed in order to superpose both traces in a «butterfly
fashion» (see Figure 118 on page 205).

NOTE
You may only use this key to change page when the measurement is com-
pleted. When the measurement is completed, the Curve page correspond-
ing to the local MTS/T-BERD is automatically displayed (Origin if the
direction of the link has been defined O->E, End if the direction of the link
has been defined E->O).

Origin and End traces

Bi-directional measurement may be performed using up to 4 different wavelengths. We
can therefore analyze successively up to 4 couples of Origin and End traces.

In order to go from one couple to another, activate the Wavelength/Evt key, select
Wavelength, and move from one trace to another using arrows.

These traces are OTDR traces. All regular OTDR functions are proposed to modify the
display (Zoom/Shift, Cursors, Evt, Curve/Table, Full scale,...).

Just like in OTDR mode, the user will be able to work on these traces in order to analyze
the fiber: by moving events, consulting the selected trace associated result table,
asking for an auto-measurement, adding markers, and doing manual measure-
ments.
See “Results table” on page 69, “Addition of events” on page 85 and “Manual measure-
ments” on page 90.

When the user comes back to OEO trace, all modifications done on either the
Origin curve or on the End curve are now taken in account. The OEO mea-
surement is performed again.

1.In our example, St-Etienne corresponds to the extremity connected to the local
unit, Lyon corresponds to the extremity connected to the remote unit.

206 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
OEO Result table

OEO trace
Only one couple of OE and EO traces is displayed, corresponding to one wavelength.

If the measurement has been performed on different wavelengths, select Wavelength

on the key Wavelength/Evt in order to go from one couple of traces to another, using
direction keys.
Functions such as Zoom/Shift, Cursors, Evt, Curve/Table, Full scale... are all the
same as for OTDR but the table result as well as the use of markers are specific
to OEO measurements.

OEO Result table

Bi-directional measurement results use principles described in “Principle of bi-directional
measurement” on page 4.

The total loss of the fiber (on the line specifying the total number of events) is resulting
from the average between the total loss calculated in the direction O->E and the total
loss calculated in the other direction.

Three tables are available in the OEO curve page, each showing attenuation, slope and
reflectance.

In order to go from one table to another,

1 Click on the Advanced key
2 Click on Loss/Slope/Reflect. key and select one of the three possibilities.

Automatic measurement and addition of markers

in OEO page
Key Delete/Auto Meas
When this key is activated in the OEO page, and Delete> is selected, OEO measure-
ment is erased as well as OTDR measurement, for both origin and end traces.

When Auto Meas is selected, auto-measurement is performed once more for both origin
and end traces, resulting in a new OEO measurement.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 207

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Test of a cable

Addition of markers
In order to modify a marker on any of both origin and end traces, select cursor A or B,
position your cursor when you want to modify or add a marker and press the key Set
Event:
– If there was no marker at this position, a new one is added on both origin and
end traces
– If there was two markers, one on each of both origin and end traces, both are
deleted
– If there was only one marker, either on the origin trace or on the end trace, a
second marker is added, on the trace when none was present.

Markers display
Markers are available on the trace taken from the origin.

Markers are available on the trace taken from the end.

NOTE
Acquisitions must be done with the same resolution. If not, the addition of
markers cannot be performed perfectly.

Test of a cable
In order to test a full cable, it is first necessary to make an OEO reference trace, where
all fiber events have been marked on both origin and end traces.

This trace may be obtained by requesting an auto-measurement after which markers

may be added, or by performing a manual measurement.

The next step consists in memorizing all markers, by selecting Lock Evts in the Process
page.

NOTE
If the auto mode was set for the referencing, it is recommended to change to
manual mode for the next fibers. This will ensure that setup parameters used
for all the fibers will be the same than those used for the reference trace.

208 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Saving the traces and generating a report

Finally, a bi-directional automatic measurement is performed for each fiber. Results are
stored in either one «.OEO» file or two «.SOR» files.

Saving the traces and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the traces can be saved and a report can be gener-
ated directly from the results screen.

Saving results and creating a report from results page

To save the trace (and generate a report):
1 Check in the results page that the OEO view is selected .
2 Press Advanced > Fast Report key
A menu displays under the trace.
3 In the menu, configure the file saving (and the report).

Figure 119 Fast report configuration

a In the Fiber Number parameter, modify if necessary the number of the fiber
b In the Save Mode parameter, select:
File Only to save exclusively the traces in one oeo file or several .sor files
File + txt to save the trace in a oeo file or several .sor files and generate a
txt file of the results
File + pdf to save the trace in a oeo file or several .sor files and generate a
report of the trace and results in a pdf file.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 209

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Saving the traces and generating a report

NOTE
Traces are saved in oeo or sor format according to the configuration of the
parameter File Content (FILE > Setup). See “Saving and report for traces in
overlay” on page 211

c In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
d Modify the Fiber Number / Fiber Code using the key .
The parameter is different according to the Cable Structure configuration
(see “Cable structure” on page 45).
e In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A)
f In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
4 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
5 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad
or
Click on Auto Filenaming menu key to apply the file name defined in the Setup
screen, in Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 50)
6 Press Enter to validate.

NOTE
The oeo/sor file(s) and the txt/pdf file will have the same name.

The icon displays during saving process.

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform.

NOTE
The file(s) and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

210 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Saving the traces and generating a report

NOTE
The file saving can also be performed from the FILE > Explorer page (see
“Saving Files from the Explorer” on page 539).

Saving and report for traces in overlay

As several traces are displayed in overlay in the results page, one or several file(s)/
report(s) is/are generated:
• If in the File Setup page (FILE > Setup), the parameter File Content is defined
with One Trace, one .sor file and one pdf/txt report will be generated for each
trace (one file for trace O -> E and one file for trace E-> O).
• If in the File Setup page (FILE > Setup), the parameter File Content is defined
with All Traces, one single .oeo file and one single txt/pdf report will be gener-
ated, bringing together all traces: trace O -> E, trace E-> O and Bi-directional.
Example: if 2 traces are displayed in overlay, one single .oeo file and one single
txt/pdf file will be saved.

Opening a report
1 To open the report, press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the pdf file of the report.
The file name is:
For the txt file: trace file_oeo.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.oeo.pdf
3 Press Load.
The pdf file opens on the platform.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 211

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Saving the traces and generating a report

Figure 120 PDF report

File description

Parameters used
for acquisition

Graphical
representation of the

Trace

Results table

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A PDF Report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS 8000 V2 or 6000/6000A (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on
page 545).

212 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Troubleshooting

Recalling OEO traces

Recalling a «.OEO» file:

If the OEO software option is available, loading a «.OEO» file with the Load key followed
by View Trace key will open automatically the OEO-OTDR tab in order to display the
OEO trace.

Recalling two «.SOR» files:

Wether the OEO software option is available or not, if the two «.SOR» files corre-
sponding to a bi-directional measurement are selected, the key Load Bi-dir. appears.
The OEO trace is then displayed.

NOTE
If both traces are not compatible (not performed using the same wavelength
and pulse width), a error message is displayed <Acquisition parameters for
these two files are different ! >

For further information on File management, see Chapter 20 “File management”

Troubleshooting
Warning/errors after pressing the key Start

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

No data link. Activate con- No data connection Go back to Home page to establish a
nection before START connection
No tab OEO-OTDR on No software option Bi-directional measurement impossi-
remote Platform OEO-OTDR on ble if no software option on remote
remote Platform Platform
Remote Unit not ready OTDR resource has Go back to Home page on the remote
not been selected Unit to select the OTDR function
No resource for remote Plat- OTDR resource is Stop measurement on remote Unit to
form already being used free the resource

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 213

Chapter 6 Bi-directional OTDR
Troubleshooting

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

No response from remote Data link problem Check the data connection
Unit

Warning/errors resulting from common configurations

Message Action possible

No common laser: acquisi- Select a Platform equipped with the same type OTDR plug-in
tion is impossible
Lasers are different. Do you Yes : measurement will occur using selected lasers common
want to continue? to both Platforms.
No: measurement is stopped.
Acquisition configs are differ- Yes: the SETUP configuration is transferred and applied on the
ent. Transfer config to remote Platform.
remote? No: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped.
File configs are different. Yes : the FILE configuration is transferred and applied to the
Transfer config to remote? remote Platform.
No: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped.
Acquisition and files configs Yes: The SETUP and FILE configurations are transferred and
are different. Transfer config applied on the remote MTS/T-BERD.
to remote? No: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped

214 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 7
Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
This chapter describes the functions of the FiberCompleteTM modules (Combined
OTDR or Fault Finder and auto bidirectional IL/ORL and Distance) and their use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “General introduction” on page 216
• “Activating the function” on page 219
• “Establishing References” on page 219
• “Configuring the units” on page 225
• “Performing the tests” on page 231
• “Results screen” on page 234
• “Saving results and generating a report” on page 238
• “Filenaming convention” on page 241

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 215

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
General introduction

General introduction
Principle
FiberComplete is used to perform automatically and through a single connection port,
the following tests:
• Bidirectional insertion loss (IL)
• Unidirectional / Bidirectional optical return loss (ORL) using the continuous wave
method (OCWR)
• Distance/length measurements
• Unidirectional / Bidirectional OTDR or fault analysis

To carry out the measurements, 2x T-BERD/MTS-8000V2 or 6000/6000A are needed,

both equipped with FiberComplete capable modules (see references in “OTDR Module
B” on page 572 and “OTDR Module C” on page 572) and broadband power meters on
the mainframes.

Using one unit at each end of the fiber under test and without any connection/disconnec-
tion, IL/ORL and distance measurements are performed and results exchanged via the
fiber under test (FUT).

When the OTDR is selected, an OTDR measurement is launched automatically either in

unidirectional mode from the primary unit (where the test has been initiated), or in bidi-
rectional mode from both units.

A failed value of IL or ORL may trigger the Fault Finder function automatically in order
to identify the faulty event.

216 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
General introduction

Figure 121 Configuration for FiberComplete function

Local Remote

IL / ORL / Distance /

Acquire Analyze Report

Measure Bidir IL & ORL Locate failures with Save all the results
and OTDR Fault Finder automatically

NOTE
The FiberComplete function can be performed with one T-BERD/MTS-8000
V2 and one T-BERD/MTS-6000/6000A.

Configurations
Two configurations are available, depending on the tests that have to be performed:
• Construction/Installation tests with loss, optical return loss, distance and OTDR.
• Acceptance Tests with loss, optical return loss and distance, and faults detection
in case of problem.

Construction/Installation Test

In this configuration, bidirectional IL and ORL, length and/or unidirectional/bidirectional

OTDR measurements are performed. The bidirectional IL/ORL and length results are
stored on each unit, the OTDR traces are stored on the primary unit (where the test has
been initiated*) in unidirectional mode, and on both units in bidirectional mode.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 217

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
General introduction

Figure 122 Construction/Installation Test

Reference Source and power meter
on Units A & B

Setup Units A & B

(Measurement and File parameters)

Press START/STOP button to launch the

measurements

Measure loss A->B, B->A, and Avg and

store/display on both units Next
Fiber
Measure ORL A & ORL B, and
store/display on both units

Do an OTDR measurement and store

it on the unit

Acceptance Tests

In this configuration, the bidirectional IL, ORL and length measurements are performed
and results are automatically stored on each unit.

If the Fault Finder function has been selected in the Setup menu, and if at least one
result exceeds the defined thresholds, the predominant defects causing the failure are
identified and located.

The FiberComplete screen displays an easy to interpret result table that prompts
predominant issues for easy troubleshooting.

218 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Activating the function

Figure 123 Acceptance Test

Reference Source and power meter on
Units A & B

Setup Units A & B

(Measurement and File parameters)

Press START/STOP button to launch the

measurements

Measure loss A->B, B->A, and Avg and

store/display on both units
Next
Measure ORL A & ORL B, and Fiber
store/display on both units

Compare results with defined thresholds

Fail Pass

Fault finder

Activating the function

1 Press the HOME button.
2 Use direction key to reach the icon FCOMP.
3 Press ENTER key to activate the function.
The icon turns yellow and Fiber Complete is displayed .

Establishing References
To get a meaningful measurement, the two leads or patch cords used for the measure-
ment have to be referenced.

The references are valid for all fibers that will be tested during the day with the same
patch cords, not disconnected from the source. If, at anytime, the patchcords are discon-

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 219

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Establishing References

nected from the test instruments and/or have been contaminated by dirt or dust, they
have to be re-inspected and referencing stage has to be redone.

Reference methods for insertion loss and ORL testing

Table 5 Reference methods for Insertion Loss and ORL Testing

IL Loopback IL Side-by-side Zero ORL

Reference Method Reference method reference method
Setup require- No specific require- Units shall be at the same No specific require-
ment ment location for references ment
Description Each unit is performing Each unit is performing its Each unit is perform-
its own IL reference, own IL reference, and ing its own ORL ref-
with its source from the units are connected using erence, with its
module port and pow- two jumpers and a bulk- source / powermeter
ermeter from the base- head adapter. from the module,
unit, this with one dedi- this with one dedi-
cated jumper. cated jumper
Recommenda- Easiest process. Most accurate setup, but Easy process.
tions Not recommended for both units must be at the Once the reference
short links. same location for refer- is performed, do not
One the reference is ences. disconnect jumper
performed, do not dis- Once the reference is per- from the source.
connect jumper from formed, do not disconnect Use of non reflective
the source jumper from units ports. terminator is manda-
tory for bend insen-
sitive jumper.
Loss principle Link ORL, including Link IL including one link Link ORL measure-
link connectors. connector ment after jumper,
for optimized test-
ing. Requires man-
drel wrap or non
Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter reflective termina-
Link under test Link under test tion at link end.

Reference stage process

The Power Meter option is mandatory onto the 8000 V2/6000(A) Mainframe.

220 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Establishing References

Each test equipment must set its own references and conform to the following process:
1 Press RESULTS button
2 Press References > Take Refs keys and follow the step by step instructions to
perform references on each unit.
3 Choose between side by side or loopback for you loss referencing method.

Figure 124 Select the reference to be performed

Loopback Referencing method

The loopback referencing is used when the two units are at different location.

After clicking on Loopback, the wizard will guide you through two steps:
1 The self reference is used for loss and ORL testing. Connect the jumper from the
module port to the mainframe powermeter and press Ok to start referencing.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 221

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Establishing References

Figure 125 Self reference

Powermeter of the OTDR Module port
8000 V2 platform

The reference values are stored and displayed at the end of referencing.
2 The zero ORL reference is necessary for ORL testing. Once the self reference
measurement has been carried out, the Zero ORL adjustment can be performed
Connect the jumper from the module port to the non-reflective termination via a
mating sleeve. If you don't have a non-reflective termination, a mandrel can be
used. Press Ok to start referencing.

222 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Establishing References

Figure 126 Zero ORL reference

Non-reflective
OTDR port termination (or mandrel)

NOTE
Non-reflective terminations are mandatory when bend insensitive jumpers
are used.

Side-by-Side referencing method

The side-by-side referencing is used when the two units are at the same location and is
the preferred method for better loss measurement accuracy.
After clicking on Side/Side, the wizard will guide you through three steps:
1 The self reference is used for ORL testing. Connect the jumper from the module
port to the mainframe powermeter and press Ok to start referencing.
See Figure 125 on page 222
2 The zero ORL reference is necessary for ORL testing. Once the self reference
measurement has been carried out, the Zero ORL adjustment can be performed.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 223

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Establishing References

Connect the jumper from the module port to the non-reflective termination via a
mating sleeve. If you don't have a non-reflective termination a mandrel can be
used. Press Ok to start referencing.
See Figure 126 on page 223
3 For the loss reference, connect the jumper from the module port of the primary
unit, toward the module port of the secondary one via a mating sleeve. Press Ok
to start referencing.

NOTE
The side-by-side loss reference is bidirectional and performed automatically
on both units.

Figure 127 Loss Reference

Mating sleeve

Jumper

Factory References
In the Take Refs sub-menu, the softkey Factory Refs is available.

It allows to apply the reference values defined by default in factory.

The following figure show the values defined by default in factory:

224 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Configuring the units

Figure 128 Factory References

Configuring the units

Once references have been taken on both 8000 V2 Units, the acquisition parameters
must be configured.
1 Press SETUP button to display the FiberComplete Setup menu.

CAUTION
The Laser selection and Results Screen parameters must be configured on
both units. Other acquisition setups shall be set on the primary unit.

Figure 129 FiberComplete Setup

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 225

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Configuring the units

Acquisition parameters
Laser select the desired wavelength(s).
All: acquisition is performed for all wavelengths available in the
instruments.
IL/ORL Measurement
ORL standalone: select this parameter to perform exclusively an ORL measure-
ment in unidirectional mode.
IL/ORL Bidir: select this parameter to perform both an ORL and an Insertion
Loss measurement, in bidirectional mode.
Length Measurement select if the fiber length must be measured during the test.
Yes: the fiber length will be measured.
No: the fiber length will not be measured during the test.
OTDR Measurement Select the measurement method for OTDR.
None.: OTDR measurement is not performed after FiberComplete test.
Unidir.: OTDR measurement is performed in one way: from the primary unit
toward the secondary one.
Bidir.: OTDR measurement is performed with parameters defined in automatic
mode (Quick Link Test) in the two ways: from primary to seconday unit, and from
secondary to primary unit.
OTDR Acquisition If OTDR measurement is configured with Unidir or Bidir
parameter, select the acquisition mode for OTDR.
Auto.: OTDR acquisition is performed with parameters defined in automatic
mode (Quick Link Test).
Manual; OTDR measurement is performed with the parameters manually defined
in the OTDR Setup menu (see “Configuring the reflectometry test” on page 28).
No: OTDR measurement is not performed.
Fault Finder select if Fault Finder function must be activated.
Yes: if a result for Loss and/or ORL exceeds one limit value defined in the
Thresholds parameters (see “Alarms parameters” on page 227), the Fault Finder
function is automatically triggered in order to identify the faulty events.
No: the Fault finder function is not activated (no fault finding occurs, even if one
value exceeds the thresholds).

If «Fault Finder» parameter is set to Yes, the «OTDR» parameter is

automatically set to No, and vice-versa.

226 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Configuring the units

The following parameters, defined on master unit, are automatically

applied/transferred to the slave unit: Laser - IL/ORL Bidir. - OTDR
Acquisition Auto (if OTDR Acquisition is defined on Manual, both units
will performed a manual measurement, but according to their own configura-
tion in the OTDR tab: the parameters can then be different).

Alarms parameters
In the Setup page, press Alarms softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Alarms).
• Thresholds Select the user defined thresholds to be used: User 1/ User 2 /
User 3 / User 4 and enter limits for:
- Loss: enter a loss threshold for each wavelength (dB)
- ORL: enter an ORL threshold for each wavelength (dB)
Or select the Default parameter to define thresholds by default for
Loss and ORL values:
- Loss: > 40 dB for each wavelength
- ORL: < 27 dB for each wavelength
Select None if alarm thresholds must not be defined

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

Unit

Select the unit for the distance measurement: km / kfeet / miles.

Table View

Allows to choose the kind of table to be displayed at the end of acquisition.

• Fiber displays detailed results for one fiber: Loss B -> A and loss A -
> B at each wavelength; the average loss at each wavelength
and the ORL A and ORL B at each wavelength. See “Fiber
View” on page 235.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 227

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Configuring the units

NOTE
If Fiber View is selected, and if results are stored, then the filenaming con-
vention is; [fiber Id][fiber Num]. Therefore, the unit will generate one IL / OLR
/ Distance file per fiber.

• Cable displays cable result of multiple fibers: the average loss and
the ORL A and ORL B at each wavelength. See “Cable view”
on page 234.

NOTE
If Cable View is selected, and if results are stored, then the filenaming con-
vention is; [cable ID]. Therefore, the unit will generate one IL / OLR / dis-
tance file per complete cable.

Link parameters
In the Setup page, press Link softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current screen,
press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Link).

See “Configuring the Link parameters” on page 43.

File parameters
The File storage parameters must be also configured, in order to define how the results
traces will be saved onto the equipment.

In the Setup page, press File softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current screen,
press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on File).

The following parameters defined in the Setup > File page of the mas-
ter unit are automatically applied/transferred to the slave unit: File-
naming - Save mode.

See “Configuring the File parameters” on page 48, except for Filenaming parameter.

228 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Configuring the units

Filenaming

Select Filenaming parameter and press the right arrow key to modify the name of the
file for the result trace.
In the edition keypad, select the pre-defined parameters available or, press abc
key to enter a name manually for the file. Then, press Enter to validate..

Figure 130 Filenaming - Edition keypad (pre-defined parameters)

or
Press Default Filename to apply the name by default to the file:
If the parameter Table View is defined on Fiber: [Fiber_Id][Fiber_Num]
If the parameter Table View is defined on Cable: [Cable_Id]
See “Table View” on page 227)
As soon as the Cable Id changes, the result table is cleared and the next tests are
stored with the new Cable Id name.

The name of the file is displayed in grey under Filenaming parameter

Automatic configuration
Press the key Auto Setup to configure automatically the acquisition parameters as
follows:
• Lasers: All

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 229

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Configuring the units

• IL/ORL Measurement: IL/ORL Bidir.

• Length Measurement: Yes
• OTDR Measurement: None
• Fault Finder: No
• Table View: Fiber
• Thresholds: Default

Saving parameters from configuration

Once the File and Measurement parameters are configured, it can be saved in a config-
uration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled for future acquisition in FiberComplete mode.

To save parameters in a configuration file:

1 If File page is displayed, press SETUP to return to Setup page.
2 Press Save Config. menu key .
An edition keypad displays.
3 Enter a name for the configuration file.

Figure 131 Save Configuration file - Edition keypad

Directory into which files are saved

230 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Performing the tests

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the current directory, the last one used.

4 Press Enter to validate

The configuration file is saved with the extension .fo_cfg (icon ).

NOTE
The FiberComplete configuration file includes data storage and measure-
ment settings of FCOMP and SM_OTDR. This configuration file can be
shared and reused with other units.

Loading a configuration file FiberComplete

To load a configuration file previously created and apply parameters to new tests with
FiberComplete function:
1 Press FILE hard key
2 Select the configuration file desired
3 Press Load > Load Config.
• Press SETUP hard key to display the OTDR acquisition parameters saved in the
configuration file.
• Select Setup page to display the file storage parameters saved in the configura-
tion file.

You can modify some acquisition or file storage parameters, and save them in a new
configuration file (see “Saving parameters from configuration” on page 230).

NOTE
Some Viavi pre-defined configuration files for FiberComplete are already
available into the equipment, in FILE disk > config > FCOMP.

Performing the tests

Once Setup is configured on both units, they can be linked to the fiber to be tested.

Press RESULTS hard key to display the FiberComplete results page.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 231

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Performing the tests

Automatic pairing / continuity check

As soon as the secondary (B) unit is connected to the fiber, the primary (A) unit detects
it (and vice-versa).

Both unit are connected to the same fiber One unit is disconnected of the fiber link, or
there is a break

Sending a message to the distant Platform

Once both Platforms are paired via the fiber to be tested, each one can send a message
to the other Platform.

This message can be sent to launch a test, to wait before launching the test, to clean the
connectors...

To send a message to the distant equipment:

1 Go to the Results page.
2 Press Send a message softkey.
A new screen displays.

Figure 132 List of messages available

3 Select the message to send.

232 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Performing the tests

NOTE
If the message «Go to Fiber N°» is selected, use left and right direction keys
to decrement/increment the fiber number.

4 Press the Send Message softkey.

The message displays automatically on distant Platform.

Figure 133 Receipt of the message on the distant Platform

Starting the test

Below are described the steps when bidirectional IL/ORL and distance are selected in
the Setup menu.
1 Press START/STOP button to launch the test
a Unit A and B are performing IL test and mutually exchange their result
values
b Unit A and B are performing ORL test (using OCWR method) and mutually
exchange their result values
c Distance measurement is performed and recorded on both units.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 233

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Results screen

Figure 134 Test in progress

d Once all tests are performed, results are displayed on both units
e If OTDR parameter is set to Auto or Manual in the Setup menu, the OTDR
acquisition starts.
If Fault Finder parameter is set to Yes and an IL or ORL value reaches one
of the user defined thresholds, the Fault Finder starts. See “Configuring the
units” on page 225.

Results screen
Once the tests are completed, the results screen displays on both units.

Cable view
If, in the Setup page, the parameter Table View is set to Cable, the following result table
is displayed:

234 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Results screen

Figure 135 Result Cable View

The Cable View allows to display results of multiple fibers:

– the average loss at each wavelength
– the ORL A and ORL B at each wavelength
– the distance is displayed on top of the screen

NOTE
In order to erase the results table, the Cable ID must be modified in the File
Setup menu (see “Filenaming” on page 229).

Fiber View
If, in the Setup page, the parameter Table View is set to Fiber, a screen as the following
one displays:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 235

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Results screen

Figure 136 Result Fiber View

The Fiber View allows to display results of one fiber:

– Loss B -> A and loss A -> B at each wavelength
– the average loss at each wavelength
– the ORL A and ORL B at each wavelength
– the distance is displayed on top of the screen

Fault Finder
If, in the Setup page, the Fault Finder parameter is set to Yes, a Fault analysis is auto-
matically launched, if one value exceeds the thresholds defined in the Setup menu.
As soon as the Fault Finder finishes its analysis, an easy to interpret table is displayed.
It indicates the attenuation values and/or reflectance of the predominant defects that
may have caused the IL and/or ORL values to fail.
1 Select Table IL/ORL - Fault to switch between the IL/ORL and Fault Finder
result.

236 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Results screen

Figure 137 Fault finder result screen

OTDR
If the OTDR Measurement parameter has been set to Unidir. or Bidir., the OTDR
acquisition is launched and the trace can be seen by selecting the OTDR tab at the
bottom of the screen.

Figure 138 OTDR trace

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 237

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Saving results and generating a report

NOTE
In Auto mode, the wavelengths selected for IL/ORL are also used for OTDR
testing.
In Manual mode, all the OTDR parameters can be adjusted in the OTDR
setup menu.

NOTE
To go from one tab to the other one, press the RESULTS button or, with touch-
screen, directly select the tab wished.

NOTE
In bidirectional mode:
- The OTDR results trace for acquisition performed from Location A to Loca-
tion B is stored on the primary unit (Location A)
- The OTDR results trace for acquisition performed from Location B to Loca-
tion A is stored on the secondary unit (Location B).

Saving results and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the results can be saved and a report can be gener-
ated directly from the results screen.

Saving results and creating a report from results page

To generate a report:
1 Press Fast Report soft key .
A menu displays under the trace.
2 In the menu, configure the file saving mode (and the report).

238 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Saving results and generating a report

Figure 139 Fast report configuration

a In the Save Mode parameter, select:

txt file select Yes to save the results in a blts file and to generate a
txt file of the results.
pdf file select Yes to save the results in a blts file and to generate a
report in a pdf file.
b In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
c Modify the Fiber Number / Fiber Code using the key .
The parameter is different according to the Cable Structure configuration
(see “Cable structure” on page 45).
d In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A).
e In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
3 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
4 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad.
or
Press Auto Filenaming to apply the file name defined in the Setup screen, in
Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 229).
5 Press Enter to validate.

NOTE
The blts file and the txt or pdf file will have the same name.

The icon displays during saving process.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 239

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Saving results and generating a report

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform.

NOTE
The file and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

Opening a report
1 To open the report, press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the file of the report.
For the txt file: trace file_blts.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.blts.pdf.
3 Press Load.
The file opens on the T-BERD/MTS-8000 V2 / or 6000/6000A.

Figure 140 Example of PDF report (Fiber view)

240 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Saving results and generating a report

CAUTION
To modify the Viavi logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A pdf report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS 8000 V2 or 6000/6000A (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on
page 545).

Recalling OTDR files

Once a OTDR file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:
1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.
2 Select the directory and then the file to open
3 Click on Load
4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”

Filenaming convention
The filenaming convention is automatically generated by the unit.

Filenaming convention in Fiber View

In Fiber View, the filenaming convention is as follows:

[Fiber_Id][Fiber_Num]

One .blts file is created per each individual fiber tested. The Fiber Number is automati-
cally incremented.

Filenaming convention in Cable View

In Cable View, the filenaming convention is as follows:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 241

Chapter 7 FiberComplete Modules
Saving results and generating a report

[Cable_Id]

The cable results, which includes all fibers, are stored in a .blts file.

As soon as the Cable Id changes, the result table is cleared and the next tests are stored
with the new Cable Id name.

The table view can be modified in the Setup page (see Figure 129 on page 225).

Filenaming convention for Fault Finder results

If the fault finder is selected, the fault finder sor trace is using the following filenaming
convention:
[Cable_Id][Fiber_Id][Fiber_Num]

Filenaming convention for OTDR results

If the OTDR is set to Auto, the sor traces have the following filenaming convention:
[Cable_Id][Fiber_Id][Fiber_Num]

A pre formatted .txt file can also be generated automatically at each measurement. It
includes the Fault Finder table.

Please refer to Chapter 20 “File management” for more information on storage/recall

functions.

242 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 8
Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum
Measurement
This chapter describes the different stages in carrying out a spectrum analysis of an
optical signal, or analyzing effects from an optical components or network elements like
EDFA, DFB-sources..., by a Platform equipped with an OSA of the OSA-50X series or
the OSA-100 series.

The OSA-50X series are available on MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 and ONA-
1000 platforms.
The OSA-110 series are available on MTS / T-BERD 6000(A), 6000A V2,
MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2, and ONA-800/1000 platforms.
ORR 50GHz
(FWHM) typ
Resolution
bandwidth

Total save

ROADM
I-OSNR
Power

DROP

OSNR

EDFA
WDM
Type

Drift

DFB
LED

FPL
typ.

OSA-500 35pm 50dBc 23dBm X X X X X X X

OSA-500M 38pm 47dBc 23dBm X X X X X X X
OSA-501M 38pm 47dBc 23dBm X X X X X X X X
OSA-500R 38pm 47dBc 20dBm X X X X X X X X
OSA-500RS 38pm 47dBc 23dBm X X X X X X X X
OSA-110M 100pm 40dBc 23dBm X X X x
OSA-110H 100pm 40dBc 30dBm X X X x
OSA-110R 100pm 40dBc 23dBm X X X X X

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 243

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement

NOTE
Looking for the OSA-type and series Nr, on the Home page, press Settings
> Help page.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Laser safety” on page 245
• “Possible carrier devices for OSA-110 and OSA-50x modules” on page 245
• “Cleaning of Connectors” on page 246
• “Transportation” on page 247
• “Configuration of the instrument” on page 247
• “OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 248
• “Acquisition” on page 262
• “Trace display functions” on page 262
• “Overlay trace function” on page 269
• “Table of results” on page 272
• “Channel filtering” on page 277
• “Drift measurement” on page 278
• “EDFA results analysis” on page 2801
• “DFB results analysis” on page 282
• “Testing ROADM networks” on page 285
• “Measurement of I-OSNR” on page 287
• “WDM-Expert Software option” on page 290
• “Saving the trace and generating a report” on page 301

1.Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier

244 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Laser safety

Laser safety
The OSA module contains a Class 1 Laser product according to DIN IEC 60825-1:2014.
Please take notice of following instructions

When the system or device is switched on, never look directly into the in-
and output or into a connected optical fiber.

The devices which are tested can be rated in a higher laser class with
dangerous radiation. Observe their security instructions. Please heed the
normal precautions for working with lasers and consider local regulations.

Possible carrier devices for OSA-110 and OSA-50x

modules
Possible carrier devices for OSA-110 modules and its
electrical specifications

Mainframe name Power supply Voltage Wattage

MTS-6000 24 VDC ± 5 % 160 Watts max

MTS-6000V2 24 VDC ± 5 % 160 Watts max

MTS-8000 with Adapter E8100E 24 VDC ± 5 % 220 Watts max

MTS-8000E with Adapter E8100E 24 VDC ± 5 % 220 Watts max

ONA-800 with adapter 81FMC1 19 VDC ± 5 % 160 Watts max

19 VDC ± 5 % 160 Watts max

ONA-1000 with adapter
24 VDC ± 5 % 330 Watts max

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 245

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Cleaning of Connectors

Possible carrier devices for OSA-50x modules and its

electrical specifications

Mainframe name Power supply Voltage Wattage

MTS-8000 with Adapter E8100E 24 VDC ± 5 % 220 Watts max

MTS-8000E with Adapter E8100E 24 VDC ± 5 % 220 Watts max

19 VDC ± 5 % 160 Watts max

ONA-1000 with adapter
24 VDC ± 5 % 330 Watts max

Cleaning of Connectors
Cleaning of the patchcord connector is extremely important to avoid damage to the input
of the OSA. A dirty connection can irreversibly damage both surfaces, especially when
working with high powers.

We highly recommend inspection of the patchcord before connecting it to the OSA

246 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Transportation

Transportation
The OSA can be damaged by excessive acceleration during transpor-
tation with improper packaging.
Modules without a MTS / T-BERD should be shipped only in the origi-
nal packaging.
For shipping of a MTS / T-BERD 6000(A) or MTS / T-BERD 6000A V2
containing an OSA, use either the original packaging with the black
rubber foam, or the transportation case referenced E60HCASE-OSA.
For shipping of a MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 containing an OSA, use either
the original packaging with the black rubber foam, or the transporta-
tion case referenced E80HCASE-OSA.
Using the original packing material ensures that the device is properly
protected during shipping. Otherwise, VIAVI cannot give warranty on
modules good protection.
If you need a new packaging, please contact VIAVI Technical Assis-
tance Center.

Configuration of the instrument

The instrument configuration menu will be displayed directly after power up or by
pressing the HOME-button.

The actual module status will be shown (ON/OFF) on system window

1 For configuring the OSA press the OSA-icon (by touchscreen) , or select the
function icon by arrow-keys and press ENTER.
2 Press RESULT button to see the OSA-result window.
If the MTS / T-BERD 8000/6000 is switched Off in this configuration, the next start
up will directly start the to OSA-application, and display the result window.

For more details about the general MTS / T-BERD- configuration see the 6000(A),6000A
V2 ou 8000 V2 Platforms user manuals.

For measurement, connect the fiber to be tested on the optical input of the selected
module.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 247

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

NOTE
Consider the maximum optical input power for OSA.

Kind of input connector:

• if the protection cap is green the optical input interface is a angled physical
connector (APC-type)
• if it is a black protection cap, the interface type is physical connector (PC-type)

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

To configure the Platform in preparation for an OSA test on a fiber, press the SETUP
button.

The various measurement parameters are proposed:

NOTE
With OSA-500R/OSA-500RS/OSA-110R two auto modes are available: Test
Auto WDM mode and Test Auto I-OSNR mode.

1 Setup in Test Auto mode

Test Auto I-OSNR (only

Parameter Test Auto WDM OSA-500R, OSA-500RS &
OSA-110R)
Acquisition settings
Mode WDM I-OSNR
Sweep single
Sweep range Full ext. C Band
Averaging acquisition No Not available
I-OSNR Range (OSA-
Not available Full
500R only)
Resolution 0.04 nm (depends on module type)

248 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Analyze settings
Channel detection permanent
Signal threshold Auto
Min channel spacing Std 50GHz
OSNR
OSNR method left & right Not available
Noise Shape Not available Filtered
S<->N distance Auto Not available
Noise acq BW std 0.1 nm
SNR Meas. Type S/N
Splitter compensation No
Tilt & Slope Gain No
Results screen settings
Grid default = last value used
Alarms No
Wavelength range Auto
Table Content Standard
Unit nm
Show I-OSNR trace No
Configuration of the file set-up (see Chapter 20)
Filenaming [Cable_id][Fiber_Num][Test_Poin ][Direction]
Auto Store Yes
Nb Fiber Increment Yes

2 or define your own configuration

The parameter to be modified must be selected by means of the direction keys . The
possible options then appear on the screen: make your choice using the direction keys
and , or using the touchscreen.

The Setup parameters are arranged in 5 sub-chapters:

1 Acquisition
2 Analysis
3 Display

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 249

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

4 Link
5 File

Figure 141 OSA Setup

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring

the File parameters” on page 48
See OTDR Setup: “Configuring
the Link parameters” on page 43

On Setup page, you may select one of the sub-chapter by pressing one of the softkey
F1 to F5.

The various parameters proposed are defined below.

Loading a configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for OSA test:
1 Press SETUP hard key.
2 On bottom right of setup page, press Load Config. menu key.
3 In the Explorer, select the desired file configuration
4 Press Load Config. menu keys.
A beep is emitted to validate the selection of the configuration file.

250 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

The software automatically brings you back to setup page.

NOTE
Most of the configuration files are available into the Platform in disk/config/
OSA.

Acquisition Parameters
Mode (not available for OSA-110, fix WDM / OSNR)

WDM / I-OSNR (only valid for OSA-500R, OSA-500RS and OSA-110R)

Module is used for measuring the 'true' in-band OSNR by using
the polarization nulling method. This mode is recommended for
OSNR measurements in ROADM based networks. See “Testing
ROADM networks” on page 285.
WDM / OSNR Module is used to measure the optical spectrum of an optical
signal. Standard WDM results are displayed in the results table.
(See “Display of the WDM / OSA results” on page 262)
OO-OSNR The On/Off-OSNR method is a two step method. Step one
measures the optical spectrum and the channel power, while
step two measures the noise power when the transmission
channel is switched-off.
EDFA Module is used to analyze results from an EDFA. EDFA results
are displayed in the results table. (See “EDFA results analysis”
on page 280)
DFB Module is used to analyze results from a DFB. DFB results are
displayed in the results table (See “DFB results analysis” on
page 282).
FPL Module is used to analyze results from a Fabriperot Laser. FPL
results are displayed in the results table.
LED Module is used to analyze results from a LED. LED results are
displayed in the results table.

Sweep

Continuous The OSA sweeps continuously and displays the results

Single The OSA performs one single sweep and displays the result

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 251

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Statistics The OSA calculates a statistic of a number of sweeps. The

number of sweeps must be entered (next parameter).
Filtering Set the OSA filter to certain wavelength and switch the output of
the filter to output connector. (OSA-501M only)
Drift The OSA measures power, wavelength and signal to noise ratio
over time. The number of sweeps and the wait time between the
sweeps need to be set.

NOTE
For Drift measurements a Grid needs to be defined and the Channel
Detection parameter is set to Grid.

Sweep Range

Select the wavelength numbers or Full parameter to use all wavelengths available.

I-OSNR Range (only valid for OSA-500R and OSA-110R)

This parameter defines the resolution of the polarization nulling routine for true in-band
OSNR measurement.
Up to 15dB low sensitivity mode for fast measurements, recommended for
ROADM system testing at data rates of = 40Gbps and
OSNR≤15dB or at data rates up to 12.5Gbps and OSNR values
≤ 25dB
Up to 20dB recommended for data rates of = 40Gbps and OSNR ≤ 20 dB, or
for data rates up to 12.5Gbps and OSNR ≥ 25dB.
Full recommended for data rates of ≥ 40Gbps and OSNR ≥ 20 dB

Averaging acquisition

No (1 sweep), Low (4 sweeps), Medium (16 sweeps), High (32 sweeps)

This function can reduce the noise level of a value up to 5 dB. When the acquisition is
averaged, a bar graph showing the state of advancement of the averaging is displayed
at the bottom right of the screen.

252 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Resolution (not available with OSA-110M)

The resolution bandwidth of the OSA (the minimum value depends on specification of
OSA type. See page 243).
0.1/0.2/0.3/0.4/0.5, 1, 2 or 5 nm for modules OSA-50X.

Number of sweeps

In Statistics mode, this must be selected between 2 and 1000.

Long Term

NOTE
A long term measurement can be done only if the Sweep parameter is on
Statistic mode.

Long term time diagram:

– number of sweeps 7
– wait period 5s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
|----|------|-----|------|----|-----|

time distance between the next acquisition = wait period (time)

No
Manual The measurement is done manually, once the key Stop Wait is
pressed
Period The measurement is automatically done, after the wait period
selected (see hereunder).

Wait Period

The Wait Period parameter allows to enter a wait period before the measurement start
(only active if Long Term is positioned on Period)
• Increments of 5 seconds up to 1 minute, then increments of 1 minute up to 10
minutes, then increments of 5 minutes up to 60 minutes; then increment of 1 hour
up to 24 hours.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 253

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Monitoring Time (for Drift Measurement only)

For Drift Measurement a monitoring time may be selected between 1 minute and 20
days:

Interval (for Drift Measurement only)

The interval time between the measurements. The limits depend on the monitoring time.

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

Those parameters are only linked to the current active fiber.

Channel Detection1
Signal threshold 1
Threshold of detection of channels (see “Channel detection threshold” on page 267).
Auto. the threshold is determined automatically.
Manual the threshold can be set from -79.9 to +30 dBm
Use direction keys or Edit Number to modify values.

NOTE
Modification of the parameters Channel detection and Signal threshold
will only modify the results if the OSA module present is the one that was
used for the acquisition.

Mode
Grid The grid serves as a detection reference: it must therefore be
Regular, Manual, ITU DWDM, ITU CWDM, LR4/ER4-100G,
LR4/ER4-40G or 10x10-100G. The choice of grid takes priority

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace
and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

254 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

over the choice Channel Selection. For example, it is not

possible to choose Channel selection = Grid, if the option
selected for the grid is «Without» or «Conventional».
Permanent Automatic detection of the channel on each acquisition. In this
mode the channels are always detected without making a
reference measurement.

NOTE
At the end of an acquisition in permanent mode, it is possible to create a grid
on the basis of the channels detected. To do this, press the key Adopt Grid
in the SETUP menu.
The new Grid can be shown as table by pressing View Grid in the Setup
menu.

Min. Channel spacing

Defines the minimum spacing of two adjacent optical channels in the system.

This parameter is also used to set the range for integration to measure the accurate total
signal power of an optical channel. The window for channel power integration will be ±1/
2 the min. channel spacing setting left and right to the channel center frequency.

The measurement result will be displayed in the WDM table as 'Level' in dBm.

Min. Channel elevation

Defines the minimum elevation of two adjacent peaks from the valley between them
which is required to recognize independent channels. Peaks which are not separated by
a valley deeper than the min.channel elevation are considered as part of the same
optical channel.

This example shows two signals, the left having only one peak larger than the selected
Min.channel elevation, the right one with two peaks.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 255

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

The two peaks of the right one are separated by a valley, but their elevation from that
valley is smaller than the Min.channel elevation. Therefore they are not treated as inde-
pendent sig-nals

Select Auto to define the value automatically or select Manual to enter a specific value
for the parameter.

OSNR
To modify these parameters, go to the OSNR line. A sub-menu then appears proposing
the following options:

OSNR method (only available in OSNR mode)1

Side of the peak where the point of reference for noise
measurement is taken (left, right, average left and right, worst
case of left and right).
S<->N Distance (only available in OSNR mode)
Distance between the peak of the channel and the point of
reference for the noise.
Auto: distance determined according to spacing of channels.
Manual: an additional line Manual value opens. Go down and modify the
value with < > or click on the value and enter a new one in the keypad that
opens
Pre-defined: select 25 GHz (0.2 nm), 50 GHz (0.4 nm),100 GHz (0.8 nm)
from the peak.
Noise Shape (only available for OSA-500R, OSA-500RS or OSA-110R in I-
OSNR mode)
Filtered: evaluation for mixed filter shaped ROADM networks
Unfiltered: evaluation for networks without optical filters
Noise Acq. Bandwidth
Reference bandwidth used for the acquisition of noise:
Standard 0.1 nm
With the <> keys you can select other values between 0.05 nm and 1.0 nm.
OSNR meas.type: S / N or (S+N)/N
S/N: the integrated power in the channel minus the noise is considered as
signal

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on

the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

256 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

(S+N)/N: the integrated power in the channel without correction is consid-

ered as signal.

Splitter compensation
When the measurement is made after a tap coupler (also known as a splitter), it is
possible to compensate for the loss introduced by this element and to display the value
measured before or after it.

The following options are available:

Value1 Yes: activation of compensation and choice of its value using the
keys and : or the numeric keypad : from 1 to 30 dB (by
increments of 1) or 1 to 99% (by increments of 0.1%).
Unit Choice of compensation in dB or as a percentage of the value
measured.
For example, with a 10 dB splitter, the results will be augmented by 10 dB. The
trace will be offset upwards by 10 dB. A channel measured at -30 dBm will be
displayed -20 dBm.

Display Parameters
In the Setup page, press Display softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Display).

Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen.

Grid
Go to the Grid line to access the Grid sub-menu. Select the Type line to see the different
choices and modify them if required.

Five possible types of grid are proposed with different corresponding values, some of
which are fixed or non-applicable, others editable.

The type «Conventional» and the option «Without» do not give access to the parameters
of the Grid sub-menu; the LR4/ER4-100G, LR4/ER4-40G, and the 10x10-100G are fix
channels plan;.
• LR4/ER4-100G 229.0 THz, 229.8 THz, 230.6 THz, 231.4 THz

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 257

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

• LR4/ER4-40G: 1271 nm, 1291 nm, 1311 nm, 1331 nm

• 10x10-100G 1523 nm, 1531 nm, 1539 nm, 1547 nm, 1555 nm, 1563 nm,
1571 nm, 1579 nm, 1587 nm, 1595 nm

The others give access to certain options, as shown in the table below:

Table 6 Grid menu options for each type of grid

ITU CWDM ITU DWDM Regular Manual

Grid name Editable Editable Editable Editable

ITU standard G.694.2 G.692 N/A N/A

Editable, from
Editable, from 1250.05 to 1649.93 Editable from
First ITU
1270 to 1611 nm, nm, by increments 1250 to 1650 nm,
channel (with N/A
by increments of corresponding to the by increments of
display in nm)
20 nm channel spacing 0.01 nm.
selected
Editable from 20
to 1000 GHz by
Channel Editable, from 25 to increments of 1
20 nm N/A
spacing 200 GHz at each click, of
10 if key is held
down
Editable, from 1 Editable, from 1 to Editable, from 1
Number of Editable from 1
to 18 by incre- 256 by increments of to 256 by incre-
channels to 256
ments of 1 1 ments of 1
Sub-menu Sub-menu
Sub-menu acces-
Sub-menu accessi- accessible to dis- accessible to
sible to display
ble to display the play the wave- display the
the wavelengths
Channel wavelengths of each lengths of each wavelengths of
of each channel,
settings channel, name the channel, name each channel,
name the band,
band, and name the band, and name the band,
and name each
each channel name each chan- and name each
channel
nel channel

NOTE
The maximum real number of channels for ITU grids depends on the value
selected for the first channel and the spacing between the channels.

258 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

NOTE
It is possible to display the grid with the View Grid key. A table then appears
showing the channel number, the name of the channel, the reference wave-
length and the alarm thresholds for delta F, min. P, max. P and min. SNR.

Alarms
When Channel Detection is positioned on Grid, it is possible to activate an alarm
system. This system is based on a system of thresholds. Any measurement results that
exceed these thresholds are displayed in red in the table, and the icon appears at
the top right of the screen. If all the results are within the thresholds (no result is in red),
the icon becomes .

To activate the alarm system, go to the <Alarms> line and select "Active".

Thresholds can then be set (using the direction keys or numeric keypad), to global level
or to the level of each channel:
1 Global alarms
Number of channels Yes/No
Delta channel power1 No or threshold modifiable from 0.1 to 60 dB
Delta OSNR2 No or threshold modifiable from 0.1 to 60 dB
3
Composite power No or threshold modifiable from -59.9 dBm to +20 dBm
2 Channel alarms
Max channel offset4 No/Freq/Wavelen.
Min. channel power5 Yes/No
Max. channel power6 Yes/No
Min. OSNR 7 Yes/No
Channel Number From «001» to the max. number of channels.
Channel value Display of the wavelength of the channel number selected

1.Max. acceptable variation between max. power and min. power on all channels
2.Max. acceptable variation between max. SNR and min. SNR on all channels
3.Maximum composite power
4.Wavelength drift. Selection of the alarm on the basis of the value of delta F
5.The values are then defined in Min. P
6.The values are then defined in Max. P
7.The values are then defined in Min. SNR

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 259

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Delta F / Delta WL1 From 0 to 2 THz (2 THz is the default value) or from 0 to 8 nm.
The unit depends on the value of the parameter Max channel
offset
P Min. 2 From -80 dBm to +9.9 dBm (below max. threshold)
P Max.3 From -79.9 dBm to +10 dBm (above min. threshold)
OSNR From 0 to 50 dB

Zoom Mode (OSA-500)

The OSA module performs a measurement over the sweep range, but the display shows
the part defined by the Zoom mode.
Auto display automatically zooms into the wavelength range where
optical channels are present
Full display full sweep range or part chosen by the zoom function of
the result page

For sweep range = FULL, it is possible to display the same wavelength range for every
new sweep, independent of previous settings of the zoom function on the result page:
C+L Band 1530-1625nm
C Band 1530-1565nm
Start/ End manually selectable start / end wavelengths
Center / Span manually selectable center /span.
ext. C+L Band 1525-1625nm
ext. C Band 1525-1570nm

Zoom Mode (OSA-110)

The OSA module performs a measurement over the sweep range, but the display shows
only the part defined by the Zoom mode..

This parameter sets the wavelength range to be displayed as a trace

Auto display automatically zooms into the wavelength range where
optical channels are present

1.Delta of frequency or wavelength

2.Minimum power
3.Maximum power

260 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Manual display full sweep range or part chosen by the zoom function of
the result page

Unit
Here the units of the x axis can be selected:
• Frequency in THz
• Wavelength in nm

Table Content
Standard The result table displays the columns Ch-Number, Ch-ID,
Wavelength/Frequency, Spacing/Offset, Ch-Power, OSNR,
Noise
Statistics The result table displays the columns Ch-Number, Ch-ID,
Wavelength/Frequency, minimum Wavelength/Frequency,
maximum Wavelength/Frequency, Ch-Power, minimum Ch-
Power, maximum Ch-Power
Pass/Fail The result table displays the columns Ch-Number, Ch-ID,
Wavelength/Frequency, Spacing/Offset, Ch-Power, OSNR,
Pass/Fail result
CWDM The result table displays the columns Ch-Number, Ch-ID,
Wavelength, Spacing/Offset, Ch-Power

See “WDM-Expert Software option” on page 290 to configure the Table Content with
Extended or User Defined parameter.

Saving configuration in a file

Once parameters have been configured, they can be kept in memory and saved in a
configuration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled in order to be recalled for future OSA acqui-
sitions.

To save parameters in a configuration file:

1 If necessary, press SETUP to return to Setup page.
2 Select one parameter in one of the setup page (acquisition, link..)
3 Press Save Config. menu key

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 261

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Acquisition

4 Enter a name for the configuration file using the edition keypad (max 20 charac-
ters).

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the directory disk/config/OSA.

5 Press Enter to validate

A sound is emitted to indicate the file is saved.
The configuration file is saved with the extension ".fo_cfg" (icon ) and can be
recalled at any time from the Explorer page.

Acquisition
To start a measurement press START key. The OSA-XXX will scan over the entire wave-
length range and the measurement result will be displayed in graphical and tabular
format.

NOTE
A warning message appears when the channel power or the composite
power is larger than the absolute maximum rating for the OSA.
In this case be extremely careful when disconnecting the patchcord - it might
emit dangerously high optical power!

Trace display functions

The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see
example Figure 142 on page 263.

A range of functions enable modifications to the display of the trace (Cursors, Zoom/
Shift, Event/Trace, Trace/Table, Full scale, etc.).

Display of the WDM / OSA results

The results window, obtained by pressing the RESULTS button, shows different zones
displaying, from top to bottom:

262 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

• the mini-trace in the upper part of the screen, accompanied by the principal char-
acteristics of the acquisition and of the file if the result is stored in memory.
• the trace results associated with cursors A and B
• the trace proper (see “Trace display functions” on page 262).
• the table of results (see “Table of results” on page 272).

The trace represents power (in dBm) as a function of frequency (in THz) or wavelength
(in nm). The channels detected are represented by peaks.

NOTE
If several acquisitions are performed, the trace displayed is the one corre-
sponding to the last acquisition.

Figure 142 Example of OSA test result (with grid)

Filename
Number of acquisitions Fiber number
Multi-traces display

Wavelengths and power

at point of trace
referenced by cursors A
and B Channel
Wavelength and power
difference between
cursors A and B

Number of the channel

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 263

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Display functions

Zoom function
The Zoom function is used to analyze part of the trace in greater detail. In association
with Channel (WDM/OSA) it enables rapid checking of a succession of events or chan-
nels.
The zoom is centered on the cursor selected. If the two cursors A and B are selected,
the zoom is centered midway between the two cursors.

The position of the section of trace displayed with respect to the complete trace is repre-
sented by a red rectangle on the mini-trace at the top left-hand corner of the screen.

To define a zoom on the trace:

1 Select Cursor A or B and center it on the zone to be examined
2 On the Shift/Zoom key, select the Zoom function.
3 Use the or key to increase or reduce the zoom factor.
or
Use touchscreen and click on trace to position the upper left and bottom right
corners of the zoomed area.

Zooming on the different channels in succession

1 Zoom on one of the channels as shown above.

2 On the Trace/Channel key, select the Channel function.
3 Use the and keys to move the zoom on to the successive channels.

Cursors function
The vertical cursors A and B are used in the Zoom and Shift functions to position or
delete markers.

The cursors A and B are represented by vertical lines of different colors:

• in a solid line if the cursor is selected.
• in a dotted line if the cursor is not selected.

264 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Positioning the cursor

When a trace is displayed, the key can be used to select one or both cursors.

The direction keys and move the selected cursor(s) along the trace.

When a selected cursor touches the right or left-hand edge of the screen, the trace starts
to scroll horizontally to maintain display of this cursor.

If an unselected cursor has been moved off-screen by a zoom, it can be brought back
on to the screen by selecting it and then pressing one of the direction keys or . It
will then appear on whichever edge of the screen is closest to its position.

When the cursor function is selected, the keys and move the trace vertically.

Cursors information

The informations on Cursors are always display on the upper part of the screen.
Above the trace are shown the co-ordinates of the points of intersection of the cursors
A and B with the trace, together with the distance between the two points.

Cursor X and Y

Two types of cursors can be defined:

• Cursor X: only a vertical bar is present.
• Cursor X and Cursor Y: there is a vertical bar and a horizontal bar. The intersec-
tion between these two bars is placed on the trace.

To display the type of cursor selected:

1 Click on Advanced.
2 Select the key CursorX/CursorY to modify the current choice.
Each click on this key will alternatively insert or delete the check mark against
Cursor Y

Full scale
To display the entire trace, with no zoom or displacement:
1 Either press the Full Scale key
or,
With Trace selected on Trace/Channel, press validation key

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 265

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Shift function
The Shift function is used to displace the displayed section of the trace by pressing the
direction keys.
The horizontal shift is performed maintaining the point of intersection between the trace
and the selected cursor at the same level, scrolling the trace horizontally while following
it vertically, so that it never goes off the screen.
To use this function:
1 Select the zoom factor as described above.
2 Choose cursor and cursor position.
3 On the Zoom/Shift key, select Shift.
4 Use the direction keys or touch and hold screen to shift the trace in the desired
direction.

Trace /Table key

This key offers a choice from the following displays:
Trace alone: main display of the trace with a single line of the table at the foot of the
page (see Figure 142 on page 263).
Trace + Table: display of trace, reduced in size but followed by 5 to 8 lines of the table
of results.

266 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Figure 143 OSA Results - Trace and Table

Table: display of the table alone

Figure 144 OSA Results - Table

Channel detection threshold

On the trace, some peaks corresponding to noise could be mistaken for channels. It is
therefore necessary to fix a power threshold level: only peaks that exceed this threshold

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 267

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

will be considered as channels and included in the table of results.

To display or modify this threshold, press the SETUP key, then select Signal threshold.
Modify the value to position it on Auto1 or fix a threshold value.

Display of a grid
The display window of the trace can include a grid to facilitate verification of the position
of the channels. Several grids are possible (see the chapter “Grid” on page 257)

Display of total power between cursors

To display on the trace the total power between the two cursors A and B:
1 Place the cursors at the desired positions.
2 Press the Advanced key, then Total Power A<--->B.
The space between the trace and the two cursors is greyed out and the power is
displayed in the form "P=-4.95dBm".
Pressing the key Total Power A<-->B a second time removes the result of the
total power measurement.

Display of gain Tilt (delta) and gain slope results

The Platform can display two additional results:
• The gain tilt, that is to say the difference between the max.and min. values of the
peaks of the complete signal spectrum between the cursors.
• The gain slope measured by a method using a least squares algorithm on all
detected channel using peak power levels or channel power levels.

To display these results above the channels:

1 Press the Advanced button
2 Press Measure A<->B button
3 Select the cursor and set it to the measurement range limits
4 Press Tilt/Slope A<->B
The Gain Tilt is displayed in dB.

1.The "Auto" value is obtained by continuing to reduce the value of the threshold
below the minimum value of -79.9 dBm

268 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Overlay trace function

The Gain Slope is traced and displayed as value dB/THz or dB/nm according to
the units selected

Disable the Tilt and Slope by pressing the Tilt/Slope button again.

Figure 145 Display of total power, gain tilt and slope of the gain between the cursors

Overlay trace function

This very useful function enables up to eight traces to be displayed on the screen at
once:
• either to compare traces acquired on a number of different fibers in the same
cable,
• or to observe changes over time in traces taken of one and the same fiber.
• or to compare both curves get for each way of propagation in the origin/end
mode.

For this purpose, the Platform possesses an overlay memory which can store:
• the current trace, for comparison with further traces to be acquired subsequently,
• or traces previously saved, for comparison with the current trace,

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 269

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Overlay trace function

Overlaying several traces stored in memory

To display two traces from the memory, deleting the current trace or traces already
loaded:
1 Press the FILE button.
2 On the Menu/Explorer key, select Explorer.
3 Select the files of the traces for display.
4 Press the Load key.
5 Press View trace(s) or Load traces + config.
6 When loading is complete, the Results screen appears: the first trace selected is
the active trace, the other trace being overlaid.

Overlaying the current trace

To copy the current trace into the overlay memory, proceed as follows:
1 On the Results page, press the Advanced key, then Overlay.
2 Press Set New Trace soft key.
The current trace is copied into the overlay memory: represented in a different
color, it is automatically offset with respect to new trace.
A new acquisition can then be started.

NOTE
In the case of Multi-trace display with multiple wavelength acquisition: when
the START key is pressed, all the traces displayed are deleted to leave room
for the new acquisitions.

Display of traces in overlay

• The traces are shown in different colors (the active trace is green).
• Their serial numbers are repeated at the top of the screen.

270 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Overlay trace function

Figure 146 OSA - Overlaid traces

Swapping overlay traces

Measurements can only be made on the active trace and not on overlaid traces. To make
measurements on a trace in overlay, it must first be swapped with the active trace.

To do this:
1 Press the Trace key,
2 Press the and keys, as many times as necessary.
or
Click on the upper bar, with signature of the measurement and cursor information
(next to Mini-trace).

Changing the traces position

Once a trace is displayed in overlay, the traces can be adjusted according to the Y axis:
1 Press Advanced > Overlay menu keys.
2 Select the adjustment according to Y axis:
• Y Reset: all traces are on the same level at the intersection with the active cursor.
• Y Shift: Each trace is shifted from 5 dB from the other.
• Y Exact: the traces displayed are on the same position according to their injec-
tion level.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 271

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Table of results

Trace resulting from the difference between two

traces
It is possible to obtain the trace corresponding to the point-by-point difference between
the current trace and the trace in overlay (if only two traces are displayed simultane-
ously). To do this:
1 Press Advanced > Overlay menu keys
2 Press the 2 Curves Diff. menu key.
The screen displays the 2 traces in overlay and the trace resulting from "Differ-
ence".

Removing a trace in overlay

Removing the current trace
It is possible to remove a trace displayed. To do this:
1 Select it (see previous paragraph),
2 In Results page, press Advanced > Overlay menu keys
3 Press Remove Current Trace.

Removing all the traces

To remove all the traces except the current trace, press the key Remove Other Traces.

Quitting the overlay menu

To quit the overlay menu, press the Exit key.

Table of results
Lines
According to the choice made in the SETUP menu, the table of results may include:
• either a line for each channel detected (if Channel Selection = Permanent)
• or a line for each graduation, (if Channel Selection = Grid and a grid is selected)

272 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Table of results

Type of display
The table may be displayed in a single line, on half of the screen or the whole screen as
a function of the Trace/Table key (see “Trace /Table key” on page 266)

Contents of the table with statistics

When selecting the Statistics measurement mode and multiple acquisitions are
performed, statistics are calculated on the results. To display these results in the table,
select the parameter Table Contents to Statistics.
1 the number of the channel
2 the frequency or the channel wavelength
3 the min. frequency or the channel wavelength
4 the max.frequency or the channel wavelength
5 the level of the channel in dBm
6 the min. level of the channel in dBm
7 the max. level of the channel in dBm

If the option "Osa Edit Table" is released more further more statistics are available by
using the User Defined Tables

Successive addressing of channels according to the sort

type selected

On the trace and in the table, it is possible to move the cursor from one channel to the
next in the selected sort order. To do this,:
1 Use the key Cursor A/Cursor B to choose the cursor A or B to be used on the
trace.
2 Press the Channel key
3 Press and to move the cursor to the following or preceding channel:

Displaying relative results

By default, the table gives the results in absolute values. To obtain these results in rela-
tive values with respect to a reference channel:
1 Press the Table Contents key, then Relative>/<Absolute to select Relative.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 273

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
On/Off-OSNR Method

2 Move the cursor on to the channel that is to serve as the reference.

3 Press the Set Ref. Channel key.
The results are recalculated with respect to this channel of reference.

On/Off-OSNR Method
Challenge
This is a precise out-of-service method used for measuring the in-band OSNR of stan-
dard and also of polarization-division multiplexed (PDM) systems.

Principle of "On/Off-OSNR Measurement"

The On/Off-OSNR method is based on measuring the noise power when the transmis-
sion channel is switched-off.

This is a 2 step method:

1 Switch-on all channels and perform a standard WDM measurement
All parameters like power (Pon) and wavelength are measured and stored in the
instrument
2 Switch-off the channel carrying PDM signals and perform a second measure-
ment
The channel power measured at the deactivated channel wavelength will indicate
the in-band noise Poff = noise power
In-band OSNR is calculated based on Pon and Poff

Setup
Select 'Measurements Mode' = OO-OSNR'

274 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
On/Off-OSNR Method

Figure 147 OSA Setup: OO-OSNR configuration

Step 1: Reference measurement

1 In the Results page, select 'Ref. Acquisition' and perform (Start) an OSA
measurement (all channels ON).

All channels will be detected and the total channel power (=integrated ch-power) of each
channel will be shown and stored in the table = P_ch (Power [dBm]).

OSNR and Noise will not yet be displayed.

Step 2: Noise / OSNR measurement

1 Select 'Noise Acquisition'

2 Switch off the channel you want to measure the OSNR (one or multiple chan-
nels).
3 Select Noise Acquisition measurement (Noise Acq) and start the measurement.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 275

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
On/Off-OSNR Method

The OSA will perform a scan and automatically detect the channels switched-off.

Noise power is measured at the center frequency of the switched-off channels.

Noise power is normalized to Noise Acq BW (i.g. 0.1nm) according to the setup param-
eter.

OSNR will be calculated and displayed in the table based on stored P_ch (step 1).

Limitations
The On/Off-OSNR method requires an intervention into the optical system as the optical
channel to be measured needs to be switched-off.

This is only applicable for an out-of-service measurement.

Some ROADM networks contain so called 'self-blocking' ROADMs.

These kind of ROADMs will block all light including the noise, when there is no signal
present (switched-off).

This can be identified when the noise power < -60dBm or an unrealistic high OSNR
value of >35dB is measured.

The self blocking function can be switched off in many ROADMs by the system manage-
ment SW for service activation and trouble shooting purposes.

=> make sure that the self-blocking function is switched of for On/Off-OSNR
measurements.

The On/Off-OSNR application will report OSNR = #### if the measured noise floor <-
60dBm or the OSNR >35dB, as this is normally not present in an optical network when
there are no self-blocking ROADMs implemented.

276 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Channel filtering

Channel filtering
Field of application
This option is only available for OSA-501M modules.

It is used to filter out one particular channel and extract it via a port called the "drop port".

Configuration
To obtain filtering of a given canal to the drop port, go into theSETUP menu of the OSA
module. Choose Acquisition, then Sweeps and select Filtering.

The options of the acquisition menu then change and offer:

Choice of channel

In the Choice of Channel option, either a value may be entered manually or the current
value from the table can be taken.
• Manual: A new line appears above choice of channel, in which the
required value can be entered.
• Table: The value of the current selection in the results table is used
automatically. To vary this selection, go to the result screen and use Table
contents.

Channel value

Here the manual value of the filtering to be performed can be entered using the direction
keys and . or the numeric keypad

Tracking

Activating the tracking function will make the internal tunable filter follow slow wave-
length changes of optical sources and transmitters providing stable output power.

The information «Locked» appears as long as the channel remains within the tolerance
limits of the instrument. If the channel strays outside the tolerance band, the information
«Unlocked» appears.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 277

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Drift measurement

Using channel filtering

After setting sweep mode (in the acquisition menu of the SETUP screen) on Filtering,
press the START/STOP button to start or stop filtering of the signal.

Drift measurement
The OSA-xxx modules provide a Drift measurement application to perform multiple
measurements and display the recorded results in a graphical format (trace) over the
time.

This can be used to monitor the drift of power, wavelength and SNR of optical systems
or components. This is important to measure the drift of non temperature stabilized
transmitter in CWDM networks.

NOTE
A Drift measurement can only be done at predefined wavelengths or fre-
quencies, for this reason a reference Grid needs to be defined and the
Channel Detection parameter is set to Grid.

The following parameters need to be set for Drift measurements:

Number of Sweeps Defines the number of sweeps (1 to 10.000)
Interval Defines the time between the measurements. Similar to Wait
Period of Long Term application (see “Wait Period” on
page 253).

NOTE
Interval specifies the time between start of one measurement and start of the
next measurement and includes the instrument measurement time

All channels defined by the channel Grid can be monitored simultaneously with the drift
application. To show the monitored measurement parameter use the Trace/Channel/
Drift button in the result screen.

This button has a toggle function with the following selections:

• Trace: in Trace mode the up/down cursor change the active trace in a multiple
trace display

278 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Drift measurement

• Channel: in Channel mode the up/down cursor changes the channel to be

displayed over time.
• Drift: activates the drift display showing the selected parameter over time

Activating the Drift display will show the following screen:

Figure 148 Example of drift measurement, wavelength over time

In the Drift display the measurement result is shown in a graphical format (trace over
time / scans) and a tabular format. The table shows the following parameters:
Channel number number of the displayed channel
Wavelength or Frequency of the displayed channel
Ref reference value of wavelength, power or SNR
AVG average value of wavelength, power or SNR
Min Minimum of wavelength, power or SNR
Max Maximum of wavelength, power or SNR
Sdev or Delta standard deviation or delta (Min/ max) of wavelength, power or
SNR

All Zoom and Shift functions are available in Drift mode.

By using the cursor A it is possible to get access to each measured data point. The Start
value as well as the actual cursor position including the time information is shown in the
grey field of the table.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 279

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
EDFA results analysis

NOTE
If the channel power drifts to a power level below the channel detection
threshold the measurement will indicate "No Signal"

EDFA results analysis

This feature applies only to instruments OSA-50X series.

The results analysis of an EDFA consists in performing two spectrum analysis: one
before the signal is amplified and another one after the signal is amplified. Both traces
are further compared, providing the resulting power gain and noise figure.

EDFA test configuration

To configure the Platform in preparation for an EDFA test, press the SETUP button.

In the Measurements section, set Type on «EDFA».

Other SETUP parameters are the same for EDFA as for WDM measurements. Refer to
“OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 248 for a complete description.

NOTE
If your Platform is equipped with an OSA-303, you may use the two ports to
test before and after the EDFA. In this case, make sure you select «Port
A+B» for Input Port.

EDFA measurements
Measurement procedure, using one port :

If only one port is selected, the Platform is ready to perform the «Acq. in» (signal before
being amplified by EDFA).
1 Connect your Platform to your fiber before the EDFA.
2 Click START/STOP to perform the first acquisition.
3 Switch to Acq. Out.

280 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
EDFA results analysis

4 Connect your Platform to your fiber after the EDFA.

5 Click START/STOP to perform the second acquisition.
Results appear automatically in the table.

Figure 149 EDFA measurements

Select which acquisition you are working on

Select which trace

to view

Measurement procedure, using two ports:

If two ports are selected, the Platform will perform both «Acq. In» and «Acq. Out» in one
step.
1 Connect your Platform to your fiber before the EDFA on port A and your fiber after
the EDFA on port B.
2 Click START/STOP to perform both acquisitions.
Results appear automatically in the table.

EDFA results
A table is displayed (see “EDFA measurements” on page 281) showing for each
channel:
S. In Signal power before EDFA (expressed in dBm)
N. In Noise level before EDFA (expressed in dBm)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 281

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
DFB results analysis

S. Out Signal power after EDFA (expressed in dBm)

N. Out Noise level after EDFA (expressed in dBm)
Gain Power gain from EDFA (expressed in dB)
NF Noise figure from EDFA (expressed in dB)

<Channel> allows moving the cursor from one channel to another, both in the trace and
in the table of results.

Saving EDFA results

Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, both traces may be stored as regular WDM
traces.
To save your files:
1 Select Acq. In to save the first file
2 Click on FILE, select name and Store Trace
3 Click on RESULTS to come back to the previous screen
4 Proceed the same way for Acq. Out.

Loading EDFA results

Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, both traces may be reloaded as regular
WDM traces. Results will be automatically recalculated.
1 Select Acq. In before loading your first file
2 Click on FILE and Explorer to select your file
3 Load and view your trace
The first trace is now loaded for <Acq. In>.
4 Select Acq. Out before loading the second file and proceed the same way to load
the second file.
Results appear automatically in the table.

DFB results analysis

This feature only applies to instruments OSA-50X.

DFB results analysis allows to characterize DFB lasers, by giving the corresponding
SMSR, Offset and bandwidth values.

282 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
DFB results analysis

DFB test configuration

To configure the Platform in preparation for a DFB test, press the SETUP button.

In the Measurements section, set Type on DFB.

A new DFB sub-menu is offered while other Setup parameters are the same for DFB as
for WDM measurements. Refer to “OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 248
for a complete description.

DFB (sub-menu)

Bandwidth level Level (expressed in dB) where the main component bandwidth
should be calculated
Min SMSR Minimum offset value to consider to find the Side Mode
Max SMSR Maximum offset value to consider to find the Side Mode

DFB measurements
Measurement procedure:

1 Use a patchcord to connect your DFB laser source to an input port of the OSA-
XXX module on the Platform.
2 Power on the DFB laser source.
3 Click START/STOP to perform the acquisition.

The trace and corresponding results appear automatically after a few seconds.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 283

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
DFB results analysis

Figure 150 DFB measurements

Select which DFB

you are working on

Cursors A and B are automatically positioned on the first DFB laser, respectively on the
max SMSR and the pick of the main component.

DFB results
A table is displayed (see “DFB measurements” on page 284) showing for each DFB:
Channel Number of DFB laser detected
Wavelength Wavelength (in nm) of the DFB main component
Level integrated power (expressed in dBm)
SMSR Side Mode Suppression Ratio (expressed in dBc)
Mode off Mode Offset (expressed in nm)
BW @ level Calculated bandwidth (expressed in nm) according to the
bandwidth level (expressed in dBc) defined in the setup menu.

When the <Channel> key is selected, use the arrow keys and to move the cursor
from one DFB pick to another1, both in the trace and in the table of results.

1.In case several DFB lasers are characterized at the same time

284 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Testing ROADM networks

Saving DFB results

DFB Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be stored as a regular
WDM trace.

To save your files:

1 Click on FILE, select name and Store Trace
2 Click on RESULTS to come back to the previous screen

Loading DFB results

Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be reloaded as a regular
WDM trace. Make sure Type parameter is set on DFB in the Setup menu to recalculate
DFB results.
Results appear automatically in the table.

Testing ROADM networks

In ROADM networks, each channel may traverse different routes, optical amplifiers, and
add-drop filters, resulting in different OSNR for each channel. Conventional OSA
measurements are unreliable, as they indicate OSNR values that are too high: up to
10dB above the true OSNR. Using the in-band OSNR method (I-OSNR) of OSA-500R,
OSA-500RS or OSA-110R will provide the true OSNR value in ROADM based networks.

Figure 151 ROADM network test

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 285

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Testing ROADM networks

With OSA-500R, OSA-500RS or OSA-110R, it is possible to measure the "true" in-band

OSNR using the polarization nulling technique.

Here is a test setup for in-band OSNR testing.

Figure 152 Test setup for In-band OSNR testing

OSA-500RS OSA-500RS OSA-500RS OSA-500RS OSA-500RS

Example:
• OSNR measured with in-band OSA-500R or OSA-500RS at terminal site (1)
provides value of 14dB
• Service failed as the OSNR is < 20 dB

How to locate the failure?

Perform the following tests at EDFA monitor access points (2-5):

• Check per channel input and output power of EDFA
=> Input power must be in the system specified range
• Check power uniformity
=> Equal power levels for all channels at EDFA output
• Compare OSNR from EDFA to EDFA
=> OSNR may decrease because of the amplifier noise figure NF (type 3-4 dB)
per EDFA
• Locate and exchange optical amplifier

286 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Measurement of I-OSNR

Measurement of I-OSNR
Pre-setting the OSA for an in-band OSNR
measurement in I-OSNR mode
As the out-of-band OSNR measurements might not provide the 'TRUE' OSNR value for
the above listed systems configurations, the in-band OSNR measurement method
based on VIAVI’s polarization nulling technique must be selected.
1 Press SETUP until OSA test setup appears.
2 Press Test Auto I-OSNR button.
The instrument will be set for in-band OSNR measurements.

All Parameter settings will be done automatically:

The following parameters will be pre-set:

Sweep mode single
Sweep range ext. C-band= 1525-1570nm, covering all EDFA
applications
I-OSNR sensitivity (for OSA-500R only) needs to be set manually, see below
Resolution full, i.e. highest resolution
Channel detection permanent auto detection of channels & ch-spacing
Min channel spacing std 50GHz, needs to be adjusted manually, see below
OSNR method needs to be adjusted manually, see below
noise Acq. BW standard 0.1nm
OSNR meas Type S/N = indicates real signal to noise measurement

3 Select Show I-OSNR trace: Yes

In the I-OSNR mode the polarization nulling trace can be displayed on the screen by
activating the Show I-OSNR trace to Yes.

A blue trace will then show the progress of the suppression of the polarized signal by the
polarization nulling method.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 287

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Measurement of I-OSNR

Manual Settings:I-OSNR sensitivity (for OSA-500R and OSA-

110R only)

I-OSNR sensitivity will set the number of measurements performed for polarization
nulling
• Low (fast) mode (<2 min measurement time)
Fast measurement with small number of polarization nulling measurements
=> can be used for a first check when expected OSNR <20dB for 10G systems at
channel spacing of 50GHz and higher; and for systems running at 40GBps at
channel spacing of 100GHz or higher
• Medium mode (<5min measurement time)
Polarization nulling will be performed at about 3 times more measurement points
than fast mode
=> to be used when expected OSNR is in the range of 20-25dB for 10G systems
at channel spacing of 50GHz and higher; and for systems running at 40GBps at
channel spacing of 100GHz or higher.
• High mode (<11min measurement time)
Polarization nulling will be performed at about 3 times more points than in
medium mode
=> to be used when expected OSNR is >25dB and for all systems running at 40/
100GBps at channel spacing of 50GHz

Manual Settings: Min Channel Spacing

Min channel spacing needs to be set according to the minimum present channel spacing
in a system.

NOTE
The preset min channel spacing is 50GHz, which works for most of the sys-
tems. For other systems, the operator needs to enter the effective minimum
system channel spacing of the WDM system. This is important for a correct
approximation of the noise distribution inside the transmission band of the
WDM channels.

288 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Measurement of I-OSNR

Example 1: only every second channel is loaded, system looks like 100GHz channel
spacing
It might be that the system has a visible channel spacing of 100GHz but the min
channel spacing is 50GHz as only every second channel is loaded. This could
also be the case when 50GHz optical interleavers are used to multiplex two
100GHz spaced WDM signals (even and odd channels) together into a 50GHz
spaced system
=> min-ch-spacing needs to be set to 50GHz

Example 2: submarine links

Submarine links often pack 3 channels into the ITU-T 100GHz grid
=> min-channel spacing needs to be set to 33GHz

Manual Settings: OSNR method

The OSNR method can be set according to the application.

• ROADM networks: networks with optical filters in the link:

Set OSNR method to 'filtered' (=pre-set)
In-band noise approximation will be done automatically to match the in-band
noise distribution of the measured filter shape, whatever shape it is: flat top or
rounded
=> set OSNR method to 'filtered'
• Overlapping spectra: systems with Overlapping spectra, having no filter in the
link (e.g. submarine links or 40/100G links at 50GHz channel spacing)
=> set OSNR method to 'unfiltered'

In-band noise will be approximated as a flat distribution.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 289

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

Performing an in-band OSNR test in I-OSNR mode

In the I-OSNR mode the instrument performs multiple scans for one measurement.
During each scan the polarization controller will change its setting to adopt to the input
signal for a maximum suppression of the signal to get access to the in-band noise.
1 Start the measurement by pushing the START/STOP button
A green on top of the WDM table will show the progress of the measurement.
When the measurement is finished the green bar disappears and the result is
shown in the table.

Figure 153 Result trace of an I-OSNR measurement

The table will show the following results:

• Wavelen/Freq: will be displayed in nm or in THz
• Spacing: channel spacing in THz
• Level: total integrated channel power in dBm
• Noise: in-band noise power normalized to 0.1nm noise bandwidth
• I-OSNR: in-band OSNR measured Gaussian or no Filter approximation

WDM-Expert Software option

The WDM-Expert option is a software option, available on VIAVI OSA-110M//110R and
OSA-500/500M/500RS.

290 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

This option allows to perform Real time analysis (no additional measurement time
required) and can be used as a post analysis software on already measured links.

A new test parameter is available in WDM-table, Data Rate, allowing to get an

• Expert analysis of each optical channel to derive transmitted data rate
• Indication of per channel data rate and pol-mux modulation

Transmitted signals Indication in WDM Table

100G signals higher using pol-mux modulation ≥100G PM
40G signals without pol-mux modulation 40G
10G signals without pol-mux modulation 10G
2.5G signals without pol-mux modulation 2.5G

Configuring the display with WDM-Expert option

Once the software option is installed, new parameters are available in the Setup page:
1 Press SETUP.
2 Select Display menu key.
3 In the Display parameters, press Table Content parameter.
In addition to pre-defined (Standard / Statistics / Pass/Fail / CWDM - see “Table
Content” on page 261) a pre-defined Extended and four user definable WDM
tables can be created
Extended to display the Data Rate in the trace results table
The result table displays the columns Ch-Number, Wavelength/
Frequency, Spacing/Offset, Ch-Power, OSNR, Noise and Data
Rate.
User Def 1... 4 The user may compose any available result column to its own
result table. The user may define up to four different user-
defined result tables.

If the Table Content is set to one of the User Defined value, you can open the table
editor page by pressing the softkey Edit Table.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 291

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

Customizing the WDM table (User Defined

configuration)
The WDM-Expert option allows to define up to four user definable WDM tables, each
one with up to 7 columns.

Once the parameter User Def. 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected in the Setup > Display page:
1 Press Edit Table menu key.

Figure 154 Customization of WDM table

2 In the right menu keys, check Value is defined to Available.

3 In Column Categories, select the category into which an item must be added to
user-defined table.
4 In Available Columns, select the item to be added to the table (video reversed).
5 Click on Add to Table menu keys.
The selected item is displayed on the right part of the screen, in the User Def. #
column.
6 Repeat from step 3 to step 5 to add all columns wished, up to seven.
7 Press Exit to return to Setup screen.
8 Press RESULTS to display the current trace open with the user defined table.

292 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

Modifying a user defined table

The left column of the table editor page shows the result table column categories; the
column in the middle shows the corresponding result columns, and the right column
shows the columns, that are currently part of the result table.

By selecting a column category and one of the available columns you may compose
your own current result table by pressing the softkey Add to Table.

To rearrange the sequence of the columns in the result table select one of the result
column in the Current Table column.

Figure 155 Modify / Remove items

Once a User defined table is available, it can be modified at any time from the Setup
page:
• the position of a value in the table can be modified
• a value can be removed from the table.
1 In the Display parameters, press Table Content parameter.
2 Select the User Def. 1, 2, 3 or 4 to be modified
3 Press Edit Table
4 In the column User Def. #, click on the parameter (= value) to be removed or
moved.
The menu key Value is defined to Actual. and the menu keys are modified.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 293

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

5 Click on Move Item up ˄ or Move Item down ˅ to change the position of the item
in the table.
or
Click on Remove from Tab. X to delete the item form the table.

Items available per category

Figure 156 Items for each category for user definable WDM table

Chan.Numbers & Names

Sequence Number channels are consecutively numbered.

Channel ID the channel identification, defined by the text in Display > Grid >
Channel settings > Channel ID
Band ID the channel identification, defined by the text in Display > Grid >
Channel settings > Band ID

294 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

ITU Chan Number channel number derived from the channel's center frequency in
the range of 190.100 THz to 197.950 THz (1 .. 79.5)

Spect.Pos. [Disp.Unit]

All spectral positions in this columns category are displayed in nm or THz. This depends
on the value of the Setup/Display/Unit parameter
Center the center frequency / wavelength of the channel signal
Spacing the frequency / wavelength difference to the previous channel
signal
Offset the frequency / wavelength difference to the corresponding grid
line (only available if the parameter Analysis/Channel detection/
Mode is set to Grid)
Offs./Spac depends on the parameter Analysis > Channel detection >
Mode: if this is set to Grid: Offset (see above) else Spacing
Center Ref depends on the parameter Analysis/Channel detection/Mode: if
it is set to Grid: the grid frequency / wavelength else the center
frequency / wavelength of the channel signal
Center rel the difference between the center frequency / wavelength of the
channel signal and the reference channel (set by the softkey Set
Ref Channel on the result page)
Center Ref.rel the difference between the reference frequency / wavelength
of the channel and the reference channel

Spect. Pos [THz]

All spectral positions in this columns category are displayed in THz, independent of the
value of the Setup/Display/Unit parameter. The available result table columns corre-
spond to Spect. Pos [Disp.Unit]
Center the center frequency of the channel signal
Spacing the frequency difference to the previous channel signal
Offset the frequency difference to the corresponding grid line (only
available if the parameter Analysis/Channel detection/Mode is
set to Grid)
Center Ref depends on the parameter Analysis/Channel detection/Mode: if
it is set to Grid: the grid frequency else the center frequency of
the channel signal

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 295

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

Center rel the difference between the center frequency of the channel
signal and the reference channel (set by the softkey Set Ref
Channel on the result page)
Center Ref.rel the difference between the reference frequency of the channel
and the reference channel

Spect. Pos [nm]

All spectral positions in this columns category are displayed in nm, independent of the
value of the Setup/Display/Unit parameter. The available result table columns corre-
spond to Spect. Pos [Disp.Unit]
Center the center wavelength of the channel signal
Spacing the wavelength difference to the previous channel signal
Offset the wavelength difference to the corresponding grid line (only
available if the parameter Analysis/Channel detection/Mode is
set to Grid)
Center Ref depends on the parameter Analysis/Channel detection/Mode: if
it is set to Grid: the grid wavelength else the center wavelength
of the channel signal
Center rel the difference between the center wavelength of the channel
signal and the reference channel (set by the softkey Set Ref
Channel on the result page)
Center Ref.rel the difference between the reference wavelength of the channel
and the reference channel

Channel power

Power Peak the peak power of the channel signal

Power Integr. the entire power of the channel signal
This parameter indicates the calculated total channel power
level from the detected channels, achieved by mathematical
power integration over ± ½ min channel spacing around the
channel center frequency.(see "Min. Channel spacing" on page
178). This power level may differ from the peak power level
indicated by cursor evaluation in the graphical trace.

296 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

NOTE
The power integration method is used to avoid wrong channel power mea-
surement with modulated signals having a larger bandwidth than the optical
filter resolution bandwidth of the OSA.

P / Pcomp the percentage of the power of a channel signal to the sum of all
powers of the channel signal
Power Peak rel the difference between the peak power and the peak power of
the reference channel
Power Integr. rel the difference between the integrated power and the integrated
power of the reference channel

Noise & OSNR

Noise the noise level in dBm.

Indicates the noise level measured left and right of the peak of
the optical channel (out-of-band noise measurement). The noise
level is normalized to the selected noise acquisition bandwidth
(see noise acq. Bandwidth setting).

NOTE
The noise level depends on the noise acquisition bandwidth so the noise
level may be different to the result in the graphical trace.

NOTE
For OSA-500R, OSA-500RS and OSA-110R, in I-OSNR measure-ment
mode, the noise level is calculated based on the polarization nulling method
indicating the noise level at the channel transmission wavelength (in-band
noise measurement).

OSNR The optical signal to noise ratio for the channel in dB.
In WDM mode this parameter indicates the out of band SNR
result based on the out-of-band noise measurement.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 297

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

NOTE
For OSA-500R, OSA-500RS and OSA-110R, with I-OSNR setting, this
parameter indicates the "true" I-OSNR (in-band OSNR) measured with the
polarization nulling method.

Noise Dist [THz/nm] distance between the center of the channel and the point of
reference for the noise (only valid for Acquisition Mode
WDM / OSNR) given in THz or nm; depends on the value
of the Setup/Display/Unit parameter
Noise Dist. [GHz] distance between the center of the channel and the point of
reference for the noise (only valid for Acquisition Mode WDM /
OSNR) given in GHz; independent of the value of the Setup/
Display/Unit parameter
Noise Dist. [nm] distance between the center of the channel and the point of
reference for the noise (only valid for Acquisition Mode WDM /
OSNR) given in nm; independent of the value of the Setup/
Display/Unit parameter
Noise rel the difference between the noise level and the noise level of the
reference channel
OSNR rel the difference between the OSNR and the OSNR of the
reference channel

Statistics

The statistics results are only available if the Acquisition Sweep parameter is set to
Statistics!

All spectral positions in this columns category are displayed in nm or THz. This depends
on the value of the Setup/Display/Unit parameter
Center Avg. the average of the center frequency or wavelength of a channel
signal
Center Min. the minimum of the center frequency or wavelength of a channel
signal
Center Max. the maximum of the center frequency or wavelength of a
channel signal
Center Delta the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the
center frequency or wavelength of a channel signal

298 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

Center Sdev. the standard deviation of the center frequency or wavelength of

a channel signal
Power Integr. Avg the average of the integrated power of a channel signal
Power Integr. Min the minimum of the integrated power of a channel signal
Power Integr. Max the maximum of the integrated power of a channel signal
Power Integr. Delta the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the
integrated power of a channel signal
Power Integr. Sdef the standard deviation of the integrated power of a channel
signal
Osnr Avg. the average of the optical signal to noise ratio of a channel
signal
Osnr Min. the minimum of the optical signal to noise ratio of a channel
signal
Osnr Max. the maximum of the optical signal to noise ratio of a channel
signal
Osnr Delta the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the
optical signal to noise ratio of a channel signal
Osnr Sdev the standard deviation of the optical signal to noise ratio of a
channel signal
Center Avg.rel the average of the difference between the center frequency or
wavelength of a channel signal and the reference channel
Power Integr. Avg.relthe average of the difference between the power of a channel
signal and the reference channel
Osnr Avg.rel the average of the difference between the OSNR of a channel
signal and the reference channel

Wdm Analysis

Pass-Fail If alarms are activated (see Channel settings Alarms) a pass/fail

summary of the channel is displayed.
Data-Rate The Data Rate column gives an estimation of the data rate the
channel is modulated with. The resolution depends on the OSA
module type:
OSA-500R & RS: can differentiate between =100G PolMux,
40G, 10G, and =2.5G
OSA-500 & OSA-500M: can differentiate between =40G, 10G,
and =2.5G
OSA-110R & RS: can differentiate between =100G PolMux,
40G, and =10G

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 299

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
WDM-Expert Software option

OSA-110M: can differentiate between = 40G, and =10G.

Results tables with WDM-Expert software option

If the Table Content parameter is defined with Extended, a new column Data Rate is
available in the results table:

Figure 157 Extended Table Content

If a user-defined table content has been configured, the table differs according to the
items selected for the results table:

300 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

Figure 158 Example of user-defined results table

Saving the trace and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the trace can be saved and a report can be gener-
ated directly from the results screen.

Saving results and creating a report from results page

To generate a report:
1 Press Fast Report menu key .
A menu displays under the trace.
2 In the menu, configure the file saving (and the report).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 301

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

Figure 159 Fast report configuration

a In Fiber Number parameter, press to modify if necessary the number of

the current fiber.
b In the Save Mode parameter, select:
txt file select Yes to save the results in a blts file and to generate a
txt file of the results.
pdf file select Yes to save the results in a blts file and to generate a
report in a pdf file
c In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
d Modify the Fiber Number/Fiber Code using the key .
The parameter is different according to the Cable Structure configuration (see
“Cable structure” on page 45)
e In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A)
f In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
3 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
4 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad
or
Click on Auto Filenaming menu key to apply the file name defined in the Setup
screen, in Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 50).
5 Press Enter to validate.

302 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

NOTE
The osa file and the txt/pdf file will have the same name.

The icon displays during saving process.

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform.

NOTE
The trace and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

Opening the report

To open the report:
1 Press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the file/report.
For the txt file: trace file_pmd.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.pmd.pdf.
3 Press Load.
The file opens onto the MTS/T-BERD.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 303

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

Figure 160 Example of OSA Report in pdf

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A pdf report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS 8000V2 or 6000/6000A (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on
page 545).

Recalling files
Once a file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:

304 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.

2 Select the directory and then the file to open
3 Click on Load
4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 305

Chapter 8 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

306 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 9
Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum
Measurement
This chapter describes the different stages in carrying out a spectrum analysis of an
optical signal, or analyzing effects from an optical components or network elements like
ROADMs, DFB-sources..., by a Platform 8000V2 equipped with an OSCA -710.

The OSCA-710 series is only available on MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 and

ONA-1000 platforms.
ORR 50GHz
(FWHM) typ
Resolution
bandwidth

Total save

POL-MUX

ROADM
I-OSNR
Power

OSNR

OSNR

WDM
Type

typ.

OSCA-710 3pm 50dBc 23dBm X X X X

NOTE
Looking for the OSCA-type and series Nr, on MTS/T-BERD 8000V2 press
HOME > About.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Laser safety” on page 309
• “Guidelines for the prevention of hazards” on page 309
• “Possible carrier devices for OSCA-710 modules and its electrical specifications”
on page 309
• “Cleaning of Connectors” on page 310

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 307

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement

• “Transportation” on page 310

• “Configuration of the instrument” on page 310
• “OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 311
• “Acquisition” on page 320
• “Trace display functions” on page 321
• “Table of results” on page 327
• “Testing ROADM networks” on page 329
• “Measuring POL-MUX (polarization mulitplexed ) channels” on page 330
• “File Management” on page 334

308 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Laser safety

Laser safety
The OSCA module contains a Class 1 Laser product according to DIN IEC 60825-
1:2014. Please take notice of following instructions

When the system or device is switched on, never look directly into the in-
and output or into a connected optical fiber.

The devices which are tested can be rated in a higher laser class with
dangerous radiation. Observe their security instructions. Please heed the
normal precautions for working with lasers and consider local regulations.

Guidelines for the prevention of hazards

In order doing measurements, the OSCA-710 might be plugged to fibers, which could
operate at highly dangerous optical power-levels. Due to the fact that only a small part
of the optical spectrum (C-Band) can be measured, one can not exclude that radiation
beyond the detectable range is received however. Therefore the OSCA-710 must not be
used to verify or monitor a certain class of hazard.

Possible carrier devices for OSCA-710 modules and

its electrical specifications

Mainframe name Power supply Voltage Wattage

MTS-8000 with Adapter E8100E 24 VDC ± 5 % 220 Watts max

MTS-8000E with Adapter E8100E 24 VDC ± 5 % 220 Watts max

19 VDC ± 5 % 160 Watts max

ONA-1000 with adapter
24 VDC ± 5 % 330 Watts max

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 309

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Cleaning of Connectors

Cleaning of Connectors
Cleaning of the patchcord connector is extremely important to avoid damage to the input
of the OSCA. A dirty connection can irreversibly damage both surfaces, especially when
working with high powers.

We highly recommend inspection of the patchcord before connecting it to the OSCA.

Transportation
The OSCA can be damaged by excessive acceleration during transpor-
tation with improper packaging.
Modules without a MTS / T-BERD should be shipped only in the origi-
nal packaging.
For shipping of a MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 containing an OSCA, use
either the original packaging with the black rubber foam, or the trans-
portation case referenced E80HCASE-OSA.
Using the original packing material ensures that the device is properly
protected during shipping. Otherwise, VIAVI cannot give warranty on
modules good protection.
If you need a new packaging, please contact VIAVI Technical Assis-
tance Center.

Configuration of the instrument

The instrument configuration menu will be displayed directly after power up or by
pressing the HOME-button.

The actual module status will be shown (ON/OFF) on system window

1 For configuring the OSCA press the OSCA-icon (by touchscreen), or select the
function icon by arrow-keys and press ENTER.
2 Press RESULT button to see the OSCA-result window.
If the MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2 is switched Off in this configuration, the next start
up will directly start the to OSCA-application, and display the result window.

For more details about the general MTS / T-BERD- configuration see the 8000 V2 Plat-
forms user manuals.

310 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

For measurement, connect the fiber to be tested on the optical input of the selected
module.

NOTE
Consider the maximum optical input power for OSCA.

Kind of input connector:

• if the protection cap is green the optical input interface is a angled physical
connector (APC-type)
• if it is a black protection cap, the interface type is physical connector (PC-type)

OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

To configure the 8000 V2 Platform in preparation for an OSCA test on a fiber, press the
SETUP button.

The various measurement parameters are proposed:

1 Setup in Test Auto mode

Acquisition settings
Mode WDM / OSNR POL-MUX
Sweep single, continuous
Sweep range Full, Start/End, Center, Span
Averaging acquisition No
Resolution 0.3 pm
Analyze settings
Channel detection Permanent, Grid
Signal threshold Auto
Min channel spacing Std 50GHz
OSNR
OSNR method left & right
S<->N distance Auto Not available
Noise acq BW std 0.1 nm
SNR Meas. Type S/N

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 311

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Splitter compensation No
Tilt & Slope Gain No
Results screen settings
Grid default = last value used
Alarms No
Wavelength range Auto
Table Content Standard
Unit nm
Show I-OSNR trace No
Configuration of the file set-up (see Chapter 20)
Filenaming [Cable_id][Fiber_Num][Test_Poin][Direction]
Auto Store Yes
Nb Fiber Increment Yes

2 or define your own configuration

Click on one parameter on the screen to display the possible options: make your choice
using the direction keys and , or using the touchscreen.

The Setup parameters are arranged in 5 sub-chapters:

1 Acquisition
2 Display
3 Measurement
4 Link
5 File

312 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Figure 161 OSCA Setup

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the

the Link parameters” on page 43 File parameters” on page 48

On Setup page, select one of the menu clicking on one of the menu key or press Main
Menu to display the menu keys on the right of the screen.

The various parameters proposed are defined below.

Loading a configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for OSCA test:
1 Press SETUP hard key.
2 On bottom right of setup page, press Load Config. menu key.
3 In the Explorer, select the desired file configuration
4 Press Load Config. menu keys.
A beep is emitted to validate the selection of the configuration file.
The software automatically brings you back to setup page.

NOTE
Most of the configuration files are available into the Platform in disk/config/
OSA.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 313

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

Acquisition Parameters
Mode

WDM / OSNR Module is used for measuring the OSNR by using the
standardized analysis method. This mode is recommended for
OSNR measurements on signals without optical filtering.
POL-MUX This setup is used for polarization multiplexed carriers. The
OSNR of the signal is calculated with a spectral correlation
method on active links. See „“Measuring POL-MUX (polarization
mulitplexed ) channels” on page 330.

Sweep Range

Select the wavelength numbers or Full parameter to use all wavelengths available.

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

Those parameters are only linked to the current active fiber.

Channel Detection1
Signal threshold 1
Threshold of detection of channels (see “Channel detection threshold” on page 326).
Auto. the threshold is determined automatically.
Manual the threshold can be set from -79.9 to +30 dBm
Use direction keys or Edit Number to modify values.

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace
and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

314 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

NOTE
Modification of the parameters Channel detection and Signal threshold
will only modify the results if the OSCA module present is the one that was
used for the acquisition.

Mode
Grid The grid serves as a detection reference: it must therefore be
Regular, Manual, ITU DWDM, ITU CWDM, LR4/ER4-100G,
LR4/ER4-40G or 10x10-100G. The choice of grid takes priority
over the choice Channel Selection. For example, it is not
possible to choose Channel selection = Grid, if the option
selected for the grid is «Without» or «Conventional».
Permanent Automatic detection of the channel on each acquisition. In this
mode the channels are always detected without making a
reference measurement.

NOTE
At the end of an acquisition in permanent mode, it is possible to create a grid
on the basis of the channels detected. To do this, press the key Adopt Grid
in the SETUP menu.
The new Grid can be shown as table by pressing View Grid in the Setup
menu.

Min. Channel spacing

Defines the minimum spacing of two adjacent optical channels in the system.

This parameter is also used to set the range for integration to measure the accurate total
signal power of an optical channel. The window for channel power integration will be ±1/
2 the min. channel spacing setting left and right to the channel center frequency.

The measurement result will be displayed in the WDM table as 'Level' in dBm.

Min. Channel elevation

Defines the minimum elevation of two adjacent peaks from the valley between them
which is required to recognize independent channels. Peaks which are not separated by
a valley deeper than the min.channel elevation are considered as part of the same
optical channel.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 315

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

This example shows two signals, the left having only one peak larger than the selected
Min.channel elevation, the right one with two peaks.

The two peaks of the right one are separated by a valley, but their elevation from that
valley is smaller than the Min.channel elevation. Therefore they are not treated as inde-
pendent signals

Select Auto to define the value automatically or select Manual to enter a specific value
for the parameter.

OSNR
To modify these parameters, go to the OSNR line. A sub-menu then appears proposing
the following options:

OSNR method (only available in OSNR mode)1

Side of the peak where the point of reference for noise
measurement is taken (left, right, average left and right, worst
case of left and right).
S<->N Distance (only available in OSNR mode)
Distance between the peak of the channel and the point of
reference for the noise.
Auto: distance determined according to spacing of channels.
Manual: an additional line Manual value opens. Go down and modify the
value with < > or click on the value and enter a new one in the keypad that
opens
Pre-defined: select 25 GHz (0.2 nm), 50 GHz (0.4 nm),100 GHz (0.8 nm)
from the peak.
Noise Acq. Bandwidth
Reference bandwidth used for the acquisition of noise:
Standard 0.1 nm

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on

the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

316 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

With the <> keys you can select other values between 0.05 nm and 1.0 nm.
OSNR meas.type: S / N
S/N: the integrated power in the channel minus the noise is considered as
signal

Splitter compensation
When the measurement is made after a tap coupler (also known as a splitter), it is
possible to compensate for the loss introduced by this element and to display the value
measured before or after it.

The following options are available:

Value1 Yes: activation of compensation and choice of its value using

the keys and : or the numeric keypad: from 1 to 30 dB (by
increments of 1) or 1 to 99% (by increments of 0.1%).
Unit Choice of compensation in dB or as a percentage of the value
measured.
For example, with a 10 dB splitter, the results will be augmented by 10 dB. The
trace will be offset upwards by 10 dB. A channel measured at -30 dBm will be
displayed -20 dBm.

Display Parameters
In the Setup page, press Display softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Display).

Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen.

Grid
Go to the Grid line to access the Grid sub-menu. Select the Type line to see the different
choices and modify them if required.

Five possible types of grid are proposed with different corresponding values, some of
which are fixed or non-applicable, others editable.

The type «Conventional» and the option «Without» do not give access to the parameters
of the Grid sub-menu.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 317

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

The others give access to certain options, as shown in the table below:

Table 7 Grid menu options for each type of grid

ITU DWDM Regular Manual

Grid name Editable Editable Editable

ITU standard G.692 N/A N/A

Editable, from 1530 to

First ITU 1565 nm, by incre- Editable from 1530 to
channel (with ments corresponding to 1565 nm, by incre- N/A
display in nm) the channel spacing ments of 0.01 nm.
selected
Channel Editable, from 25 to Editable from 0.1 to
N/A
spacing 200 GHz 100 GHz

Number of Editable, from 1 to 256 Editable, from 1 to 256

Editable from 1 to 256
channels by increments of 1 by increments of 1

Channel Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each channel, name the
settings band, and name each channel

NOTE
The maximum real number of channels for ITU grids depends on the value
selected for the first channel and the spacing between the channels.

NOTE
It is possible to display the grid with the View Grid key. A table then appears
showing the channel number, the name of the channel, the reference wave-
length and the alarm thresholds for delta F, min. P, max. P and min. SNR.

Alarms
When Channel Detection is positioned on Grid, it is possible to activate an alarm
system. This system is based on a system of thresholds. Any measurement results that
exceed these thresholds are displayed in red in the table, and the icon appears at

318 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
OSCA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

the top right of the screen. If all the results are within the thresholds (no result is in red),
the icon becomes .

To activate the alarm system, go to the <Alarms> line and select "Active".

Thresholds can then be set (using the direction keys or numeric keypad), to global level
or to the level of each channel:
1 Global alarms
Number of channels Yes/No
Delta channel power1 No or threshold modifiable from 0.1 to 60 dB
2
Delta OSNR No or threshold modifiable from 0.1 to 60 dB
3
Composite power No or threshold modifiable from -59.9 dBm to +20 dBm
2 Channel alarms
Max channel offset4 No/Freq/Wavelen.
Min. channel power5 Yes/No
Max. channel power6 Yes/No
Min. OSNR 7 Yes/No
Channel Number From «001» to the max. number of channels.
Channel value Display of the wavelength of the channel number selected
Delta F / Delta WL8 From 0 to 2 THz (2 THz is the default value) or from 0 to 8 nm.
The unit depends on the value of the parameter Max channel
offset
P Min. 9 From -80 dBm to +9.9 dBm (below max. threshold)
10
P Max. From -79.9 dBm to +10 dBm (above min. threshold)
OSNR From 0 to 50 dB

1.Max. acceptable variation between max. power and min. power on all channels
2.Max. acceptable variation between max. SNR and min. SNR on all channels
3.Maximum composite power
4.Wavelength drift. Selection of the alarm on the basis of the value of delta F
5.The values are then defined in Min. P
6.The values are then defined in Max. P
7.The values are then defined in Min. SNR
8.Delta of frequency or wavelength
9.Minimum power
10.Maximum power

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 319

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Acquisition

Zoom Mode
The OSCA module performs a measurement over the sweep range, but the display
shows the part defined by the Zoom mode.
Auto display automatically zooms into the wavelength range where
optical channels are present
Full display full sweep range or part chosen by the zoom function of
the result page

For sweep range = FULL, it is possible to display the same wavelength range for every
new sweep, independent of previous settings of the zoom function on the result page:
C Band 1530-1565nm
Start/ End manually selectable start / end wavelengths
Center / Span manually selectable center /span.

Unit
Here the units of the x axis can be selected:
• Frequency in THz
• Wavelength in nm

Table Content
Standard The result table displays the columns Ch-Number, Ch-ID,
Wavelength/Frequency, Spacing/Offset, Ch-Power, OSNR,
Noise

Acquisition
To start a measurement press START key. The OSCA-710 will scan over the entire wave-
length range and the measurement result will be displayed in graphical and tabular
format.

320 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

NOTE
A warning message appears when the channel power or the composite
power is larger than the absolute maximum rating for the OSCA.
In this case be extremely careful when disconnecting the patchcord - it might
emit dangerously high optical power!

Trace display functions

The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see
example Figure 162 on page 322.

A range of functions enable modifications to the display of the trace (Cursors, Zoom/
Shift, Event/Trace, Trace/Table, Full scale, etc.).

Display of the WDM / OSCA results

The results window, obtained by pressing the RESULTS button, shows different zones
displaying, from top to bottom:
• the mini-trace in the upper part of the screen, accompanied by the principal char-
acteristics of the acquisition and of the file if the result is stored in memory.
• the trace results associated with cursors A and B
• the trace proper (see “Trace display functions” on page 321).
• the table of results (see “Table of results” on page 327).

The trace represents power (in dBm) as a function of frequency (in THz) or wavelength
(in nm). The channels detected are represented by peaks.

NOTE
If several acquisitions are performed, the trace displayed is the one corre-
sponding to the last acquisition.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 321

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Figure 162 Example of OSCA test result (with grid)

Filename
Number of acquisitions Fiber number
Mini trace display

Wavelengths and power

at point of trace
referenced by cursors A
and B
Wavelength and power
difference between
cursors A and B

Number of the channel

Display functions

Zoom function
The Zoom function is used to analyze part of the trace in greater detail. In association
with Channel (WDM/OSCA) it enables rapid checking of a succession of events or chan-
nels.
The zoom is centered on the cursor selected. If the two cursors A and B are selected,
the zoom is centered midway between the two cursors.

The position of the section of trace displayed with respect to the complete trace is repre-
sented by a red rectangle on the mini-trace at the top left-hand corner of the screen.

To define a zoom on the trace:

1 Select Cursor A or B and center it on the zone to be examined
2 On the Shift/Zoom key, select the Zoom function.

322 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

3 Use the or key to increase or reduce the zoom factor.

or
Use touchscreen and click on trace to position the upper left and bottom right
corners of the zoomed area.

Zooming on the different channels in succession

1 Zoom on one of the channels as shown above.

2 On the Trace/Channel key, select the Channel function.
3 Use the and keys to move the zoom on to the successive channels.

Cursors function
The vertical cursors A and B are used in the Zoom and Shift functions to position or
delete markers.

The cursors A and B are represented by vertical lines of different colors:

• in a solid line if the cursor is selected.
• in a dotted line if the cursor is not selected.

Positioning the cursor

When a trace is displayed, the key can be used to select one or both cursors.

The direction keys and move the selected cursor(s) along the trace.

When a selected cursor touches the right or left-hand edge of the screen, the trace starts
to scroll horizontally to maintain display of this cursor.

If an unselected cursor has been moved off-screen by a zoom, it can be brought back
on to the screen by selecting it and then pressing one of the direction keys or . It
will then appear on whichever edge of the screen is closest to its position.

When the cursor function is selected, the keys and move the trace vertically.

Cursors information

The informations on Cursors are always displayed on the upper part of the screen.
Above the trace are shown the co-ordinates of the points of intersection of the cursors
A and B with the trace, together with the distance between the two points.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 323

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Cursor X and Y

Two types of cursors can be defined:

• Cursor X: only a vertical bar is present.
• Cursor X and Cursor Y: there is a vertical bar and a horizontal bar. The intersec-
tion between these two bars is placed on the trace.

To display the type of cursor selected:

1 Click on Advanced.
2 Select the key Cursor X / Cursor Y to modify the current choice.
Each click on this key will alternatively insert or delete the check mark against
Cursor Y

Full scale
To display the entire trace, with no zoom or displacement:
1 Either press the Full Scale key
or,
With Trace selected on Trace/Channel, press validation key

Shift function
The Shift function is used to displace the displayed section of the trace by pressing the
direction keys.
The horizontal shift is performed maintaining the point of intersection between the trace
and the selected cursor at the same level, scrolling the trace horizontally while following
it vertically, so that it never goes off the screen.
To use this function:
1 Select the zoom factor as described above.
2 Choose cursor and cursor position.
3 On the Zoom/Shift key, select Shift.
4 Use the direction keys or touch and hold screen to shift the trace in the desired
direction.

Trace /Table key

This key offers a choice from the following displays:

324 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Trace alone: main display of the trace with a single line of the table at the foot of the
page (see Figure 162 on page 322).
Trace + Table: display of trace, reduced in size but followed by 5 to 8 lines of the table
of results.

Figure 163 OSCA Results - Trace and Table

Table: display of the table alone

Figure 164 OSCA Results - Table

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 325

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Trace display functions

Channel detection threshold

On the trace, some peaks corresponding to noise could be mistaken for channels. It is
therefore necessary to fix a power threshold level: only peaks that exceed this threshold
will be considered as channels and included in the table of results.
To display or modify this threshold, press the SETUP key, then select Signal threshold.
Modify the value to position it on Auto1 or fix a threshold value.

Display of a grid
The display window of the trace can include a grid to facilitate verification of the position
of the channels. Several grids are possible (see the chapter “Grid” on page 317)

Display of total power between cursors

To display on the trace the total power between the two cursors A and B:
1 Place the cursors at the desired positions.
2 Press the Advanced key, then Total Power A<--->B.
The space between the trace and the two cursors is greyed out and the power is
displayed in the form "P=-4.95dBm".
Pressing the key Total Power A<-->B a second time removes the result of the
total power measurement.

Display of gain Tilt (delta) and gain slope results

The 8000 V2 Platform can display two additional results:
• The gain tilt, that is to say the difference between the max.and min. values of the
peaks of the complete signal spectrum between the cursors.
• The gain slope measured by a method using a least squares algorithm on all
detected channel using peak power levels or channel power levels.

To display these results above the channels:

1 Press the Advanced button
2 Press Measure A<->B button
3 Select the cursor and set it to the measurement range limits

1.The "Auto" value is obtained by continuing to reduce the value of the threshold
below the minimum value of -79.9 dBm

326 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Table of results

4 Press Tilt/Slope A<->B

The Gain Tilt is displayed in dB.
The Gain Slope is traced and displayed as value dB/THz or dB/nm according to
the units selected

Disable the Tilt and Slope by pressing the Tilt/Slope button again.

Figure 165 Display of total power, gain tilt and slope of the gain between the cursors

Table of results
Lines
According to the choice made in the SETUP menu, the table of results may include:
• either a line for each channel detected (if Channel Selection = Permanent)
• or a line for each graduation, (if Channel Selection = Grid and a grid is selected)

Type of display
The table may be displayed in a single line, on half of the screen or the whole screen as
a function of the Trace/Table key (see “Trace /Table key” on page 324)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 327

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Table of results

Contents of the table with statistics

When selecting the Statistics measurement mode and multiple acquisitions are
performed, statistics are calculated on the results. To display these results in the table,
select the parameter Table Contents to Statistics.
1 the number of the channel
2 the frequency or the channel wavelength
3 the min. frequency or the channel wavelength
4 the max.frequency or the channel wavelength
5 the level of the channel in dBm
6 the min. level of the channel in dBm
7 the max. level of the channel in dBm

If the option "OSCA Edit Table" is released more further more statistics are available by
using the User Defined Tables

Successive addressing of channels according to the sort

type selected

On the trace and in the table, it is possible to move the cursor from one channel to the
next in the selected sort order. To do this:
1 Use the key Cursor A/Cursor B to choose the cursor A or B to be used on the
trace.
2 Press the Channel key
3 Press and to move the cursor to the following or preceding channel:

Displaying relative results

By default, the table gives the results in absolute values. To obtain these results in rela-
tive values with respect to a reference channel:
1 Press the Table Contents key, then Relative>/<Absolute to select Relative.
2 Move the cursor on to the channel that is to serve as the reference.
3 Press the Set Ref. Channel key.
The results are recalculated with respect to this channel of reference.

328 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Testing ROADM networks

Testing ROADM networks

In ROADM networks, each channel may traverse different routes, optical amplifiers, and
add-drop filters, resulting in different OSNR for each channel. Conventional OSA
measurements are unreliable, as they indicate OSNR values that are too high: up to
10dB above the true OSNR. Using the POL-MUX OSNR method of OSCA-710 will
provide the true OSNR value in ROADM based networks.

Figure 166 ROADM network test

With OSCA-710, it is possible to measure the "true" in-band OSNR using the Stokes
analysis on the received polarized signals.

Here is a test setup for in-band OSNR testing.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 329

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Measuring POL-MUX (polarization mulitplexed ) channels

Figure 167 Test setup for In-band OSNR testing

OSCA-710 OSCA-710 OSCA-710 OSCA-710 OSCA-710

Example:
• OSNR measured with OSCA-710 at terminal site (1) provides value of 14dB
• Service failed as the OSNR is < 20 dB

How to locate the failure?

Perform the following tests at EDFA monitor access points (2-5):

• Check per channel input and output power of EDFA
=> Input power must be in the system specified range
• Check power uniformity
=> Equal power levels for all channels at EDFA output
• Compare OSNR from EDFA to EDFA
=> OSNR may decrease because of the amplifier noise figure NF (type 3-4 dB)
per EDFA
• Locate and exchange optical amplifier

Measuring POL-MUX (polarization mulitplexed )

channels
Pre-setting the OSCA for an in-service OSNR
measurement in POL-MUX mode
As the out-of-band OSNR measurements might not provide the 'TRUE' OSNR value for
the above listed systems configurations, the POL-MUX OSNR measurement method
based on VIAVI’s coherent spectral correlation technique must be selected.

330 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Measuring POL-MUX (polarization mulitplexed ) channels

1 Press SETUP until OSCA test setup appears.

2 Press Test Auto PolMux-OSNR button.
The instrument will be set for in-band OSNR measurements.

All Parameter settings will be done automatically:

The following parameters will be pre-set:

Sweep mode single
Sweep range C-band= 1527.6-1565.5nm 191.5T-196.25THz
Channel detection permanent auto detection of channels & ch-spacing
Min channel spacing std 50GHz, needs to be adjusted manually, see below
OSNR method needs to be adjusted manually, see below
noise Acq. BW standard 0.1nm
OSNR meas Type S/N = indicates real signal to noise measurement
Reference Correlation needs to be adjusted manually, see below
Symbol rate needs to be adjusted manually, see below

Manual Settings: Min Channel Spacing

Min channel spacing needs to be set according to the minimum present channel spacing
in a system.

NOTE
The preset min channel spacing is 50GHz, which works for most of the sys-
tems. For other systems, the operator needs to enter the effective minimum
system channel spacing of the WDM system. This is important for a correct
approximation of the noise distribution inside the transmission band of the
WDM channels.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 331

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Measuring POL-MUX (polarization mulitplexed ) channels

Example 1: every second channel is loaded, system looks like 100GHz channel spacing
It might be that the system has a visible channel spacing of 100GHz but the min
channel spacing is 50GHz as only every second channel is loaded. This could
also be the case when 50GHz optical interleavers are used to multiplex two
100GHz spaced WDM signals (even and odd channels) together into a 50GHz
spaced system
=> min-ch-spacing needs to be set to 50GHz

Example 2: submarine links

Submarine links often pack 3 channels into the ITU-T 100GHz grid
=> min-channel spacing needs to be set to 33GHz

Manual Settings: OSNR method

The OSNR method can be set according to the application.

Manual Settings: Reference Correlation

As each transmitter system is a sophisticated complex optical device, the unit is not
perfect. Therefore the characteristics of the transmitting laser will vary over various
types, manufacturers, configurations etc. The differences will have influences on the
quality of the transmission system.

The OSNR is calculated from the difference between the correlation of the combination
of signal and noise and the correlation of the pure signal without noise.

332 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
Measuring POL-MUX (polarization mulitplexed ) channels

However, the correlation of the pure signal is smaller than 100% for all transmitters.
Therefore, the correlation of the pure signal is called Reference Correlation and can be
set manually for best accuracy. A typical reference correlation value is 98.5%.

Manual Settings: Symbol rate

The spectral correlation method depends on the knowledge of the Symbol rate the
carrier uses, because the symbol rate defines the distance for the optimal correlation for
two spectral components in the channel. Although the instrument will have a certain
tolerance, when given wrong numbers for the Symbol rate (typ. 4-5%), it is advised to
input the exact Symbol rate.

Manual Settings: PDL compensation

The accuracy of the measurement depends on spectral symmetry which could be

degraded due to polarization effects (polarization depend loss and/or polarization mode
dispersion). The analysis will gain accuracy if the effects are post-compensated by algo-
rithms when PDL compensation is set to „Yes“. This is mandatory in distorted and
optional in distortion-free systems.

Performing OSNR test in WDM/OSNR mode

In the WDM/OSNR mode the instrument performs one measurement. The signal is eval-
uated with standard (out-of-band) ITU OSNR method.

Start the measurement by pushing the START/STOP button.

A green on top of the WDM table will show the progress of the measurement.
When the measurement is finished the green bar disappears and the result is
shown in the table.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 333

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
File Management

Figure 168 Result trace of an OSNR measurement

The table will show the following results:

• Wavelen/Freq: will be displayed in nm or in THz
• Spacing: channel spacing in THz
• Level: total integrated channel power in dBm
• Noise: in-band noise power normalized to 0.1nm noise bandwidth
• OSNR: measured OSNR

File Management
Storing OSCA measurements
If Auto store has been selected, then results will be saved automatically.
If not, or if you want to save the results under another name, directory etc.:
1 Click on FILE key
2 Click on Save > Save.
3 Enter a filename in the edition keypad.
4 Click on Enter to save the trace.
The trace is saved with the extension ".DCR"

334 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
File Management

Recalling OSCA files

Once an OSCA file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:
1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.
2 Select the directory and then the file to open.
3 Press the Load soft key.
4 Press View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened.

For further information on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 335

Chapter 9 OSCA-710 Optical Spectrum Measurement
File Management

336 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 10
Polarization Mode Dispersion
Chapter 10

Measurement
This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a PMD measurement with a
Platform 8000 equipped with a 81PMD / 81DISPAP / 81MRDISPAP Module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Recommended equipment” on page 338
• “PMD Activation and self calibration” on page 338
• “Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module” on page 345
• “Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement” on page 347
• “Display of results” on page 350
• “Statistics results” on page 353
• “Saving the trace and generating a report” on page 355
• “Recalling PMD files” on page 358
• “PMD standards and limits” on page 359

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Platform 8000, the OBS-5XX
(Optical Broadband Source) or 81BBSxx (BroadBand Source).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 337

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Recommended equipment

Recommended equipment
To perform a PMD measurement, the following equipment is recommended:
• Platform 8000 with a module as mentioned above, and associated optical
connectors.
• OBS-5XX Optical Broadband Source, or 81BBS1A and 81BBS2A Optical broad-
band source modules.
• Fiber inspection scope with associated optical connector tips.
• Cleaning kit.
• Two fiber patchcords with required optical connectors.

NOTE
Method used to measure the Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) is
described in the Reference Guide to Fiber Optic Testing - Vol2.

NOTE
The PMD value obtained by the fixe analyzer method is the mean DGD
value, also designated as «PMD value».

PMD Activation and self calibration

1 Select the PMD function in the Instrument HOME page using touchscreen
.

2 Press the button RESULTS to display the auto-calibration status. A bargraph

«tuning in progress» informs of the progression status of the calibration at the
bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before
continuing.
3 Press the button SETUP to access to the configuration menu for PMD. Select a
parameter to modify it.

Loading a configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for PMD test:

338 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD Activation and self calibration

1 Press SETUP hard key.

2 On bottom right of setup page, press Load Config. menu key.
3 In the Explorer, select the desired file configuration
4 Press Load Config. menu keys.
A beep is emitted to validate the selection of the configuration file.
The software automatically brings you back to setup page.

NOTE
Most of the configuration files are available into the Platform in disk/con-
fig/PMD.

Setup menu
To access the PMD test setup menu, press the SETUP button on the Platform 8000.

You can choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key or define your own
configuration.

The softkey is available when one header is selected.

In Test Auto configuration, the setups below are provided.

Acquisition
– Sweep1: Single
– Averaging acquisition: Auto
– Long term: No

Analysis
– Coupling: Strong
– Amplified Link: No
– Measurement Band; Auto

Link
– Fiber Nbr Increment: Yes

1.Does not apply with 81DISPAP/81MRDISPAP modules used with a PSM

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 339

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD Activation and self calibration

File
– Filenaming: Auto : [Cable_Id][Fiber_Num][Direction]
– Auto store: Yes

Figure 169 PMD Test setup menu

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the

Link parameters” on page 43

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the File

parameters” on page 48

Acquisition parameters

NOTE
When the composite power of the input signal is higher than +20 dBm, a
warning is displayed and the signal is cut off.

Acquisition band (only available with 81DISPAP modules)

OESCL Acquisition will be performed on the full band.
SCL Acquisition will only be performed on S, C and L bands.

340 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD Activation and self calibration

Sweep (Not available when used with the Polarisation scrambler Module
in High Resolution PMD mode)
Continue Continuous measurement with a trace refresh and a real-time
display of the results.
Single Single measurement with associated results displayed.
Statistics A set of measurements can be performed providing result
statistics. This mode also gives access to the following
parameters: Long Term and Number of sweeps.

Averaging acquisition

It enables to improve the dynamic range of the measurement by reducing the noise
level. It is recommended to use the Auto mode and configure a manual averaging if
needed only.
No No averaging of the acquisition sample.
Low Low averaging (4 samples).
Medium Medium averaging (16 samples).
High High averaging (32 samples).
Auto Averaging automatically selected.

NOTE
An increase of the averaging can improve the dynamic range.

Power Level

No No receive power level indication.

Yes Receive power level is indicated in bar graph.

NOTE
When Yes selected, acquisition stops if not enough power is received.

Make zero (Only when used with the Polarization scrambler module in
High Resolution PMD mode)
It enables to perform the reference of the 81BBS1A broadband source module before a
measurement (see “Performing the reference” on page 347).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 341

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD Activation and self calibration

Last zero (Only when used with the Polarization scrambler module in
High Resolution PMD mode)
This parameter displays the date and time of the last reference.

Number of sweeps (not available when used with the Polarization

scrambler module in High Resolution PMD mode)
Number of acquisitions from 2 to 1000.

Long term (Only when used with the Polarization scrambler module in
High Resolution PMD mode)
Enables to repeat the measurement defined by the number of sweeps, over a given
period and to obtain statistical results:
None Samples are displayed one after the other;
Manual Requires the user to press the Stop Wait button to start the next
sample.
Period Defines time between 2 samples. To be configured with wait
period parameter.

Wait Period

The Wait Period parameter allows to enter a time between 2 acquisition samples (only
active if Long Term is positioned on Period)
• Increments of 5 seconds to 24 hours.

High Dynamic (only available with 81DISPAP modules)

Auto The Dynamic range is automatically selected
No High dynamic mode is not used for measurement
Yes High dynamic mode is selected for measurement

Alarms parameters
In the Setup page, press Alarms softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Alarms).

342 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD Activation and self calibration

Alarms Status

None No Pass/Fail thresholds selected.

Active Pass/Fail analysis will be made upon defined thresholds: auto
values or delay.

Auto Values

No Threshold values entered manually.

Yes Threshold values automatically calculated according to the bit
rate info selection.

Bit rate info.

This table provides the PMD thresholds according to the transmission bit rate. Use the
direction keys and or touchscreen for selection.

Delay / Coeff

PMD Delay Maximum allowable delay.

PMD Coeff. Maximum allowable PMD coefficient.
PMD2 Delay Maximum allowable second order PMD delay (Only if
Coupling is set to Strong)
PMD2 Coeff. Maximum allowable second order PMD coefficient (Only if
Coupling is set to Strong)

Delay and coefficient values for PMD and PMD2 can be modified using the Edit Number
key.

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

NOTE
The key Copy Setup For AP/CD, displayed if one parameter is selected,
allows to apply the PMD configuration to the other selected function(s) of the
81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 343

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD Activation and self calibration

Fiber length
Unknown If you do not know the fiber length
Distance Press Edit Number to enter fiber distance: Min=0.100 km /
Max=20000 km

The fiber length must be set to calculate the PMD coefficient.

Distance Unit
When the fiber length is manually entered, choose the distance unit
Km Distance unit defined in kilometers.
Kfeet Distance unit defined in kilofeet.
Miles Distance unit defined in miles.

Spectral Unit
Select Spectral unit: THz or nm.

If the softkey PMD is set to Standard mode, any measurement will be set to the strong
mode Coupling and the wavelength range to Auto.

The Expert mode is to be used with measurement through EDFA. When selected, the
Expert mode allows to define the coupling, to define if an amplified link is used and to
set the wavelength range.

Coupling
Strong For standard singlemode fibers
Weak For polarization-maintained fibers and components.

Amplified link
Select Yes when measuring through optical amplifiers

Measurement Band
Auto / C Band / L Band / C+ L Band / Manual
When Manual is selected, the Measurement Start and End must be set (in nm or THz
according to the unit defined in Spectral Unit parameter).

344 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module

Saving configuration in a file

Once parameters have been configured, they can be kept in memory and saved in a
configuration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled in order to be recalled for future PMD acqui-
sitions.

To save parameters in a configuration file:

1 If necessary, press SETUP to return to Setup page.
2 Select one parameter in one of the setup page (acquisition, link..)
3 Press Save Config. menu key
4 Enter a name for the configuration file using the edition keypad (max 20 charac-
ters).

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the directory disk/config/PMD.

5 Press Enter to validate

A sound is emitted to indicate the file is saved.

The configuration file is saved with the extension ".fo_cfg" (icon ) and can be
recalled at any time from the Explorer page.

Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test

module
The following modules apply:
• E81PMD
• E81DISPAP
• E81MRDISPAP

Handheld or module broadband sources can be used to perform PMD measurements:

• OBS-55
• OBS-500
• OBS-550

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 345

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Performing a PMD measurement with a PMD test module

• 81BBS1A
• 81BBS2A

The following procedure considers the use of an OBS-5xx type source.

Remote operator
1 Inspect and clean connectors with appropriate methods as described in IEC
61300-3-35
2 Connect the fiber under test to the optical connector of the broadband source
using required mating solution such as a fiber patchcord.
3 Press the ON/OFF button to switch on the OBS-5XX broadband source.
4 Press Laser On/Off of the OBS-55 or the "Active" button of the OBS-5x0 to acti-
vate the source transmission.

NOTE
Make sure the test mode is set to "PMD" when using the OBS-500 or OBS-
550.

Local operator
1 Inspect and clean connectors with appropriate methods as described in IEC
61300-3-35
2 Connect the fiber under test to the optical connector of the test module using
required mating solution such as a fiber patchcord, as shown in Figure 170.
3 Select the PMD function in the Instrument Setup menu and wait for the module
self calibration (tuning).
4 Press the SETUP button to access the PMD Test Setup menu.
5 Select the appropriate PMD parameters according to your application as defined
earlier in this chapter.
6 Press the START/STOP button and wait for the results to be displayed.

346 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

Figure 170 PMD measurement with an ODM plug-in

Fiber under test

fiber patchcords
OBS-5XX

Optical connector
of the 81DISPAP/
81MRDISPAP
module

Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

The HR PMD measurement requires a polarization scrambler module

(PSM) to be connected to the PMD module, and the use of the
81BBS1A broadband source module at the other end of the fiber under
test.

Selecting the HR-PMD function

1 Press the HOME button
2 On the Home page, validate the HR-PMD icon of the PSM module.

Performing the reference

It is mandatory to perform a PMD reference prior to the first measurement.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 347

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

1 To perform a reference, connect your Broadband source 81BBS1A to the PSM

module as shown below:

Figure 171 Interconnection of 81BBS1A and PSM modules

Coupler
Jumper

Signal input
connector on
the PSM
module

81BBS1A in Base-Unit PSM module in Base-Unit

2 Press the RESULTS hardkey. A bar graph informs of the progression status of the
module self-calibration. Wait for completion before continuing
3 On the BBS Results tab, select Source On, enter safety password 4877, and
select PMD/AP function using the soft key.

Figure 172 BBS activation

4 Go to the PMD Setup page, and press the Acq. Ref. softkey.

NOTE
If the 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module with the HR function is used for
the first time, pressing the SETUP button directly open the Reference Setup
page.

5 Set the parameter Make Zero to Yes in the configuration menu.

348 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Performing a High Resolution PMD measurement

NOTE
When performing a PMD reference, acquisition parameters are not taken in
account, except for averaging.

6 Press the button START/STOP to start referencing of the broadband source.

NOTE
Performing a reference measurement can take several minutes (minimum 2
min 30).

Resulting reference will then be displayed and message "ready to measure"

confirms the reference is valid.

If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following
points:

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

Acquisition impossible Auto-calibration is not Wait for the calibration to be termi-
Hit any key to continue completed nated
Signal level too low! The 81BBS1A is not Press the ON/OFF button to switch
Check source and connec- switched on on the 81BBS1A, check if Make ref-
tions erence is still set to Yes, then
Hit any key to continue repeat step 6
The 81BBS1A battery Check if the LOW-BATT red led is
is too low lighted. If yes, then recharge the
battery.
Defective connections Check that the cables are properly
connected, and the notches on the
connectors are correctly aligned.

Performing the measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, use
the following procedure to start testing:
1 Press the SETUP button to access the PMD configuration menu

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 349

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Display of results

2 Select the appropriate PMD test parameters according to your application as

earlier defined in this chapter.
3 Press the START/STOP button to start measuring.

Figure 173 HR PMD measurement

Fiber under test Jumper

fiber patchcords

81BBS1A PSM module Signal input connector on the

81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module

Display of results
Spectrum/FFT menu key
The key Spectrum / FFT enables you to display:
• The spectrum representing the power (in dBm) according to the frequency (in
THz) or wavelength (in nm).
• The FFT curve and PMD information (delay & coefficient) according to the Fast
Fourier Transform Method. The FFT trace represents the PMD delay in ps.

Display of PMD results

The PMD results screen is split in 3 main areas. from top to bottom::

350 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Display of results

• The information bar with:

– module reference
– number of acquisitions used for the statistics (Acq)
– wavelength range (1525-1610 nm),
– fiber number (N:)
– fiber length in defined unit
– date and time of acquisition.
– file name (if result stored in memory)
– Pass/fail indication
• The FFT curve and its gaussian shape (for strong mode coupling only).
• the table of results: PMD delay and coefficient, second order PMD (PMD2) delay
and coefficient. This table is different if statistic measurement is selected (see
“Statistics results” on page 353).

The results are displayed in black when no alarm is defined, in green if alarms are within
the threshold defined in the Setup menu and in red if the alarms exceed the thresholds
defined.

Figure 174 Example of PMD result (FFT view)

File Name Number of Alarm
Coupling Cable Identification
acquisitions indicator

Fiber Length

Spectrum/
FFT

PMD
PMD delay second order second order Coefficient
PMD delay PMD coefficient

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 351

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Display of results

NOTE
When several acquisitions are performed, the trace resulting from the last
acquisition is displayed.

Cursors, in spectrum display

To move the cursor(s) on the trace:
1 Press Cursor A / Cursor B menu key to select one or both cursor(s).
2 Use the direction arrow keys and or and .
or
With touchscreen, directly press on trace to position the cursor(s)
The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated under-
neath the trace:

Zoom access, in spectrum display

In order to zoom in on the trace:
1 Press the Zoom/Shift menu key to display Zoom,
2 Use the direction arrow keys to zoom in either horizontally or vertically.
or
Use touchscreen to position upper left and bottom right location of the zoom area
The zoom is made around the selected cursor(s).

NOTE
To reset the zoom and see the full trace, press Full scale.

Trace shift access, in spectrum display

To shift the trace horizontally or vertically:
1 Press the Zoom/Shift soft key to select Shift function.
2 Use the direction arrow keys
or
With touchscreen, touch and hold the screen to make the required shift.

352 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Statistics results

Statistics results
Statistics can be performed on a series of samples defined by the number of samples
and the time between two consecutive samples (Wait period). Refer to “Acquisition
parameters” on page 340 for parameter setup.

To display the statistic results press the RESULTS button.

In Spectrum display, the results page gives access to several functions:

• Cursors A/B: see “Cursors, in spectrum display” on page 352
• Zoom: see “Zoom access, in spectrum display” on page 352
• Shift: see “Trace shift access, in spectrum display” on page 352

Table of results
Current value, average value, min value, max. value and standard deviation (Sdev) are
provided in the table for each of the 4 parameters: PMD delay, PMD coefficient, second
order PMD delay and second order PMD coefficient. The statistic results are automati-
cally updated with each acquisition.

Graphics display
When Statistic mode is selected, the button Spectrum/FFT becomes Spectrum/FFT/
Drift/Barchart.

This button allows therefore to display alternatively:

• Delay drift during the acquisition time.

Figure 175 Example of drift

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 353

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Statistics results

In Drift mode, the cursor can be moved on each measurement by clicking on the key
Previous Acq. or Next Acq.
• The histogram providing the delay value for each acquisition.

Figure 176 Example of histogram

Information messages
Under the trace, at the right-hand corner a message indicates the current status of the
trace or proposes to start next acquisition (by clicking on Stop wait).

Signal acquisition

This message indicates that an acquisition is in progress.

To stop an acquisition, whatever the mode is used, press the START/STOP button.

Next measurement

After each acquisition in the Statistic mode and when Long term has bee set on Period
or Manual, this message requests that you select Stop Wait. The Platform 8000 then
displays Signal Acquisition.

Ready to start test cycle

This message appears after a acquisition cycle is finished, when you are in statistic
mode. Press START/STOP to start a new cycle.

354 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

Ready to start Measurement

The message is displayed after the completion of an acquisition sample or a Reference

measurement.

Waiting bar graph

When Statistic mode is used and Long term is set to Period, a bargraph displays, the
remaining time before the next acquisition.

Saving the trace and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the trace can be saved and a report can be gener-
ated directly from the results screen.

Saving results and creating a report from results page

This function is available exclusively in FTT view, in the results page. If

Drift or Bar chart view is selected (in statistic mode), the report can be
generated but will be generated for FTT view.

To generate a report:
1 Select FFT view with the menu key (or menu key with statistics
results).
2 Press Fast Report menu key .
A menu displays under the trace.
3 In the menu, configure the file saving (and the report).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 355

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

Figure 177 Fast report configuration

a In the Save Mode parameter, select:

txt file select Yes to save the results in a blts file and to generate a
txt file of the results.
pdf file select Yes to save the results in a blts file and to generate a
report in a pdf file
b In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
c Modify the Fiber Number/Fiber Code using the key .
The parameter is different according to the Cable Structure configuration (see
“Cable structure” on page 45)
d In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A)
e In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
4 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
5 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad
or
Click on Auto Filenaming menu key to apply the file name defined in the Setup
screen, in Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 50).
6 Press Enter to validate.

NOTE
The pmd file and the txt/pdf file will have the same name.

The icon displays during saving process.

356 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform.

NOTE
The trace and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

Opening the report

To open the report:
1 Press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the file/report.
For the txt file: trace file_pmd.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.pmd.pdf.
3 Press Load.
The file opens onto the MTS/T-BERD..

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 357

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
Saving the trace and generating a report

Figure 178 Example of PMD Report in pdf

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A pdf report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS 8000V2 or 6000/6000A (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on
page 545).

Recalling PMD files

Once a PMD file has been stored, it can be recalled using the Explorer:

358 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD standards and limits

1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.

2 Select the directory and then the file to open
3 Press the Load soft key.
4 Press View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

PMD standards and limits

Some organizations and standards are stating that 10% of the bit rate for the PMD delay
can be tolerated for a system without disturbing the network performance by more than
1 dB loss, at 1550 nm, with NRZ coding:

Bit Rate Per Equivalent Time- PMD Delay

SDH SONET
Channel slot Limit
2.5 Gbit/s STM-16 OC-48 401 ps 40 ps

10 Gbit/s STM-64 OC-192 100 ps 10 ps

40 Gbit/s STM-256 OC-768 25.12 ps 2.5 ps

10G Ethernet Ethernet - - 5 ps

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 359

Chapter 10 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement
PMD standards and limits

360 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 11
Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out an In-Service and In-Band
PMD-OSNR with a T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 equipped with 81IPMD and 81PSM Modules.

VIAVI's non-intrusive technique used in I-PMD enables to measure PMD in a link that is
in-service by using the transmission DWDM channels.

VIAVI unique I-PMD test solution allows troubleshooting faulty channels of 10G / 40G
transmission systems and qualifying fiber networks for future upgrade plans up to 100G
without turning the entire network down.

This chapter refers exclusively to I-PMD measurement.

To get information on HR OSA measurement, refer to Chapter 12.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Recommended equipment” on page 362
• “I-PMD Activation and Configuration” on page 362
• “Performing a Zero Reference” on page 368
• “Performing an In-Band PMD-OSNR measurement with an I-PMD Module” on
page 369
• “Display of results” on page 372
• “Performing a PMD Measurement with BBS and IPMD Module” on page 379
• “File Management” on page 383
• “PMD standards and limits” on page 383

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Platform 8000.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 361

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Recommended equipment

Recommended equipment
To perform an In-Band PMD measurement, the following equipment is recommended:
• T-BERD/MTS 8000V2 mainframe with a 81IPMD module, and associated optical
connectors.
• one PSM Module and associated optical connectors.
• Fiber inspection scope with associated optical connector tips.
• Cleaning kit.

I-PMD Activation and Configuration

Activating the IPMD function
Once the Base-Unit is correctly configured for I-PMD Measurement:
1 Press HOME hard key
2 In the Home page, select I-PMD icon
3 Press SETUP hard key to configure the acquisition.
The following screen displays:

362 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
I-PMD Activation and Configuration

Figure 179 I-PMD Test Setup menu

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring

the Link parameters” on page 43 See OTDR Setup: “Configuring
the File parameters” on page 48

Loading a configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for IPMD test:
1 Press SETUP hard key.
2 On bottom right of setup page, press Load Config. menu key.
3 In the Explorer, select the desired file configuration
4 Press Load Config. menu keys.
A beep is emitted to validate the selection of the configuration file.
The software automatically brings you back to setup page.

NOTE
Most of the configuration files are available into the Platform in disk/con-
fig/IPMD.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 363

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
I-PMD Activation and Configuration

Acquisition parameters
In the Setup screen,
1 First, select PMD/I-OSNR on the parameter Mode,
2 Then select the following parameters for acquisition:

PMD Mode

Select the acquisition mode in the parameter:

Channel Acquisition will be performed on one G.694.1 Channel
Grid Acquisition will be performed on multiple channels defined in a grid
BBS Acquisition will be performed with BBS inserted, instead of Transmis-
sion signals (intrusive measurement, network should be down and
replaced by a BBS module - see Chapter 15 “Broadband source
BBS”).

Sweep
HR OSA Acquisition will be performed on a given frequency range (see sweep range
menu to a complete description). In this mode, OSNR are measured «out band».

Channel Frequency
If Channel is selected in the Mode parameter, adjust the frequency of the channel to
analyze (using the Edit Number menu key).
The Wavelength parameter is automatically configured according to channel
frequency defined.

Sweep range

If Sweep mode is selected in the Mode parameter, select the frequency range in this
sub-menu:
Full Full frequency range is used for measurement
Start/End Select manually the Start/End frequency
Center/Span Select manually the Center/Span frequency

364 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
I-PMD Activation and Configuration

Number of Scans

Define the number of scans to perform (from 1 to 1000). This mode also gives access to
the following parameters: Long Term and Time Interval between scan if more than 1
scan is selected.

It is also possible to perform continuous scans, by setting the parameter to Continue

mode.

Averaging acquisition

Define the number of acquisitions to average for a scan: from 1 to 64.

Long Term

Enable to define a fix time between two scans:

No no time between two scans;
Yes fix time between two scans (value defined in the following param-
eter).

Time interval between scans

Define the time between two scans, from 30 seconds to 24 hours.

Total Meas. Time

This parameter cannot be modified but informs of the duration time of the measurement
(according to parameters previously defined).

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

OSNR
This parameter is not available if PMD Mode is set to BBS.

To modify these parameters, go to the OSNR line.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 365

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
I-PMD Activation and Configuration

Noise Shape

Filtered evaluation for mixed filter shaped ROADM networks

Unfiltered evaluation for networks without optical filters

Noise Acq. Bandwidth

Reference bandwidth used for the acquisition of noise

Standard 0.1 nm
Values lie between 0.05 nm and 1.0 nm.

OSNR meas.type

Selection of OSNR calculation: S / N or (S+N)/N

Splitter Compensation
When the measurement is made through a Test Access Port (also known as a TAP), it
is possible to compensate for the loss induced by this element and to display the actual
power level of the system.

Value

Yes: activation of compensation and selection of value: from 1 to 30 dB (by increments

of 1) or 1 to 99% (by increments of 0.1%).

Unit

Choice of compensation in dB or percentage (%).

Define the Splitter Compensation using the numeric keypad (displayed via the Edit
Number menu key) or left/right direction keys.

For example, with a 10 dB splitter, the results will be augmented by 10 dB. The trace will
be offset upwards by 10 dB. A channel measured at -30 dBm will be displayed -20 dBm.

366 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
I-PMD Activation and Configuration

Display

Alarms

To define alarm thresholds for IPMD measurement , select Alarm parameter, and in the
sub-menu displayed, configure the alarm values:
None No, Pass/Fail thresholds selected.
Active Pass/Fail analysis will be made upon defined thresholds: auto
values or delay.
Auto Values
No Threshold delay values entered manually.
Yes Threshold delay values automatically calculated according to
the bit rate info selection.
Bit rate info. This table provides the PMD thresholds according to the transmis-
sion bit rate. Use the direction keys and for selection.
PMD Delay Maximum allowable delay.

Delay values for PMD can be modified using the Edit Number key.

Spectral Unit
Select the spectral unit between THz and nm.

Display range (not available in BBS mode)

It enables to define the display width for a single channel:
Full full display width
+/- 40G display from +/- 40GHz of the central frequency
+/- 20G display from +/- 20GHz of the central frequency
+/- 10G display from +/- 10GHz of the central frequency

Saving configuration in a file

Once parameters have been configured, they can be kept in memory and saved in a
configuration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled in order to be recalled for future IPMD acqui-
sitions.

To save parameters in a configuration file:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 367

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing a Zero Reference

1 If necessary, press SETUP to return to Setup page.

2 Select one parameter in one of the setup page (acquisition, link..)
3 Press Save Config. menu key
4 Enter a name for the configuration file using the edition keypad (max 20 charac-
ters).

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the directory disk/config/IPMD.

5 Press Enter to validate

A sound is emitted to indicate the file is saved.

The configuration file is saved with the extension ".fo_cfg" (icon ) and can be
recalled at any time from the Explorer page.

Performing a Zero Reference

For High OSNR accuracy, it is recommended to perform a Zero Referencing before first
use of the product:
1 Press SETUP hard key to reach Setup screen
2 Put caps on the module optical port
3 Press Zero Ref. menu key
4 Confirm the reference process pressing Yes.

368 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing an In-Band PMD-OSNR measurement with an I-PMD Module

Figure 180 Zero reference screen

Performing an In-Band PMD-OSNR measurement

with an I-PMD Module
Installation
Once I-PMD setup has been correctly configured:
1 Connect a jumper between the I-PMD module and the PSM output port.
2 Connect the fiber to be tested to the PSM input port.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 369

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing an In-Band PMD-OSNR measurement with an I-PMD Module

Figure 181 Modules interconnections

Short patchcord to To test Access/
interconnect I-PMD Monitor port
and PSM modules
PSM
Module

I-PMD
Module

Detection of Channels
If the list of DWDM channels to be tested is unknown, it is possible to run a quick scan
in order to detect all available frequencies:
1 Press Detect Channels menu key in order to start the detection of channels.
2 Wait for the end of detection
The optical spectrum with all detected channels is displayed, as shown below:

370 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing an In-Band PMD-OSNR measurement with an I-PMD Module

Figure 182 Channel detection

step 3

step 4

3 Check all channels have been detected.

If not, add or remove channels:
a Press Table Contents menu key
b Press Add Channel or Remove Channel menu key.
4 Press Adopt Detected Channels menu key to adopt detected channels to the
acquisition grid.

In band PMD-OSNR measurement

Once the Grid is entered (with detection channels)
1 Press SETUP hard key to return to I-PMD Setup screen.
2 In the Mode parameter, select Grid.
3 Press View Setup Grid menu key to visualize the adopted grid.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 371

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Display of results

Figure 183 View Setup Grid

If necessary, channels can be added/removed from this screen.

4 Press Exit to return to the Setup menu
5 Enter the number of scans to be performed (see Figure 179 on page 363) using
the parameter Number of Scans,.
This number depends on the number of channels that will be used.
6 Press START hard key to launch the scan, and wait for the end of measurement.

Display of results
The key Osa / PMD enables you to display either:
• The optical spectrum of the tested channels
or
• The PMD results page, including the statistical measurements if more than one
scan has been performed.

372 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Display of results

OSA Results

OSA menu key

1 Check Osa function is selected on the menu key .
The spectrum results page is displayed as below:

Figure 184 Example of OSA Results

Instantaneous
Effective DGD In-Band noise
measurement measured for each
for each channel individual channel

Optical Spectrum Analysis with In-Band OSNR measured

Frequency and Power level for each individual channel

The OSA results screen is split in 3 main areas. from top to bottom:

The information bar with:

– module reference
– frequency range
– frequency of the selected channel
– fiber number (N:)
– date and time of acquisition.
– file name (if result stored in memory)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 373

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Display of results

The table of results (without statistics):

If only one scan is performed, no statistics are available, and the results table contains
the following results:
– the channel number
– the frequency or the wavelength of the channel, according to the unit selected
in the Setup menu
– the effective DGD (in ps)
– the level of the channel in dBm
– the In-Band OSNR for the channel, in dB
– the In-Band noise for the channel, in dBm

The table of results (with statistics):

If more than one scan is performed, statistics are available and can be displayed:

1 Press the menu key .

2 Select Stat. On with the menu key .

The menu key turns active.

3 Select the statistics to be displayed: Eff. DGD / Wavelen. / Power / OSNR.
• The table of results with statistics contains the following elements:

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6

Effective
Eff. DGD Min eDGD Max eDGD Avg eDGD
DGD (ps)
Frequency/
Frequency/ Frequency/
Wavelen. Length
Channel Frequency / Length Min. Length Avg.
Max.
number Wavelength
Power
Power Power Min. Power Max. Power Avg.
(dBm)
OSNR
OSNR SNR Min. SNR Max. SNR Avg.
(dB)

374 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Display of results

Figure 185 Example of OSA Results with statistics

NOTE
When several scans are performed, only the trace resulting from the last
scan is displayed.

Moving the cursors

To move the cursor(s) on the trace:
1 Press soft key Cursor A / Cursor B menu key,
2 Use the direction arrow keys /
or
Touch the spectrum display at the location where the cursor must be positioned.
The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated above the
trace.

Zoom on trace
In order to zoom in on the trace:
1 Press the Zoom/Shift menu key to select Zoom.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 375

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Display of results

2 Use the direction keys / or / to zoom in either horizontally or verti-

cally.
or
Use the touchscreen to position upper left and bottom right location of the zoom
area

The zoom is made around the selected cursor(s).

NOTE
To reset the zoom and see the full trace, press Full scale.

Trace shift
To shift the trace horizontally or vertically:
1 Press the Zoom/Shift soft key to select Shift function.
2 Use the direction arrow keys or touch and hold the screen to make the required
shift.

Channel key
In order to move from channel to channel:
1 Press Channel menu key
2 Use direction keys and or and or touch the targeted channel.
This will change the active channel in the results table and in the spectrum
display.

Advanced key
Trace/Table menu key: the table can be displayed either:
• in one single line .

376 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Display of results

Figure 186 Results table - one single line

• on half of the screen (see Figure 184 on page 373)

• on the whole screen :

Figure 187 Results table in full screen

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 377

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Display of results

Cursor X / Cursor Y menu key: Two types of cursors can be defined:

– Cursor on X: only a vertical bar is present.
– Cursor on X and Y: there is a vertical bar and a horizontal bar. The inter-
section between these two bars is placed on the trace.
Each click on this key will alternatively insert or delete the check mark against
Cursor Y.

Total Power A<->B menu key: allows to measure the total power between the A and B
cursors:
a Place the cursors at the desired positions.
b Press the Advanced key, then Total Power A<--->B.
The space between the trace and the two cursors is greened out and the
power is displayed in the form "P=xxxxdBm".
Pressing the key Total Power A<-->B a second time removes the result of
the total power measurement.

PMD results

Figure 188 PMD Results page

Statistical analysis with

PMD results confidence
indication

PMD estimation indication

Resulting PMD value for

all measured channels

378 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing a PMD Measurement with BBS and IPMD Module

Performing a PMD Measurement with BBS and

IPMD Module
The following modules apply:
• E81PMD with E81PSM

Handheld or module broadband sources can be used to perform PMD measurements:

• OBS-55
• OBS-500
• OBS-550
• 81BBS2A (the 81BBS1A cannot be used for this measurement)

The following procedure considers the use of an OBS-5xx type source.

Remote operator
1 Inspect and clean connectors with appropriate methods as described in IEC
61300-3-35
2 Connect the fiber under test to the optical connector of the broadband source
using required mating solution such as fiber patchcord.
3 Press the ON/OFF button to switch on the OBS-5XX broadband source.
4 Press Laser On/Off of the OBS-55 or the "Active" button of the OBS-5x0 to acti-
vate the source transmission.

NOTE
Make sure the test mode is set to "PMD" when using the OBS-500 or OBS-
550.

Local operator
1 Inspect and clean connectors with appropriate methods as described in IEC
61300-3-35
2 Connect the fiber under test to the optical connector of the test module using
required mating solution such as a fiber patchcord, as shown in Figure 189 on
page 380.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 379

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing a PMD Measurement with BBS and IPMD Module

3 Select the I-PMD function in the Home page and wait for the module self calibra-
tion (tuning).
4 Press the SETUP button to access the IPMD Test Setup menu (see Figure 179 on
page 363).
5 Select the BBS mode in the Setup menu in the Mode parameter.
6 Configure the other parameters as wished.
7 Press the START/STOP button and wait for the results to be displayed.

Figure 189 I-PMD measurement with a BBS module

Fiber under test

OBS-5XX
fiber patchcords

Optical connector of
the 81IPMD Module

Display of results
The key Osa / PMD enables you to display either:
• The optical spectrum of the BBS
or
• The PMD results page, including the statistical measurements (see description on
Figure 188 on page 378).

OSA Results

1 Check Osa function is selected on the menu key .

A results page as the following one is displayed:

380 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing a PMD Measurement with BBS and IPMD Module

Figure 190 Example of OSA BBS Results

Instantaneous
Effective DGD
measurement
for each channel

Optical Spectrum Analysis with Frequency

The OSA results screen is split in 3 main areas. from top to bottom:
1 The information bar with:
– frequency range
– fiber number (N:)
– date and time of acquisition.
– file name (if result stored in memory)
2 The trace
3 The table of results contains the following results:
– the channel number
– the frequency or wavelength tested, according to the unit selected in the
Setup menu
– the effective DGD (in ps)

If more than one scan is performed, statistics are available and can be displayed:
1 Press the menu key .
2 Select Stat. On with the menu key .
The menu key turns active.
The statistics for effective DGD display.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 381

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
Performing a PMD Measurement with BBS and IPMD Module

Figure 191 Example of OSA - BBS Results with statistics

NOTE
When several scans are performed, only the trace resulting from the last
scan is displayed.

Functions on trace display

Several functions are available in results page, in OSA or PMD view, using the menu
keys:
• Cursors A/B: see “Moving the cursors” on page 375
• Zoom: see “Zoom on trace” on page 375
• Shift: “Trace shift” on page 376
• Channel: see “Channel key” on page 376
• Advanced > Trace/Table: see “Advanced key” on page 376

382 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
File Management

File Management
Saving results
If Auto store is selected, results are saved automatically.
If not, or if you want to store the results under another name/directory etc.:
1 Click on the FILE key
2 Click on Save > Save.
3 Enter a filename in the edition keypad.
4 Click on Enter to save the trace.

The HR OSA and In-Band DGD-OSNR traces are stored with the extension ".PIB".

Recalling files
Once a file has been stored, it can be recalled using the Explorer:
1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.
2 Select the directory and then the file to open.
3 Press the Load soft key.
4 Press View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened.

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

PMD standards and limits

Some organizations and standards are stating that 10% of the bit rate for the PMD delay
can be tolerated for a system without disturbing the network performance by more than
1 dB loss, at 1550 nm, with NRZ coding:

Bit Rate Per Equivalent PMD Delay

SDH SONET
Channel Time-slot Limit
2.5 Gbit/s STM-16 OC-48 401 ps 40 ps

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 383

Chapter 11 I-PMD Measurement
PMD standards and limits

Bit Rate Per Equivalent PMD Delay

SDH SONET
Channel Time-slot Limit
10 Gbit/s STM-64 OC-192 100 ps 10 ps

40 Gbit/s STM-256 OC-768 25.12 ps 2.5 ps

10G Ethernet Ethernet - - 5 ps

384 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 12
Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA
Measurement
This chapter describes the different stages in carrying out a spectrum analysis of an
optical signal, or analyzing effects from an optical components or network elements like
DFB-sources by a Base Unit equipped with a High Resolution OSA.

NOTE
The HROSA-C and OSA610 series are available on T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2
and T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2platforms.

NOTE
Looking for the OSA-type and series Nr:
• on T-BERD/MTS 8000V2 press HOME > About
• on T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2 press SYSTEM > Help page.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Cleaning of Connectors” on page 386
• “Configuration of the instrument” on page 386
• “Acquisition” on page 393
• “Trace display functions” on page 394
• “Overlay trace function” on page 400
• “Table of results” on page 403
• “On/Off-OSNR Method” on page 404
• “DFB results analysis” on page 406
• “File Management” on page 409

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 385

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Cleaning of Connectors

Cleaning of Connectors
Cleaning of the patchcord connector is extremely important to avoid damage to the input
of the OSA. A dirty connection can irreversibly damage both surfaces, especially when
working with high powers.

We highly recommend inspection of the patchcord before connecting it to the OSA.

Configuration of the instrument

The instrument configuration menu will be displayed directly after power up or by
pressing the HOME-button.

The actual module status will be shown (ON/OFF) on system window

1 For configuring the OSA press the OSA-icon (by touchscreen), or select the func-
tion icon by arrow-keys and press ENTER.
2 Press RESULT button to see the OSA-result window.
If the MTS / T-BERD 8000 V2/6000(A) is switched Off in this configuration, the
next start up will directly start the to OSA-application, and display the result
window.

For more details about the general MTS-configuration see the Base Unit manual.

For measurement, connect the fiber to be tested on the optical input of the selected
module.

Kind of input connector:

• if the protection cap is green the optical input interface is a angled physical
connector (APC-type)
• if it is a black protection cap, the interface type is physical connector (PC-type)

Loading a configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for HR-OSA test:
1 Press SETUP hard key.
2 On bottom right of setup page, press Load Config. menu key.
3 In the Explorer, select the desired file configuration
4 Press Load Config. menu keys.

386 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Configuration of the instrument

A beep is emitted to validate the selection of the configuration file.

The software automatically brings you back to setup page.

NOTE
Most of the configuration files are available into the Platform in disk/con-
fig/IPMD.

OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup

To configure the Platform 8000 in preparation for an OSA test on a fiber,
1 Press the SETUP button.
The various measurement parameters are proposed
2 Select the parameter Mode and set it to WDM/OSNR
WDM / OSNR Module is used to measure the optical spectrum of an optical signal
and the OSNR, using the interpolation method. Standard WDM
results are displayed in the results table. (See “Display of the WDM /
OSA results” on page 394)
WDM / OO-OSNR
Module is used for measuring the optical spectrum of an optical
signal and the OSNR is measured by the two step On-Off method.
Standard WDM results are displayed in the results table. (See
chapter “On/Off-OSNR Method” on page 404)
DFB Module is used to analyze results from a DFB. DFB results are
displayed in the results table (See “DFB results analysis” on
page 406).
I-OSNR 40G DP-QPSK
Module is used to acquire the optical spectrum of Dual polarization
40G signals (40G DP-QPSK) and to measure the In Band OSNR.
Standard WDM results are displayed in the results table. (See
“Display of the WDM / OSA results” on page 394).
3 Define your own configuration

The parameter to be modified must be selected by means of the direction keys or

using the touchscreen. The possible options then appear on the screen: make your
choice using the direction keys or touchscreen.
The various parameters proposed are defined below.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 387

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Configuration of the instrument

Figure 192 Setup for optical spectrum measurements

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring

the Link parameters” on page 43

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the File

parameters” on page 48

Acquisition Parameters

Sweep

Continue The OSA sweeps continuously and displays the results

Single The OSA performs one single sweep and displays the result
Statistics The OSA calculates a statistic of a number of scans. The number of
scans must be entered (next parameter).

Sweep Range

Select the frequency range in this sub-menu:

Full Full wavelength range is used for measurement
Start/End Select manually the Start/End wavelength
Center/Span Select manually the Center/Span frequency
ITU Channel Select the Channel Frequency

388 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Configuration of the instrument

Averaging acquisition

Select between "No" and 64 times averaging.

Resolution

Select the resolution bandwidth used for HR OSA acquisition (depends of the module
used).

Coarse Scan

The coarse mode provides a faster scan over multiple channels at the cost of a
degraded frequency accuracy. Select Yes to perform this scan.

Number of Scans

In Statistics mode, this must be selected between 2 and 1000.

Long Term

NOTE
A long term measurement can be done only if the Sweep parameter is on
Statistics mode.

Long term time diagram:

– number of sweeps 7
– wait period 5s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
|-----|-----|-----|------|----|-----|

time distance between the next acquisition = wait period (time)

No the measurement is not automatically launched
Yes the measurement is automatically done, after the time interval
selected (see hereunder).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 389

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Configuration of the instrument

Time Interval between Scans

This parameter allows to enter a wait period before the measurement start (only active
if Long Term is positioned on Yes, in Continue or Statistics mode)
• Increments of 5 seconds up to 1 minute, then increments of 1 minute up to 10
minutes, then increments of 5 minutes up to 60 minutes; then increment of 1 hour
up to 24 hours.

The modification of this parameter automatically modifies the next parameter, Total
Meas. Time, which cannot be modified.

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

Channel Detection

Signal threshold 1
Threshold of detection of channels (see “Channel detection threshold” on page 399).
Auto. the threshold is determined automatically.
Manual the threshold can be set from -79.9 to +30 dBm
Use direction keys or Edit Number to modify values.

Min. Channel spacing 1

Defines the minimum spacing of two adjacent optical channels in the system.

This parameter is also used to set the range for integration to measure the accurate total
signal power of an optical channel. (see table contents page 403) The window for
channel power integration will be ±1/2 the min. channel spacing setting left and right to
the channel center frequency.

The measurement result will be displayed in the WDM table as 'Level' in dBm.

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on

the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

390 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Configuration of the instrument

Min. Channel elevation 1

Defines the minimum elevation of two adjacent peaks from the valley between them
which is required to recognize independent channels. Peaks which are not separated by
a valley deeper than the min.channel elevation are considered as part of the same
optical channel.

This example shows two signals, the left having only one peak larger than the selected
Min.channel elevation, the right one with two peaks.

The two peaks of the right one are separated by a valley, but their elevation from that
valley is smaller than the Min.channel elevation. Therefore they are not treated as inde-
pendent sig-nals

Select Auto to define the value automatically or select Manual to enter a specific value
for the parameter.

OSNR

OSNR method1
Side of the peak where the point of reference for noise measurement
is taken (left, right, average left and right, worst case of left and right).
S<->N Distance
Distance between the peak of the channel and the point of reference
for the noise.
- Auto: distance determined according to spacing of channels.
- Manual: an additional line Manual value opens. Go down and modify the
value with < > or click on the value and enter a new one in the keypad that
opens

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on

the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 391

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Configuration of the instrument

- Pre-defined: select 25 GHz (0.2 nm), 50 GHz (0.4 nm),100 GHz (0.8 nm)
from the peak.
- Left & Right: manually define different left and right distances from the
peak
Noise Acq. BW
Reference bandwidth used for the acquisition of noise:
- standard 0.1 nm
- with the <> keys you can select other values between 0.05 nm and 1.0
nm.
OSNR meas.type
S / N or (S+N)/N
- S/N: the integrated power in the channel minus the noise is considered as
signal
- (S+N)/N: the integrated power in the channel without correction is consid-
ered as signal.

Splitter compensation

When the measurement is made after a tap coupler (also known as a splitter), it is
possible to compensate for the loss introduced by this element and to display the value
measured before or after it.

Go to the Splitter compensation line to display a sub-menu proposing the following

options
Value1 Activation of compensation and choice of its value using the keys
and : or the numeric keypad : from 1 to 30 dB (by increments of 1)
or 1 to 99% (by increments of 0.1%). Select None on the numeric
keypad to not activate the compensation.
Unit Choice of compensation in dB or as a percentage of the value
measured.

For example, with a 10 dB splitter, the results will be augmented by 10 dB. The trace will
be offset upwards by 10 dB. A channel measured at -30 dBm will be displayed -20 dBm.

Display

Spectral Unit
Here the units of the x axis can be selected:
• Frequency in THz

392 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Acquisition

• Wavelength in nm
Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen.

Saving configuration in a file

Once parameters have been configured, they can be kept in memory and saved in a
configuration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled in order to be recalled for future HR OSA
acquisitions.

To save parameters in a configuration file:

1 If necessary, press SETUP to return to Setup page.
2 Select one parameter in one of the setup page (acquisition, link..)
3 Press Save Config. menu key
4 Enter a name for the configuration file using the edition keypad (max 20 charac-
ters).

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the directory disk/config/IPMD.

5 Press Enter to validate

A sound is emitted to indicate the file is saved.

The configuration file is saved with the extension ".fo_cfg" (icon ) and can be
recalled at any time from the Explorer page.

Acquisition
To start a measurement press START key. The OSA-XXX will scan over the entire wave-
length range and the measurement result will be displayed in graphical and tabular
format.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 393

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Trace display functions

Trace display functions

The trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see
example Figure 193 on page 395.

A range of functions enable modifications to the display of the trace (Cursors, Zoom/
Shift, Event/Trace, Trace/Table, Full scale, etc.).

Display of the WDM / OSA results

The results window, obtained by pressing the RESULTS button, shows different zones
displaying, from top to bottom:
• the mini-trace in the upper part of the screen, accompanied by the principal char-
acteristics of the acquisition and of the file if the result is stored in memory.
• the trace results associated with cursors A and B
• the trace proper (see “Trace display functions” on page 394).
• the table of results (see “Table of results” on page 403).

The trace represents power (in dBm) as a function of frequency (in THz) or wavelength
(in nm). The channels detected are represented by peaks.

NOTE
If several acquisitions are performed, the trace displayed is the one corre-
sponding to the last acquisition.

394 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Trace display functions

Figure 193 Example of OSA test result (with grid)

Fiber number
Filename
Mini-trace display
Wavelengths and power at
point of trace referenced
Channel
by cursors A and B
Wavelength and power
difference between
cursors A and B

Number of the channel

Display functions

Zoom function
The Zoom function is used to analyze part of the trace in greater detail. In association
with Channel (WDM/OSA) it enables rapid checking of a succession of events or chan-
nels.
The zoom is centered on the cursor selected. If the two cursors A and B are selected,
the zoom is centered midway between the two cursors.

The position of the section of trace displayed with respect to the complete trace is repre-
sented by a red rectangle on the mini-trace at the top left-hand corner of the screen.

To define a zoom on the trace:

1 Select Cursor A or B and center it on the zone to be examined
2 On the Shift/Zoom key, select the Zoom function.
3 Use the or key to increase or reduce the zoom factor.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 395

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Trace display functions

or
Use touchscreen and click on trace to position the upper left and bottom right
corners of the zoomed area.

Zooming on the different channels in succession

4 Zoom on one of the channels as shown above.
5 On the Trace/Channel key, select the Channel function.
6 Use the and keys to move the zoom on to the successive channels.

Cursors function
The vertical cursors A and B are used in the Zoom and Shift functions to position or
delete markers.

The cursors A and B are represented by vertical lines of different colors:

• in a solid line if the cursor is selected.
• in a dotted line if the cursor is not selected.

Positioning the cursor

When a trace is displayed, the key can be used to select one or both cursors.

The direction keys and move the selected cursor(s) along the trace.

When a selected cursor touches the right or left-hand edge of the screen, the trace starts
to scroll horizontally to maintain display of this cursor.

If an unselected cursor has been moved off-screen by a zoom, it can be brought back
on to the screen by selecting it and then pressing one of the direction keys or . It
will then appear on whichever edge of the screen is closest to its position.

When the cursor function is selected, the keys and move the trace vertically.

Cursors information
The informations on Cursors are always display on the upper part of the screen.
Above the trace are shown the co-ordinates of the points of intersection of the cursors
A and B with the trace, together with the distance between the two points.

Cursor X and Y
Two types of cursors can be defined:

396 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Trace display functions

• Cursor X: only a vertical bar is present.

• Cursor X and Cursor Y: there is a vertical bar and a horizontal bar. The intersec-
tion between these two bars is placed on the trace.

To display the type of cursor selected:

1 Click on Advanced.
2 Select the key CursorX/CursorY to modify the current choice.
Each click on this key will alternatively insert or delete the check mark against
Cursor Y

Full scale
To display the entire trace, with no zoom or displacement:
1 Either press the Full Scale key
or,
With Trace selected on Trace/Channel, press validation key

Shift function
The Shift function is used to displace the displayed section of the trace by pressing the
direction keys.
The horizontal shift is performed maintaining the point of intersection between the trace
and the selected cursor at the same level, scrolling the trace horizontally while following
it vertically, so that it never goes off the screen.

To use this function:

1 Select the zoom factor as described above.
2 Choose cursor and cursor position.
3 On the Zoom/Shift key, select Shift.
4 Use the direction keys or touch and hold screen to shift the trace in the desired
direction.

Trace /Table key

This key offers a choice from the following displays:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 397

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Trace display functions

Trace alone: main display of the trace with a single line of the table at the foot of the
page (see“Example of OSA test result (with grid)” on page 395).

Trace + Table: display of trace, reduced in size but followed by 5 to 8 lines of the table
of results.

Figure 194 OSA Results - Trace and Table

Table: display of the table alone

Figure 195 OSA Results - Table

398 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Trace display functions

Channel detection threshold

On the trace, some peaks corresponding to noise could be mistaken for channels. It is
therefore necessary to fix a power threshold level: only peaks that exceed this threshold
will be considered as channels and included in the table of results.
To modify this threshold, press the SETUP key, then select Signal threshold. Modify the
value to position it on Auto1 or fix a threshold value.

Display of total power between cursors

To display on the trace the total power between the two cursors A and B:
1 Place the cursors at the desired positions.
2 Press the Advanced key, then Total Power A<--->B.
The space between the trace and the two cursors is greyed out and the power is
displayed in the form "P=-4.95dBm".
Pressing the key Total Power A<-->B a second time removes the result of the
total power measurement.

Figure 196 Display of total power between the cursors

1.The "Auto" value is obtained by continuing to reduce the value of the threshold
below the minimum value of -79.9 dBm

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 399

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Overlay trace function

Overlay trace function

This very useful function enables up to eight traces to be displayed on the screen at
once:
• either to compare traces acquired on a number of different fibers in the same
cable,
• or to observe changes over time in traces taken of one and the same fiber.
• or to compare both curves get for each way of propagation in the origin/end
mode.
For this purpose, the Platform 8000 possesses an overlay memory which can store:
• the current trace, for comparison with further traces to be acquired subsequently,
• or traces previously saved, for comparison with the current trace,

Overlaying several traces stored in memory

To display two traces from the memory, deleting the current trace or traces already
loaded:
1 Press the FILE button.
2 On the Menu/Explorer key, select Explorer.
3 Select the files of the traces for display.
4 Press the Load key.
5 Press View trace(s) or Load traces + config.
6 When loading is complete, the Results screen appears: the first trace selected is
the active trace, the other trace being overlaid.

Overlaying the current trace

To copy the current trace into the overlay memory, proceed as follows:
1 On the Results page, press the Advanced key, then Overlay.
2 Press Set New Trace soft key.
The current trace is copied into the overlay memory: represented in a different
color, it is automatically offset with respect to new trace.
A new acquisition can then be started.

400 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Overlay trace function

NOTE
In the case of Multi-trace display with multiple wavelength acquisition: when
the START key is pressed, all the traces displayed are deleted to leave room
for the new acquisitions.

Display of traces in overlay

• The traces are shown in different colors (the active trace is green).
• Their serial numbers are repeated at the top of the screen.

Figure 197 OSA - Overlaid traces

Swapping overlay traces

Measurements can only be made on the active trace and not on overlaid traces. To make
measurements on a trace in overlay, it must first be swapped with the active trace.

To do this:
1 Press the Trace key,
2 Press the and keys, as many times as necessary.
or
Click on the upper bar, with signature of the measurement and cursor information
(next to Mini-trace).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 401

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Overlay trace function

Changing the traces position

Once a trace is displayed in overlay, the traces can be adjusted according to the Y axis:
1 Press Advanced > Overlay menu keys.
2 Select the adjustment according to Y axis:
Y Reset: all traces are on the the same level at the intersection with the active
cursor.
Y Shift: Each trace is shifted from 5 dB from the other.
Y Exact: the traces displayed are on the same position according to their injec-
tion level.

Trace resulting from the difference between two

traces
It is possible to obtain the trace corresponding to the point-by-point difference between
the current trace and the trace in overlay (if only two traces are displayed simultane-
ously).

To do this:
1 Press Advanced > Overlay menu keys
2 Press the 2 Curves Diff. menu key.
The screen displays the two traces in overlay and the trace resulting from the
"Difference".

Removing a trace in overlay

Removing the current trace

It is possible to remove a trace displayed. To do this:

1 Select it (see previous paragraph),
2 In Results page, press Advanced > Overlay menu keys
3 Press Remove Current Trace.

402 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
Table of results

Removing all the traces

To remove all the traces except the current trace, press the key Remove Other Traces.

Quitting the overlay menu

To quit the overlay menu, press the Exit key.

Table of results
Lines

According to the choice made in the SETUP menu, the table of results may include:
• either a line for each channel detected (if Channel Selection = Permanent)
• or a line for each graduation, (if Channel Selection = Grid and a grid is selected)

Type of display

The table may be displayed in a single line, on half of the screen or the whole screen as
a function of the Trace/Table key (see “Trace /Table key” on page 397)

Contents of the table without statistics

In the absence of statistics (see “Analysis parameters” on page 390) the parameters
given for each channel are:
1 the number of the channel
2 the frequency or the channel wavelength according to the unit selected
3 the spacing between the channels in THz or in nm
4 the level of the channel in dBm
This parameter indicates the calculated total channel power level from the
detected channels, achieved by mathematical power integration over ± ½ min
channel spacing around the channel center frequency.(see “Min. Channel
spacing 1” on page 390). This power level may differ from the peak power level
indicated by cursor evaluation in the graphical trace.
5 The noise level in dBm

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 403

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
On/Off-OSNR Method

Indicates the noise level measured left and right of the peak of the optical channel
(out-of-band noise measurement), in the defined resolution.
6 The optical signal to noise ratio for the channel in dB.
In WDM mode this parameter indicates the out of band SNR result based on the
out-of-band noise measurement.

Contents of the table with statistics

When selecting the Statistics measurement mode and multiple acquisitions are
performed, statistics are calculated on the results. To display these results in the table,
press the Table Contents key, then Statistics. Different Statistics keys are available to
choose the content of the table display for each channel.

The following statistics can be selected: wavelength or frequency statistics, power statis-
tics, and SNR statistics.

The display will give current value, average value, max. value, min. value and standard
deviation, or delta between min and max (selectable).

In the mode Statistics Mixed the table will show a mixture of statistical results: current,
min. and max of wavelength or frequency, and current, min. and max of the power levels.

On/Off-OSNR Method

Challenge
This is a precise out-of-service method used for measuring the in-band OSNR of stan-
dard and also of polarization-division multiplexed (PDM) systems.

Principle of "On/Off-OSNR Measurement"

The On/Off-OSNR method is based on measuring the noise power when the transmis-
sion channel is switched-off.

This is a 2 step method:

1 Switch-on all channels and perform a standard WDM measurement
All parameters like power (Pon) and wavelength are measured and stored in the
instrument

404 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
On/Off-OSNR Method

2 Switch-off the channel carrying PDM signals and perform a second measure-
ment
The channel power measured at the deactivated channel wavelength will indicate
the in-band noise Poff = noise power
In-band OSNR is calculated based on Pon and Poff

Setup
In the Acquisition setup screen, set the parameter Mode to OO-OSNR and configure
the measurement as wished (see “OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 387).

Figure 198 OSA Setup: OO-OSNR configuration

Step 1: Reference measurement

1 In the Results page, select 'Ref. Acquisition' and perform (Start) an

OSA measurement (all channels ON)

All channels will be detected and the total channel power (=integrated ch-power) of each
channel will be shown and stored in the table = P_ch (Power [dBm]).

OSNR and Noise will not yet be displayed.

Step 2: Noise / OSNR measurement

1 In the Results page, select 'Noise Acquisition'

2 Switch off the channel you want to measure the OSNR (one or multiple chan-
nels).
3 Select Noise Acquisition measurement (Noise Acq) and start the measurement.

The OSA will perform a scan and automatically detect the channels switched-off.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 405

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
DFB results analysis

Noise power is measured at the center frequency of the switched-off channels.

Noise power is normalized to Noise Acq BW (i.g. 0.1nm) according to the setup param-
eter.

OSNR will be calculated and displayed in the table based on stored P_ch (step 1).

Limitations
The On/Off-OSNR method requires an intervention into the optical system as the optical
channel to be measured needs to be switched-off.

This is only applicable for an out-of-service measurement.

Some ROADM networks contain so called 'self-blocking' RAODMs.

These kind of ROADMs will block all light including the noise, when there is no signal
present (switched-off).

This can be identified when the noise power < -60dBm or an unrealistic high OSNR
value of >35dB is measured.

The self blocking function can be switched off in many ROADMs by the system manage-
ment SW for service activation and trouble shooting purposes.

=> make sure that the self-blocking function is switched of for On/Off-OSNR
measurements.

The On/Off-OSNR application will report OSNR = #### if the measured noise floor <-
60dBm or the OSNR >35dB, as this is normally not present in an optical network when
there are no self-blocking ROADMs implemented.

DFB results analysis

This feature only applies to instruments OSA-50X.

DFB results analysis allows to characterize DFB lasers, by giving the corresponding
SMSR, Offset and bandwidth values.

DFB test configuration

To configure the Platform 8000 in preparation for a DFB test, press the SETUP button.

406 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
DFB results analysis

In the Acquisition setup screen, set Mode on DFB.

A new DFB sub-menu is offered while other Setup parameters are the same for DFB as
for WDM measurements. Refer to “OSA optical spectrum analyzer Setup” on page 387
for a complete description.

DFB (sub-menu) in Analysis screen

Bandwidth level
Level (expressed in dB) where the main component bandwidth
should be calculated
Min SMSR Minimum offset value to consider to find the Side Mode
Max SMSR Maximum offset value to consider to find the Side Mode

DFB measurements
Measurement procedure:

1 Use a patchcord to connect your DFB laser source to an input port of the OSA-
XXX module on the Platform 8000.
2 Power on the DFB laser source.
3 Click START/STOP to perform the acquisition.

The trace and corresponding results appear automatically after a few seconds.

Figure 199 DFB measurements

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 407

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
DFB results analysis

Cursors A and B are automatically positioned on the first DFB laser, respectively on the
max SMSR and the pick of the main component.

DFB results
A table is displayed (see “DFB measurements” on page 407) showing for each DFB:
Channel Number of DFB laser detected
Wavelength Wavelength (in nm) of the DFB main component
Level integrated power (expressed in dBm)
SMSR Side Mode Suppression Ratio (expressed in dBc)
Mode off Mode Offset (expressed in nm)
BW @ level Calculated bandwidth (expressed in nm) according to the bandwidth
level (expressed in dBc) defined in the setup menu.

When the <Channel> key is selected, use the arrow keys and to move the cursor
from one DFB pick to another1, both in the trace and in the table of results.

Saving DFB results

DFB Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be stored as a regular
WDM trace.

To save your files:

1 Click on FILE, select name and Store Trace
2 Click on RESULTS to come back to the previous screen

Loading DFB results

Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be reloaded as a regular
WDM trace. Make sure Type parameter is set on DFB in the Setup menu to recalculate
DFB results.
Results appear automatically in the table.

1.In case several DFB lasers are characterized at the same time

408 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
File Management

File Management

Storing HR-OSA measurements

If Auto store has been selected, then results will be saved automatically.
If not, or if you want to save the results under another name, directory etc.:
1 Click on FILE key
2 Click on Save > Save
3 Enter a filename in the edition keypad.
4 Click on Enter to save the trace.
The trace is saved with the extension ".PIB"

Recalling HR-OSA files

Once an HR OSA file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:
1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.
2 Select the directory and then the file to open.
3 Click on Load
4 Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened

For further information on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 409

Chapter 12 High Resolution OSA Measurement
File Management

410 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 13
Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a Attenuation Profile (AP)
measurement with a Platform 8000 V2 equipped with a 81DISPAP or 81 MRDISPAP
Module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Recommended equipment” on page 412
• “AP Activation and self calibration” on page 412
• “AP Reference Measurement” on page 417
• “Performing a AP measurement” on page 420
• “Display of AP results” on page 421
• “Saving the trace and generating a report” on page 426

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Platform 8000 V2 and the
Optical Broadband Source you are using.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 411

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Recommended equipment

Recommended equipment
To perform a AP measurement, the following equipment is recommended:
• Platform 8000 V2 with a module as referenced above, and required optical
connector.
• OBS-5XX,the BBS1A or BBS2A with required optical connectors.
• Fiber inspection scope with associated optical connector tips.
• Cleaning kit.
• Two fiber patchcords with required optical connectors.
• One mating adapter.

AP Activation and self calibration

1 Validate the AP function in the Instrument Home page.
2 Press RESULTS to display the auto-calibration status. A bar tuning in progress
informs of the progression status of the calibration at the bottom of the screen.
Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing.
3 Press SETUP to access to the configuration menu for AP analysis.

Loading a configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for AP test:
1 Press SETUP hard key.
2 On bottom right of setup page, press Load Config. menu key.
3 In the Explorer, select the desired file configuration
4 Press Load Config. menu keys.
A beep is emitted to validate the selection of the configuration file.
The software automatically brings you back to setup page.

NOTE
Most of the configuration files are available into the Platform in disk/con-
fig/AP.

412 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
AP Activation and self calibration

Setup Menu
The different test and display parameters are described below:

Figure 200 Configuration menu for AP test

See: “Configuring the File

parameters” on page 48 See: “Configuring the Link
parameters” on page 43

Test Auto configuration

The Test Auto soft key sets all parameters to auto or default values and let the unit to
choose the appropriate setup, as listed below.

Setup Menu
Acquisition:
• Averaging acquisition: No
Results Screen:
• Wavelength range: full
• Normalized to km: No
File menu
• File naming: Auto
• Auto store: Yes
• Fiber Nb Increment: Yes
In standard mode, you can set the parameters below.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 413

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
AP Activation and self calibration

Acquisition parameters

Acquisition band (with 81DISPAP modules)

OESCL measurement performed over the full wavelength range (OESCL
bands).
SCL measurement performed over a wavelength range limited to S,C and
L bands

NOTE
In case of OBS5xx handheld sources, the measurement will be performed
exclusively on SCL band.

Averaging acquisition
It enables to improve the dynamic range of the measurement by reducing the noise
level. It is recommended to use the Auto mode and configure a manual averaging if
needed only:
No No average of the acquisition sample to be performed.
Low Low averaging (4 samples).
Medium Medium averaging (16 samples).
High High averaging (32 samples).

Power Level
This parameter enables to get a power level indication at the start of an acquisition (only
with 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP modules)
No the received power is not indicated before starting the measurement
acquisition.
Yes the received power is indicated at the beginning of measurement.

NOTE
If Yes is selected, the acquisition stops if not enough power is received.

414 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
AP Activation and self calibration

Last Reference / BBS Type / BBS Serial Number

These parameters provide the relevant information related to the Broadband source
(BBS) referencing.

These parameters cannot be modified as they are automatically generated after a refer-
ence measurement (see “Performing the reference” on page 417)

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

Measurements

Known Length

A know fiber length enables to calculate and display the attenuation profile values in dB/
km, in the table. (see Figure 204 on page 422).
No If you do not know the fiber length, select No
Yes If you know the fiber length, select Yes.

Fiber length

If Yes has been selected on the previous line, click on Edit number to use the numeric
keypad, or use the direction keys, to modify the fiber length (Min = 0.100 km / Max = 300
km).

Unit

Select the distance unit: km / kfeet / miles.

NOTE
The key Copy Setup For PMD/CD allows to apply the AP configuration to
the other selected function(s) of the module.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 415

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
AP Activation and self calibration

Display

Wavelength

It enables to configure the range of wavelengths to be displayed on the graph and in the
table of results.
Full Displays results along the full available wavelength range
S+C+L Band Displays results along S, C + L bands.
C+L Band Displays results along C + L bands.
Manual Displays results between 2 user defined wavelengths. The user must
then select the <start> and <end> wavelengths.
ITUCWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.2 CWDM channels exclusively
ITUDWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.1 DWDM channels exclusively

Channel spacing can be fixed at: 25 GHz, 50 GHz, 100 GHz or 200 GHz.
Telecom Displays 4 wavelengths: 1310 / 1480 / 1550 / 1625 nm

Inc.Wavelength

Defines the spacing between 2 consecutive measurement points displayed on the graph
and in the table of results.

Normalized to km

No The AP result is provided in dB only.

Yes The AP result is also provided in dB/km (calculated according to fiber
length).

Saving configuration in a file

Once parameters have been configured, they can be kept in memory and saved in a
configuration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled in order to be recalled for future AP acquisi-
tions.

To save parameters in a configuration file:

1 If necessary, press SETUP to return to Setup page.

416 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
AP Reference Measurement

2 Select one parameter in one of the setup page (acquisition, link..)

3 Press Save Config. menu key
4 Enter a name for the configuration file using the edition keypad (max 20 charac-
ters).

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the directory disk/config/AP.

5 Press Enter to validate

A sound is emitted to indicate the file is saved.

The configuration file is saved with the extension ".fo_cfg" (icon ) and can be
recalled at any time from the Explorer page.

AP Reference Measurement
On the measurement examples below, only the OBS-5XX is described. However, it can
be replaced by E81BBSXX.

Performing the reference

It is recommended to perform a broadband source referencing once a day or each time
the fiber patchcord has to be changed.

NOTE
When a reference is performed, acquisition parameters are not taken in
account.

To make a reference, connect your OBS-5XX or BBS to the test module just like shown
on figure below.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 417

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
AP Reference Measurement

Figure 201 Reference measurement setup

OBS-5XX Mating adapter

Fiber patchcord

Signal input connector of the

81DISPAP or 81 MRDISPAP module

1 Activate the source on the distant Unit, and select AP function.

2 In the AP Setup page, press the Acq. Ref. sofkey.

Figure 202 AP Reference Setup

3 In Make Reference, select Yes

The line BBS Serial Number turns active.
4 Enter a serial number for the broadband source used.
5 Press the button START/STOP to start the reference of the broadband source.

418 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
AP Reference Measurement

6 Press Yes in the dialog box to start reference and wait for the end of reference
measurement.
Once the reference is correct, the message "ready to start Measurement"
appears in the blue bar.

Figure 203 Example of a reference for a broadband source

A bargraph indicates the source power level

Low High
If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the
following potential causes:

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

Acquisition impossible Auto-calibration is not Wait for the calibration to be termi-
Hit any key to continue completed nated
The OBS-5XX (or other Press the ON/OFF button to switch
source) is not switched on on the source, verify if <Make refer-
ence> is still set to <Yes>, then repeat
Signal level too low! step step 5
Check source and connec- The OBS-5XX (or other Check if the LOW-BATT red led is
tions. source) battery is too low lighted. If yes, then recharge the bat-
Hit any key to continue. tery.
Defective connections Check that the cables are properly
connected, and the notches on the
connectors are correctly aligned.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 419

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Performing a AP measurement

Saving a reference measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, you
can save the result on the hard disk or disk of the Base Unit (8000V2 or 6000/6000A
Platform).
Proceed as follow:
1 Click on the FILE button
2 Select Setup
3 Enter a filename for this reference, or click on Default Filename.
The file has the extension ".AP", but differs from the AP measurement result files
as it only contains the reference points (the information on the upper part of the
screen are different). See “Saving the trace and generating a report” on
page 426).

Loading existing reference

The last reference performed with the Base Unit may be different than the reference
used by the current curve.

In this case, the Acquisition Ref. menu will be different than the Curve Menu, in the
Reference setup page.

You can replace one reference by the other, using specific softkeys:
• Load Ref From Trace: the reference which has been used for the curve actually
open will be used for the next acquisitions.
• Update Trace With Ref.: apply the acquisition reference parameters to the
loaded curve.

Performing a AP measurement
When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, use
the following procedure to make a measurement:
1 Disconnect the mating adapter and connect each fiber patchcord to the end of the
fiber under test.
2 Press the SETUP button to access the configuration menu.
3 Select the appropriate AP test setup according to your application as earlier
defined in “AP Activation and self calibration” on page 412.

420 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Display of AP results

4 Press the START/STOP button to see the results within a few seconds.
5 Repeat step 1 to 4 for every fiber to be tested.

NOTE
When the composite power of the input signal is higher than +20 dBm, a
warning is displayed and the signal is cut off.

Fiber under test

Fiber patchcord

Signal input
connector on the
81DISPAP or
81 MRDISPAP
module

OBS-5XX

NOTE
You can modify the fiber length without performing a measurement again.
The AP results (dB/km) will be recalculated automatically.

Display of AP results
The AP results screen presents different zones (see: “Example of a AP result” on
page 422).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 421

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Display of AP results

Trace display

Figure 204 Example of a AP result

File name Wavelength range Fiber Length

Attenuation profile Curve

Results table (see “Results

table” on page 424)

Spectrum/Profile
For a reference measurement, only the spectrum is available.

For a AP measurement, two different graphs may be displayed.

You may switch from the «Profile» view to the final «Spectrum» view using the button
Spectrum/Profile.
• Spectrum: It shows the final spectrum.

422 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Display of AP results

Figure 205 Example of a spectrum view after a measurement

• Profile: it provides the difference between the final spectrum and the reference
spectrum of the broadband source- that’s the resulting attenuation profile (see
figure “Example of a AP result” on page 422).

NOTE
For a reference measurement, only the spectrum is available.

NOTE
The Trace - Table and Wavelength functions are available exclusively with
the Profile mode.

Zoom
In order to zoom in on the trace:
1 Press the Zoom/Shift menu key to select Zoom,
2 Use the arrow keys and or and to zoom horizontally or vertically.
The zooming area is defined by the selected cursor(s).

With touchscreen, position upper left and bottom right location of the zoom area.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 423

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Display of AP results

NOTE
To reset the zoom and see the full trace, press Full scale.

Trace shift
To shift the trace horizontally or vertically:
1 Press the Zoom/Shift menu key to select Shift
2 Use the arrow keys and or and to make the required shift.
or
With touchscreen, touch and hold the screen to make the required shift.

Cursor
To move the cursor(s) on the trace
1 Press the Cursor A / Cursor B menu key
2 Use the arrow keys and or and .
or
With touchscreen, directly click on position of the cursor(s) on trace
The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated above the
graph area.

Wavelength
To move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one,
1 Press the Wavelength key
2 Use the arrow keys and or and .
The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table (if the trace and/or the
results table is displayed).

Results table
The Trace/Table/Summary key allows to display the trace and/or the results table.

NOTE
The Results Table is available exclusively in Profile view.

424 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Display of AP results

The menu key Trace/Table/Summary enables to display either:

the trace and 1 line of the table (see Figure 204 on page 422).

the trace and 8 lines of the table

Figure 206 AP Profile - Trace and Results table

the trace and a summary of the results

Figure 207 AP Profile - Trace and Summary

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 425

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Saving the trace and generating a report

: the table only

Figure 208 AP Profile -Results table

The results table provides, for each wavelength (calculated using the wavelength range
and the incrementation parameter as seen in “Wavelength” on page 416), the attenua-
tion profile in dB/km and the total loss in dB.

Saving the trace and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the trace can be saved and a report can be gener-
ated directly from the results screen.

Saving results and creating a report from results page

This function is available exclusively in Profile view, in the results

page.

To generate a report:
1 Select Profile view with the menu key Spectrum/Profile.
2 Check the results are not displayed in Table mode exclusively, otherwise the
report cannot be generated (Fast Report menu key is not available).
3 Press Fast Report menu key .

426 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Saving the trace and generating a report

A menu displays under the trace.

4 In the menu, configure the file saving (and the report)

Figure 209 Fast report configuration

a In the Save Mode parameter, select:

File Only to save exclusively the trace in a ats file
File + txt to save the trace in a ats file and to generate a txt file of the results
File + pdf to save the trace in a ats file and to generate a report of the trace
and results in a pdf file
b In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
c Modify the Fiber Number using the key .
d In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A)
e In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
5 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
6 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad
or
Click on Auto Filenaming menu key to apply the file name defined in the Setup
screen, in Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 50)
7 Press Enter to validate

NOTE
The ats file and the txt or pdf file will have the same name.

The icon displays during saving process.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 427

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Saving the trace and generating a report

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform..

NOTE
The file and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

Opening a report
1 To open the report, press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the pdf file of the report.
The file name is:
For the txt file: trace file_ats.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.ats.pdf.
3 Press Load.
The file opens on the T-BERD/MTS.

Figure 210 Example of AP Report

428 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Saving the trace and generating a report

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A pdf report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on page 545).

Recalling AP files
Once an AP file is stored, use the Explorer to reload it:
1 Press FILE to open the Explorer.
2 Select the directory and then the file to open.
3 Click on Load
4 Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 429

Chapter 13 Attenuation profile
Saving the trace and generating a report

430 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 14
CD measurements using
Chapter 14

phase shift method

The Chromatic Dispersion analyzer function using phase shift method is available
through the 81DISPAP, 81MRDISPAP and 81CD modules and is described in this
chapter.

Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “CD activation and self calibration” on page 432
• “Configuring the CD test” on page 432
• “CD Reference measurement” on page 439
• “Performing a CD Measurement” on page 442
• “Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers” on page 443
• “Display of CD results” on page 444
• “Saving the trace and generating a report” on page 449

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 431

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
CD activation and self calibration

CD activation and self calibration

1 Press the HOME button
2 Select the CD function
3 Press the button RESULTS to display the auto-calibration status.
A bargraph tuning in progress informs of the progression status of the calibra-
tion at the bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed
before continuing.
4 Press the button SETUP to access to the configuration menu for Chromatic
Dispersion analysis.

Configuring the CD test

To configure a chromatic dispersion test, press the SETUP button. The different measure-
ment parameters are displayed.

You can choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key or define your own
configuration.

NOTE
The key Copy Setup For PMD/AP allows to apply the CD configuration to
the other selected function(s) of the 81XXX module.

Test Auto Configuration

In Test Auto configuration, the setups below are provided.

Setup menu
MEASUREMENT
Known Length No
Approximation formula
Auto chooses the best formula depending on the acquisition
band
Sellmeier 5T if the 81XXX module is used with a BBS2A on the
OESCL band
Quadratic when the 81XXX modules are operating on the SCL
bands.

432 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Configuring the CD test

Amplified Link: No (refer to “Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers”

on page 443)
RESULTS SCREEN
Normalized to km Yes
Show Measured pointsNo
Show Fit Formula No

Storage parameters (see Chapter 20 “File management”):

– Auto Store: Yes
– Increment Fiber Number: Yes

Manual Mode Configuration

In manual mode, you can set your own parameters.

To define your own configuration, select the parameter to be modified, then choose the
option for this parameter.

Figure 211 Configuration of CD test (Expert mode)

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring

the Link parameters” on page 43
See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the
File parameters” on page 48

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 433

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Configuring the CD test

The configuration parameters of the CD test are described below.

Loading a configuration file

To load the configuration file to be used for CD test:
1 Press SETUP hard key.
2 On bottom right of setup page, press Load Config. menu key.
3 In the Explorer, select the desired file configuration
4 Press Load Config. menu keys.
A beep is emitted to validate the selection of the configuration file.
The software automatically brings you back to setup page.

NOTE
Most of the configuration files are available into the Platform in disk/con-
fig/CD.

Acquisition parameters

Acquisition

Acquisition band (with 81DISPAP modules)

OESCL measurement performed over the full wavelength range (OESCL

bands).
SCL measurement performed over a wavelength range limited to S,C and
L bands.

NOTE
In case of OBS5xx handheld sources, the measurement will be performed
exclusively on SCL band.

434 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Configuring the CD test

Power Level

This parameter enables to get a power level indication at the start of an acquisition (only
with 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP modules).
No the received power is not indicated before starting the measurement
acquisition.
Yes the received power is indicated at the beginning of measurement.

NOTE
If Yes is selected, the acquisition stops if not enough power is received.

Reference
Last Reference / BBS Type / BBS Serial Number

These parameters provide the relevant information related to the Broadband source
(BBS) referencing.

These parameters cannot be modified as they are automatically generated after a refer-
ence measurement (see “CD Reference measurement” on page 439).

Alarms parameters
In the Setup page, press Alarms softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Alarms).

Alarm Status

None No alarm management.

Active Enable the Pass/Fail evaluation according to the defined thresholds
(see below).
Auto Values: Yes

The maximum dispersion tolerance is automatically set according to the bit rate informa-
tion.

Bit rate info.

List all relevant data rates. Use the direction arrow keys and for selection.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 435

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Configuring the CD test

Auto values: No

Dispersion

Threshold value is entered manually: select the maximum dispersion threshold (ps/nm)
: from >1 to > 10000 ps/nm.

NOTE
Max. dispersion threshold is always considered for non normalized disper-
sion values.

The Pass/Fail indication is provided in the results table.

Analysis parameters
In the Setup page, press Analysis softkey (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click on Analysis).

Measurements

Fiber Length

Unknown If you do not know the fiber length

Distance Press Edit Number to enter fiber distance: Min=1km / Max=20000
kmDispersion coefficients (normalized values) will be calculated
accordingly.

Distance Unit

When the fiber length is set manually, choose the distance unit: km / kfeet / miles.

Normalized to km

No Only Dispersion results of the link are displayed, in ps/nm.

Yes In addition to dispersion results, dispersion coefficient are calculated
according to the fiber length and listed in the table.

436 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Configuring the CD test

Approx. formula

Select the approximation formula to be used for generation of the delay, dispersion and
slope curves:

Please refer to ITU-T G.650.1 or IEC 60793 1-42 for further information.
Quadratic A+Bλ+Cλ2.
Sellmeier 3-term A+Bλ2+Cλ−2.
Sellmeier 5-term A+Bλ2+Cλ-2+Dλ4+Eλ-4.
Lambda Log A+Bλ+Cλ ln(λ).

See “Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone” on page 10.

You can also let the product to configure automatically the approximation formula to be
used by selecting Auto.

It is recommended to select the quadratic formula when the

81XXX,Module is used with an OBS-5XX, a 81BBS1A or a 81BBS2A, in
SCL mode.

Amplified link

Select Yes when measuring through optical amplifiers (see “Performing a CD measure-
ment through amplifiers” on page 443).

Display
Wavelength

This parameter enables to set the displayed wavelength range.

Full Displays results along the full available wavelength range
S+C+L Band Displays results along S, C + L bands..
C+L Band Displays results along C + L bands.
C Band Displays results along C band
ITUCWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.2 CWDM channels exclusively
ITUDWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.1 DWDM channels exclusively
Channel spacing can be fixed at: 25 GHz, 50 GHz, 100 GHz or 200 GHz.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 437

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Configuring the CD test

Manual Displays results between 2 user defined wavelengths. The user must
then select the inf. wavelength to "start” with and the sup. wave-
length to "end" with.

NOTE
This parameter cannot be configured if, in Measurements box, the parame-
ter Fiber Length is defined to Unknown.

Inc.Wavelength

Defines the spacing between 2 consecutive measurement points displayed on the graph
and in the table of results.

Measurement Points

Displays the acquisition points on the Delay curve (represented by black crosses).
Yes All the acquisition points are displayed.
No No acquisition points visible

Show approximation formula

Displays the resulting approximation equation and the correlation coefficient on the
upper left side of the trace.
Yes Equation is displayed.
No Equation is not visible.

Saving configuration in a file

Once parameters have been configured, they can be kept in memory and saved in a
configuration file.

This configuration file can then be recalled in order to be recalled for future CD acquisi-
tions.

To save parameters in a configuration file:

1 If necessary, press SETUP to return to Setup page.

438 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
CD Reference measurement

2 Select one parameter in one of the setup page (acquisition, link..)

3 Press Save Config. menu key
4 Enter a name for the configuration file using the edition keypad (max 20 charac-
ters).

NOTE
Configuration file is saved in the directory disk/config/CD.

5 Press Enter to validate

A sound is emitted to indicate the file is saved.

The configuration file is saved with the extension ".fo_cfg" (icon ) and can be
recalled at any time from the Explorer page.

CD Reference measurement
On the measurement examples below, only the OBS-5XX will be described. However, it
can be replaced by E81BBSXX

Performing the reference

It is recommended performing a CD referencing once a day or each time the fiber patch-
cord has to be changed.

NOTE
When a reference is performed, acquisition parameters are not taken in
account.

To perform a reference, connect your OBS-5XX or BBS to the test module as shown
below.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 439

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
CD Reference measurement

Figure 212 Reference measurement setup

Mating adapter

Fiber patchcord

OBS-55

Signal input connector of the

81DISPAP or 81 MRDISPAP module

1 Activate the source on the distant Unit., and select CD function.

2 In the CD Setup page, press the Acq. Ref. sofkey.
If 81XXX module with CD function is used for the first time, clicking on the SETUP
button directly opens the Reference setup page.

Figure 213 Setup CD Reference Measurement

3 In Make Reference, select Yes

The line BBS Serial Number turns active.

440 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
CD Reference measurement

4 Enter a serial number for the broadband source used.

5 Press the button START/STOP to start the reference of the broadband source.
A bargraph as this one is displayed until the end of the
acquisition.
Once the reference is correct, the message Valid Reference is displayed in
green, and related information are displayed in the upper blue part of the screen:
date and time of reference acquisition / Source type / serial number.

If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following
points:

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

Acquisition impossible Auto-calibration is not Wait for the calibration to be com-
Hit any key to continue completed pleted
Press the Source ON/ Source
The source is not
OFF button to switch on the source,
switched on
verify if Make reference is still set
to Yes, then repeat step 3
Signal level too low!
Check if the LOW-BATT red led is
Check source and connec- The Source battery is
lighted. If yes, then recharge the
tions too low
battery.
Hit any key to continue
Defective connections
Check that the cables are properly
The CD mode has not
connected, and the notches on the
been selected on the
connectors are correctly aligned.
source

Saving a reference measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, you
can save the result on the hardidsk or disk of the Base Unit used (8000 V2 or 6000/
6000A Platform).

Proceed as follow:
1 Click on the FILE button
2 Select Setup
3 Enter a filename for this reference, or click on Default Filename.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 441

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Performing a CD Measurement

The file has the extension ".OCD", but differs from the CD measurement result
files as it only contains the reference points (the information on the upper part of
the screen are different). See “Saving results and creating a report from results
page” on page 449.

Loading existing reference

The last reference acquisition performed with the Base Unit may be different than the
reference used by the curve one.

In this case, the Acquisition Ref. menu will be different than the Curve Menu, in the
Reference setup page.

You can replace one reference by the other, using specific softkeys:

- Load Ref From Trace: the reference which has been used for the curve actually open
will be used for the next acquisitions.

- Update Trace With Ref.: apply the reference parameters to the loaded curve.

Performing a CD Measurement
Once the reference measurement is correctly performed:
1 Disconnect the mating sadapter and connect each fiber patchcord to the end of
the fiber under test
2 Press the SETUP button to access the CD configuration menu.
3 Select the appropriate CD test setup according to your application (see “CD acti-
vation and self calibration” on page 432).
4 Press the START/STOP button to see the results within a few seconds.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 for every fiber to be tested

442 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers

Figure 214 Connections for the CD Measurement

Fiber under test

Fiber patchcord

Signal input connector of

OBS-5XX the CD module

NOTE
You can modify the fiber length without performing a measurement again.
The CD results (dB/km) will be recalculated automatically.

Performing a CD measurement through amplifiers

The CD reference step is not required for measuring through amplifiers:
1 Connect the source and the 81DISPAP/81MRDISPAP module at each end of the
fiber under test. Optical attenuators (OLA55 1 and OLA55 2) have to be posi-
tioned before and after the amplified link.
VIAVI recommends to:
• setup the front attenuator (OLA55 #1) so that the power level received by the
amplifier is 10 dB lower than the in-service power level (in normal operation).
• setup the far end attenuator (OLA55 #2) so that the maximum received power
level by the CD tester is -10dBm max

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 443

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Display of CD results

Amplified Network

81BBSXX or 81DISPAP or
OLA 55 #1 OLA 55 #2
OBS-5XX 81MRDISPAP
Psource=Pi - 10dB Ptester=- 10dBm max
2 Press the SETUP button to access the CD configuration menu.
3 Select the appropriate CD test setup according to your application as earlier
defined in “Configuring the CD test” on page 432.
4 Select Yes for Amplified link (It will limit the acquisition band from 1530 nm to
1565 nm).
5 Press the START/STOP button to perform CD measurement.

NOTE
Depending on the amplifier specification, it may be required to adjust the
acquisition band to a short wavelength range.

Display of CD results
General display
Once the acquisition is completed, the result curve is automatically displayed. The Delay
curve is always displayed first.

444 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Display of CD results

Figure 215 Delay Curve

Fit Formula

Measured
points

Normalized
to km

The information provided with the delay curve may be different depending on to the
parameters settings. In the Figure 215, the following parameters have been configured:
• Normalized to km : Yes
• Show Measured Points: Yes
• Show Fit Formula: Yes

NOTE
If the parameter Normalized to km is set to No, the result table will not dis-
play the Dispersion Coef (ps/nm.km) values.

Functions available

Delay / Dispersion / Slope

Once the delay curve is displayed, you can change to the Dispersion, then the Slope
Curve, using the Delay / Dispersion / Slope key.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 445

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Display of CD results

Figure 216 Example of the Slope display

Trace/Table
The menu key Trace/Table/Summary enables to display either:

: the trace and 7 lines of the table (see Figure 216 on page 446)

the trace and a summary of the results

446 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Display of CD results

Figure 217 CD Delay - Trace and Summary

: the table only

Figure 218 Results Table

Move from 7 lines table to full table using menu key Trace/Table.

The results table displays the following values for each wavelength (depending on the
range and increment defined in the Setup menu):

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 447

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Display of CD results

• Delay
• Total dispersion
• Dispersion Coefficient (if Normalized to km is set to Yes in the Setup menu. If
not, this column is empty).
• Slope

The blue line at the top of the table displays the following information:
• The Bit Rate Info. used for the Pass/Fail indication
• L0: zero dispersion wavelength
• So: Slope at L0

Cursor, Zoom and Shift functions

Those functions are available exclusively in Expert mode (configu-

rable in the CD ODM Setup screen).

Position the cursor

To move the cursor on the trace:

1 Press Cursor A menu key,
2 Use the direction arrow keys and or and .
or
With touchscreen, directly press on trace to position the cursor
The coordinates of cursor intersection with the trace are indicated above the
trace.

Zooming on trace

In order to zoom in on the trace:

1 Press the Zoom/Shift menu key to display Zoom,
2 Use the direction arrow keys to zoom in either horizontally or vertically.
The zoom is made around the selected cursor(s).

With touchscreen, position upper left and bottom right location of the zoom area.

448 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Saving the trace and generating a report

Shifting the trace

To shift the trace horizontally or vertically:

1 Press the Zoom/Shift soft key to select Shift function.
2 Use the direction arrow keys
or
With touchscreen, touch and hold the screen to make the required shift.

Wavelength
To move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one,
1 Press the Wavelength key
2 Use the arrow keys and or and .
The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table (yellow highlight).

Saving the trace and generating a report

Once the results page is displayed, the trace can be saved and a report can be gener-
ated directly from the results screen.

Saving results and creating a report from results page

To save the trace (and generate a report):
1 Check the results are displayed in Trace + Table mode (menu key ).

If the screen displays exclusively the Table, the report cannot be generated (the
Fast Report key is not available).

NOTE
Whatever is the view selected in Results page (Delay, Dispersion or
Slope), the report is always generated with the Dispersion trace.

2 Press Fast Report menu key .

A menu displays under the trace.
3 In the menu, configure the file saving (and the report)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 449

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Saving the trace and generating a report

Figure 219 Fast report configuration

a In the Save Mode parameter, select:

File Only to save exclusively the trace in a ocd file
File + txt to save the trace in a ocd file and to generate a txt file of the
results
File + pdf to save the trace in a ocd file and to generate a report of the trace
and results in a pdf file
b In the Cable Id parameter, enter/modify the name of the Cable using the
edition keypad.
c Modify the Fiber Number/ Fiber Code using the key .
The parameter is different according to the Cable Structure configuration
(see “Cable structure” on page 45).
d In the Direction parameter, select/modify the direction, to define if the
measurement has been performed from Origin to Extremity (A -> B) or from
Extremity to Origin (B -> A)
e In the Location A and Location B parameters, enter/modify the name of
Origin and Extremity.
4 Once saving is configured as wished, press Save All menu key
5 Enter a name for the file in the edition keypad
or
Click on Auto Filenaming menu key to apply the file name defined in the Setup
screen, in Filenaming parameter (see “Filenaming” on page 50)
6 Press Enter to validate

NOTE
The trace file and the txt or pdf file will have the same name.

450 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Saving the trace and generating a report

The icon displays during saving process.

Once saving is completed, a sound is emitted onto the Platform.

NOTE
The file and the report are saved in the last storage media and directory
selected.

Opening a report
1 To open the report, press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the pdf file of the report.
The file name is:
For the txt file: trace file_ocd.txt
For the pdf file: trace file.ocd.pdf
3 Press Load.
The file opens on the Platform.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 451

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Saving the trace and generating a report

Figure 220 Example of CD ODM Report

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk:
disk > logo.jpg.

NOTE
A pdf report can also be generated from the File Explorer page onto the T-
BERD/MTS 8000V2 or 6000/6000A (see “Generating pdf report(s)” on
page 545).

File Signature
The Chromatic Dispersion results are stored with the extension ".ocd".

452 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Saving the trace and generating a report

The Reference measurement and the CD measurement files have both the extension
".ocd" but can be differentiated by the information displayed in the File signature, on
upper part of the screen:

Figure 221 File Signature for Reference and CD measurement

Reference File
Signature

Measurement File
Signature

Recalling reference or CD measurement files

Once a CD file is stored, it can be recalled using the Explorer:
1 Select Explorer with the key Setup/Explorer.
2 Select the directory and then the file to open
3 Press Load
4 Press View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
Click on Load Ref. to open a reference file.

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 453

Chapter 14 CD measurements using phase shift method
Saving the trace and generating a report

454 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 15
Chapter 15 Broadband source BBS
This chapter describes the function of the BBS (Broadband Source) module and its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Function of the BBS module” on page 456
• “Activation process” on page 456
• “Remote interlock connector” on page 457

NOTE
BBS modules comply with standard IEC 60825-1:2014, class 1M.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 455

Chapter 15 Broadband source BBS
Function of the BBS module

Function of the BBS module

The broadband source (BBS) module, covers two different wavelengths:
• from 1260 to 1640 nm with the 81BBS2A
• from 1460 to 1640 nm with the 81BBS1A.

They are used to measure the attenuation profile, chromatic dispersion and PMD of
optical fibers.

Activation process
To use the BBS function, go into the HOME page and select the BBS icon using
the key or touchscreen.
1 Go into the SETUP or RESULTS menu (the same page is displayed for this plug-
in) to access the BBS settings.
2 Press the Source On key.
3 Enter the password 4877, using the direction keys , or by pressing the numerical
keyboard with the stylus.
4 Press the Confirm soft key to validate the password.
The source is on and the icon is displayed.

Configuration with the 81BB2A module

Figure 222 Configuration of the BBS2A

1 Select CD, AP or PMD transmission mode to perform the corresponding test

using the 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module.

456 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 15 Broadband source BBS
Remote interlock connector

2 If a CD mode is selected, the key Full Band/SCL Band is displayed and allow to
select transmitted wavelength range.

Configuration with the 81BB1A module

Figure 223 Configuration of the BBS1A

1 Select CD, AP/PMD or ALL transmission mode to perform the corresponding test
using the 81DISPAP or 81MRDISPAP module.

If the parameter All is selected, the dynamic range will be degraded by

3 dB.

Remote interlock connector

The use of a Remote Interlock system is specified with class IIIb sources by 21 CFR
1040.10 (USA).

The BBS module is equipped with a remote interlock connector (SMB type) on the front
panel. This is aimed to protect the user from injury when using class IIIb light sources.

If the short circuit at the SMB connector is opened, the broadband light source is
switched off immediately and cannot be switched on until it is closed again.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 457

Chapter 15 Broadband source BBS
Remote interlock connector

Figure 224 Remote interlock connector

Remote interlock
connector

458 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 16
Chapter 16 Multi Test Access Unit
This chapter describes the function of the MTAU (Multi Test Access Unit) module and its
use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Function of the MTAU module” on page 460
• “Connections” on page 460
• “Configuration” on page 461
• “Manual mode” on page 461
• “Auto mode” on page 462

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 459

Chapter 16 Multi Test Access Unit
Function of the MTAU module

Function of the MTAU module

The MTAU is a passive module (switch) used to route the signals from the different
measurement plug-ins to one and the same fiber.

The advantage is to be able, for example, to make all the characterization measure-
ments (insertion loss, reflectometry, chromatic dispersion, spectrum and polarization
measurements) with a single Platform 80001 without ever disconnecting the fiber.

Connections
The MTAU plug-ins offer a common port with 4 ports A, B,C and D. The fiber to be tested
must be connected to the common port. The other ports are connected to the measure-
ment modules, e.g. OTDR, ODM, or an external instrument.

Two Platforms can be used at each end of the link under test for maximum efficiency and
to carry out the largest number of tests in both directions.

NOTE
The MTAU is not directional. It is possible to use the common port either as
an input or as an output.

Figure 225 MTAU plug-in with 1 common & 4 ports

Inputs for connection to

the different modules
Output: fiber under test

1.Equipped with suitable plug-ins, for example an OTDR module and an ODM module

460 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 16 Multi Test Access Unit
Configuration

Configuration
To use the MTAU function, go into the HOME page and select the icon .

Then go into the SETUP or RESULTS menu (the same page is displayed for this plug-
in) to access the screen from which the the input channels can be switched.

The screen displays a diagram of the input and outputs to the switching device.

Figure 226 Manual mode for the MTAU plug-in

Switching button
Common port Port B Port D

Port A Port C

Manual mode
To switch each output, use the button Port A/Port B/Port C/Port D. Each click on this
button switches the next output port.

The active port and the link to the common port are shown green, while the other ports
remain grey.

NOTE
To optimize manipulation, always use the RESULTS key to change over
from this screen to the screen corresponding to each measurement.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 461

Chapter 16 Multi Test Access Unit
Auto mode

Auto mode
The auto mode offers the best way to test a full cable. The purpose is to set a sequence
of operations, which will be performed for each fiber, one after the other with no need to
modify the configuration or to go to each measurement tab. All operations can be
handled from the MTAU tab.

NOTE
The switch between measurement (if necessary) is automatic. Nevertheless
launching each measurement remains the user responsibility, as some extra
equipment might be needed (ex broadband source for PMD).

Select Auto on the key Manual/Auto to switch to auto mode or vice et versa.

Figure 227 Auto mode for the MTAU plug-in

Icons representing
available functions

Links showing that

- OTDR will be
performed on port A
- PMD/AP/CD will
be performed on
port B

Different icons appear at the top of the screen, showing different available functions.
According to your Platform 8000 configuration, you may have all the following functions
available:

• OTDR • CD
• OEO • AP
• PMD • OSA

462 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 17
Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Used with the MTAU module, the Fiber characterization function allows to automate a
test sequence with the different modules and associated test functions available in the
T-BERD/MTS.

If a touchscreen is not available, to use the Fiber Characterization

Script function, external keyboard and mouse or screen deported on
PC are mandatory.

Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Inspect and clean connectors” on page 464
• “Connect the test modules to the MTAU” on page 464
• “Referencing the test functions” on page 466
• “Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode” on page 473
• “Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characteriza-
tion Script” on page 483
• “Results display and saving” on page 498

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 463

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Inspect and clean connectors

Inspect and clean connectors

Before connecting a fiber into a test module, inspect and clean the module bulkhead and
the fiber jumper connectors.
1 Connect the P5000i video inspection scope to both units USB port (any)
2 Press HOME hard key on the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2.
Press SYSTEM hard key on the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2.
3 Activate the Microscope function on both units by touching with your finger or
stylus. Touch the desired test f unction a second time to turn the icon yellow
.

4 Use the P5000i video inspection scope to verify the connector quality.
5 Use appropriate cleaning material (e.g. IBC™ cleaner, cotton swab, dust air
sprays, etc.) and re-inspect to confirm.

NOTE
See the user manual of the 8000 V2 or 6000A V2 Base-Unit for the P5000i
scope use.

Connect the test modules to the MTAU

To perform a a test sequence with the fiber characterization script, you must connect the
available plug-in modules to MTAU ports as follow:
• OTDR Module (Event characterization): PORT A
• ODM Module (Chromatic Dispersion / PMD / Attenuation profile): Port B
1 Connect the OTDR module to the MTAU port A with a short jumper.
2 Connect the ODM module to the MTAU port B with a short jumper

NOTE
Leave the port not connected if you don't have the associated test plug-in
module.

The Fiber Characterization function can be used:

464 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Connect the test modules to the MTAU

• in Unidirectional configuration

Figure 228 Interconnection - Unidirectional configuration

DISPAP (CD/PMD/AP)

MTAU 2: Multi-Test Access

unit allowing a single
connection/disconnection of

Fiber under test

OTDR module 1310/1550/1625 nm + FiberComplete (IL/ORL)

• in Bi-directional configuration, with one T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 at one end, and

one T-BERD/MTS 6000 at the other end.

Figure 229 Interconnection - Bi-directional configuration

Optical Talkset
Powermeter
VFL
Optical
DISPAP (CD/PMD/AP)
Talkset
OTDR module 1310/1550/
1625 nm + FiberComplete (IL/
8000 V2 Base Unit

ORL) + BBS (CD/PMD/AP)

MTAU 2
6000A V2

Fiber under test

OTDR module 1310/1550/1625 nm + FiberComplete (IL/ORL)

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 465

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Referencing the test functions

The test modules (OTDR, DISPAP) have to be located in the slots clos-
est to the mainframe. Keep the MTAU module at the back slots.

Referencing the test functions

The following test functions require REFERENCING before performing tests:
• FCOMP - Insertion Loss (IL) and Optical return Loss (ORL)
The IL/ORL Referencing is done to ensure that the IL and ORL of the fiber
jumpers are taken into account for an accurate qualification of the fiber to test.
• Chromatic Dispersion (CD), Attenuation Profile (AP)
The AP /CD referencing is done to ensure that the far end broadband source is
calibrated with the DISPAP module and the insertion loss of the fiber jumpers are
taken into account for an accurate qualification of the fiber to test.

NOTE
This measurement is a two ended test. Both T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 Platform
and Broadband Source (OBS Handheld or T-BERD/MTS including the BBS
capability) must be at the same location

Inspect and clean connectors

Before connecting a fiber into a test module, inspect and clean the module bulkhead and
the fiber jumper connectors.

Caution

• Use the P5000i video inspection scope to verify the connector quality.
• Use appropriate cleaning material (e.g. IBC™ cleaner, cotton swab, dust air
sprays, etc...) and re-inspect to confirm.

466 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Referencing the test functions

IL/ORL referencing

IL/ORL referencing with the integrated

FiberComplete® solution
1 Connect a fiber jumper to the MTAU COM port of T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 and one
to the test port of the module of the T-BERD/MTS 6000A.
Refer to Figure 229 on page 465 for proper module interconnections.
2 Press ON/OFF to turn both units on and wait the completion of auto-test (45 sec.).

Activate the FCOMP function on both units

1 Press the HOME hard key and light the icon .

2 Press the hard key RESULTS and touch the MTAU tab of the 8000 V2 unit.
3 Press the soft key until OUT A is selected on the 8000 V2 unit.

ORL and side by side IL Referencing

1 Touch the FCOMP tab.
2 Press the soft key References to enter the reference menu.
3 Press the soft key Take Refs in order to enter the referencing wizard.
4 Press Side/Side key to start referencing process for ORL and side by side Inser-
tion Loss.
5 When prompt, connect the test jumpers from the 8000V2 COM port to the main-
frame power meter and from the 6000 test module to mainframe power meter, as
shown below:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 467

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Referencing the test functions

Figure 230 IL Side by side measurement

6 Press OK to measure emitted power level.

7 When prompt, disconnect the test jumpers from the mainframe power meters and
connect the non-reflective terminator to the end of each test jumper, as shown
below (terminators located in the black plastic box)

Figure 231 Zero ORL Referencing

468 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Referencing the test functions

8 Press OK to perform zero ORL referencing.

9 Connect both jumpers together using the appropriate mating adapter. See below
the interconnection schematic.

Figure 232 IL Side by Side Referencing schematic

10 Press Ok to perform IL Referencing.

Perform ORL and Loopback IL Referencing

1 Touch the FCOMP tab.
2 Press the soft key References to enter the reference menu.
3 Press the soft key Take Refs in order to enter the referencing wizard.
4 Press Loopback to start referencing process for ORL and Insertion Loss
5 Repeat above steps 5 to 8 for loopback ORL/IL referencing.

AP and CD referencing with FC2 Test Kit

The referencing for AP and CD in bi-directional mode is performed with:
• one T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 at one side
• one T-BERD/MTS-6000A V2, with the E81x6C-FCHAR module and integrated
broadband source, at the other side.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 469

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Referencing the test functions

1 Connect a fiber jumper to the MTAU COM port of T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 and to
the test module of the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2.
2 Connect both jumpers together using the appropriate mating adapter.
See below the interconnection schematic.

Figure 233 Interconnection for CD/AP Referencing in Bidirectionnal mode

3 Press ON/OFF to turn both units on and wait the completion of auto-test (45 sec.)

Activate the CD or AP function on T-BERD/MTS 8000

V2
Once the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 is switched on:
1 On the Home page, select CD icon or AP icon .
2 Wait for the self calibration process of the DISPAP module (~1min.).
3 Press the hard key RESULTS and touch the MTAU tab.
4 Press the soft key until OUT B is selected

Activate the BBS Source on T-BERD/MTS 6000

Once the T-BERD/MTS 6000 is switched on:

470 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Referencing the test functions

1 On the Home page, select BBS icon .

2 Press RESULTS hard key.
3 Click on BBS tab.
4 Click on menu key to select CD or AP.
5 Press START/STOP hard key to activate the BBS.

Perform the CD/AP referencing on T-BERD/MTS

8000 V2
1 Click on CD or AP tab and press SETUP.
2 Click on Ref Acq. to enter in the reference menu.
3 Select Make Reference to Yes.
4 Press Yes to confirm making a new reference..
5 On the parameter BBS Serial Number, enter the BBS module serial number
using the numerical keyboard and validate.

NOTE
The serial number is displayed in the About page of the Platform (HOME >
About).

6 Press the soft key to exit the reference menu.

7 Press START/STOP hard key to reference

AP and CD referencing with FC1 Test Kit

The referencing for AP and CD in unidirectional mode is performed with:
• one T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 at one side
• one OBS5x0 at the other side.
1 Connect a fiber jumper to the MTAU COM port of T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 and to
the OBS5x0.
2 Connect both jumpers together using the appropriate mating adapter.
See below the interconnection schematic.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 471

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Referencing the test functions

Figure 234 Interconnection for Referencing in Unidirectionnal mode

3 Press the hard key ON/OFF on both the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 and the OBS5x0
unit

Activate the AP/CD function on the T-BERD/MTS

8000 V2
1 Press the hard key HOME and light the icon / with your
finger or stylus.
Wait for the tuning process of the DISPAP module (~1min.)
2 Press the hard key RESULTS and touch the MTAU tab
3 Press the soft key until OUT B is selected

Activate the AP/CD mode of the OBS5x0

1 Press the Application hard key until the AP/CD LED is lighted.

2 Press Output hard key to activate the BBS .

472 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

Perform the AP / CD referencing on the T-BERD/MTS

8000 V2
1 Touch the AP / CD tab and press the hard key.
2 Press the soft key Acq. Ref. to enter the reference menu.
3 Select Make Reference to Yes.
4 Press Yes to confirm making a new reference.
5 Drop down using the navigation keys, or touch the BBS Serial Number param-
eter, and enter the OBS5x0 serial number using numerical keyboard and press
Enter.

NOTE
The serial number can be found at the back of the OBS5x0 handheld.

6 Press the soft key Close Ref. Menu to exit the reference menu.
7 Press the START/STOP hard key to reference.

Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual

mode
There are two modes of performing a Fiber characterization in manual mode:
• In Unidirectional mode: one OTDR measurement is performed in one way (A ->
B), using 1 x 8000 + OBS.
• In bi-directional mode: the OTDR measurement is performed in the two directions
(A -> B and B -> A), with addition of bi-directional IL/ORL using 1 x 8000 + 1 x
6000.

Fiber Characterization with FC1 Test Kit

(Unidirectional)
Once the necessary referencing measurements have been done, a fiber characteriza-
tion can be performed, in manual mode, using a T-BERD 8000 V2 at one end and an
OBS 5x at the other end.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 473

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

The Insertion Loss (IL), the Optical return Loss (ORL), the Chromatic Dispersion (CD)
and the Attenuation Profile (AP) measurements have to be referenced before starting
testing.

Please refer to chapter “AP and CD referencing with FC1 Test Kit” on page 471 for the
associated procedures

Getting started with the "Link Characterization"

Script
1 Press the SCRIPT hard key or press the icon .on the Home page.
2 Drop down using the navigation keys or touch to select the
"Link characterization" script.
3 Press the soft key Play to launch the script process.

Define the Test Setup

The available test functions are listed in black in Test Setup window.

Check marked the square button for each test function to be added in the test sequence.
(Button becoming red).
• Connector Inspection: Available if video inspection scope is connected to the
mainframe. The script will open up the connector image viewer.
• OTDR: The script will use the wavelengths defined in the OTDR test Setup and
measurements will be performed using Automatic configuration.
• CD (PS): Chromatic Dispersion measurement. It requires the use of the OBS
handheld or the selection of the BBS on the other T-BERD 8000 script configura-
tion menu.
• PMD: PMD measurement. It requires the use of the OBS handheld or the selec-
tion of the BBS on the other T-BERD 800 script configuration menu.
• AP: Attenuation Profile measurement. It requires the use of the OBS handheld or
the selection of the BBS on the other T-BERD 8000 script configuration menu.

Define the Job Type

The Job Type enables to define how the product is going to organize the results and
what type of characterization test sequence is performed.

Check marked the square button for each type (button becoming red).

474 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

• Cable commissioning: is used for testing an entire cable. The script will save all
the test results and the summary report into one directory, and for all the fibers.
The directory will be created using the Cable ID as the name. This directory will
be located under the current selected directory. Make sure the selected directory
is the root hard disk or a well known one. Press the System hard key and the File
hard key to get access to the Explorer in order to change the directory selection.
• Fiber Span testing: is used for few fiber testing. The script will save the test
results of one fiber and the report summary into one directory. Each fiber will have
its own directory. The directory will be created using the FiberID and the Fiber #,
as the name. This directory will be located under the current selected directory.
• Uni-directional Testing: defines the script sequence when only one T-BERD
8000 is used in conjunction with a handheld OBS 5x0 at the far end.

Define the Link Description

The Link Description enables to document the information, related to the link being
tested.

Fill-in all the information using the USB key board: Local Cable Id / Local Fiber Id /
Origin & End Location / Job Ticket.
• Rate: select the expected bit rate in the drop down menu. This will pre-define the
alarm thresholds for CD and PMD testing.
• Add a Comment which will be loaded into each test application and save with
each test results.
• Define the Local Fiber # of your fiber under test.
Set the Direction of the measurement between A->B and B->A (Origin and
End).
If the Origin fiber number or cable Id is different from the far end, check
mark Different extremities in order to have access to the local and distant
information using the Settings: Local / Distant soft key.

Configuring the “Results” Summary table

This summary table enables to review selected values at the end of the test sequence.
A Pass/Fail status is associated to the table.
1 Press softkey Select Results to Display to access the list.
2 Highlight one parameter in the column Available results.
3 Press the soft key Add Result in order to select the parameter and see it in the
column Results to display.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 475

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you have selected all the parameters. Maximum 7.
5 Press the soft key Validate in order to acknowledge the selection.

Figure 235 Summary table contents

6 Press Exit to return to Fiber Characterization screen.

Start the test sequence

When the script configuration is done, you can start the test sequence.
1 Press the Start soft key when ready.
2 Follow the step by step guidances to conduct the link characterization sequence.
a Press Yes to Start a SM-OTDR test. (This will start a 1310/1550/1625 nm
OTDR test).
b When asked to "CHECK PMD SOURCE", contact far end of fiber under test
and connect OBS-550/500 light source. Turn light source on, ensure BB
mode of operation, PMD mode and press activate. Red light will come on
indicating light source is active.
c Press Yes to continue PMD test.
d Upon completion of PMD test, instruct tech at far end to press AP mode of
operation on light source.
e Press Yes to continue AP test.
f Upon completion of AP test, instruct tech at far end to press CD mode of
operation on light source.

476 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

g Press Yes to continue CD test.

After completion of CD test, Result screen appears.

Figure 236 Results screen with FC1 Test Kit

If more fibers are to be tested press Yes and fiber number automatically increments.

If no more fiber is to be tested press No and a summary of the results is visible.

1 Press soft key Exit to exit the link characterization script.

NOTE
To see details of the tests, press RESULTS hard key and Application soft key
at the bottom of the on-screen.

OBS-500/550 LightSource Operation for Fiber

Characterization Testing
1 Press the Power button to turn on.
2 Using the MODE button to select BB(1).
3 When instructed by the technician performing the tests, using the Application
button ensure PMD light is green.
4 Under Output press the button to activate the source.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 477

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

When directed by the testing technician, using the Application button ensure AP light
is green, then CD.

NOTE
OBS-550 has HD mode which is High dynamic mode. By selecting HD
mode, the EDFA amplifier built into the light source is engaged and the out-
put power increases substantially. In addition, the spectral range of the light
source goes from 1460-1640 to 1530-1565 nm.

Fiber Characterization with FC2 Test Kit (Bi-dir.)

Once the necessary referencing measurements have been performed, a fiber charac-
terization can be performed, in manual mode, using a T-BERD 8000 V2 at one end and
a T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2 at the other end, or using two T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2.

Activating the test functions on T-BERD/MTS 8000

V2
1 Press the HOME hard key on the 8000 V2
2 Activate test functions: select the function to activate by touching with your finger
or stylus.
Touch the desired test function a second time to turn the icon yellow.
3 Activate 6 test functions:

Activating the test functions on T-BERD/MTS 6000A

V2
1 Press the hard key SYSTEM on the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2
2 Activate 2 test functions / :
Select the function to activate by touching with your finger or stylus.
Touch the desired test function a second time to turn the icon yellow.

Creating the storage directory

1 Press the FILE hard key.
2 Drop down using the navigation keys or use a pointer to highlight an existing
folder. All files from all test functions will be saved to this folder going forward.

478 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

If a new folder is needed, go to step 3, else go to next section.

3 Highlight desired main folder. Press the soft key Create Directory to create a
sub-directory.
A virtual keyboard will appear to allow you to input a new folder name. Alterna-
tively, you can connect a USB keyboard to input the name.

NOTE
You must name the folder after your site name (ex: Jones, MSC, Valley View,
etc).

4 Once the folder name is input, press Enter to validate and create.
5 All test files will be saved into this directory, unless a new one is created or the
selection of the target directory changes.

NOTE
It is not mandatory to create a subdirectory as the script automatically cre-
ates one at the start of the test sequence.

Setting the test parameters

Setting the Fiber Complete (FCOMP) test parameters on

both units

1 Go to the FCOMP tab

2 Press the SETUP key to get access to the setup menu
3 Configure the FCOMP Setup parameters as below:

Figure 237 FiberComplete setup

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 479

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

Setting the OTDR test parameters on both units

1 Go to the SM-OTDR tab.

2 Press the soft key Alarms.
3 Select Alarm level to Fail
4 Set the thresholds to Default or define your own criteria (see Figure 243 on
page 488).

Setting the PMD test parameters on T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to the PMD tab

2 Press the soft key Test Auto.
3 Under the ‘Display’ section, tap “Alarms” field and define the transmission bit
rate

Figure 238 PMD Alarm configuration

Setting the AP test parameters on T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to the AP tab
2 Press the soft key Test Auto

Setting the CD test parameters on T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to the CD tab
2 Press the soft key Test Auto
3 Under the Display section:
– tap Alarms field and define the transmission bit rate:
– tap Wavelength Range field and set as below:

480 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

Figure 239 Alarms and Wavelength range configuration

Defining the filenaming and fiber description

1 Go to the FCOMP tab
2 Press the FILE hard key
3 If needed, press soft key Explorer/Setup to toggle to Setup
4 Configure your File storage mechanism

For ‘Filenaming’, define your desired string, example: [Orig-

in_Id]_[End_Id]_[Fiber_Id]_[Fiber_Num]

Press the soft key Copy Setup To all in order to update all the test functions
(OTDR, CD, PMD, AP) with this filenaming information.

Starting a test sequence

1 Inspect and clean connectors of the fiber link to measure using the P5000i
inspection scope
2 Connect the fiber under test to each patchcord (one connected to the TB8000
COM port of the MTAU module and one connected the 6000A module C)

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to MTAU tab and select Out A .

2 Press the RESULTS hard key
3 Go to the FCOMP tab and press the START/STOP button to start the measurement
sequence

NOTE
IL, ORL and bidirectional OTDR measurements are triggered under FCOMP.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 481

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Test Sequence in Manual mode

4 Wait for the completion of FCOMPand OTDR testRed Testing light turns off.
5 Go to MTAU tab and select Out B .

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A

1 Press the SYSTEM hard key to go to the Home page and activate the BBS function
2 Press the RESULTS hard key
3 Touch the BBS tab
4 Touch the soft key Source Off/Source On to turn the source on
5 Touch the softkey CD/PMD/AP to position the test mode as CD

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to CD tab and press the START/STOP button to start the measurement

sequence.
2 Test is complete when the red Testing light turns off.

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A

1 Touch the softkey CD/PMD/AP to position the test mode as PMD

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to PMD tab and press the START/STOP button to start the measurement
sequence.
2 Test is complete when the red Testing light turns off.

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

1 Touch the softkey CD/PMD/AP to position the test mode as AP.

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to AP tab and press the START/STOP button to start the measurement

sequence

Test is complete when the red Testing light turns off.

482 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

All measurements are completed FOR THIS FIBER

Testing next fiber

Before testing next fiber, make sure the fiber description (fiber num-
ber, location…) has been correctly setup in the FiberComplete FILE
setup page and copied to all.

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Go to MTAU tab and select Out A

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

1 Press the SYSTEM hard key on the 6000A

2 Activate 2 test functions: /
3 Repeat steps 1 to 20 above.

Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence

using the Link Characterization Script

Fiber Characterization with FC1 Test Kit

(Unidirectional)
Once the referencing measurements have been done, a fiber characterization test can
be performed, using a T-BERD 8000 V2 at one end and a OBS5x0 at the other end.

Selecting data storage directory

1 Press the FILE hardkey.
2 Press File/Explorer softkey to select the "Explorer" page.
3 Using the navigation keys or touchscreen, on the left side of the screen, select
the main or sub directory where you wish to store files, typically the "Hard Disk".
4 If necessary, create a new directory to store the results: see “Creating the storage
directory” on page 478.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 483

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Launching the Link Characterization script

1 Press the SCRIPT hard key on the 8000 V2
2 Select the function Scripts > Link Characterization using touchscreen or stylus

3 Press the soft key Launch to enter the script configuration menu..

Configuring the Test Setup

The available test functions are listed in black in Test Setup window
1 Check the test functions to include in the characterization sequence as follow

Figure 240 Test sequence configuration on 8000 V2

Configuring the Job Type & Link Description

The Job Type window enables to define how the product is going to organize the results
and what type of characterization test sequence is performed.

The Link Description window enables to document the information, related to the link
being tested.
1 Check Fiber Span testing is defined in Job Type parameter.
2 Enter Link Description on both units

Make sure they are both identical for test documentation consistency.

484 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Figure 241 Link Description parameters

Enter Cable/Link Id
Enter Fiber
Enter Fiber information number
Enter both end Select bit
locations rate in drop
Add job/work# info. & down list
comments if required

NOTE
All test files will be saved into the directory automatically created as per
[Local Fiber Id] [Local Fiber #].

Configuring the “Results” Summary table

This summary table enables to review selected values at the end of the test sequence.
A Pass/Fail status is associated to the table.
1 Press softkey Select Results to Display to access the list.
2 Highlight one parameter in the column Available results.
3 Press the soft key Add Result in order to select the parameter and see it in the
column Results to display.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you have selected all the parameters. Maximum 7.
5 Press the soft key Validate in order to acknowledge the selection.
See Figure 235 on page 476
6 Press Exit to return to Fiber Characterization screen.

Starting a test sequence

When the script configuration is done, you can start the test sequence.
1 Press the Start soft key when ready.
2 Follow the step by step guidances to conduct the link characterization sequence.
a Press Yes to Start a SM-OTDR test. (This will start a 1310/1550/1625 nm
OTDR test).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 485

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

b When asked to “CHECK PMD SOURCE”, contact far end user to connect
OBS-550/500 light source. Turn light source on, ensure BB mode of opera-
tion, and set for PMD mode and press Activate. Red light will turn on indi-
cating source is active.
c Press Yes to continue PMD test.
Upon completion of PMD test, instruct user at far end to press AP mode of opera-
tion on light source.
d Press Yes to continue AP test.
Upon completion of AP test, instruct user at far end to press CD mode of opera-
tion on light source.
e Press Yes to continue CD test.
Upon completion of CD test, Result screen appears.
3 If more fibers are to be tested press Yes and fiber number automatically incre-
ments.
If no more fiber is to be tested press No and a summary of the results is visible.
4 Press soft key Exit to exit the link characterization script.

To see details of the tests, press RESULTS hard key and application soft key at the bottom
of the on-screen.

Fiber Characterization with datalink

Once the referencing measurements have been done, a fiber characterization can be
performed, in an automatic mode, using a T-BERD 8000 V2 at one end and a T-BERD/
MTS 6000A V2 at the other end.

Connecting the Optical Talkset and Datalink

1 Connect the optical talkset port of each mainframe (labeled “TS”) using a spare
fiber.
2 When both units are connected, press HOME on the 8000 V2 unit
3 Select the function to activate by touching with your finger or stylus.
4 Touch a second time to turn the icon yellow .

486 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

NOTE
The far end 6000A Datalink icon will turn yellow when connection is estab-
lished. Both units will beep to confirm.

NOTE
You can use the optical talkset simultaneously to talk through the spare fiber.

Figure 242 Talkset and Datalink connection

Optical Datalink Connection with spare fiber
Talkset
Powermeter Optical
VFL Talkset
DISPAP (CD/PMD/AP) Powermeter
OTDR module 1310/1550/ VFL
1625 nm + FiberComplete (IL/
ORL) + BBS (CD/PMD/AP)
8000 V2

MTAU 4: Multi-Test Access unit

allowing a single connection/
disconnection of the fiber under
test for multiple measurements
6000A

Fiber under test

OTDR module 1310/1550/1625 nm + FiberComplete (IL/ORL)

5 Activate the function

Setting the OTDR/IL/ORL Pass/Fail criteria

If it has not already been done, the alarm parameters must be configured for OTDR and
IL/ORL.

NOTE
You don’t need to go through this step if the pass/fail criteria had previously
been loaded.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 487

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

1 Press the SETUP hard key on both units

2 Go to the FCOMP tab on both units
3 Configure the FCOMP Thresholds parameters as Default or enter your own
criteria
4 Go to the SM-OTDR tab on both units
5 Press the soft key Alarms
6 Select Alarm level to “Fail”
7 Set the thresholds to Default or define your own criteria

Figure 243 OTDR Alarms - Default and User

Selecting data storage directory

1 Press the FILE hardkey.
2 Press File/Explorer softkey to select the "Explorer" page.
3 Using the navigation keys or touchscreen, on the left side of the screen, select
the main or sub directory where you wish to store files, typically the "Hard Disk".
4 If necessary, create a new directory to store the results: see “Creating the storage
directory” on page 478.

Launching the Link Characterization script

1 Press the SCRIPT hard key on the 8000 V2 and 6000A units
2 Select the function Scripts > Link Characterization using touchscreen or stylus

3 Press the soft key Launch to enter the script configuration menu.

488 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Configuring the test sequence

Check the test functions to include in the characterization sequence as follow

Configuring the test sequence on the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

Figure 244 Test sequence configuration on 8000 V2

Configuring the test sequence on the T-BERD/MTS 6000A

V2

Figure 245 Test sequence configuration on 6000A

To perform the characterization with automatic method, check the parameter Full auto
test (Datalink) is selected on both units.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 489

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Configuring the Job Type & Link Description

1 Check Fiber Span testing is defined in Job Type parameter.
2 Enter Link Description on both units

Figure 246 Link Description parameters

Enter Cable/Link Id
Enter Fiber
Enter Fiber information number
Enter both end Select bit
locations rate in drop
Add job/work# info. & down list
comments if required

Make sure they are both identical for test documentation consistency.

All test files will be saved into the directory automatically created as
per [Local Fiber Id] [Local Fiber #] if fiber span, and [Local Cable_Id] if
cable commision.

Configuring the “Results” Summary table

This summary table enables to review selected values at the end of the test sequence.
A Pass/Fail status is associated to the table.
1 Press softkey Select Results to Display to access the list.
2 Highlight one parameter in the column Available results.
3 Press the soft key Add Result in order to select the parameter and see it in the
column Results to display.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you have selected all the parameters. Maximum 7.
5 Press the soft key Validate in order to acknowledge the selection.
See Figure 235 on page 476.
6 Press Exit to return to Fiber Characterization screen.

490 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Starting a test sequence

1 Press the soft key Start on both units
A message Waiting for Datalink initialisation... is displayed
while both units are communicating to each others in order to synchronize the test
sequence.
2 Inspect and clean connectors of the fiber to test using the P5000i inspection
scope on both ends when the inspection page appears.
3 Connect the fiber under test to each patchcord (one connected to the TB8000
COM port of the MTAU module and one connected the 6000A module C).
4 Press the SCRIPT hard key on both units to continue with the test sequence.

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 The message displays until the green link

between both test sets is displayed.

NOTE
The test set will start the test sequence automatically. Do not press the Yes /
No keys.

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

1 The following message appears while the 8000 V2 test is in progress:

DO NOT click Stop until the 8000 V2 notifies test is completed.

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 The message to start PMD/CD/AP measurements display.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 491

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Measurement will start automatically,, when the far end BBS is on.
2 Press No when message prompt appears to stop
testing.
3 Notify the far end user to do the same.

Testing next fiber

Before testing next fiber, make sure the fiber description (fiber num-
ber, location…) has been correctly setup in the Link Characterization
Script setup page.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 9 to test the next fiber

Users can press Yes when the message prompts to

sequence a new test with consecutive fiber number..

Fiber Characterization - No datalink

Once the referencing measurements have been done, a fiber characterization can be
performed, in a semi automatic mode, using a T-BERD 8000 V2 at one end and a T-
BERD/MTS 6000A V2 at the other end, or using two T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2.

Setting the OTDR/IL/ORL Pass/Fail criteria

If it has not already been done, the alarm parameters must be configured for OTDR and
IL/ORL.

NOTE
You don’t need to go through this step if the pass/fail criteria had previously
been loaded.

1 Press the SETUP hard key on both units

2 Go to the FiberComplete tab on both units
3 Configure the FCOMP Thresholds parameters as Default or enter your own
criteria

492 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

4 Go to the SM-OTDR tab on both units

5 Press the soft key Alarms
6 Select Alarm level to “Fail”
7 Set the thresholds to Default or define your own criteria

Figure 247 OTDR Alarms - Default and User

Selecting data storage directory

1 Press the FILE hardkey.
2 Press File/Explorer softkey to select the "Explorer" page.
3 Using the navigation keys or touchscreen, on the left side of the screen, select
the main or sub directory where you wish to store files, typically the "Hard Disk".
4 If necessary, create a new directory to store the results: see “Creating the storage
directory” on page 478.

Launching the Link Characterization script

1 Press the SCRIPT hard key on the 8000 V2 and 6000A units
2 Select the function Script > Link Characterization using touchscreen or stylus.

3 Press the soft key Launch to enter the script configuration menu.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 493

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Configuring the test sequence

Check the test functions to include in the characterization sequence as follow

Configuring the test sequence on the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

Figure 248 Test sequence configuration on 8000 V2

Configuring the test sequence on the T-BERD/MTS 6000A

V2

Figure 249 Test sequence configuration on 6000A

To perform the characterization with semi-automatic method, check the parameter Full
auto test (Datalink) is not selected on both units.

494 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Configuring the Job Type & Link Description

1 Check Fiber Span testing is defined in Job Type parameter.
2 Enter Link Description on both units

Figure 250 Link Description parameters

Enter Cable/Link Id
Enter Fiber
Enter Fiber information number
Enter both end Select bit
locations rate in drop
Add job/work# info. & down list
comments if required

Make sure they are both identical for test documentation consistency.

All test files will be saved into the directory automatically created as
per [Local Fiber Id] [Local Fiber #] if fiber span, and [Local Cable_Id] if
cable commision.

Configuring the “Results” Summary table

This summary table enables to review selected values at the end of the test sequence.
A Pass/Fail status is associated to the table.
1 Press the softkey Select Results to Display to access the selection list.
2 Highlight one parameter in the column .
3 Press the soft key Add Result in order to select the parameter and see it in the
column .
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you have selected all the parameters. Maximum 7.
5 Press the soft key Validate in order to acknowledge the selection.
See Figure 235 on page 476.
6 Press Exit to return to Fiber Characterization screen.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 495

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

Starting a test sequence

1 Press the soft key Start on both units
2 When message Do you want to start measurement from your site?
appears, click Yes on the 8000 and No on the 6000A
3 Inspect and clean connectors of the fiber to test using the P5000i inspection
scope on both ends when the inspection page appears
4 Connect the fiber under test to each patchcord (one connected to the TB8000
COM port of the MTAU module and one connected the 6000A module C)
5 Press the SCRIPT hard key on both units to continue with the test sequence

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

6 Press Yes to the message when the green link
between both test sets is displayed.
IL, ORL and bidirectional OTDR measurements are performed under FCOMP

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

7 The following message appears while the 8000 V2 test is in progress:

DO NOT click until the 8000 V2 notifies test is completed.

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

1 Notify 6000A user when the prompt appears but DO NOT
press Yes until far end user confirmed PMD source function is activated

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

2 When notified by the 8000 V2user, press OK button to continue
3 Touch the softkey to position the test mode as PMD
4 Notify the far end user

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

5 Press Yes to the message to start PMD measurement
6 Notify 6000A user when the prompt appears but DO NOT
press Yes until far end user confirmed AP source function is activated

496 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Fiber Characterization Automated Test Sequence using the Link Characterization Script

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

7 When notified by the 8000 V2 user, touch the softkey to position the test
mode as AP
8 Notify the far end user

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

9 Press Yes to the message to start AP measurement
10 Notify 6000A user when the prompt appears but DO NOT
press Yes until far end user confirmed CD source function is activated

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

11 When notified by the 8000 V2 user, touch the softkey to position the test
mode as CD
12 Notify the far end user

On the T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2

13 Press Yes to the message to start CD measurement
14 Press No when message prompt appears to stop
testing
15 Notify the far end user

On the T-BERD/MTS 6000A V2

16 When notified by the 8000 user, press .
17 Press No when message prompt appears to stop
testing

Testing next fiber

Before testing next fiber, make sure the fiber description (fiber num-
ber, location…) has been correctly setup in the Link Characterization
Script setup page.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 24 to test the next fiber

Users can press Yes when the message prompts to sequence

a new test with consecutive fiber number..

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 497

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Results display and saving

Results display and saving

Once all the measurements are performed, the result table is displayed

Figure 251 Fiber Characterization Results Table

The results summary is filled in with the last 5 fiber measurements and the user can
scroll up and down to view the other fibers tested.

The data are automatically saved in one directory.

Figure 252 Directory automatically generated

All raw OTDR, CD, PMD and AP traces are saved (5 per fiber: 1310 OTDR, 1550 OTDR,
PMD, CD and AP files).

The test set automatically creates a *.txt file which saves Loss, ORL, OTDR, CD, PMD
and AP results in pre-formatted columns. This file can be opened on a PC with a spread-
sheet program (e.g. ExcelTM...).

498 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Results display and saving

Figure 253 Example of txt file opened via Excel

Job Information

OTDR Results

CD Results

PMD Results

AP Results

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 499

Chapter 17 Fiber Characterization
Results display and saving

500 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 18
Chapter 18 OFI Module
This chapter describes the functions of the OFI module (Optical Fiber Installation) and
its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “OFI module” on page 502
• “Selection of the OFI module” on page 502
• “LTS function” on page 502
• “FOX Function” on page 510
• “Manual ORL” on page 521
• “Generating a pdf report” on page 523
• “File Management” on page 526

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 501

Chapter 18 OFI Module
OFI module

OFI module
The OFI module is used to make insertion loss measurements, ORL measurements and
distance measurements. The following functions are available with the OFI Module:
• Loss Test Set
• FOX (Fiber Optic eXpert)
• ORL (Optical Return Loss)

Selection of the OFI module

1 Push the HOME button.
2 Select the icon and to start the LTS function,
Select the icon to start the FOX function,
Select the icon to start the ORL function.

LTS function

Connections to the power meter and the source

The type of optical connector used for the power meter is UPP (Universal Push Pull),
which is compatible with all diameter 2.5 mm connectors (FC, SC, ST, DIN, E2000, etc.).

Figure 254 Optical connectors

FOX connector

Power meter connector

NOTE
The source connection is the same as the FOX port.

502 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
LTS function

Configuring the LTS

To activate the function:
1 Press the SYSTEM button.
2 Validate the Powermeter icon and the Source icon .

The effect of this action will be to bring the power meter and source into use.

Figure 255 Configuration of power measurement

See OTDR Setup:

“Configuring the Link
parameters” on
page 43

See OTDR Setup: “Configuring the

File parameters” on page 48

Configuring the alarm parameters

Alarm Activation of the Alarm function : any result below the lower
threshold or above the upper threshold will be displayed in red on the
Results page.
Lower and upper thresholds
Choice of lower and upper thresholds for each available wavelength,
from -60 to +40 dBm.

NOTE
To copy one value of the Lower or/and Upper threshold for all wavelengths,
select the reference value and click Update for All Wavel..

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 503

Chapter 18 OFI Module
LTS function

NOTE
A continuous push on the direction keys, increments the value by 10 dBm.

Configuring the Measurement parameters

In the Setup page, press Measur’t soft key (if one parameter is selected in the current
screen, press Top Menu soft key to display the right menu keys and click
Wavelength Selecting wavelength:
- Auto: the wavelength of the input signal will be automatically
detected and selected to perform the measurement.
850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1420, 1450, 1480, 1490, 1510, 1550 or 1625
nm: measurement performed at specified wavelength.
- User: choice of wavelength on the next line in the menu.
User choice (if the User option was selected in the Lambda line) selection of the
wavelength between 800 nm and 1650 nm, in 1 nm steps, by means
of the direction keys and .
Beep on modulation
Select whether a sound must be emitted or not when a modulation
occurs (Yes / No).
Unit Unit of power displayed:
- Watt, dBm for displaying absolute power
- dB for displaying a result relative to a reference (link loss)
Reference level
If dB units were chosen in the previous line, selection of the refer-
ence value for the wavelength selected. Using the direction keys,
first choose the wavelength, then press the > key to access choice of
the value (+XXX.XX), then confirm this value with the validation
key .
This reference is also automatically available, in the Results page, using the Set
as Reference key.
Attenuator compensation
Choice of level to be applied to the wavelength chosen for measure-
ment to compensate for the loss due to the external attenuator
(+XX.XX dB). First use the direction keys to choose the wavelength,
then press > to access choice of value, then confirm this value by
pressing the validation key .

504 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
LTS function

NOTE
To copy a Reference Level or a Attenuator Compensator on all wavelengths,
select the reference wavelength and click on Update for All Wavel..

Configuring and displaying the parameters of the

source

Figure 256 Source configuration

Source

When the laser is on, the icon is displayed.

The parameters of the source can be accessed directly on the results screen of the LTS
module, by pressing the Source Configuration soft key.
Wavelength To change the wavelength when a multi-wavelength source
is present (depending on option).
The wavelength value is displayed.
Mode To vary the mode of emission of the source. Possible modulation
values are:
270 Hz
330 Hz
1 kHz
2 kHz

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 505

Chapter 18 OFI Module
LTS function

Auto (the sources emit on determined frequencies to enable the power

meter to detect the wavelength used automatically)
Twintest (cyclical emission on all available wavelengths for a few seconds
on each wavelength), compatible with the VIAVI OLP 5/6/15/16/18.
CW (continuous emission)
The mode used is displayed, above the icon .
PowerIn CW mode: You can choose the emitted power:
- either the nominal value: -3.5 dB
- or an attenuation of -3 or -6 dBm, with regard to this nominal value, to get
a power of 6.5 dBm or of 9.5 dBm.
For all the other modes (270Hz / 330Hz / 1kHz / 2 kHz / Auto / Twintest),
select one of the following emitted power: -12.5 , -9.5, -6.5 dBm.
Source Reference
Allows to access to the Standard Ref. menu key, to perform the
standard reference of the source.

Display of results and command

The results page called up by the RESULTS button, gives the information relating to the
measurement in progress, results previously saved and the commands available for
measurement and saving.

Result of the measurement in progress

The power measured by the power meter is displayed in large characters, in the units
selected in the SETUP menu, together with:
• the mode of transmission of the signal measured: continuous (CW) or modulated
to a frequency of 270Hz, 330Hz, 1KHz, or 2KHz.
• the wavelength of the signal measured.
• the reference level expressed in dB.
• the level of Attenuation Compensation.

Table of results
For one and the same fiber, the power meter displays a table of 9 results corresponding
to the different possible wavelengths. The table shows the power measured in dBm, the
relative power (in dB) and the reference level in dBm (if units = dB), together with the
mode.

506 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
LTS function

A measurement result is displayed in the table when the Keep Result softkey is
pressed.

The Clear Table softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table.

If the Alarm function has been activated, any result that exceeds the selected thresholds
appears in red in the table. Otherwise, results are shown in the table in green.

When the instrument is switched off, results present in the table are saved.

Figure 257 Results and commands of the LTS

Results
of the
power meter

Commands
When the LTS function is selected, the following softkeys are available on the results
page:
Source Config. See “Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source” on
page 505
Powermeter Config.
– Wavelength: Modify the signal wavelength
– Unit: Modify the unit selected
– Zero: Adjustment of the Zero value when the power meter’s optical input is
closed with a plug..

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 507

Chapter 18 OFI Module
LTS function

Power Ref
– Set as reference
Selects the current result as reference value to measure the attenuation of
a link. This reference is displayed under the measurement result until a new
reference value is chosen.
Keep Result Saves the result on the corresponding line of the table.
Clear Table Deletes all the results recorded in the table.

Making a measurement
The power meter is started up as soon as the function is activated in the Home
page.

NOTE
Power measurement is automatically updated in consequence. The value
«<-60 dB» is displayed when the laser is switched off and if the source out-
put is looped on to the power meter input.
If the OFI module’s source is used, the START/STOP key must be used to start or stop
emission of light.

Power measurement
1 Connect the light source to be tested to the rear connector (see “Connections to
the power meter and the source” on page 502).
2 In the SETUP menu, choose the units dBm, dB or Watts.
3 Press the START/STOP key to start the laser.
The result will appear in the results page and can be memorized in the table (see
“Table of results” on page 506).
4 Press the START/STOP key to stop the laser.

508 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
LTS function

Optical link loss

Setting the zero value of the power meter

It is important to set the zero of the power meter before making any mea-
surements where accuracy is required, as the noise from the photodiode
fluctuates over time and with variations in temperature.

1 Fix the plug over the optical input of the power meter so that no light can reach
the photodiode of the power meter. If the zero adjustment is made without this
plug, an error message may be displayed, as the photodiode will detect too much
light.
2 In the Results page, press the Zero soft key.

Carrying out the reference measurement

1 Fix the adapter corresponding to the jumper to the optical connector of the power
meter.
2 Connect the jumper between the input of the power meter and the output of the
source.
3 Configure the same wavelength on the source and the power meter.
The power measured is displayed in the results page of the LTS.
4 Press Set as Reference to save the result displayed as reference value.

Measurements on the fiber under test

After defining the reference value, proceed as follows to make the measurement:
1 Fix the jumpers and connectors needed to connect the fiber to be tested between
the source output and the power meter input.
2 In the set-up menu, select dB units.
3 The power displayed in the Power Meter window corresponds to the optical loss
of the link tested. It can be displayed in the table (see “Table of results” on
page 506).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 509

Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

FOX1 Function
The FOX function is used to make automatic, bidirectional optical power measurements
and / or ORL measurements at one or several wavelengths. This function is also used
to make a distance measurement of the link under test.
Two MTS 8000 are required, each one equipped with an OFI module at each end of the
fiber.
The OFI module 81xx is also compatible with the OFI-2000.
With the FOX function, the two MTS 8000s can communicate and send messages to
each other.

Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement

Two types of parameters can be modified in the FOX configuration of the OFI.
• The Acquisition parameters
• The results screen parameters.

Figure 258 FOX parameters

Acquisition parameters
Laser All / 1550 / 1310 / 1625 / 1550 + 1310 / 1550 + 1625 / 1310 + 1625
Measurements Loss / Loss + ORL / Loss + Length / Loss + ORL + Length

NOTE
The acquisition and measurement parameters can change according to the
OFI plug-in used.

1.Fiber Optic eXpert

510 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

Results screen parameters

Index Of Refraction

Preset Index 1550 SM

User from 1.30000 to 1.70000
Corning SMF-28 1.46810
Lucent Truewave 1.47320
SpecTran SM 1.46810
Litespec 1.46700
ATT SM 1.46700
Fitel Furukawa 1.47000
Corning SMF-DS 1.47110
Corning SMF-LS 1.47000
Corning Leaf 1.46840
E-SMF 1.46450

Unit km / kfeet / miles

Alarms No
Active: used to set alarms.
– Loss: enter the loss threshold for each wavelength (in dB).
– ORL: enter an ORL threshold for each wavelength (in dB).
– Delay: enter a delay time (in µs).
– Length: indicative value, changes according to the delay time and the fiber
index.

To change the alarms values, use the direction keys and or the numeric keypad.

File Storage parameters

Filenaming[ Cable_Id][Fiber_Num][Fiber_Code]
Auto Store Yes (cannot be modified)
Fiber Nbr Increment Yes (cannot be modified)

In the FOX function:

• the measurement results are automatically saved

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 511

Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

• the fiber number is automatically incremented.

To display the fiber to be tested, push the START/STOP button in the results page of the
FOX function (see “Choosing the fiber to be tested” on page 517).

Establishing a reference
Before making a power, a ORL and / or distance measurement with the FOX function of
the OFI module , you have to take references.
1 On the RESULTS page, push the References button.

Different references can be taken:

• For a loss measurement
– Side by Side reference
– Loopback reference
• For an ORL measurement
– Power emitted reference
– Zero ORL

NOTE
As the ORL is an option, establishing a reference for this measurement is not
automatically available with the OFI module.

Establishing a reference for loss measurement

Before any measurement, you must establish references.

Two methods can be used to take references: taking a side by side reference and taking
the reference in a loop-back mode.

Taking a side by side reference

NOTE
This reference can only be performed when the two MTS 8000 are at the
same location.

512 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

1 On the RESULTS page, push the References key.

2 Push the Loss Side/Side key.
3 Link the FOX connectors of the two MTS 8000s by using two jumpers.
4 Push on Go key.

Figure 259 Taking a side by side reference (8000 V2 series example)

Reference date.
Type & serial number
of the distant
instrument

Once the references are taken, the reference screen is updated for the wave-
lengths available on the distant instrument. It indicates the type of reference
used.
The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the distant
instrument are indicated on the first line of the table.

If the reference is correct, disconnect the jumpers at the middle point, in order to insert
the fiber to be tested.

If the reference taken is not correct, take a new reference.

If the reference measurements are too weak, a warning is displayed.

Clean all connections to improve the reference measurements.

The reference is only valid if the jumpers are not disconnected from the MTS
8000.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 513

Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

Taking the reference in a loop-back mode

NOTE
This reference can be made wether the MTS 8000s are on the same site or
not.

1 Connect the optical output of the source (FOX port) to the optical input of the
power meter by means of a jumper.
2 Push the References key.
3 Push the Loss Loopback key.
4 Push the Go key.

Figure 260 Taking a reference in a loop-back mode

Once the reference is taken, the reference table is updated for the wavelengths
available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.
The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the local instru-
ment are indicated on the first line of the table.

If the reference is correct, disconnect the jumper in order to connect the fiber to be
tested.

If the reference is not correct, take a new reference.

514 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement

Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for a ORL measurement:
1 Power emitted reference
2 Zero ORL adjustment

Follow the order given above to take the reference. They are not two differ-
ent processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference for an ORL
measurement

NOTE
As ORL is an option, establishing a reference for this measurement is not
automatically available with the OFI module.

ORL Emitted power

1 Link the FOX port to the power meter input port via a jumper.
2 Click on ORL Power Emitted
3 Click on the Go key. The power measurement from the laser signal emitted is
completed.
Once the reference has been taken, the reference screen is updated for the
wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference
used.
As the Zero measurement as not yet been done, the first line of the table displays
the message Ref ORL : Incomplete.

ORL Zero adjustment

Once the Power Emitted measurement has been carried out, the Zero adjustment can
be performed:
1 Disconnect the jumper from the external power meter and wrap this jumper, still
connected to the FOX port, around the mandrel (6 to 7 times).
2 Click on ORL Zero
3 Push the Go key

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 515

Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

Figure 261 Adjustment of the ORL Zero

Once the reference has been taken, the reference screen is updated for the
wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference
used.

Once the two references are complete, the date as well as the type and
serial number of the local instrument are displayed on the first line of the
table.
If not, the message Ref ORL : Incomplete is displayed.

Measurement acquisition
Before making an automatic FOX measurement, check that:
• both MTS 8000s (local and distant) as well as the OFI module on each instrument
are powered on and the FOX function selected.
• the FOX function is correctly configured (SETUP menu).
• each end of the fiber is correctly connected to the module.
• the fiber and jumpers are in good condition.

To display the fiber measurement page, push the RESULTS key.

The page displays:

• Both instruments connected to the link (local and distant).

516 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

• The Results table with the last measurement made.

• The tested fiber parameters

Choosing the fiber to be tested

Once the results page is displayed, push the START/STOP button.
The details of the next fiber to be tested are displayed.

Figure 262 Details of the following fiber to be tested

To test a different fiber to the one displayed, select the new fiber according to its number
or its color code.

Use the direction keys and to change the number or color code of the fiber to be
tested.
Changing the fiber number involves a modification of the color code and vice
versa.

Making the measurement

Before making the measurement, check that the reference measurements are correct
(see “Establishing a reference” on page 512).

Push the START/STOP button once more to start the measurement of the selected fiber.

The results are displayed as the sequence progresses, on both MTS 8000s.
During the measurement, the soft keys on the right of the screen are inactive.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 517

Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

Once the measurement has finished, the MTS 8000 beeps to signal the end of the
sequence. The beep differs, depending on wether the measurement has completed
correctly or according to the measurement/alarm status.

Identifying the distant module

Before making a measurement, you can check presence of the distant module.

Once the results page is displayed, click on Identify distant.

The distant module identification is made automatically.

Figure 263 Distant module Identification

Distant
Module

Data from the distant instrument is displayed: The serial number and the operator name
on this instrument.

Check this data before making a measurement or taking a reference.

Displaying results for a FOX automatic measurement

The measurement results are displayed as the sequence progresses, on both MTS
8000s.

518 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

During the measurement, the following icon is displayed and the keys on the right of the
screen are inactive.

Once the measurement has finished:

• the icon turns grey
• keys are active.
• the MTS 8000 beeps to signal the end of the measurement.

Figure 264 Result of a FOX automatic measurement

The data displayed in the table can vary according to the acquisiton parameters (see
“Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement” on page 510).

Sending a message
When two MTS 8000s are connected at each end of the fiber, via their FOX port, they
can send messages to each other.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 519

Chapter 18 OFI Module
FOX Function

Two types of messages are available:

– predefined messages (10)
– User-definable messages(4)

The message sent by one MTS 8000 will be displayed on the screen of the other MTS
8000.

To send a message to the distant MTS 8000:

1 In the Results page, push the Send Message key.

Figure 265 Messages that can be sent to the distant MTS 8000

A menu with 10 predefined messages available is displayed.

Another menu with 4 messages the user can defined is also displayed.
2 Select the message to be sent.
To enter a user message:
– select one of the last 4 messages (called «User Msg. #n»)
– press the empty box to open the edition keypad
– enter the text you want
– push the Enter key.
3 Push the Send Message soft key.
On the distant MTS 8000, the message is displayed.
Press any key to delete the message.

520 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
Manual ORL

NOTE
If the link is not established between the two MTS 8000, the following error
message is displayed: «No acknowledge received for the SMS sent».

Manual ORL
The OFI module can be equipped with the ORL function (option), which allows to make
an ORL manual measurement .

However, before making this measurement, the references have to be established once
the ORL tab has been selected on the OFI module or on the MTS 8000, in the SYSTEM
page .

The functions LTS, FOX and ORL can be selected at the same time on the
OFI module.
However, the Powermeter and ORL functions from the MTS 8000 cannot be
selected simultaneously.

Establishing a reference for an ORL manual

measurement
Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for an ORL manual measurement:
1 Power emitted reference: see “ORL Emitted power” on page 515
2 Zero ORL adjustment: see “ORL Zero adjustment” on page 515

Follow the order given above to take the reference. They are not two differ-
ent processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference for an ORL
manual measurement.

Establishing references is only valid for a specific module or function. For

example, the references for an ORL automatic measurement are only avail-
able for the FOX function (a new reference must be redone for an ORL man-
ual measurement.).
Moreover, the Manual ORL references performed with the MTS 8000 are
not valid with an OFI module.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 521

Chapter 18 OFI Module
Manual ORL

NOTE
As ORL manual is an option, establishing a reference for this measurement
is not automatically available with the OFI module.

Measurement acquisition
The page displays:
• The results screen with the wavelength and the ORL references established.
• The table where are saved the ORL measurements.

Making the measurement

Before making the measurement, check that the reference measurements are correct
(see “Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement” on page 521).

Push the START/STOP key to start the measurement.

Display of results for an ORL manual measurement

To display the fiber measurement page, push the RESULTS key.

For each wavelength, push the key Keep Result to display the result in the table.

The Clear Table softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table.

If the Alarm function has been activated, any result that exceeds the selected thresholds
appears in red in the table.

522 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
Generating a pdf report

Figure 266 Results for an ORL manual measurement

Once all the results are displayed, click on the FILE button to save the file in a directory.

Generating a pdf report

Once the FOX results page is displayed, a report can be generated directly from the
results screen.

NOTE
The report cannot be generated from Manual ORL results page or from LTS
results page.

Creating a report from results page

To generate a report:
1 Check the FOX results page is displayed
2 Press Fast Report menu key .
The key turns grey (inactive) and the icon displays on the upper
banner, until the end of the report.
Once report has been generated, the Fast Report key returns active and a beep
is emitted, to indicate the work is completed.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 523

Chapter 18 OFI Module
Generating a pdf report

NOTE
The pdf report is saved in the last storage media and directory selected.

Opening a report
To open the report
1 Press FILE hardkey
2 In the Explorer page, in the directory selected, select the pdf file of the report.
The pdf file name by default is:
trace file name_year_month_day__hour_min_sec.pdf.

NOTE
If the results table is too long for one single page, then several pdf files are
created (1 file per page), with filename ending with «_1.pdf», «_2.pdf»...

3 Press Load > Confirm Load.

The file opens in the PDF Reader of the T-BERD/MTS.

524 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 18 OFI Module
Generating a pdf report

Figure 267 Example of FOX Report

Adding a logo to a pdf report

To display a logo (or any other image) on the upper left part of the pdf report:
1 Go to the System Settings screen (HOME > System Settings)
2 In the Printer menu, select File (Formatted)
3 In the Logo parameter, enter the full path of the image file (with file extension)
Example: disk/Logo.jpg
4 Click on Exit to return to Home page.
5 Press FILE and in the Explorer, open the file for which a pdf report must be
generated.
6 Launch the report.
Once report is generated, the logo is displayed on the upper left part of the page.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 525

Chapter 18 OFI Module
File Management

File Management

Storing results
Although each measurement is automatically stored (for FOX results only), it is possible
to save the results under a different file name, directory etc.
Once the results are displayed:
1 Push the FILE button
2 Select Setup with the key Setup/Explorer
3 Modify the parameter you want in the FILE configuration menu
4 Click on the Store Trace key
The FOX files are saved with the extension «.FOX»; the LTS files are saved with
the extension «.LTS»; the ORL files are saved with the extension «.ORL»

With the LTS and ORL results, two files are saved:
The first file is to be used with the Platform 8000 and allows all LTS mea-
surements results to be retrieved. It is saved with the extension «.LTS» or
«.ORL».
The second file is an ASCII file using tabulations to separate values. It is
saved with the extension «.txt» and can be opened by the Platform 8000. It
has been designed to be used with a spreadsheet program on a PC where it
allows all LTS measurement results to be retrieved and formatted in a cus-
tomized table.

For more details on file management, see Chapter 20 “File management”.

Recalling files
To recall a LTS, FOX or ORL file:
1 Go to the Explorer
2 Select the directory
3 Select the file to load
4 Click on Load
5 Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config.
The selected file is opened.

526 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 19
Chapter 19 Macros
The macro function allows to store series of user actions, in order to play them back
automatically.

The macro function is operational only while the Platform is used under the context of
«fiber optic applications», meaning used with one of the following application selected:
OTDR, OSA, CD, PMD, AP, LTS...

Actions in the HOME page will not be recorded

A file macro may also be operational with no active modules, as long as «Standalone
results» for fiber optics is used, and concerned files are fiber optics files.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Calling the Macro function” on page 528
• “Macro recording” on page 528
• “Default macro” on page 532
• “Macro playback” on page 533
• “Storing a macro” on page 534

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 527

Chapter 19 Macros
Calling the Macro function

Calling the Macro function

This function is accessible via the button SCRIPT, in the front of the 8000 V2 or clicking
on the upper banner and pressing Script button on the 6000/6000A V2.

10 various macros may be created and used.

Once you click on the button SCRIPT, you see the list of all the 10 macro positions. Each
number from 1 to 10, displays the name of the macro stored at that position, or displays
«(Empty)» in case that particular spot is free.

Figure 268 List of Macros

Macro recording
The Platform offers two different types of macro: Standard and File.

For both types, it is required to select and activate all necessary modules before starting
the macro recording

Never press the Home key during macro recording

528 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 19 Macros
Macro recording

Standard macro
This macro type shall be used to automate functions or operation mode.

To create a new standard macro:

1 Select a free position. A sub-menu automatically appears.
2 Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on Standard.
3 Click on the soft key Learn. You arrive directly to the Results page. You can now
see the icon at the top of the screen. You are now ready to record.
4 Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro.
5 Click on SCRIPT when you are done, and select End Macro. You macro has now
been saved.
6 Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm.

NOTE
All events are recorded wether you use the Platform buttons, the soft keys,
the touchscreen, a mouse, or an external keyboard.

NOTE
The speed of your actions is relevant if the macro is played in Real time. Oth-
erwise, if it is played in «standard» mode, it is not taken into account during
the macro recording. See “Macro playback” and “Playing a macro in Real
Time”

File macro
This macro type shall be used to perform a template, which will be used to perform the
same actions directly on a multiple selection of files.

To create a new file macro:

1 Select a free position. A sub-menu automatically appears.
2 Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on File.
3 Click on the soft key Learn.
You arrive directly to the FILE page.
The icon is displayed at the top of the screen

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 529

Chapter 19 Macros
Macro recording

4 Select the file you want to work with to perform all actions.
5 Load and view the corresponding trace.
You can now see the icon at the top of the screen indicating the macro can
be recording.
6 Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro.
7 Press SCRIPT button when you are done, and select End Macro. You macro has
now been saved.
8 Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm.

Notes for standard macros also apply for file macros.

Adding interaction to your macro

You may insert in your macro, a special dialog box, a message or a pause. These
features will be very useful to you. They will give you some time to switch to another fiber
if necessary, let you play a macro to a partial state and stop, or simply just bring your
attention after or before a specific action is performed.

To access all these features, press SCRIPT button during the learning process of a
macro, just like if it was done. Several soft keys will become available.

Inserting a dialog box

Click on the soft key Insert Dialog Box. The dialog box editor is displayed. Enter the
content of your dialog box and press confirm when you are done.

Inserting a message
Click on the soft key Insert Message. The Message text editor is displayed. Enter the
content of your message and press confirm when you are done.

NOTE
Dialog boxes and messages serve different purposes when the macro is
played back. A message will just appear to bring your attention to a specific
point and wait until you are ready to continue. A dialog box will give you the
choice between continuing to play the macro, or aborting it, letting you par-
tially play a macro in some cases.

530 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 19 Macros
Macro recording

Inserting a pause
Click on the soft key Insert Pause. This action will automatically make the macro wait
for a user action.

Renaming a macro
Whether you just created a new macro or you wish to modify the name of an existing
macro, you may edit the name and change it as much as you want.
1 Select the macro and select Name on the sub-menu.
2 Click on to open the text editor, and type the new name.
3 Click on Confirm to accept the new name.

The «Overwrite Config.» setting

Both your actions and the actual configuration are saved when you create a new macro.
So when you play a macro back, you have the choice between:
1 Playing all actions and keeping the actual configuration
Your actions are fairly independent of the configuration, and you don’t wish to modify
the current configuration: set Unit Config. / File Config. on None.
2 Playing all actions and restoring the original configuration

Your actions are very dependant of the configuration, for example in case you need to
do some measurements where you wish to keep all the acquisition parameters the
same: set Unit Config. / File Config. on Yes. This setting will also allow to make sure
all necessary modules are selected in the HOME page before the macro is started.

It is strongly recommended to use the second method where all configura-

tion is restored before playing the macro. Only experienced users might
decide to do otherwise for different reasons.

Replacing a macro
Select an existing macro and click on the soft key Learn.

A message will be displayed, asking you if you really wish to overwrite the macro. Click
Yes if you wish to continue.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 531

Chapter 19 Macros
Default macro

Removing a macro
Select an existing macro and click on the soft key Remove.

A message will be displayed, asking you if you really wish to delete the selected macro.
Click Yes if you wish to continue.

Default macro

Using the default macro

It is possible to set one macro as default. This is very useful if, for example, you wish to
perform one macro several times in a row. Double clicking on the button SCRIPT will auto-
matically play the default macro.

Setting a macro as default

Select Default Macro, and choose in the sub-menu, which macro you wish to set as
default.

As an alternative, you may also select a macro and press the soft key Set as default.

Figure 269 Menu keys

Macro 3 is set as
default

Alternatively, set any other macro

as default using this button

532 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 19 Macros
Macro playback

Macro playback
1 To play the default macro, you may directly double click on SCRIPT.
To play another macro, go to the macro screen (press SCRIPT once), and select
the macro you wish to play. Then press the soft key Play.

During all the play back of the macro, you can see the icon at the top of the screen.

NOTE
This icon changes to when the playback is suspended by a pause
event, waiting for the user to restart the process (see “Inserting a pause” on
page 531).

All actions recorded in your macro are now performed.

In «standard» playing, the speed of the playback is not the same as the speed of the
recording. All actions except for acquisitions, will appear faster, but will remain slow
enough to let you see what is currently performed. Acquisition times remain the same as
during the recording.

If you play the macro in real time, the speed of your actions during recording is taken into
account (see “Playing a macro in Real Time” on page 534)

NOTE
Don’t forget to add interactive events during your macro recording if you
need a pause, a specific message or simply to be able to abort the macro at
a certain stage if necessary.

Touching a button on the Platform will automatically cause the macro play-
back to abort, except for restarting the playback, interrupted by a pause
event.

NOTE
For a File macro, you may select several files before you call the Macro func-
tion.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 533

Chapter 19 Macros
Macro playback

Playing a macro in Real Time

In the Script page, the soft key Play Real Time allows to play the macro selected, taking
into account the speed of the actions during the macro recording.

Script (specific option)

According the configuration of the MTS/T-BERD 6000/8000V2, this one can be

equipped with a Script function, available on the same page as the macro page.

To use the script, a MTAU module is mandatory. See Chapter 17.

Storing a macro
The Platform lets you save macros as files on the hard disk or other storage media.

To store a macro, select it and click on the soft key Store. It will automatically store it in
the current directory.

NOTE
If you wish to store your macro at a specific place on your storage media,
make sure you use the file explorer to set that place as your current direc-
tory.

To reload this macro later on, go to the file explorer and load the file. The macro will auto-
matically take the first available place in the list of your 10 macros.

The macro cannot be loaded if no macro position is available.

534 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 20
Chapter 20 File management
The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:
• “Description of the explorer” on page 536
• “Saving and loading files” on page 539
• “Exporting files” on page 541

In Home > App’s > File Explorer, the files can be loaded and traces can
be displayed or saved even when no module is set into the Base Unit.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 535

Chapter 20 File management
Description of the explorer

Description of the explorer

Opening the file explorer

To access the Explorer
1 Press the FILE button

The explorer is used to select the storage medium, and to create or rename directories
and files:
– The left-hand part presents the storage architecture. Use the keys and
or touchscreen to move around among all the media and their respec-
tive directories.
– The right-hand part displays all the files present in the directory selected.

Figure 270 Example of explorer

Free space
available on the
selected media

The direction keys can be used to move horizontally between the two parts and vertically
within each zone.

At the top of the screen, the file signature is displayed if a function (OTDR, OSA...) is
activated in the Home page (see “Example of signature of an OTDR file” on page 537).

536 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 20 File management
Description of the explorer

Managing tabs
Tabs give access to the File menu of each application (OTDR, OSA, Power Meter, etc.)
present in the instrument.

It is possible to open a file even if the corresponding module is not present in the instru-
ment (e.g. OSA file without OSA module). A new tab then temporarily manages this
application.

When several different applications (corresponding to modules or plug-ins for different

measurements) are managed by the MTS / T-BERD, pressing the FILE key several times
in succession changes from one tab to another to give access to the file configuration of
the desired application (e.g. OTDR, OSA, etc.). See “Tabs” on page 23.

File signature
The acquisition parameters of the trace contained in the selected file are displayed at
the top of the screen together with a small-scale representation of the trace (provided it
was acquired on a MTS / T-BERD) (see “Mini-trace” on page 22).

Figure 271 Example of signature of an OTDR file

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 Mini-trace 9 Alarm status

2 Laser 10 Plug-in used
3 Pulse width 11 Comment
4 Fiber Identification 12 Resolution
5 Color Code 13 Acquisition Time
6 Fiber Number 14 Refraction Index
7 Cable Identification 15 Date of signal acquisition
8 Direction of measurement 16 Time of signal acquisition

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 537

Chapter 20 File management
Description of the explorer

Figure 272 Example of signature of a FCOMP file

1 2 3 4 5

6
7 8

1 Measurement parameters 5 Origin / End

2 Fiber Identification 6 Module used
3 Fiber Number 7 Comment
4 Cable Identification 8 Acquisition Date & Time

Buttons on the right of the screen

Saving traces

These buttons are used to save one or more traces/

• Save: allows to save the current trace opened.
• Save All: allows to store all the traces displayed in overlay (OTDR and
OSA only) in one single file.
• The softkey Next Trace is used to activate the menu of the following
trace, in an overlay configuration (OTDR, OEO and OSA only).

Storage media
For saving or recalling data, the Platform 8000 offers a wide choice of media, both built-
in and external.

Free space on selected media is clearly displayed at the bottom of the left panel.

538 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 20 File management
Saving and loading files

NOTE
Remote T-BERD/MTS and data transfer
During a data transfer (with the option Data/Talkset), the distant MTS / T-
BERD hard drive connected by the fiber is displayed as a storage media. File
and directory edition features may all be used in the same manner with this
storage media as with the other ones.

Directory and files editing function

The Files and directories editing functions are similar to those available in the Explorer
page of the Platform.
Refer to 8000 V2 or 6000A V2 Platform User Manual if you want to work on directories
and files (copy/paste, rename...).

Saving and loading files

Saving Files from the Explorer

When the explorer is displayed, the active trace for the selected tab is displayed in the
File Signature.

You can then save the active trace:

1 Select a directory by clicking once on it
2 Click on Store to save the active trace
A new sub-menu displays
3 For OTDR traces only click on Next Trace to change the file signature on the top
part of the screen and to save the next trace from traces in overlay
4 Click on Save All or on Save (OTDR files only).
The Save All menu key in OTDR tab allows to save all the traces opened,
whereas the Save menu key allows to save exclusively the trace described in the
file signature.
5 If you wish, click on FILE button to display the Explorer page for another applica-
tion and save, using the same method, the active trace from this application.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 539

Chapter 20 File management
Saving and loading files

Figure 273 Saving active trace from the explorer

Displayed when two active

overlaid traces are open.

The trace described in the

file signature will be saved in
the directory selected (in this
example: demo)

This will open automatically the edition keypad, in order to give a filename for the
active trace.

NOTE
The «Store» menu key is not available if the type of saving for OTDR files is
defined to «All Traces» in the File Content parameter (see “File Content”
on page 51).

Loading files and displaying traces

To access the functions for loading one or more files, select the file(s) in the explorer and
press Load. Several options are then available:

Simple loading
The key View Trace(s) enables simple loading of traces, using the current parameters
of the Platform 8000. The current trace(s) is/are then replaced with this new trace(s).

Load with configuration

The key Load Trace + Config will display the traces, recalling the configuration
recorded in the file. Thus the zooms, cursors and parameters present at the time of
acquisition will be used for the display.

This function also enables to recall and set the parameters defined in the screens corre-
sponding respectively to the FILE and SETUP keys.

It is then possible to perform an acquisition under the same conditions as those of the
trace recalled.

540 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

• If the MTS / T-BERD was equipped with a different module from the current one
when the trace was acquired, certain configuration parameters cannot be
updated. A message warns the user of this.
• If several traces are selected, the configuration used will be that of the first trace.
• If the number of traces added and the number of traces present is greater than 8,
then the last traces added will not all be taken into account.

The configuration cannot be recalled if the trace was not originally cre-
ated by a MTS / T-BERD.

Loading several traces in overlay

Up to 8 traces in the OTDR application can be displayed simultaneously in overlay.
To obtain a display of multiple traces, two methods are possible:
• Select all the files to be loaded at the same time (see 5800 Platform User manual
for multiple selection of files) and click on Load > View Trace(s)
• Define a reference trace in a first time, open it, then come back to the explorer to
select the other traces to be added (see “Reference Trace function” on page 99).

Exporting files
Click on the Export menu key allows to display a sub-menu from which selected files
can be:
• generated into one/several reports
• merged into one file (for txt/pdf files only)
• sent by e-mail

Explorer/Link Manager
Before exporting file(s), the display can be modified, and the Link Manager can be
selected instead of the Explorer using the Explorer/Link Mgr menu key.

The Link Manager function allows to display the explorer with all the link information
exclusively for the active application (the function must be activated in Home page, or
at least one result trace must be opened to get the tab and display files in the Link
Manager page).

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 541

Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

For example, if the Link Mgr. function is selected in the tab OTDR, only the link informa-
tion from the OTDR files will be displayed (wether in multimode or singlemode).

Select Link Mgr with the menu key Explorer/Link Mgr. to display the corresponding
files for the active tab.

NOTE
The function is only available with the OTDR, CD, OSA, PMD & AP functions

Figure 274 Explorer and Link Manager display

Tab
selected
Explorer View Link Manager View

According to the application selected, the fiber information available are different. The
table below describes the fiber information displayed for each selected tab:

NOTE
The files in the Link Manager window can be sorted according each column
available for a tab.

Table 8 Fiber Information displayed

Column. OTDR & OEO CD ODM OSA PMD AP LTS

1st Alarm status (icon) & Fiber number
2nd Direction Laser

542 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

Table 8 Fiber Information displayed

Column. OTDR & OEO CD ODM OSA PMD AP LTS

3rd Lambda Length Nb Channel Length Length Power
(dBm)
4th Total Loss L0 Power Max. Delay 1 AP @ 1310 nm Loss (dB)
5th Fiber Length S0 Power Min. Coeff. 1 AP @ 1650 nm Ref (dBm)
6th Nb of Event Dispersion OSNR Max Delay 2 AP @ 1625 nm
-
at 1550 nm
7th Max Splice Coeff at OSNR Min. Coeff 2 -
-
1550 nm
8th Total ORL - - - - -

Editing function
The same editing functions as those from the Explorer are available with the Link
Manager function:
• Directory: Copy (or cut) / Paste; Rename, Delete,
See “Directory and files editing function” on page 539).
• File(s): Copy / Cut, Rename, Delete

Moreover, the Edit menu from the Link Manager allows to export the whole directory,
with the files corresponding to the active tab, in a txt file.

Exporting a directory in a txt file

1 Click on Export and select the Link Manager function
2 Select the tab corresponding to the files you want to use
3 Select the directory to open
4 Select one file from the list
5 Click on Export menu key.
The txt file is automatically generated, in the same directory as the one selected
for the export.
The name by default for the txt file is: fiber_info_”name of application
selected”.txt.
For example, for the export of the Fiber Information from the OTDR application,
the txt file will be called: fiber_info_otdr.txt

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 543

Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

NOTE
The txt file can be renamed once it is saved.

This file is made of two parts:

• The Header, with general information: the equipment used and its serial number,
the date and time of export, the location of the file, and the number of files
exported.
• The table, containing all the fibers information coming from the files of the active
tab.

Once generated, the txt file can be transferred onto a PC and opened via a spreadsheet
program (e.g. Excel...).

Figure 275 Example of a directory exported in a txt file (open with Excel)
File name

Header of
the txt file

Recall of the Fiber

Information
displayed on the T-
BERD/MTS 8000
V2/6000(A) (except
alarm status)

544 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

Generating pdf report(s)

Several files of a same type (example: all OTDR files) can be generated in one/several
pdf report(s).
1 Select the file(s) to be generated in a pdf report
2 Press Export > Report menu keys.
3 Using the menu key select:
– 1 Trace if the report must be generated with one trace per page
– Multi if the report must be generated with up to three traces per page (for
OTDR files only).
– ODM if the report must be generated with one PMD result, one CD result
and one AP result for example (for PMD, CD ODM and AP files only).
4 Click on Build Report
5 In the edition menu displayed, enter the name for the report
6 Press Enter to validate and launch the report
The icon display during report generation.
Once report is generated, a beep is emitted.

Figure 276 Report: 1 Trace and Multi (with OTDR files)

PDF Report: «1 Trace» mode PDF Report: «Multi» mode

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 545

Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

CAUTION
To modify the VIAVI logo, set by default on the header of the pdf report, save
your logo in a jpg file called logo.jpg and place it to the root of the disk: disk
> logo.jpg.

NOTE
The report is saved in the same directory as the selected files.

Using the Merge key, with the txt/pdf files

The txt or pdf files that have been saved/generated from a results page can be merged
into one txt/pdf file from the Explorer.

The key Merge is used to merge several txt or pdf files into one file, putting together the
results of all files.
1 In the explorer, select the txt/pdf files generated with the trace files you want.

The merging can be done exclusively from files of the same format.
Pdf and txt files cannot be selected at the same time to generate a
merged file.

2 Click on Export > Merge key

The icon displays during merging process, and a beep is emitted once
process is completed.

The file is saved with the filename: merged_yyyy_mm_day__hr_mn_sec.pdf/txt

It is automatically saved in the same directory as the one where the txt/pdf files
have been selected.

NOTE
The file can be renamed once it is saved.

Sending files by e-mail

Several files can be sent by e-mail.

546 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

1 Check in the Setup page that the File Export parameters are correctly configured
(see 8000 V2 or 6000(A V2) Platform User Manual).
2 In the Explorer, select the file(s) to be sent by e-mail
3 Press Export menu key.
4 Click on Send by mail menu key .
5 If necessary, in the edition menus displayed, modify the e-mail address and/or the
subject of the e-mail.
6 Press Enter to validate and send the file
The menu key Send by mail turns inactive until the end of process
Once mail is sent, menu key is active again and the message Mail Sent is
displayed.
Click on any key to follow.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 547

Chapter 20 File management
Exporting files

548 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 21
Chapter 21 Technical specifications
This chapter shows the technical specifications of the modules, of the T-BERD/MTS,
and options and accessories available.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “Mains adapters” on page 550
• “Environment” on page 550
• “OTDR Modules” on page 553
• “HR OSA Module” on page 564
• “ODM Modules” on page 565
• “ODM MR Modules” on page 566
• “High Resolution Dispersion test solution” on page 567
• “BBS Modules” on page 569
• “MTAU modules” on page 570
• “Warning” on page 570

NOTE
Mains adapters and Environmental specifications provided in this chapter
are for T-BERD/MTS 8000 V2 and vary by platform. Refer to platform’s spec-
ification sheet. For the modules refer to their own environmental specifica-
tions.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 549

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
Mains adapters

Mains adapters
Standard Mains Adapter High power Mains Adapter

Input 100-250 V, 50-60 Hz 100-250 V, 50-60 Hz

24 V continuous, 21V continuous,
Output
6,25 A max 10.5 A max
Compliance IEC 62368-1:2018 IEC 62368-1:2018

Environment
Indoor/outdoor
• Backlight high visibility color screen
• High visibility capacitive touchscreen for indoor and outdoor use.
• Altitude up to 2000m.

CAUTION
It is strongly recommended to work on the Platform in its glove when the
product is used outdoor, in rainy weather.

CAUTION
AC/DC power supply must be used indoor!
The Platform battery charging must be performed indoor only!

Temperature

• Platform Operating temperature range Refer to platform’s specification sheet

• Storage -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)

IEC 61010-1 Temperature range from 0 to 40°C

550 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
Environment

Humidity
• 5 to 95% without condensation

Pollution degree
• Pollution degree: 2

VIAVI recommends that customers dispose of their instruments and peripherals in an

environnmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole
products and recycling of products components, and/or materials.

Waste Electrical and electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive

In the European Union, this label indicates that this product should not be
disposed of with household waste. Il should be deposited at an appropriate
facility to enable recovery and recycling.
•

EMI/ESD
• CE class A Compliant, according to EN 61326-1:2013
• FCC 47-1 Part 15 Compliant

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to
take adequate measures.

Drop test
In accordance with the Telcordia GR-196-CORE recommendations, the MTS/T-BERD
resists the following test:
• 6 impacts dropped from a height of 76cm on a pinwood floor of 5 cm thickness (1
impact on each of its 6 sides, with power off).

Shocks
The MTS/T-BERD resists the following test:

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 551

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
Environment

• 3 shocks per axis along each of the 3 axes, with power off.
• Impacts of 15g, 1/2 sine, duration 11 ms, at 10 second intervals.

Bumps
The MTS/T-BERD resists the following test:
• 1,000 bumps per axis along each of the 3 axes, with power off.
• Jolts of 15g, 1/2 sine, duration 6 ms, at 1 second intervals.

Vibration
The MTS/T-BERD resists the following vibration tests:
• Complete test comprising 6 cycles along each of the x, y and z axes.
• One cycle of 5 to 200 Hz and back to 5 Hz with a sweep duration of one minute
per octave.
• 3 mm amplitude displacement test, for the range 5 Hz to 9 Hz.
• 3g acceleration test for the range 10 Hz to 200 Hz.

Flammability
The MTS/T-BERD housing (in ABS, type V0) does not propagate fire.

IP Protection Index
Index of the IP protection for the Platform 8000: IP32

NOTE
For a higher classification, contact VIAVI.

Overvoltage
Overvoltage category I

552 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

OTDR Modules
Typical values at 25°C, otherwise specified.

Warning labels for the laser classes

Dangerous voltage (> 70VDC) is present inside of the product.

Do not attempt to remove cover when product is in use.

Due to the reduced dimensions of the optical modules, it is not possible to attach the
required warning labels to them. In line with the provisions of Article 7.1 of the IEC
60825-1:2014 standard, the laser class identification labels are shown below.
The user must take the necessary precautions concerning the optical output of the
instrument and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Ref. standard IEC 60825-1: 2014 FDA21CFR§1040.10

CLASS 1
Class 1 LASER PRODUCT

Class 1M

Class 2

Measurements on optical fibers are difficult to execute and the preci-

sion of the results obtained depends largely on the precautions taken
by the user.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 553

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

OTDR measurements characteristics

Distance measurement

• Distance displayed takes into account the calibration of the refractive index of the
fiber.
• Refractive Index adjustable from 1.30000 to 1.70000 in steps of 0.00001
• Resolution of display: 1 cm max.
• Resolution of cursor: 1 cm max.
• Sampling resolution (distance between measurement points): from 2 cm, with up
to 256 000 acquisition points.
• Absolute Accuracy:
– For OTDR Modules A:
MM part: ±0.33m ± sampling resolution + 1.10–5 x distance
SM part: ±0.5m ± sampling resolution + 1.10–5 x distance
– For OTDR Modules B, C, D: ± 0.75m ± sampling resolution ±10-5 x
distance (excluding errors of calibration of refractive index of the fiber)
– For other modules: ± 1m ± sampling resolution ±10-5 x distance
(excluding errors of calibration of refractive index of the fiber).
• Relative Accuracy (Multimode):
– Expert Mode
±0.07m ± sampling resolution + 1.10-5 x distance
– RDZ Mode
±0.1m ± sampling resolution + 1.10-5 x distance

Attenuation measurement

• Dual cursor
• Mode Automatic, manual, 2-point, 5-point and LSA
• Display resolution: 0.001 dB
• Cursor resolution: 0.001 dB
• Linearity:
– Multimode
± 0.05 dB/dB
– Singlemode
± 0.03 dB/dB

554 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

Reflectance measurement

• Display resolution: 0,01 dB

• Accuracy: ± 2 dB

Automatic measurement

• Automatic measurement of all the elements of the signal: Event Distance / Event
Loss / Event Reflectance / Section Loss and Attenuation / Optical Return Loss
• Slope measurement by least square averages or 2-point method.
• Thresholds of event detection:
– Splice: 0.01 to 1.99 dB in steps of 0.01 dB (Auto ≥ 0.05 dB)
– Reflectance: -11 to -99 dB in steps of 1 dB
– Bend: 0.01 to 1.99 dB in steps of 0.01 dB (Auto ≥ 0.1 dB)
– Fiber end: 3 to 20 dB in steps of 1 dB (Auto ≥ 6 dB)

Manual Measurement

• Attenuation between A & B cursors.

• Reflectance between A & B cursors.
• ORL between A & B cursors.
• Event loss using 2-point or 5-point method

OTDR size and weight

• Weight: approx. 500 g (1.1 lbs)
• Dimensions (in mm, without front panel) - w x h x d: 120 x 27 x 211

OTDR Module supply

OTDR modules are powered by the mainframe which they are attached to.
• Rated range supply 8 -15 VDC
• Maximum power consumption is 8 W

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 555

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

B, C & D Modules
Singlemode Modules

8100B OTDR
8100C OTDR Series 8100D OTDR Series
Series
1310 ± 20 nm
1310 ± 20 nm 1310 ± 20 nm
1490 ± 20 nm
1550 ± 20 nm 1550 ± 20 nm
Central Wavelength 1 1550 ± 20 nm
1625 ± 20 nm 1625 ± 10 nm
1625 ± 10 nm
1650 +15/- 5 nm 1650 ± 1 nm
1650+15/- 5 nm
Laser Classes - IEC Class 1M @ 1310 nm
Class1
60825-1: 2014 Class1 for other wavelengths
Laser Classes -
Class 1
EFDA21CFR§1040.10
46.4 dB
41 dB 50 dB
45.4 dB
2 40 dB 50 dB
RMS Dynamic Range 46.4 dB
40 dB 50 dB
46.4 dB
43 dB 48 dB
46.4 dB
Distance Range Up to 400 km
Pulse width 5 ns to 20 µs 2 ns to 20 µs
Event Dead Zone 3 0.65 mm 0.6 m 0.55 m
Attenuation Dead Zone 4 2m 2.5 m
Splitter Attenuation
- 25 m5 15 m5
Dead Zone (SADZ)
Power Meter
1310, 1490, 1550, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1310, 1490, 1550,
Calibrated wavelengths
1625 nm 1625 nm6 1625 nm
Power range -3 to -55 dBm -3 to -55 dBm -5 to -55 dBm
Uncertainty7 ± 0.5 dB @ -30 dBm
± 0.5 dB from -50 to
Linearity ± 0.2 dB from -50 to -5 dBm
-5 dBm
Continuous Wave Light Source
1310, 1550, 1625 1310, 1490, 1550,
Wavelengths 1310, 1550, 1625 nm
nm 1625 nm

556 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

8100B OTDR
8100C OTDR Series 8100D OTDR Series
Series
Output Power Level -3.5 dBm 0 dBm
Stability < ± 0.1 dB @ 25°C over 1 hour
Operating modes8 CW9, 270Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, Twintest, Auto
1. Guaranteed, with laser at25°C measured at 10 µs. 1650 nm +/- 1nm for E81165C module
2. Value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the origin of the
fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.
3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.
4. ADZ measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/PC (-55 dB) at
shortest pulsewidth.
5. Measured on a 15 dB attenuation with -70 dB reflectance
6. Except for 8138C-65 as 1625 nm is not available
7. At calibrated wavelengths
8. Substract 3 dB when used in modulation mode (270/330/1k/2kHz/Twintest/Auto)
9. The CW mode is not available with OTDR D Modules

FiberComplete specifications

Values measured at 25°C unless specified and after a warm-up period of at least 20min.
Note that to warm-up both unit, simply switch-on the FiberComplete application.

8100B OTDR Series 8100C OTDR Series

Bi-directional Test Set
Wavelength 1 1310 ± 20 nm
1310 ± 20 nm
1490 ± 20 nm
1550 ± 20 nm
1550 ± 20 nm
1625 ± 20 nm
1625 ± 10 nm
Measurement Time2 32 seconds
Insertion Loss
Reference Methods Loopback + Side by side
Dynamic Range 42 dB
3
Typical Uncertainty ± 0.25 dB
Repeatability4 < 0.1 dB
Optical Return Loss (ORL) - including manual ORL
Measurement range5 Up to 55 dB
6
Typical Uncertainty ± 0.9 dB
Repeatability 4 < 0.1 dB

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 557

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

8100B OTDR Series 8100C OTDR Series

Power Meter
Calibrated wavelengths 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
Power range -3 to -55 dBm
7
Uncertainty ± 0.5 dB @ -30 dBm
Optical Source
Wavelengths 1310, 1550, 1625 nm 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
Output Power Level -3.5 dBm
Stability < ± 0.1 dB @ 25°C over 1 hour
Operating modes8 CW, 270Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, Twintest, Auto
OTDR (see “B, C & D Modules” on page 556)

1. Guaranteed, with laser at 25°C

2. Typical measurement time for bidir 1310/1550 nm IL/ORL, after referencing is completed
3. Side by side referencing
4. 10 consecutive measurements without disconnection
5. With APC connector
6. From 10 to 45 dB @1310 or 1550 nm
7. At calibrated wavelengths
8. Substract 3 dB when used in modulation mode (270/330/1k/2kHz/Twintest/Auto)

A Modules
Multi-/Single-mode modules

E8146A
E8156 A
Multimode Singlemode
1
Central Wavelength 1310 ± 20 nm
850 +10/-30 nm
1550 ± 20 nm
1300 ± 20 nm
1625 ± 20 nm
Laser Classes - 21CFR
Class 1
IEC 60825-1:2014
RMS Dynamic Range 2 24 dB 40 dB
Distance Range from 50 m to 10 km from 100 m to 260 km
Pulse width 1 ns to 50 ns 3 ns to 20 µs

558 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

E8146A
E8156 A
Event Dead Zone 3 0.20/0.25 m 0. 60 m
Attenuation Dead Zone 4 1.5 / 2.1 m 2 m (@ 1310 nm)
Continuous Wave Light Source
Output Power Level 0 dBm
Stability5 < ± 0.2 dB @ 25° over 1 hour < ± 0.1 dB @ 25° over 1 hour
Operating modes 270Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, Auto, Twintest
1. Guaranteed, with laser at 25°C measured at 10 µs.
2. Value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the origin of the
fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.
3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.
4. ADZ measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/PC (-55 dB for
Singlemode and -35dB for Multimode) at shortest pulsewidth.
5. After 20 minutes warm-up time

High Resolution Multimode module

E8123AV
RDZ Mode Expert mode
Central Wavelength 1 850 +10/-30 nm 850 +10/-30 nm
1300 ± 20 nm
Laser Classes - 21CFR
Class 1
IEC 60825-1:2014
RMS Dynamic Range 2 16 dB 24 dB
Distance Range From 50 m to 1 km From 50 m to 10 km
Pulse width 1 ns 1 ns to 50 ns
Event Dead Zone 3
0.2 m 0.2/0.25 m
Attenuation Dead Zone 4 0.4 m 1.5 / 2 m

1. Guaranteed, with laser at 25°C measured at 10 µs.

2. Value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the backscattered level extrapolated at the
origin of the fiber and the RMS noise level , after 30 seconds of averaging, with the largest pulse-
width.
3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.
4. ADZ measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/PC (-
35 dB) at shortest pulsewidth.

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 559

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

CWDM Modules

8100 8100 8100 8100 8100

CWDM modules
CWDM1E CWDM2E CWDM3E CWDM4E CWDM5E
Central Wave- 1551 ± 5 nm 1471 ± 5 nm 1351 ± 5 nm 1271 ± 5 nm
length1 1571 ± 5 nm 1491 ± 5 nm 1431 ± 5 nm 1371 ± 5 nm 1291 ± 5 nm
1591 ± 5 nm 1511 ± 5 nm 1451 ± 5 nm 1391 ± 5 nm 1311 ± 5 nm
1611 ± 5 nm 1531 ± 5 nm 1411 ± 5 nm 1331 ± 5 nm
RMS Dynamic 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB
Range2 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB
42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB
42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB
Pulse width 3ns to 20 µs
Event Dead Zone3 0,8 m
Attenuation Dead
4.5 m
Zone4
Continuous Wave
0 dBm
Output Power
Operating modes5 CW, 270Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz

1. Guaranteed, with laser at 10 µs, over entire temperature range

2. Typical value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion extrapolated at the
beginning of fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 min. of averaging, with largest pulsewidth.
3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.
4. ADZ measured at ± 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance type FC/UPC (-55 dB) at
shortest pulsewidth.
5. Substract 3dB when used in modulation mode (270/330/1k/2k Hz)

Distance Ranges
Ranges for OTDR Module A
Multimode Module

1 ns 3 ns 10 ns 30 ns 50 ns
50 m x x
100 m x x

560 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

1 ns 3 ns 10 ns 30 ns 50 ns
200 m x x x
500 m x x x x
1 km x x x x x
2 km x x x x x
5 km x x x x x
10 km x x x

Singlemode Module

3 ns 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 µs 3 µs 10 µs 20 µs
100 m x x
200 m x x x
500 m x x x
1 km x x x x
2 km x x x x x
5 km x x x x x
10 km x x x x x x
20 km x x x x x x x
40 km x x x x x x x x x
80 km x x x x x x x x
160 km x x x x x x
260 km x x x x

Ranges for OTDR Module B

5 ns 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs 20 μs
0.5 km x x x
1 km x x x x

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 561

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

5 ns 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs 20 μs
2 km x x x x x
5 km x x x x x
10 km x x x x x x
20 km x x x x x x x x x
40 km x x x x x x x x x
80 km x x x x x x x
160 km x x x x x
320 km x x

Ranges for OTDR Module C

2 ns 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 µs 3 µs 10 µs 20 µs
0.5 km x x x
1 km x x x x
2 km x x x x x
5 km x x x x x
10 km x x x x x x
20 km x x x x x x x
40 km x x x x x x x x x
80 km x x x x x x x
160 km x x x x x
320 km x x x

Ranges for OTDR Module D

2 ns 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 µs 3 µs 10 µs 20 µs
0.5 km x x x
1 km x x x x
2 km x x x x x

562 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
OTDR Modules

5 km x x x x x
10 km x x x x x x
20 km x x x x x x x x x
40 km x x x x x x x x x
80 km x x x x x x x x
160 km x x x x x x x
320 km x x x x x

Ranges for CWDM modules

3 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs 20 μs
5 km x x
10 km x x x
20 km x x x x x
40 km x x x x x x x x
80 km x x x x x x x x
140 km x x x x x x x
260 km x x x x x
380 km x x

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 563

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
HR OSA Module

HR OSA Module
Typical values, at 25°C, unless specified otherwise.

Module EOSA610B
Wavelength Acquisition Range 190.7-196.65 THz (1524.498 - 1572.063 nm)
Absolute uncertainty of frequency
±370 MHz (±3pm)
(wavelength)1,2
Frequency (wavelength) resolu-
300 MHz (2.4pm)
tion
Minimum signal separation 2 GHz (16 pm)
Input power range (in 300 MHz
-65 to +10dBm
bandwidth)3
Noise floor -84 dBm
Max. safe total input power4 +17dBm
Close-in dynamic range > 40 dB at ±8pm (±1 GHz)
> 50 dB at ±16pm (±2 GHz)
Spurious-free dynamic range > 45 dB
Absolute uncertainty of power
±0.5 dB
level1,2,5
Display resolution 0.01 dB
Return loss > 50 dB
Measurement time6 min 1.0 s
Measurement statistics Delta wavelength, delta power, delta OSNR

1. Over the entire frequency range.

2. Average of 5 consecutive sweeps. Coarse mode disabled.
3. Power of unmodulated single-frequency laser or peak power of modulated signal in 300MHz opti-
cal bandwidth
4. Total power of all input signals
5. At -20 dBm input power
6. Over 50 GHz sweep range, no averaging

Dimensions and weight

• Weight: approx. 500 g (1.1 lbs)
• Dimensions: 213 x 124 x 32 mm (8.38 x 4.88 x 1.26 in)

564 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
ODM Modules

ODM Modules
Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Chromatic Dispersion (E81CD/E81DISPAP)1 80km G652 10km G655

Wavelength Acquisition Range 1260 - 1640 nm
Wavelength Uncertainty +/- 0.1 nm
Minimum length 1 km
Dynamic Range 45 dB
55 dB2
Zero dispersion wavelength uncertainty +/- 1.5 nm
Zero dispersion wavelength repeatability3 0.1 nm
Dispersion Uncertainty 4, 5 +/- 0.05 ps/nm.km +/- 0.1 ps/nm.km
3, 4
Dispersion Repeatability 0.005ps/nm.km
Slope at Zero Wavelength Repeatability 3 0.5% 0.1%
Measurement Time From 40s to 80s
1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS2A unless specified
2. With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode
3. Repeatibility refers to the typical one-sigma standard deviation value, obtained for system cycling over 20
measurements
4. 1530-1570nm band
5. Excluding reference fiber uncertainties

Polarization Mode Dispersion1 E81DISPAP E81PMD

2
Dynamic Range 58 dB 58 dB
65 dB3
PMD Measurement range4 0.08 to 130 ps
PMD Type B uncertainty 5, 6 +/- 0.02 ps +/- 2% PMD
PMD Repeatability 5, 6 0.025 ps
Measurement Time 7 16 seconds, independant of 6 seconds, independant
PMD value of PMD value
1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS2A unless specified
2. With averaging
3. With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode
4. Up to 60ps in strong mode coupling
5. Weak coupling for 0.1 ps to 60 ps PMD range, up to 35 dB Total Loss
6. Traceable to NPL standard
7. Minimum value without averaging

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 565

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
ODM MR Modules

Attenuation Profile (E81DISPAP)1

Dynamic Range2 55 dB
60 dB3
Measurement Uncertainty +/-0.006dB/km @1310nm
(80 km fiber G652) +/-0.003dB/km @1550nm
+/-0.004dB/km @1625nm
Measurement Time 4 6 seconds

1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS2A unless specified

2. With averaging
3. With handheld Broadband Source OBS550 in High Dynamic mode
4. Minimum value without averaging

ODM MR Modules
Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Chromatic Dispersion (E81MRDISPAP)1 80km G652 10km G655

Wavelength Acquisition Range 1435 - 1640 nm
Wavelength Display Range 1260 - 1640 nm
Wavelength Uncertainty +/- 0.1 nm
Minimum length 1 km
Dynamic Range 33 dB
Zero dispersion wavelength uncertainty n/a +/- 4.5 nm
2
Zero dispersion wavelength repeatability n/a 0.4 nm
Dispersion Uncertainty 3,4 +/- 0.06 ps/nm.km +/- 0.3 ps/nm.km
Dispersion Repeatability 2,3 0.02 ps/nm.km
Measurement Time From 10s to 30s

1. With Broadband Source wavelength type OBS500 (1460 - 1625 nm)

2. Repeatibility refers to the typical one-sigma standard deviation value, obtained for system cycling over 20
measurements
3. 1530-1570nm band
4. Excluding reference fiber uncertainties

566 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
High Resolution Dispersion test solution

Polarization Mode Dispersion (E81MRDISPAP)1

Dynamic Range2 45 dB
3
PMD Measurement range 0.08 to 130 ps
PMD Type B uncertainty 4, 5 +/- 0.02 ps +/- 2% PMD
PMD Repeatability 4, 5 0.025 ps
Measurement Time6 8 seconds, independent of PMD value
1. With Broadband Source wavelength type OBS500 (1460 - 1625 nm)
2. With averaging
3. Up to 60ps in strong mode coupling
4. Weak coupling for 0.1 ps to 60 ps PMD range, up to 35 dB Total Loss
5. Traceable to NPL standard
6. Minimum value without averaging

Attenuation Profile (E81MRDISPAP)1

Dynamic Range 45 dB
Wavelength Uncertainty +/-0.1 nm
Measurement uncertainty +/-0.003dB/km @1550nm
+/-0.004dB/km @1625nm
Measurement Time2 3 seconds
1. With Broadband Source wavelength type OBS500 (1460 - 1625 nm)
2. Measured with 80km G.652 fiber

High Resolution Dispersion test solution

Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Optical Interfaces

• Applicable Fiber: SMF 9/125 µm

• Interchangeable optical connectors: FC, SC, DIN, LC

Polarization Mode Dispersion

1,2
Dynamic Range 48 dB
PMD measurement range 3 0 to 18 ps
PMD absolute uncertainty 4,5 +/- 0.02 ps +/- 2%

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 567

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
High Resolution Dispersion test solution

Polarization Mode Dispersion

Measurement time 6 From 30 s.
1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS1A in Corresponding mode
2. With Kit 1 (PMD only). Subtract 6 dB for Kit 2 (PMD / CD / AP)
3. With strong mode coupling
4. Strong mode coupling. 1500-1600nm measurement span. PMD < 10ps
5. Up to 35 dB attenuation
6. Without averaging

Attenuation profile (with kit 2)

1,2
Dynamic Range 45 dB
Wavelength Uncertainty +/- 0.1 nm
Measurement Time 3 3 seconds
4
Measurement uncertainty :
- at 1550 nm +/- 0.003 dB/km
- at 1625 nm +/- 0.004 dB/km
1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS1A in Corresponding mode
2. With averaging
3. Without averaging
4. Measured with 80 km G.652 fiber

Chromatic Dispersion (with kit 2)

Wavelength Acquisition Range 1460 - 1640 nm
Wavelength Uncertainty +/- 0.1 nm
Minimum length 1 km
Dynamic Range 1,2 33 dB
Measurement Time 10s. to 30s.
80km G652 10km G655
Zero Dispersion wavelength uncertainty n/a +/- 4.5 nm
3
Zero Dispersion wavelength repeatability n/a 0.4 nm
Dispersion uncertainty 4, 5 +/- 0.06 ps/nm.km +/- 0.3 ps/nm.km
Dispersion repeatability3, 4 0.02 ps/nm.km
1. With Broadband Source module E81BBS1A in Corresponding mode
2. Dynamic range obtained without PSM module. A typical extra budget loss of 1.25dB applies when passing
through PSM
3. Repeatability refers to the typical one sigma standard deviation value, obtained for systems cycling of 20
measurements
4. 1530−1570 nm band

568 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 21 Technical specifications
BBS Modules

5. Excluding reference fiber uncertainties

Dimensions and weight

• Weight: 600 g (1.32Ibs)
• Dimensions (w x h x d): 213 x 124 x 32 mm (8.36 x 4.88 x 1.26 in)

BBS Modules
Specifications, at 25°C, unless otherwise mentioned.

81BBS2A
Wavelength range 1260 - 1640 nm
Minimum spectral density -42 dBm / 0,1 nm 1
Typical Output power +12.5 dBm
Power consumption 10 Wh
Operating temperature range -5 to +40°C
Laser Class 1M2
1. over 1260 - 1630 nm wavelength range, AP mode
2. Under the IEC 60825-1: 2014 international standard

Warning labels for the laser classes

Due to the reduced dimensions of the optical modules, it is not possible to attach the
required warning labels to them. In line with the provisions of Article 7.1 of the IEC
60825-1:2014 standard, the laser class identification labels are shown below:

The user must take the necessary precautions concerning the optical output of the
instrument and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Ref. standard IEC 60825-1: 2014 FDA21CFR§1040.10

CLASS 1
Class 1 LASER PRODUCT

Class 1M

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 569

Chapter 21 Technical specifications
MTAU modules

Ref. standard IEC 60825-1: 2014 FDA21CFR§1040.10

Class 2

Measurements on optical fibers are difficult to execute and the precision of

the results obtained depends largely on the precautions taken by the user.

MTAU modules
Typical values, at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.
.

81MTAU2 81MTAU4
Wavelength range 1260 - 1640 nm
Insertion Loss (max) 1 dB 1.5 dB
Return Loss (max) 50 dB
PDL1 (max) 0.1 dB
2
Repeatability (max) 0.01 dB
1. Polarization Dependent Loss
2. At constant temperature and polarization

Warning
Warning for 81PMD, UHD and VLR modules:
These are class A products. In a domestic environment, theses products may cause
radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

570 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 22
Chapter 22 Options and accessories
This chapter describes all the accessories and options available with the MTS / T-BERD
series.

NOTE
Product marking is based on the commercial reference excluding the first let-
ter.
Example: Commercial reference E4146QUAD is identified 4146QUAD on
the product.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

• “References of measurement modules” on page 572
• “User manual references” on page 576
• “References of optical connectors and adapters” on page 577
• “References of result processing software” on page 578

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 571

Chapter 22 Options and accessories
References of measurement modules

References of measurement modules

OTDR Modules

OTDR Module A Singlemode/Multimode References

Multimode / Singlemode 850/1300 nm & 1310/1550 nm OTDR module A E8146A

Multimode / Singlemode PENTA 850/1300 nm & 1310/1550/1625 nm
E8156A
OTDR module A

OTDR Module A Multimode References

High Resolution Multimode 850/1300nm OTDR AV Module E8123AV

OTDR Module B Reference

OTDR Module B 1310/1550 nm wavelengths with continuous wave light
E8126B
source and built-in power meter. optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module B 1310/1550/1625 nm wavelengths with continuous wave
E8136B
light source and built-in power meter. optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module B with filtered 1650 nm Raman compensated for in-ser-
E81165B
vice testing
OTDR Module B 1310/1550 nm wavelengths with Fiber Complete func-
tion for bi-directional Insertion Loss and ORL testing. also includes con-
E8126B-FCOMP
tinuous wave light source and built-in power meter. optical connector
must be specified
OTDR Module B 1310/1550/1625 nm wavelengths with Fiber Complete
function for bi-directional Insertion Loss and ORL testing. also includes
E8136B-FCOMP
continuous wave light source and built-in power meter. optical connector
must be specified

OTDR Module C Reference

OTDR Module C 1550 nm wavelength E8115C

572 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 22 Options and accessories
References of measurement modules

OTDR Module C Reference

OTDR Module C 1310/1550 nm wavelengths with continuous wave light
E8126C
source and built-in power meter
OTDR Module C 1625 nm wavelength filtered and Raman compensated,
E81162C
optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module C 1650 nm wavelength filtered and Raman compensated,
E81165C
optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module C 1310/1550/1625 nm wavelengths with continuous wave
E8136C
light source and built-in power meter, optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module C 1550/1625 nm wavelengths with continuous wave light
E8129C
source and built-in power meter, optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module C 1310/1550/1650 nm wavelengths with continuous wave
light source and built-in power meter. 1650 nm wavelength is filtered and E8138C-65
compensated for in-service testing, optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module C 1310/1550 nm wavelengths with FiberComplete func-
tion for bi-directional Insertion Loss and ORL testing. also includes con-
E8126C-FCOMP
tinuous wave light source and built-in power meter. optical connector
must be specified
OTDR Module C 1310/1550/1625 nm wavelengths with FiberComplete
function for bi-directional Insertion Loss and ORL testing. also includes
E8136C-FCOMP
continuous wave light source and built-in power meter. optical connector
must be specified
OTDR Module C 1310/1490/1550 nm wavelengths with continuous wave
E8139C
light source and built-in power meter, optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module C 1310/1490/1550 nm wavelengths with FiberComplete
function for bi-directional Insertion Loss and ORL testing. also includes
E8139C-FCOMP
continuous wave light source and built-in power meter. optical connector
must be specified
OTDR Module C 1310/1550 nm wavelengths combining FiberComplete
function for bi-directional Insertion Loss and ORL testing and SCL Broad-
band Source for CD/PMD/AP measurements. also includes continuous E8126C-FCHAR
wave light source and built-in power meter. optical connector must be
specified

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 573

Chapter 22 Options and accessories
References of measurement modules

OTDR Module C Reference

OTDR Module C 1310/1550/1625 nm wavelengths combining FiberCom-
plete function for bi-directional Insertion Loss and ORL testing and SCL
Broadband Source for CD/PMD/AP measurements. also includes contin- E8136C-FCHAR
uous wave light source and built-in power meter. optical connector must
be specified

OTDR Module D References

OTDR Module D 1550/1625nm. Optical connector must be specified E8129D-62
OTDR Module D 1310/1550/1625nm. Includes continuous wave light
E8136D
source and built-in power meter. Optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module D 1310/1550nm. Includes continuous wave light source
E8126D
and built-in power meter. Optical connector must be specified
OTDR Module D with filtered 1650nm wavelength. Optical connector
E81165D
must be specified
OTDR Module D with filtered 1625nm wavelength. Optical connector
E81162D
must be specified
OTDR MODULE D 1550nm wavelength. Optical connector must be
E8115D
specified

OTDR modules for calibration reports Reference

OTDR plug-in for calibration ratios E81OTDRCR

OTDR CWDM Modules

CWDM modules References

4-Wavelengths CWDM OTDR 1551/1571/1591/1611 nm module
E8140OTDRCWDM1E
with continuous wave light source
4-Wavelengths CWDM OTDR 1471/1491/1511/1531 nm module
E8140OTDRCWDM2E
with continuous wave light source

574 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 22 Options and accessories
References of measurement modules

CWDM modules References

2-Wavelengths CWDM OTDR 1431/1451 nm module with continu-
E8140OTDRCWDM3E
ous wave light source
4-Wavelengths CWDM OTDR 1351/1371/1391/1411 nm module
E8140OTDRCWDM4E
with continuous wave light source
4-Wavelengths CWDM OTDR 1271/1291/1311/1331 nm module
E8140OTDRCWDM5E
with continuous wave light source

PMD / I-PMD / HR OSA Modules

PMD modules References

PMD Plug-in Band S+C+L E81PMD
In-Service PMD Test Module with In-Band DGD/OSNR and Long
E81IPMD
Term PMD analysis

HR OSA module Reference

High Resolution Optical Spectrum Analyzer Module with Extended C-
EOSA610B
Band

PMD accessories References

Polarization Scrambler Module E81PSM
Optical variable polarizer (not necessary for 81XXX plug-ins) EOVP-15
Broadband source for PMD, AP and CD measurements EOBS550

ODM Modules

ODM modules1 References

Combined long range CD, PMD & AP measurement-1260/1640 nm E81DISPAP
Long Range Chromatic Dispersion Module - 1260 - 1640 nm E81CD

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 575

Chapter 22 Options and accessories
User manual references

1. To be used with a broadband source.

ODM MR Modules

ODM modules Reference

ODM MR Medium Range module1 E81MRDISPAP

1. To be used with a Broadband Source: EOBS500 / E81BBS1A/E81BBS2A

BBS Modules

BBS modules References

BroadBand Source module for PMD, Long Range CD and ATT Pro-
E81BBS2A
file measurement, 1260-1640nm
SCL-Band BroadBand Source plug-in Module for standard PMD,
E81BBS1A
Low PMD and Low Range CD measurements

MTAU Modules

MTAU modules Reference

1
Multi Test Access Unit for 4 test modules E81MTAU4

1. Connector type must be specified.

User manual references

User manuals for MTS/T-BERD modules References

User manual for modules, 8100 series (French) E8100M01
User manual for modules, 8100 series (English) E8100M02

576 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Chapter 22 Options and accessories
References of optical connectors and adapters

User manuals for MTS/T-BERD modules References

User manual for modules, 8100 series (German) E8100M03

References of optical connectors and adapters

Front Panel interchangeable Optical connectors for

References
Multi-mode SRL OTDR
Universal PC Connector with FC adapter EUNIPCFCMM
Universal PC Connector with SC adapter EUNIPCSCMM
Universal PC Connector with ST adapter EUNIPCSTMM
Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter EUNIPCDINMM

Front Panel interchangeable Optical Connectors for

References
Single-mode OTDR and ODM Modules1
Universal PC Connector with FC adapter EUNIPCFC
Universal PC Connector with SC adapter EUNIPCSC
Universal PC Connector with ST adapter EUNIPCST
Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter EUNIPCDIN
Universal PC Connector with LC adapter EUNIPCLC
Universal APC Connector for SM only with FC adapter EUNIAPCFC
Universal APC Connector for SM only with SC adapter EUNIAPCSC
Universal APC Connector for SM only with ST adapter EUNIAPCST
Universal APC Connector for SM only with DIN adapter EUNIAPCDIN
Universal APC Connector for SM only with LC adapter EUNIAPCLC

1. A connector (fixed or universal) must be specified at time of order of the plug-in

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 577

Chapter 22 Options and accessories
References of result processing software

Additional Adapters for Universal Connectors1 References

Universal FC Adapter EUFCAD
Universal SC Adapter EUSCAD
Universal ST Adapter EUSTAD
Universal DIN Adapter EUDINAD
Universal LC adapter EULCAD

1. Interchangeable in the field

References of result processing software1

References
Optical Fiber Trace software EOFS100
Optical Fiber Trace software (5 licences) EOFS1005L
Optical Fiber Trace software (site licence) EOFS100SL
FiberTrace software - update EOFS100UP
Optical Fiber Cable software EOFS200
Optical Fiber Cable software (5 licences) EOFS2005L
Optical Fiber Cable software (site licence) EOFS200SL

1.Free software updates on the Web (but without user manual)

578 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 A
Appendix A RoHS Information
This appendix describes the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) information,
which are mandatory requirements from China.

The RoHS directive consists in the restriction on the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical or electronic equipment sold or used in the European Union,
after July 1, 2006. These substances are: lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chro-
mium, polybrominated biphenyls, and polybrominated diphenyl ethers.

The following chapters are described:

• “Concerned products: 8100 V2 modules series” on page 580
• “Concerned products: OTDR 8100 V2 Modules Series” on page 581
• “Concerned products: OTDR VLR 8100 V2 Modules Series” on page 582
• “Concerned products: PMD 8100 V2 Modules Series” on page 583

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 579

Appendix A RoHS Information
Concerned products: 8100 V2 modules series

Concerned products: 8100 V2 modules series

Nb 8000 V2 series

580 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Appendix A RoHS Information
Concerned products: OTDR 8100 V2 Modules Series

Concerned products: OTDR 8100 V2 Modules

Series
8115UHD, 8123MM, 8126UHD, 8129UHD, 8136UHD

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 581

Appendix A RoHS Information
Concerned products: OTDR VLR 8100 V2 Modules Series

Concerned products: OTDR VLR 8100 V2 Modules

Series
8118 VLR(38/49), 8138 VLR49, 8148 VLR38

582 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Appendix A RoHS Information
Concerned products: PMD 8100 V2 Modules Series

Concerned products: PMD 8100 V2 Modules Series

81PMD

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 583

Appendix A RoHS Information
Concerned products: PMD 8100 V2 Modules Series

584 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

Index
A C
Accessories 571 Cable SLM
Adapter Setup 158
reference 577 CD
switch 20 acquisition parameters 434
types 20 Configuration 432
Attenuation 5, 73, 89 results sreen parameters 435

Attenuation profile CD ODM

acquisition parameters 414 Acquisition 442
measurement 417 Configuration 432
measurement procedure 420 Reference Measurement 439
results display 421 Results 444
results table 424 CD-ROM burning 539
Channel filtering (OSA) 277
Cleaning
B optical connectors 14
Backscatter coefficient 4 Coefficient of reflection 3, 4
Battery Connectors
on microprocessor board 20 references 577
BBS Cursor
activation 456 Movement 73
function 456 movement 265, 323, 396
remote interlock connector 457 resolution 554
Bi-directionnal OTDR
principle of measurement 4
D
Data transfer 539

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 585

Index

DFB loopback cable 132

configuration 283, 406 mode 129, 132
measurements 283, 407 FTTH
results 284, 408 laser 143
Distance splitters 144
specif. OTDR measurement 554

G
E Ghost 41, 49, 71, 174
EDFA
configuration 280
measurement 280 I
results 281
Index of refraction
Environment 550
specifications 554
Event
Index Of Refraction (IOR) 39, 108
macro 529, 533
Event memorization 95
Event OTDR 68, 85 L
Icons 71
Laser 33
Launch cable 132, 144
F Loopback 191
Fiber end 42 Lower & upper thresholds (OFI) 503
FiberComplete LTS
Cable View 235 Store 192
Configuration 225
Construction/Installation Test 217
Establishing references 219 M
Fault Finder 226, 236
Fiber length 226 Macro
Fiber View 235 adding interaction 530
calling 528
Insertion Loss (IL) 233
Optical Return Loss (ORL) 233 Default 532
OTDR 234, 237 File 529
overwrite 531
Pairing 232
Selection 219 Playback 533
recording 528
Fibers renaming 531
standards 9 Standard 529
FTTA Mail
acceptance testing 127 OFI,FOX function 519
launch cable 132

586 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Index

Measurement connection 502

attenuation (specif.) 554 Unit
distance (specif.) 554 of power 504
principle 1 Optical connectors
Memory precautions 14
see File Options 571
Modules ORL 92
CD (specif.) 566, 567 manual measurement (OFI) 521
MTAU (specif.) 570 Saturated trace 92
OTDR range 560
OTDR
MTAU Attenuation unit 38
auto mode 462 Configuration 28, 29
configuration 461 Manual measurement
manual mode 461 2 points 94
Multi-wavelength acquisition 61 5 points 94
ORL 92
Slope 90, 91
Splice & Reflectance 93
O Manual measurements 90
OFI Measurement parameters 38
Attenuator ext. (powermeter) 504 multi-wavelength acquisition 62
FOX 510 principle of measurement 2
configuration 510 Real time acquisition 57
distant module 518 Results parameters 48
measurement acquisition 516 table of results
results display 518 notes 88
send message 519 uncertainty 89
taking ref. loss 512
taking ref. ORL 515 OTDR Bi-dir.
Zero adjustment ORL 515 acquisition parameters 199
LTS adding markers 208
attenuation measurement 5 cable test 208
Configuration 503 measurement parameters 199
Connection 502 OEO results 207
insertion loss measurement 6 OEO traces 207
power measurement 5 Origin and end traces 206
source configuration 505 performing measurement 200
Manual ORL 521 troubleshooting 213
Measurement acquisition 522
OTDR Events
reference 521
results 522 Delete 86
Power meter Hints 86
measurements 509 Representation 85
ref. measurement 509 Overlay traces
zero setting 509 Add 97
Source

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 587

Index

Display 77, 97 Resolution 34

display 270, 401
Remove 98
removing 272, 402 S
Overlaying traces
Scatter coefficient 40, 108
WDM 277, 406
Script 534
Shift 266, 324, 397
P Attenuation Profile 424

PMD Shift function 77

acquisition parameters 340 Short acquisition 33, 79
Display of results 350 Side by side 189
graphic display 353
Signal threshold WDM) 254, 314, 390
information messages 354
Measurement procedure 349 Slope 71, 90, 174
method used 7 Smart Link Cable
principle of measurement 7 Cable project 120
reference measurement 345 Deactivated fiber 119, 163
Spectrum/FFT 350, 373 directory structure 165
statistics 353 Load project 160
PMD coefficient 8 Save project 159
Text file 166
Power meter
Trace view 121, 164
Alarms 183, 503
Attenuator 184 Source
Configuration 182 Display 187
Connection 182 Splice 93
Measurement process 188
Zero value 189
Pulse 33 T
Table Notes
OTDR 38, 110
R
Technical specifications 549
Range 33
Ref. power (power meter) 509
Reference measurement 191 U
Loopback 191 Units 48
Side by Side 189
Universal connector
Reference trace 99 cleaning 20
Reflectance 73 User manual
definition 3 references 576

588 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 Index

results display 263, 322, 395

W SNR parameters 255, 315, 390
table results 272, 327, 403
WDM/OSA
acquisition parameters 251, 314, 388
Configuration 248, 311, 387
difference between 2 traces (OSA) 272, Z
402 Zero value 189
display param. and analysis
alarms 259, 318 Zoom
grid 257, 317 Attenuation Profile 423
measurement parameters 390 WDM/OSA 264, 322, 395

User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025 589

Index

590 User Manual 78000010220 Rev. 025

 8100M02/UM/06-22/EN
Rev. 025
English

VIAVI Solutions
North America: 1.844.GO VIAVI / 1.844.468.4284
Latin America +52 55 5543 6644
EMEA +49 7121 862273
APAC +1 512 201 6534
All Other Regions: viavisolutions.com/contacts
email [email protected]
VIAVI France 34 rue Necker 42000 Saint-Etienne FRANCE